C70 1 V2 CBA en 31 01 2012 PDF

Translation of the original instructions
Card C 70
These instructions must be issued to the persons carrying out the tasks described herein. Unless
they are accessible to such persons at all times, these instructions cannot fulfil their purpose.
Rieter Textile Systems

Klosterstrasse 20, 8406 Winterthur
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70

Copyright Rieter. No part of these instructions or any attachment provided to the recipient may be copied or
made available to a third party without prior written permission of this company.
Rieter Textile Systems

Klosterstrasse 20
8406 Winterthur
Tel. +41 52 208 71 71
Fax +41 52 208 83 20
E-mail service_sys@rieter.com
Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Preface
Preface
The information contained in these instructions is intended to assist the smooth, trouble-free running of the
machine and the safety of operators and maintenance personnel.
The instructions contain important notes on how to operate the machine safely, properly and efficiently. By
observing these instructions you can help prevent danger, reduce repair costs and downtimes, as well as in-
creasing the reliability and lengthening the service life of the machine.
The operating instructions must be permanently available at the place where the machine is located.
The instructions must be read and followed by everyone who is assigned to work on the machine.
All electrical schematics with relevant information are located in the control cabinet.
The instructions correspond to the technical state of the art at the time of going to press.Rieter reserves the
right to carry out modifications.
Inquiries concerning Service information should be addressed to the Service Centre responsible for your re-
gion.
The instructions must be completed as necessary by adding directions based on existing national regulations
for the prevention of accidents and the protection of the environment.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70

Preface
Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General Part 1
C 70
Operation Part 2
Setting up, preparing, adjusting Part 3
Maintenance Part 4
Troubleshooting Part 5
Description of machine subassemblies Part 6
Keyword index Part 7
Appendix Part 8
31.01.2012 - en - V02 10740891
Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02
Contents
Part / Page
General
1 How to use the operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 1
2 Legal stipulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 7
3 General notes on safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 9
4 Machine identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 25
5 Machine description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 27
6 Technical Definitions and Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 29
7 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 31
8 Putting into operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 43
9 Instruction of personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 45
Operation
1 Controls and display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 1
2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 33
3 Display screens Operator interface panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 67
4 Display screens (Extended operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 129
Setting up, preparing, adjusting

1 Explanation on this section of the operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 1
2 Gearing layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 4
3 Machine set up; optimise settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 9
4 Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 47
Maintenance
1 Overview of special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 1
2 Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 3
3 Explanations for maintenance and intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 5
4 Service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 7
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 0/1

Part / Page
5 Break-in instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 13
6 Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 15
7 Cleaning / Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 21
8 Lubricant Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 45
9 Standard lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 47
10 Special lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 49
11 Lubrication points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 51
Troubleshooting
2 Operator interface panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 3
3 Error not displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 37
Description of machine subassemblies

4 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 13
5 Card chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 23
6 Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 59
7 Cylinder and card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 97
8 Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 207
9 Covers and central systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 247
10 Sliver deposit CBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 255
11 Card-accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 287
12 Control technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 331
13 Operating and display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 349
14 Torque standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 351
0/2 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Part 1
General
Part / Page
1 How to use the operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 1
2 Legal stipulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 7
3 General notes on safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 9
4 Machine identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 25
5 Machine description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 27
6 Technical Definitions and Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 29
7 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 31
8 Putting into operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 43
9 Instruction of personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 45
No. of pages 48
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1/I

General
1 / II Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02
General
Contents
Part / Page
1 How to use the operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 1

1.1 Structure of the operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 1
1.2 Symbols in the document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 3
1.3 List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 6
2 Legal stipulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 7
2.1 Liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 7
3 General notes on safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 9

3.1 Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 9
3.2 Danger areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 13
3.2.1 Overview of danger areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 13
3.2.1.1 Work in the area of the cleaning unit for the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 14
3.2.1.2 Cleaning work in the area of the delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 14
3.2.1.3 Cross apron delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 15
3.2.1.4 Disc rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 16
3.2.1.5 Danger when grinding and servicing the wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 16
3.2.1.6 Frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 17
3.3 Safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 18
3.3.1 Door lock cylinder drive (right-hand side of machine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 18
3.3.2 Controls with safety function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 19
3.3.3 Screwed-on covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 20
3.3.4 Warning sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 21
3.3.5 Door lock on card trunk (right-hand side of machine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 22
3.3.6 Do Not use the main switch to switch off the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 23
3.4 Responsibilities and qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 24
4 Machine identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 25
4.1 Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 25
4.2 Daten- und ID-Nummernschilder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 26
5 Machine description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 27
5.1 Structure carding systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 27
6 Technical Definitions and Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 29

7 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 31
7.1 Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 31
7.2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 34
7.2.1 Space requirements, definition of left and right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 34
7.3 Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 36
7.4 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 37
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1 / III

General
Part / Page
7.5 Machinery requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 38

7.5.1 Compressed air consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 38
7.5.2 Quality standards for compressor air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 38
7.5.3 Compressed air main supply (ring supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 39
7.5.4 Air ratios for waste removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 40
7.5.5 Waste air for card trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 41
7.5.6 Electrical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 41
7.6 Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 42
7.6.1 Declared emission sound pressure level according to ISO 4871 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 42
8 Putting into operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 43

8.1 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 43
8.2 Decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 43
8.3 Putting back into operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 43
8.4 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 43
9 Instruction of personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 45
1 / IV Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General
How to use the operating instructions
1 How to use the operating instructions

1.1 Structure of the operating instructions
Structure of the operating instructions
0 Preface, Register, Table of contents of file 5 Part 5: Troubleshooting

The operating instructions is divided into The information provided in this part is inten-
parts. ded to assist in finding and eliminating the
Each part deals with specific subjects and is cause in the event of a malfunction (malfunc-
intended for particular users. tions, warnings, messages).
1 Part 1: General 6 Part 6: Description of machine subassem-

General information, information about plan- blies
ning installations. In this part the following job descriptions are
listed according to subassembly: Settings,
2 Part 2: Operation checks as well as assembly and disassembly
Contains all the information with which the jobs.
operator must be familiar in order to operate All job descriptions for a subassembly and
the product safely. the necessary information concerning the
3 Part 3: Setting up, preparing, adjusting function of a subassembly are grouped to-
gether in sections.
Contains information about setting up the
plant to meet the specific requirements and 7 Part 7: Keyword index
adapting it to the environment, especially as
regards the material to be processed, and 8 Part 8: Appendix
optimizing quality and productivity.
4 Part 4: Maintenance
Contains all necessary information about the
internal planning of maintenance work This
part contains detailed instructions for cleaning
and lubrication
For more details about maintenance work
such as changing wearing parts, checks and
settings, please see cross-reference to the
description in Part 6.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1/1

General
Example of a page with orientation elements

1 Description of a section
2 Cross-reference indicating page
3 Date of publication, language and version of

document
4 Machine type and name of part
5 Part / Page
1/2 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General
1.2 Symbols in the document

Example of a note on safety
It is absolutely essential to observe the safety pre-
cautions.
Safety precautions are classified and highlighted by
signal words.
The example shows a safety precaution indicated
by the signal word "Danger".
DANGER
Maximum danger level. This is used in the case of
risks where there are very far-reaching
consequences, with fatal injuries, irreversible or
incurable injuries and very serious but curable
injuries "DANGER" is only used when damage is
highly likely to occur due to improper behavior
1 Signal word
"Danger", "Warning", "Caution", "Important" WARNING
classify the safety precautions. Second highest level of danger used for risks
2 Risk where there are far-reaching consequences, the
Description of the risk situation The potential same as at maximum danger level.. Unlike
consequences of the damage are also de- maximum level, "WARNING" is used where the
scribed. The description of the risk involved is probability of damage occurring in the case of
emphasised by a symbol. improper behavior is only slight.
3 Directions for avoiding danger

CAUTION
Description of what needs to be done or Moderate level of danger is used in the case of
avoided in order to prevent accidents and risks where the consequences are less serious,
damage occurring. The direction for avoiding completely curable injuries to only slight injuries
danger can be emphasised by a command or with short absence from work. Also used
prohibition symbol. for damage to property with far-reaching
consequences.
IMPORTANT
Low level of danger is used when there is a risk of
slight damage to property.
Danger symbols
Use eye protection
Risk of falling
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1/3

General
General hazard area
Suspended load
Risk of injury
Risk of injury due to part of the body being pulled in
Risk of injury due to being pulled in
Hazardous voltage
Electric shock from capacitor
Potentially explosive materials
Hazard due to automatic start-up
1/4 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General
Laser beam
Switch off via the main switch and secure switch with a padlock
Wear safety gloves
Prevention symbols
Wear protective footwear
No admittance
Shut down power before working on the installation.
Switch off via the main switch and secure switch with a padlock
Press EMERGENCY STOP button
Do not touch
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1/5

General
General hazard area
No admittance to unauthorised personnel
Use eye protection
Symbols in the document
The page indicated refers to the currently selected chapter.
More information on this subject can be found on the page indicated
Incorrect application, not permissible
Correct application, OK
Outcome. For example, after an operation step
1.3 List of Abbreviations

BW Cotton
CHF Synthetic fibers
LED LED
RQM Rieter Quality Monitoring
CBA coiler Coiler without drafting system
RSB Module (coiler) with drafting system and autoleveller
SB Module (coiler) with drafting system and without autoleveller
1/6 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General
Legal stipulations
2 Legal stipulations
2.1 Liability
If, contrary to regulations, the assembly of new or existing plant is carried out by a third party, RIETER MA-
CHINE WORKS LTD. declines all liability.
The auxiliary agents supplied by Rieter such as crane, roll lifter etc.must be used only at the places and on
the types of machine intended and for no other purpose .RIETER MACHINE WORKS LTD. declines all re-
sponsibility for any damage due to inappropriate usage of the auxiliary agents
If the machine is used for any purpose other than that for which it is intended, RIETER MACHINE WORKS
LTD. declines all liability.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1/7

General
Legal stipulations
1/8 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General
General notes on safety
3 General notes on safety

3.1 Safety precautions
Availability of the operating instructions
All sets of instructions, especially documents re-
lating to safety, must be kept in a place where the
staff can consult them freely.
Only those who have access to correct informa-

tion can work safely and efficiently.
Access available only for trained and authorized persons.

Appropriate measures are to be taken to ensure
that only authorised or trained personnel have ac-
cess to the machinery.
No admittance to unauthorized persons

Appropriate structural and organisational measures
must be taken to ensure that untrained persons
have no access to the machinery.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1/9

General
Regional safety regulations

Local safety regulations and laws in force in the individual countries must be observed. .
Obligatory notification
Should an accident occur on a machine or should it become clear that operating a machine constitutes a po-
tential danger, Maschinenfabrik RIETER AG, CH-8406 Winterthur, must be informed immediately in writing.
Maschinenfabrik RIETER AG declines all liability for any damage that may occur due to failure to ob-
serve this regulation.
Work on electric components

With the machine shut down, turn off the main switch and secure with a padlock.
Only qualified electricians may work and carry out checks in the electric and electronic areas.
For operational checks and troubleshooting in test operating mode, it may be necessary to work with live
voltage on certain units. This kind of work demands particular care and attention, with instruments and tools
in perfect working order.
In order to guarantee correct operating process the sensors must not be actuated during normal running.
External voltage
Certain circuits may still be carrying live voltage
even when the main or safety switch is off.
These circuits are marked at the terminals accord-
ing to the diagram.
Particular care and attention is required in this
area.
Supply line
The supply line to the main switch is live even
when the main switch is off.
The terminals of the supply line are marked accord-
ing to the diagram.
Particular care and attention is required in this
area.
Covers that are tightly screwed down

Covers that are tightly screwed down, as well as inspection windows and piping, must not be removed unless
operating conditions on the machine are safe.
Operating conditions on the machine are not safe unless the following requirements are met. The main switch
or safety switch must be turned off and secured with a padlock. In addition, no components must be moving.
The covers must be put back in place before the machine is put back into operation again.
1 / 10 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General
Maintenance work
Observe the maintenance regulations of the machine concerned.
During maintenance work, turn off the main or safety switch and secure with a padlock.
This prevents the machine being inadvertently switched on by a third person.
Auxiliary agents and tools

Auxiliary agents such as ladders, hoisting devices etc. must be in perfect condition.
Tools and other auxiliary agents must not be deposited on machines that are running.
Falling objects may cause accidents or damage.
Whenever chemicals such as solvents are used, the instructions of the manufacturer concerned must be ob-
served.
If work is carried out in which the danger of eye injury is not fully excluded, protective goggles must be worn.
This applies particularly to cleaning jobs involving compressed air.
Oil or grease residue on the floor is to be removed immediately.
Practical clothing
For operating reasons, it is not possible to secure all rotating or moving parts of a machine for the purpose of
preventing accidents. The risk of accidents in such areas can be considerably reduced by wearing appropri-
ate clothing.
Do not wear loose clothing (wide open sleeves, scarves, ties etc.)
Long hair must be specially protected. Always wear a cap.
Always wear protective goggles for grinding work.
Do not wear rings on your fingers or wristwatches.
Do not carry tools in open breast pockets. These objects might drop out or fall into the machine.
Work on buildings and installations in the vicinity of the machine

If it is necessary to carry out such work, the machine must be shut down. This applies particularly if it is ne-
cessary to work above the machine.
Do not climb onto the machine or use it as "scaffolding".
Alterations to machines and appliances

The machines are constructed in accordance with the state of the art.
The machines are tested and approved only in their original versions.
Installing parts made by other manufacturers may alter the characteristics of a machine and impair its operat-
ing reliability. Maschinenfabrik Rieter AG declines all liability for any damage of this nature.
Disposal
In the event that the machine is to be permanently put out of operation, the statutory rules in the relevant
country, concerning reutilisation, reycling and waste disposal, must be observed.
Any oil, grease or batteries in the machine must be disposed of in a proper manner.
Think safe.
For reasons related to operability, productivity etc. it is not possible to eliminate completely all sources of
danger.
Particularly in such cases, the overestimating of one's own abilities or presumptuous thinking along the lines
of: “Nothing can happen to me”‍, are the greatest sources of risk.
Daily routine jobs also demand constant attention.
Thinking safe reduces the risk of injury and is therefore never a waste of time.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1 / 11

General
Fireproofing textile machines
Type of danger
Localised fires may result from various textile processes due to the ignition of fibres, fly or fibre dust,
especially where cotton comes into contact with heated bearings, sparks from metallic impurities and electric
sparks.
Such fires on our textile machines may cause slight damage to property or the environment and there is a low
probability of personal injury by burning or inhalation of toxic smoke.
Accordingly, manually operated fire extinguishers must be provided in the spinning mill suitable for
combatting fires of the following categories:
Fire classification A:
Solid materials, mainly of an organic nature, which would normally burn when exposed to glowing heat, such
as textiles (fibers, fly or fiber dust), compound materials containing rubber.
Fire classification B:
Liquid or liquefying materials, such as oil, grease, paint, resin, wax, plastic.
Suitable extinguishing agents must be supplied according to this division into fire classifications. These may
be, for example:
water, with or without additives, for reducing the surface tension for instance.
foam
powder
quenching gases e.g. carbon dioxide, nitrogen, argon and mixtures
The use of powder extinguishers of this fire classification is also permitted to extinguish fires on low-voltage
equipment. To reduce subsequent damage due to soiling, however, we strongly recommend the use of
quenching gases.
Number, size and distribution of extinguishing agents must be determined in conjunction with the regional of-
fices responsible for fire safety.
Furthermore, the personnel must be instructed in the use of the fire extinguishing equipment, escape routes,
etc., in accordance with local regulations.
Every operator of textile machinery must actively support fire-protection and firefighting in his/her
company.
1 / 12 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General
3.2 Danger areas

3.2.1 Overview of danger areas
WARNING
Points at which there is a residual risk despite all the safety devices are marked with warning
signs.
It is dangerous if a danger zone is not recognised as such.
Damaged or missing warning signs must therefore be replaced immediately!
Damaged or missing warning signs must be replaced immediately.
There is an increased risk of injury in the areas listed in case of inappropriate conduct. Do follow to the safety
precautions in these areas.
6
5
2
3
1 Work in the area of the cleaning unit for the 4 Disc rollers, Page 1/16
card flats, Page 1/14 5 Danger when grinding and servicing the
2 Cleaning work in the area of the wires, Page 1/16
delivery, Page 1/14 6 Frequency converter, Page 1/17
3 Cross apron delivery, Page 1/15
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1 / 13

General
3.2.1.1 Work in the area of the cleaning unit for the card flats
Switch OFF the main switch when working in this
area. Danger of injury.
WARNING
Switch off the machine via the main
switch and secure the switch with a
padlock.
3.2.1.2 Cleaning work in the area of the delivery
STOP
Always switch off when cleaning the delivery. As a result, the supplies used cannot be drawn into the rollers.
1 / 14 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General
3.2.1.3 Cross apron delivery
1 2
Do not reach into the counter-running rolls (2). Danger of fingers being pulled in with running cross apron (1)
tilted down.
DANGER
Do not reach into the area around the rollers.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1 / 15

General
3.2.1.4 Disc rollers

The rotating pulley rolls (1) pose a risk and may
cause injuries to the fingers.
IMPORTANT
Danger of fingers being pulled in with
tilted-down funnel and rotating disc
rollers.
Do not touch anywhere in the area of
the disc rollers.
3.2.1.5 Danger when grinding and servicing the wires
1 2
The EMERGENCY STOP button (1) and the safety switch (2) do not function in this special operating mode.
The staff member responsible for servicing and grinding the clothings must be trained in this procedure. The
directives for servicing and grinding the clothings can be found in the corresponding sections.
1 / 16 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General
3.2.1.6 Frequency converter

The frequency converter carries dangerous electric
voltage.
DANGER
Even after the appliance has been dis-
connected from the mains, the inter-
mediate circuit remains live (intermedi-
ate circuit capacitor).
Failure to observe the discharge dur-
ation specification can lead to fatal in-
juries.
Only qualified electricians are permit-
ted to work at the frequency converter.
A 10-minute wait period (discharge
duration) is required following discon-
nection from the mains.
Avoid contact with any live parts.
Wait until the LED (CHARGE) is no
longer lit. Then wait a further 5
minutes.
Check the voltage for the intermedi-
ate circuit. The voltage has to have
dropped to below 30 volts.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1 / 17

General
3.3 Safety devices

3.3.1 Door lock cylinder drive (right-hand side of machine)
The safety switch with the actuating cams locks the doors at the cylinder drive. The machine can only be
started when the actuating cam in the safety switch is engaged. The functioning of the safety switch must be
checked periodically. Replace a defective safety switch immediately; do not bypass it. Mechanical locks
secure the doors to the feed and delivery section on the right-hand side of the machine. These can only be
unlocked when the doors at the cylinder drive are opened.
1
7
STOP
2
6 5 4 3
1 Safety switch 5 Door during cylinder operation

2 Trip cam 6 Door on delivery side of machine
3 Door on entry side of machine 7 Mechanical lock
4 Door during cylinder operation
1 / 18 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General
3.3.2 Controls with safety function
3
2
1 Main switch, Page 2/12

2 EMERGENCY SHUT-DOWN
button, Page 2/11
3 Key-operated switch for the special
operating mode "Grind card
flats", Page 2/13
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1 / 19

General
3.3.3 Screwed-on covers

The screwed-on covers described here serve as safety devices. Screwed-on covers and other screwed-on
elements may only be removed when the machine is at a complete standstill and the main switch has been
turned off and secured with a padlock. Do not remove the padlock on the main switch until all the elements
have been re-installed.
1 13 1
14
2 2
15
3 18 16
4
17
5
18
16 6 7 8 9 10 11 6 4 12
1 Cover for the opening and feed roller drives 10 Cover for access to take-off roller
2 Cover for the opening and feed roller drive pul- 11 Cover for access to doffing section
leys 12 Hood for the card-flat cleaning section
3 Cover for the drive for the delivery rollers 13 Cover for the opening roller section on the rear
4 Covers for the licker-in section side of the card chute.
5 Side cover for the licker-in section 14 Cover for the card-flat cleaning equipment
6 Covers for the storage section of the cylinder 15 Card trunk wall
7 Cover for the doffer section 16 Cover for the openings of the card flats unit
8 Abdeckung Scheibenwalzenantrieb 17 Cover for access to the licker-in section
9 Cover for clearer roller drive 18 Red covers at the card-flat deflection section
1 / 20 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General
3.3.4 Warning sign

The warning signs indicate places where there is increased danger of injury during improper working proced-
ure. Damaged or missing warning signs must be replaced immediately.
5
4
3
+
0920-8086 10 min < 60V
1 Warning sign on the cover for the doffer section 4 Warning signs on the card chute wall, the front
2 Warning signs on the door of the electrical con- and rear covers for access to the opening roller
trol cabinet, on the distribution box in the card section, and the cylinder cover behind the elec-
trunk and in the area of the power supply on the trical control cabinet
inside of the card trunk 5 Warning signs on the cover for the card-flat
3 Warning signs on the frequency converters in cleaning section
the electrical control cabinet and card trunk
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1 / 21

General
3.3.5 Door lock on card trunk (right-hand side of machine)

The door is secured by a safety switch. Only when the door is closed and the actuating cam is engaged in the
safety switch can the machine be started for production. If the door is opened, the drives are switched off im-
mediately. The functioning of the safety switch must be checked periodically. Defective safety switches must
be replaced immediately.
3
1
1 2
1 Safety switches
2 Trip cam
3 Door
1 / 22 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General
3.3.6 Do Not use the main switch to switch off the machine
Do Not use the main switch to switch off the machine because it will not slow down the cylinder. Always use
the red STOP button to switch off the machine. The cylinder is thus braked. The licker-in(s) and the opening
roll in the card trunk are not braked; they phase out after a stop.
2 3
4
1
5
1
0
1 Main switch 5 Licker-in

2 STOP button on operator interface panel Licker-in phase-out down, Page 1/24
3 Opening roll in card trunk
Opening roll in card trunk phase-out
time, Page 1/23
4 Cylinder
Cylinder deceleration time, Page 1/23, 2/42
Cylinder phase-out time, Page 1/24
Opening roll in card trunk phase-out time

The opening roll is not Phase-out time: 1
braked to 2 min
Cylinder deceleration time
Cylinder drive with change 4 min 20 s
pulleys: Cylinder speed: 500
revolutions
revolutions
Cylinder drive with frequency 1 min 45 s
converter: Cylinder speed:
500 revolutions
930 revolutions
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1 / 23

General
Cylinder phase-out time

Main switch off; cylinder is Phase-out time:
not braked 10 to 12 min
Licker-in phase-out down
The licker-in(s) is(are) not Phase-out time: 3
braked to 4 min
3.4 Responsibilities and qualifications

Responsibilities
By clear rules defining who is responsible for what, the customer creates optimum requirements for ensuring
safety in the plant.
The areas of responsibility for each authorised person must be officially laid down. This applies in particular
to jobs involving setting and servicing mechanical, electric and pneumatic devices.
This guarantees that unauthorised persons do not have access to the machines.
Visitors may enter machine rooms only if accompanied by an authorised person..
It must be made clear to visitors that machines are a potential source of danger when running.
Training
Inadequately trained staff may cause accidents.
This may also result in injury to others.
Operating and maintenance staff must be given
theoretical and practical training.
This is the general purpose of this part of the
manual. The corresponding operating instructions
in the manual refer to specific dangers and must
always be observed.
Machines that are attended by well-trained staff
produce a higher yield, better quality, fewer
malfunctions, higher output, fewer injuries.
1 / 24 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General
Machine identification
4 Machine identification
Manufacturer
Maschinenfabrik Rieter AG
Klosterstrasse 20
CH-8406 Winterthur
Tel. no.: +41 52 208 71 71

Fax: +41 52 208 83 20
4.1 Identification plate
Machinenfabrik Rieter
CH-8406 Winterthur
Type 1
Serial No. 2
Year 3
xxx V xx Hz xx A x bar 4
5
6
7
1 Typ Maschinentyp 5 A Strom

2 Serial No Serienummer 6 Hz Frequenz
3 Year Baujahr 7 V Spannung
4 bar Specification of the re-
quired compressed air
Das Typenschild befindet sich auf der Tür zum Steuerschrank. Das Typenschild enthält die Daten zur
Maschine. Bei Bestellung von Ersatzteilen die Daten vom Typenschild auf das Bestellformular übertragen.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1 / 25

General
Machine identification
4.2 Daten- und ID-Nummernschilder
Order No:
1 Year:
ID-Nr. 2 Machine type: C 60 Diagram No: xx / xx

Supply voltage: 400V 00 0000 00 - 0000
Mat.Nr. 3 Rated current: 18A
Änderungs-Stand Prüfer Supply protection: 40A
Control voltage: 24 VDC
00 0000 00 - 0000
1 Datenschild The electrical schemat-

ics corresponding to the
machine design are sup-
plied separately. When
ordering spare parts, the
information given on the
ID plate are to be noted
on the order form. When
reporting machine mal-
functions the information
given on the ID plate and
the ID number are to be
given.
2 Identification num- Identifies the exact ma-
ber chine type
3 Material number Rieter internal number
for administration.
Beide Schilder sind Elektroschrank eingeklebt.
1 / 26 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General
Machine description
5 Machine description
5.1 Structure carding systems
3 4 6 9
5 7 8 10 11
18
13
17 / 16 15 14 12
1 Removal head 12 Disc rollers with sliver scanning for card auto-
2 Exhaust pipe levelling
3 Opening unit 13 Cross apron
4 Feed trough in card trunk 14 Doffing device
5 Material opening and feed measurement for 15 Doffer
the autoleveller 16 Cover profile in the card lower section (without
6 Card flats cleaning unit and waste suction IGS-classic)
7 Precarding zone with carding elements and 17 Cylinder grinding system IGS-classic (optional)
mote knives 18 Depending on application, coiler (sliver de-
8 Cylinder posit) CBA or SB/RSB module
9 Card flats (99 in total) O The black points mark suction points of the
10 Card flats grinding system IGS-top (optional) central suction
11 Post-carding zone with carding elements and
mote knives
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1 / 27

General
Machine description
1 / 28 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General
Technical Definitions and Formulas
6 Technical Definitions and Formulas

Formula for machine efficiency
MN = Machine efficiency
The machine efficiency indicates the
availability of a machine.
A = Productive time in production mode
Time during production mode, when
material is produced.
When a machine is started in
automatic mode, it enters production
mode. As soon as the machine stops
(STOP button, malfunction), it exits
production mode.
B = Unproductive time in production mode
no material is produced.
Waiting on account of machine (e.g.
can change, run-up), waiting on ac-
count of pre-processing or finishing
(e.g. material supply)
D = Malfunction time
Downtime caused by an internal fault.
Internal: Malfunction on or due to
a machine, e.g. motor protection
switch, excess temperature, etc.
Formula for production efficiency

Simplified formula for machines with constant rates
of delivery.
PN = Production efficiency
The production efficiency indicates
the ratio of the actual production of a
machine to the theoretically-possible
production (summation of the target
productions) of a machine. It depends
on the process. All influences are
taken into account.
A = Productive time in production mode
material is produced.
(STOP button, malfunction), it exits
production mode.
T = Total time
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1 / 29

General
Technical Definitions and Formulas
T = The total time required to collect the

data.
Time "main switch on" plus downtime
(machine off)
Formula for MTBA

MTBA (mean time between assistance) denotes
the average length of time between successive
A
MTBA = acts of intervention by the operator. These MTBA
S data values enable the running properties of a ma-
chine or that of an entire system to be concretely
expressed in terms of numbers. The higher the
MTBA value, the longer the average production
duration between successive acts of intervention
by the operator.
A = Production duration in production
mode
Total duration for material production
in production mode.
(STOP button, fault), it exits
production mode.
S = Number of stoppages due to internal
faults
1 / 30 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General
Specifications
7 Specifications
7.1 Performance characteristics
Processing of textile raw material
Processing of textile raw This machine is
material built exclusively for
processing textile
raw materials.
Processing of textile raw Non-textile raw
material materials must not
be processed on
the card.
Raw material
Raw material Cotton of all provenience.
Raw material Man-made fibers: Natural and
synthetic polymers.
C 70 or C 70H production (depending on raw material)

C 70 max. 120.0 kg/h
C 70H max. 220.0 kg/h
Fiber length
Maximum fibre length max. 65.0 mm
Feeder weight
Feeder weight 600 - 900 g/m
Sliver weight range of card with a disc roll width of 9 mm

Sliver weight in ktex 4.0 - 12.0 ktex
Sliver weight in Nm 0.25 - 0.08 Nm
Sliver weight in Nm 0.15 - 0.05 Ne
Sliver weight in grains/yard 56.0 - 166.0 grs/yd
Sliver weight range of card with a disc roll width of 15 mm

Sliver weight in Ne 0.07 - 0.03 Ne
Sliver weight range of card with CBA-5

Drafts in the card

Total draft range 40 - 200 -fold
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1 / 31

General
Specifications
Application range of the sliver control of the card

Application range of the Cotton of all
sliver control of the card provenience,
man-made fibres
and mixtures up to
65 mm fibre
length.
Range of sliver control for coiler (sliver deposit) CBA-5

Determination of quality data

Calculation of weight The values for the
deviation for card sliver (A%) calculations are
Calculation of CV% values computed in the
Calculations for the corresponding
spectrogram data screens
Calculations for the number
of slubs
Coefficients of variation display module
Coefficients of variation CV (sliver weight):
display module Display module
and monitoring of
the cut and
reference length
and the cut-out
limit. The cut and
reference lengths
are determined by
the user.
• Coiler (sliver deposit) (Alternative):

CBA-5
RSB module
SB module
Without sliver deposit
• Cylinder speeds (Alternative):

Change with change pulleys at drive motor
Change with frequency converter of drive motor
• Licker-in (Alternative):
Fitting with licker-in clothing
Fitting with needles
Mote knife setting, first licker-in, manually
Mote knife setting, first licker-in, motor-driven
1 / 32 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General
Specifications
• Equipment (Additional):
Pre-and post-carding zone
Loading depends on raw material and quality requirements
• Grinders (Alternative):
Cylinder grinding system IGS-classic
Card flats grinding system IGS-top
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1 / 33

General
Specifications
7.2 Dimensions
7.2.1 Space requirements, definition of left and right
LW 120
685 180
150
LW 500
5
Ø 300 mm
347
3580 (3380)
7
2855
1919
670 2309
75
1500 2979
20
520
6
40
170
3000 N
9000 N 11000 N
75
2
2300
2380
1
9000 N 11000 N
3000 N
3 4
90
40
90
50
40
77
60
207 490
180
Location Designation Prerequisite Dimension

number
1 left machine side see figure .
2 right machine side see figure .
1 / 34 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General
Specifications
Location Designation Prerequisite Dimension

number
3 Electrical and pneumatic sup- see figure .
ply lines from below (opening:
100x100 mm)
4 Electrical and pneumatic sup- see figure .
ply lines from above (opening
68x130 mm)
5 Exhaust air upwards see figure .
6 Exhaust downwards see figure .
7 Card trunk heights Height of standard card trunk 3580.0 mm
Card trunk height (option) 3380.0 mm
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1 / 35

General
Specifications
7.3 Weights
Designation Prerequisite Weights
Machine complete, without sliver 4000 kg
deposit

Card trunk 1200 kg

Licker-in group 675 kg

Feed plate 75 kg

Licker-ins 1 and 2 45 each kg

Licker-in 3 78 kg

Machine assembly of the card flats 720 kg

Doffer 270 kg

Delivery sub-assembly 850 kg

Coiler (sliver deposit) 400 - 800 kg
CBA-5-600/750/800/1000

Sliver deposit SB / RSB (450) 1700 - 2000 kg
500/600/800/900/1000

SB module 600/1000 coiler (sliver 700 - 1100 kg
deposit)
1 / 36 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General
Specifications
7.4 Card
1 2
1 Flooring laid over sand or asphalt is not per-

missible.
2 Such intermediate supports in the region of the
foot plate should be replaced with concrete to
avoid the individual subassemblies from sinking.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1 / 37

General
Specifications
7.5 Machinery requirements

7.5.1 Compressed air consumption
Compressed air consumption
The compressed air must be clean and free from water and oil residues.
Card 0.70 Nm³/h
Automatic doffer area 1.10 Nm³/h
disposal
Separate waste disposal 0.01 Nm³/h
system for licker-in
Sliver deposit CBA: 0.10 Nm³/h
Sliver deposit SB / RSB: 0.10 - 0.30 Nm³/h
7.5.2 Quality standards for compressor air

Requirement:
Pneurop class 3/4/5
Air humidity of compressed air

Pressure dew point -20 °C
Contamination of the compressed air

Contamination, quantitative max. 5 mg/m³
Contamination, qualitative; max. 5 µ
permissible particle size
Oil content of the compressed air

Incoming air max. 1.0 mg/m³
1 / 38 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General
Specifications
7.5.3 Compressed air main supply (ring supply)

Requirement:
Gas pipe with 1...2 inch diameter and a filter with water trap. Supply line from the main supply to the machine:
Gas pipe 1/2 inch minimum diameter.
Hauptleitung
2
1
Hauptleitung Druck Hauptleitung (1)

Hauptleitung 7.0 - 8.0 bar
Maximale Länge des flexiblen Anschlussschlauches

Anschlussschlauch (2) max. 4.0 m
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1 / 39

General
Specifications
7.5.4 Air ratios for waste removal

Air volume for card waste removal
All suction points, card with Approx. 1.30 m³/s
coiler (sliver deposit) CBA:
All suction points, card with Approx. 1.45 m³/s
SB / RSB coilers:
Air volume for separate licker-in waste removal
Air volume for licker-in waste Approx. 0.50 m³/s
removal
Vacuum and measuring point for card waste removal
CBA SB RSB
Vacuum for all suction 1000 - 1300 Pa

points, card with coiler (sliver
deposit) CBA:
Vacuum for all suction 1000 - 1300 Pa
points, card with SB and
RSB coilers:
Vacuum and measuring point for separate licker-in waste removal
Vacuum for licker-in waste min. 1300 Pa
removal
1 / 40 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General
Specifications
7.5.5 Waste air for card trunk

Waste air volume for card trunk
Exhaust air volume, all 0.60 m³/s
variants
Vacuum and measuring point for card trunk exhaust air
CBA SB RSB
Vacuum, all variants 50 - 150 Pa
7.5.6 Electrical data

Mains connection
Should the supply voltage 3x 400 V +/- 10%
not be within the specified
range, a transformer must
then be utilised to ensure
stable conditions.
Installed electrical power
Maschinenspezifische See the diagram
Leistungsdaten und provided
Vorsicherungen
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1 / 41

General
Specifications
7.6 Emissions
7.6.1 Declared emission sound pressure level according to ISO 4871
Declared A-weighted sound power level (reference pressure 1 pW) LWad
Delivery speed: 100 m / min. 93 + 3 dB
Measurement standard: ISO 9902 measurement standard; measuring distance: 1 m; levels expressed in the
form: Lm + K Lm; typical mean value for K is 3 dB; safety margin. General conditions: No material, central
exhaust system, cylinder speed of 800 r.p.m., with card chute and compressor fan (2900 r.p.m.).
Declared emission of sound level at work station (reference pressure 20 µPa) LpAd
Measurement standard: ISO 9902 measurement standard; measuring distance: 1 m; levels expressed in the
form: Lm + K Lm; typical mean value for K is 3 dB; safety margin. General conditions: No material, central
exhaust system, cylinder speed of 800 r.p.m., with card chute and compressor fan (2900 r.p.m.).
1 / 42 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General
Putting into operation
8 Putting into operation

8.1 Commissioning
Machines manufactured by "Rieter Textile Systems" must always be assembled and commissioned by Ri-
eter's own staff.
Should the assembly of new or existing plant be carried out by a third party, however, RIETER MACHINE
WORKS LTD. declines all liability.
8.2 Decommissioning
Put the machine into a safe state.
disconnect the power supply.
Protect the machine from misuse.
Secure the machine in such a way that when it is idle there is no risk of injury to any person.
The machine-specific regulations with regard to decommissioning must be observed.
The machine must be suitably protected against soiling and corrosion.
The regulations and operating procedures specific to the machine are listed in the Chapter "Taking out of ser-
vice" in Part 3. These regulations, and particularly the safety regulations, must be adhered to most exactly.
8.3 Putting back into operation

All elements affecting safety must be tested to ensure that they are in perfect operating condition.
The machine-specific regulations with regard to re-commissioning must be observed.
The regulations and operating procedures specific to the machine are listed in the Chapter "Putting back into
service" in Part 3. These regulations, and particularly the safety regulations, must be adhered to most exactly.
8.4 Disposal
Disposal
In the case of the machine being conclusively removed from operation, the legal regulations of the relevant
country should be observed.
This applies in particular to:
Re-usability
Recycling
Waste disposal
It must be ensured that the fuel remaining in the machine is disposed of in accordance with regulations.
Fuel such as oils, grease and batteries.
The regulations and operating procedures specific to the machine are listed in the Chapter "Disposal" in Part
3. These regulations, and particularly the safety regulations, must be adhered to most exactly.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1 / 43

General
Putting into operation
1 / 44 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General
Instruction of personnel
9 Instruction of personnel
Safety for everyone around the machine.
— Safety devices
General notes on safety, Page 1/9
Overview of danger areas, Page 1/13
Door lock cylinder drive (right-hand side of machine), Page 1/18
Controls with safety function, Page 1/19
Screwed-on covers, Page 1/20
Warning sign, Page 1/21
Door lock on card trunk (right-hand side of machine), Page 1/22
Operation for everyone involved with the machine.

— Operation of main switch
Switching on main switch Q10, Page 2/33
Switching off the main switch., Page 2/33
Switch OFF the main switch and secure, Page 2/34
— Opening and closing secured doors on the driving end of the card
Opening the secured cylinder doors. (Right side of the machine, normal operation), Page 2/35
Open the mechanically secured doors to the feed and delivery (right-hand machine side, normal
operation), Page 2/36
Close the doors to the feed and delivery (right-hand machine side, normal operation), Page 2/37
Open the secured doors in case of a power failure., Page 2/38
— Start / Stop machine
Start the feed system (UNIcontrol), Page 2/39
Stop the feed system (UNIcontrol), Page 2/40
Starting the machine, Page 2/41
Stop machine, Page 2/42
Starting production (doffer at creep speed), Page 2/43
Starting production (doffer at high speed), Page 2/44
Insert lap into the feed roller, Page 2/48
Emptying AEROfeed, Page 2/46
Empty card trunk and card, Page 2/45
Switching off the feed roller, Page 2/45
— Operation during production
Clean window, Page 2/46
Removing blockages in the area of the feed roller, Page 2/47
Turn the feed roller backwards, Page 2/48
Cleaning the stripping blade, Page 2/50
Removing the blockage in the sliver funnel, Page 2/51
Cleaning the fleece bridge, Page 2/52
Initiate change sequence, Page 2/53
Swivel out the calender rolls, Page 2/53
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1 / 45

General
— Operating unit
Change the language, Page 2/54
Acknowledging fault or warning, Page 2/54
Troubleshooting, displaying additional help, Page 2/55
Enter password, Page 2/55
Changing passwords, Page 2/57
Cancelling the password authorisation, Page 2/58
Entered values in data screens, Page 2/63
Remedy malfunctions
— Always consult Part 5 of the Operating Manual in the event of malfunctions. Explain that there are faults
recognised by the machine and faults that are not recognised by the machine.
Acknowledging fault or warning, Page 2/54
200, Page 5/3
The grinding stone in the grinder of the IGS classic does not move, Page 5/38
Set-up
— Gearing layout, tables, machine set-up
Card, Page 3/4
Tauten the tooth and flat belts, Page 3/15
Settings in the area of the card chute, Page 3/18
Licker-in unit., Page 3/21
Settings in the range of the cylinder, Page 3/23
IGS-classic grinder, Page 3/25
Card flats unit, Page 3/27
Abnehmereinheit, Einstellungen, Page 3/30
Scheibenwalzeneinheit, Page 3/31
Bandablage, Page 3/35
Trommel -und Abnehmergarnituren warten und schleifen, Page 3/37
Electrical settings
— Electrical settings
General electrical settings, Page 3/31
Bandregulierung, Einstellungen Karde, Page 3/32
Replacing the frequency converter, Page 3/32
Operating unit, Page 3/34
Pneumatik, Page 3/34
1 / 46 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General
Maintenance
— Maintenance and lubrication schedule, maintenance staff
Card, Page 4/15, 4/21
Coiler (sliver deposit), Page 4/18, 4/41
Grinding roll, Page 4/19, 4/43
Frequency converter, Page 4/19, 4/44
Cleaning the machine left and right completely, Page 4/27
Feed roll drive in the card trunk, Page 4/40
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1 / 47

General
1 / 48 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

General
Part 2
Operation
Part / Page
1 Controls and display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 1
2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 33
3 Display screens Operator interface panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 67
4 Display screens (Extended operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 129
No. of pages 148
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2/I

Operation
2 / II Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02
Operation
Contents
Part / Page
1 Controls and display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 1

1.1 Overview of controls and display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 1
1.1.1 Overview of the operating elements on the card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 1
1.1.2 Overview of the operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 2
1.1.2.1 Overview of the LED status indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 3
1.1.2.2 Overview of the machine buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 4
1.1.2.3 Overview of cursor buttons (navigation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 5
1.1.2.4 Overview of numeric keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 6
1.1.2.5 Overview of program buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 6
1.1.2.6 Overview of preselection buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 7
1.1.3 Overview of LED indicator for the D95K-2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 8
1.1.4 Overview of card display elements and coiler (sliver deposit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 9
1.1.5 Overview of the UNIcontrol system control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 9
1.1.6 T1000V frequency converter, operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 10
1.2 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 11
1.2.1 Overview of the operating elements on the card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 11
1.2.1.1 EMERGENCY SHUT-DOWN button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 11
1.2.1.2 Main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 12
1.2.1.3 Turn back the card feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 13
1.2.1.4 Key-operated switch for the special operating mode "Grind card flats" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 13
1.2.1.5 Turn back feed roll in card trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 14
1.2.2 Overview of the machine buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 14
1.2.2.1 STOP button on the operator interface panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 14
1.2.2.2 START button on the operator interface panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 14
1.2.2.3 Emptying card chute and card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 15
1.2.2.4 Emptying AEROfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 15
1.2.2.5 Switching off the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 15
1.2.2.6 Button for activating can change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 15
1.2.2.7 Doffer STOP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 16
1.2.2.8 Button for starting production (doffer at creep speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 16
1.2.2.9 Button for starting production (doffer at high speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 16
1.2.2.10 Button for starting production (card chute) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 16
1.2.3 Overview of cursor buttons (navigation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 17
1.2.3.1 MENU-key forwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 17
1.2.3.2 MENU-key back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 17
1.2.3.3 DATA-DISPLAY-key-back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 17
1.2.3.4 "DATA-DISPLAY-key-forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 17
1.2.3.5 BASIC display key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 18
1.2.4 Overview of numeric keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 18
1.2.4.1 Numerical keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 18
1.2.4.2 DELETE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 18
1.2.4.3 ENTER-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 18
1.2.5 Overview of program buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 19
1.2.5.1 DIRECT key, forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 19
1.2.5.2 POINTER button back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 19
1.2.5.3 ENTER-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 19
1.2.5.4 DIRECT-key back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 19
1.2.5.5 POINTER button forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 19
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / III

Operation
Part / Page
1.2.5.6 HELP-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 20
1.2.5.7 MENU overview key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 20
1.2.5.8 START OF LIST key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 20
1.2.5.9 PLUS/MINUS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 20
1.2.5.10 MINUS-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 20
1.2.5.11 MINUS-ENTER-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 20
1.2.5.12 DISPLAY button, darken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 21
1.2.5.13 PASSWORD-INSERT key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 21
1.2.5.14 PASSWORD-CANCELING key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 21
1.2.5.15 END OF LIST key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 21
1.2.5.16 NUMBER button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 21
1.2.5.17 PLUS-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 21
1.2.5.18 PLUS-ENTER-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 22
1.2.5.19 DISPLAY button, brighten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 22
1.2.5.20 SCREEN-key back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 22
1.2.5.21 DELETE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 22
1.2.5.22 SCREEN-key scroll forwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 22
1.2.5.23 ENTER-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 22
1.2.6 Overview of preselection buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 23
1.2.6.1 LANGUAGE-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 23
1.2.6.2 BASIC display key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 23
1.2.7 Overview of the UNIcontrol system control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 23
1.2.7.1 UNIcontrol operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 23
1.2.8 T1000V frequency converter, operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 24
1.2.8.1 Data display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 24
1.2.8.2 ESC key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 24
1.2.8.3 SWITCH/RESET key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 24
1.2.8.4 RUN key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 24
1.2.8.5 RUN LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 24
1.2.8.6 Down arrow key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 25
1.2.8.7 STOP key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 25
1.2.8.8 DATA/ENTER key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 25
1.2.8.9 LOCAL/REMOTE key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 25
1.2.8.10 LO-RE LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 25
1.2.8.11 ALM LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 25
1.2.8.12 REV LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 26
1.2.8.13 DRV LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 26
1.2.8.14 FOUT LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 26
1.2.8.15 Up arrow key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 26
1.3 Display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 27
1.3.1 Overview of the LED status indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 27
1.3.1.1 LED automatic mode (production mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 27
1.3.1.2 ‘Warning’ LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 27
1.3.1.3 ‘Fault’ LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 27
1.3.1.4 ‘Request service personnel’ LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 27
1.3.1.5 LED electric power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 28
1.3.2 Overview of LED indicator for the D95K-2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 29
1.3.2.1 LED on the D95K-2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 29
1.3.3 Overview of card display elements and coiler (sliver deposit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 30
1.3.3.1 Display of machine conditions, coiler (sliver deposit) CBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 30
1.3.3.2 Display, can change, coiler (sliver deposit) CBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 30
1.3.3.3 Malfunction indicator card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 31
2 / IV Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Part / Page
2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 33
2.1 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 33
2.1.1 Switching on main switch Q10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 33
2.1.2 Switching off the main switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 33
2.1.3 Switch OFF the main switch and secure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 34
2.1.4 Engaging the emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 34
2.1.5 Resetting the EMERGENCY STOP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 35
2.1.6 Opening the secured cylinder doors. (Right side of the machine, normal operation) . 2 / 35
2.1.7 Open the mechanically secured doors to the feed and delivery (right-hand machine
side, normal operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 36
2.1.8 Close the doors to the feed and delivery (right-hand machine side, normal operation) 2 / 37
2.1.9 Open the secured doors in case of a power failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 38
2.2 Start / Stop range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 39
2.2.1 Start the feed system (UNIcontrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 39
2.2.2 Stop the feed system (UNIcontrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 40
2.3 Start / Stop machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 41
2.3.1 Starting the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 41
2.3.2 Stop machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 42
2.3.3 Stopping the doffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 42
2.3.4 Starting production (doffer at creep speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 43
2.3.5 Starting production (doffer at high speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 44
2.3.6 Starting production (filling card chute) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 44
2.3.7 Changing spinning cans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 45
2.3.8 Switching off the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 45
2.3.9 Empty card trunk and card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 45
2.3.10 Emptying AEROfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 46
2.4 Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 46
2.4.1 Clean window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 46
2.4.2 Removing blockages in the area of the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 47
2.4.3 Insert lap into the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 48
2.4.4 Turn the feed roller backwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 48
2.4.5 Display values and reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 49
2.4.6 Clearing material out of the suction duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 49
2.4.7 Cleaning the stripping blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 50
2.4.8 Removing the blockage in the sliver funnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 51
2.4.9 Cleaning the fleece bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 52
2.4.10 Initiate change sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 53
2.4.11 Swivel out the calender rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 53
2.5 Operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 54
2.5.1 Change the language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 54
2.5.2 Acknowledging fault or warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 54
2.5.3 Troubleshooting, displaying additional help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 55
2.5.4 Enter password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 55
2.5.5 Changing passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 57
2.5.6 Cancelling the password authorisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 58
2.5.7 What do you do if you have forgotten the master password? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 58
2.5.8 Displaying an individual data mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 59
2.5.9 Jumping from the overview mask straight to a data mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 59
2.5.10 Navigating to a desired data mask with one key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 60
2.5.11 Display the last data mask again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 60
2.5.12 Browsing in the same masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 60
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2/V

Operation
Part / Page
2.5.13 Display main mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 61

2.5.14 Browsing lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 61
2.5.15 Setting the brightness of the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 62
2.5.16 Entered values in data screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 63
2.5.17 Configuring the direct selection data mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 64
2.5.18 Testing sensors and switching the I/O status on the signal lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 64
2.5.19 Executing test functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 65
3 Display screens Operator interface panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 67

3.1 Structure of menu and data screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 67
3.2 List of menu and data screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 68
3.3 Overview screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 72
3.4 Menu 10: "10 Production set values" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 75
3.5 Menu 11: "11 Production actual values" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 78
3.6 Menu 12: "12 Production shift data" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 81
3.7 Menu 20: "20 Quality data actual values, card" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 84
3.8 Menu 22: "22 Quality data set values, card" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 86
3.9 Menu 30: "30 General information" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 91
3.10 Menu 31: "31 Information logs, statistics" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 92
3.11 Menu 40: "40 Settings, general" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 94
3.12 Menu 41: "41 Settings, machine" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 96
3.13 Menu 42: "Settings coiler I" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 100
3.14 Menu 43: "43 Settings, configuration" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 102
3.15 Menu 50: "50 Configuration, shifts" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 104
3.16 Menu 60: "60 Production value groups" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 105
3.17 Menu 70: "70 Maintenance clothings" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 108
3.18 Menu 80: "80 Operating mode/Tests" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 111
3.19 Menu 81: "81 Grind/put on" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 112
3.20 Menu 82: "82 Test inputs/outputs and covers" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 114
3.21 Menu 83: "83 Test drives" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 117
3.22 Menu 84: "84 Test/Programming devices" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 122
3.23 Menu 85: "85 Test optional devices" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 123
3.24 System functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 127
4 Display screens (Extended operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 129

4.1 List of menu and data screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 129
4.2 Menu 10: "10 Production set values" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 130
4.3 Menu 11: "11 Production actual values" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 132
4.4 Menu 20: "20 Quality data actual values, card" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 137
4.5 Menu 30: "30 General information" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 138
4.6 Menu 31: "31 Information logs, statistics" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 139
2 / VI Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Part / Page
4.7 Menu 41: "41 Settings, machine" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 141

4.8 Menu 43: "43 Settings, configuration" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 144
4.9 Menu 60: "60 Production value groups" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 145
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / VII

Operation
2 / VIII Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02
Operation
Controls and display elements
1 Controls and display elements

1.1 Overview of controls and display elements
1.1.1 Overview of the operating elements on the card
1 EMERGENCY SHUT-DOWN
button, Page 2/11
5
2 Main switch, Page 2/12
4 3 Turn back the card feed
roller, Page 2/13
3
4 Key-operated switch for the
special operating mode "Grind
2 1 card flats", Page 2/13
5 Turn back feed roll in card
trunk, Page 2/14
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2/1

Operation
1.1.2 Overview of the operating unit

The operator interface panel is the interface
between the operator and machine control
All the functions of machine operation are available
with the operational controls and displays on the
operator panel.
1 Overview of the LED status indicators

2 Overview of the machine buttons
3 Overview of cursor buttons (navigation)
4 Overview of numeric keypad
5 Overview of program buttons
6 Overview of preselection buttons
2/2 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
1.1.2.1 Overview of the LED status indicators

5 LED's display the machine condition
1 LED automatic mode

(production mode), Page 2/27
2 ‘Warning’ LED, Page 2/27
3 ‘Fault’ LED, Page 2/27
4 ‘Request service personnel’

LED, Page 2/27
5 LED electric power

supply, Page 2/28
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2/3

Operation
1.1.2.2 Overview of the machine buttons

1 STOP button on the operator
interface panel, Page 2/14
2 START button on the operator

interface panel, Page 2/14
3 Emptying card chute and

card, Page 2/15
4 Emptying
AEROfeed, Page 2/15
5 Switching off the feed

roller, Page 2/15
6 Button for activating can

change, Page 2/15
7 Doffer STOP
button, Page 2/16
8 Button for starting production

(doffer at creep
speed), Page 2/16
8a Button for starting production

(doffer at high
speed), Page 2/16
8b Button for starting production

(card chute), Page 2/16
2/4 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
1.1.2.3 Overview of cursor buttons (navigation)

The cursor buttons (1...5) allow for navigation
between the overview, menu and data screens.
1 MENU-key forwards
, Page 2/17
2 MENU-key back, Page 2/17
3 DATA-DISPLAY-key-
back, Page 2/17
4 "DATA-DISPLAY-key-
forward, Page 2/17
5 BASIC display key, Page 2/18
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2/5

Operation
1.1.2.4 Overview of numeric keypad

1 Numerical
keyboard, Page 2/18
2 DELETE button, Page 2/18
3 ENTER-key, Page 2/18
1.1.2.5 Overview of program buttons
1 DIRECT key,
forward, Page 2/19
POINTER button
back, Page 2/19
ENTER-key, Page 2/19
2 DIRECT-key back, Page 2/19
POINTER button
forward, Page 2/19
HELP-key, Page 2/20
3 MENU overview
key, Page 2/20
START OF LIST
key, Page 2/20
PLUS/MINUS
button, Page 2/20
MINUS-key, Page 2/20
MINUS-ENTER-
key, Page 2/20
DISPLAY button,
darken, Page 2/21
4 PASSWORD-INSERT
key, Page 2/21
PASSWORD-CANCELING
key, Page 2/21
2/6 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
END OF LIST key, Page 2/21

NUMBER button, Page 2/21
PLUS-key, Page 2/21
PLUS-ENTER-key, Page 2/22
DISPLAY button,
brighten, Page 2/22
5 SCREEN-key
back, Page 2/22
DELETE button, Page 2/22
6 SCREEN-key scroll
forwards, Page 2/22
The functions of the program buttons (1) to (6) de-

pend on the menu or data screen displayed.
The listed symbols indicate the function above the
program keys.
1.1.2.6 Overview of preselection buttons

. LANGUAGE-key, Page 2/23
BASIC display key, Page 2/23
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2/7

Operation
1.1.3 Overview of LED indicator for the D95K-2 module

1 LED on the D95K-2 module, Page 2/29
2/8 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
1.1.4 Overview of card display elements and coiler (sliver deposit)
1 Display of machine conditions, coiler

(sliver deposit) CBA, Page 2/30
2 Display, can change, coiler (sliver
deposit) CBA, Page 2/30
3 Malfunction indicator card, Page 2/31
1.1.5 Overview of the UNIcontrol system control unit
1
SPS/PLC Machine
1 UNIcontrol operation, Page 2/23
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2/9

Operation
1.1.6 T1000V frequency converter, operating unit

1 Data display, Page 2/24
10
2 ESC key, Page 2/24
1 9
3 SWITCH/RESET
key, Page 2/24
2 8
4 RUN key, Page 2/24
3 7
4 6
RUN LED, Page 2/24
5 5 Down arrow key, Page 2/25
6 STOP key, Page 2/25
7 DATA/ENTER key, Page 2/25
8 LOCAL/REMOTE
key, Page 2/25
LO-RE LED, Page 2/25

9 ALM LED, Page 2/25
REV LED, Page 2/26
DRV LED, Page 2/26
FOUT LED, Page 2/26
10 Up arrow key, Page 2/26
2 / 10 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
1.2 Operating elements

1.2.1 Overview of the operating elements on the card
1.2.1.1 EMERGENCY SHUT-DOWN button

Description of function
EMERGENCY SHUT-DOWN buttons are intended
to be used in an emergency. When an
EMERGENCY SHUT-DOWN button is actuated all
drives are immediately shut down. This enables
danger from moving machine parts to be avoided
as quickly as possible.
Actuated
The machine is put into a safe state as quickly
as possible.
The machine cannot be started as long as the
EMERGENCY SHUT-DOWN button is
actuated.
Released
Operating conditions
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 11

Operation
1.2.1.2 Main switch

WARNING
When the main switch is on, elements located beyond this are still live.
Injury due to electric shock.
Prior to commencing electrical installation work, switch off the machine via the main switch and
secure the switch with a padlock.
The main switch has to be turned off and secured to carry out the following tasks: Cleaning, re-
pair, service, and work in the control cabinet.
WARNING
Elements subject to external voltage may still be live even with the main switch off.
Prior to commencing work, the elements that are subject to external voltage must be isolated.
This isolation procedure may only be carried out by a qualified electrician.
CAUTION
The machine will run down in an uncontrolled manner if the main switch is turned off during oper-
ation.
The machine may become damaged.
The main switch may be only operated with the machine at a standstill.
Use the main switch to turn the operating power on and off.
Off, position "0"
The machine is without power. The machine
cannot be started.
On, position "1"

Operating position
2 / 12 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
1.2.1.3 Turn back the card feed roller

1 Prerequisite: The delivery of the card must be
stationary.
The feed roller (2) rotates backwards if push button
(1) is pressed.
1.2.1.4 Key-operated switch for the special operating mode "Grind card flats"
I II
2
1
Turn the key-operated switch (1) to the right. The machine switches into a special operating mode for grind-
ing the card flats.
The safety switch (2) at the door (3) at the cylinder drive is bypassed. The work for grinding the card
flats can be carried out with the doors open.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 13

Operation
1.2.1.5 Turn back feed roll in card trunk

1
Prerequisite: The card production is stopped
The feed roll (2) rotates backwards, if button (1) is
pressed.
The card cylinder is stopped when this button
is pressed.
2
1.2.2 Overview of the machine buttons
1.2.2.1 STOP button on the operator interface panel

The “STOP” button is used to stop the drives.
Button pressed:
The drives for production mode stop.
Button pressed in service mode:

The selected function is stopped.
1.2.2.2 START button on the operator interface panel

The “START” button is used to start the drives.
Button pressed:
The drives start up for production mode.
Button pressed, machine does not start:

The cause is displayed as a fault report.
Button pressed in service mode:

The selected function is started.
2 / 14 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
1.2.2.3 Emptying card chute and card

To be applied if an inspection of the AEROfeed,
general cleaning or a test run without material is
necessary.
Button pressed:
The feed roller in the card chute is no longer
ready for operation.
No further material is supplied to the feeder
chute
The card continues to produce until the sliver
breaks.
1.2.2.4 Emptying AEROfeed

The AEROfeed is emptied.
Button pressed:
If the upstream feed machine or the UNImix
are set to the “emptying” mode, the card
continues to produce until there is a sliver
break.
1.2.2.5 Switching off the feed roller

To be applied if a grinding, cleaning or emptying of
the machine is necessary.
Button pressed:
The feed roller of the card is switched off.
No new material is fed to the card.
1.2.2.6 Button for activating can change

Starts a can change
Button pressed:
The signal lamp is flashing.
Four seconds later, the can change occurs.
The length counter is reset to the programmed
length.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 15

Operation
1.2.2.7 Doffer STOP button

Stops the doffer
Button pressed:
The feed roller will not stop until the card
delivery speed has reached the programmed
value.
The doffer continues to run until a sliver break
occurs. The sliver monitor registers the sliver
breakage and slowly switches the doffer off.
1.2.2.8 Button for starting production (doffer at creep speed)

Prerequisite: In order to be able to switch on the
doffer, the cylinder must have reached its final
speed and the card chute must be full. “Ready for
production” appears on the text display.
Switch the doffer to creep speed.
Press button:
The doffer switches to creep speed.
1.2.2.9 Button for starting production (doffer at high speed)

Prerequisite: In order to be able to switch on the
doffer, the cylinder must have reached its final
speed and the card chute must be full. “Ready for
production” appears on the text display.
Switch the doffer to high speed.
Press button:
Pressing the button once switches the doffer
to creep speed.
Pressing the button again switches the doffer
to high speed.
1.2.2.10 Button for starting production (card chute)

Prerequisite: There is no material in the bottom
section of the card chute. The cylinder must have
reached its final speed. The material feed in the
blow room is ready for production.
Conveying material to the bottom section of the
card chute
Press button:
The bottom part of the card chute is filled.
After the card chute has been filled, “Ready
for production” appears on the text display.
2 / 16 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
1.2.3 Overview of cursor buttons (navigation)
1.2.3.1 MENU-key forwards

In the menu overview the MENU-key forwards“
marks the next line of the menu or displays the
menu screen. After the last line of the menu, the
first line of the menu is displayed.
1.2.3.2 MENU-key back

In the menu overview the "MENU-key back" marks
the preceding line of the menu or displays the
menus screen. After the first line of the menu the
last line of the menu is displayed.
1.2.3.3 DATA-DISPLAY-key-back
The "DATA-DISPLAY-key-backward" displays the
previous data screen. After the first data screen the
menu overview is displayed again.
1.2.3.4 "DATA-DISPLAY-key-forward
The "DATA-DISPLAY-key-forward" displays the
next data screen. After the last data screen the
menu overview is displayed again.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 17

Operation
1.2.3.5 BASIC display key

Use the "BASIC-DISPLAY-key" to jump from the
menu screen or some data screen into the
overview (standard basic screen or malfunction
screen).
1.2.4 Overview of numeric keypad
1.2.4.1 Numerical keyboard

Direct entry of numerical values in the enabled data
screen.
1.2.4.2 DELETE button

This button is used to delete entered values.
1.2.4.3 ENTER-key
Press the "ENTER-key" to accept the entry/change
of value, i.e. the altered value is saved.
2 / 18 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
1.2.5 Overview of program buttons
1.2.5.1 DIRECT key, forward

Prerequisite: This button is not included in all
control systems.
Use the ‬“DIRECT FORWARD” button to go to the
configured data screen. In the overview screen, the
‬“DIRECT FORWARD” button can be used to go to
a data screen that is repeatedly required. The data
screen number indicates the corresponding screen.
The first program button is always used for assign-
ing.
1.2.5.2 POINTER button back

Use the "POINTER button back" to mark the pre-
vious menu in the menu-overview. The previous
input or list field is marked in the data screen.
1.2.5.3 ENTER-key
Prerequisite: This programming key does not ap-
pear on the display until the control system has as-
certained that the malfunction has been remedied.
Use the "ACKNOWLEDGE-key" to acknowledge a
message or a displayed malfunction.
1.2.5.4 DIRECT-key back

Use the "DIRECT-key back" to jump from the basic
screen to the data screen last shown. The occu-
pancy is always on the second program key. After
switching on the machine or when the last screen
displayed can no longer be displayed, an empty
box appears (no function).
1.2.5.5 POINTER button forward

Use the POINTER button forward to mark the next
menu in the menu-overview. The next input or list
field is marked in the data screen.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 19

Operation
1.2.5.6 HELP-key
If there is context-senstive help for a malfunction
screen, it can be displayed by means of the "HELP-
key".
1.2.5.7 MENU overview key

The "MENU overview key" is used to show the
menu overview.
1.2.5.8 START OF LIST key

Use the "START OF LIST key" to jump to the be-
ginning of the list in a screen.
1.2.5.9 PLUS/MINUS button

Prerequisite: For most setting values, the
“PLUS/MINUS” button only appears, if the correct
password was previously entered.
The function of the “PLUS” button and the “MINUS”
button is enabled.
1.2.5.10 MINUS-key
Prerequisite: The "MINUS-key" appears with
most setting values only if the correct password
has previously been entered.
Use the "MINUS-key" to decrease the value. The
entry field that has been changed is displayed in-
verted. The changed value only becomes active
for the control system when it is confirmed by the
"ENTER key".
1.2.5.11 MINUS-ENTER-key
Use the "MINUS-ENTER-key" to reduce and imme-
diately save the value. The "MINUS-ENTER-key"
is only shown with variable values which are accep-
ted immediately. i.e. the transfer of the value need
not be explicitly confirmed with the ENTER-key.
2 / 20 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
1.2.5.12 DISPLAY button, darken

The screen is made darker, by presing this button
and the main screen button simultaneously.
1.2.5.13 PASSWORD-INSERT key

Use the "PASSWORD-INSERT-key" to display the
first screen for entering the password.
1.2.5.14 PASSWORD-CANCELING key

Use the "PASSWORD-CANCELING-key" to cancel
the active password authorization
1.2.5.15 END OF LIST key

Use the "END-OF-LIST key" to jump to the end of
the list in a screen.
1.2.5.16 NUMBER button

Prerequisite: For most setting values, this but-
ton only appears, if the correct password was previ-
ously entered.
The numerical keyboard is enabled for the entry of
values.
1.2.5.17 PLUS-key
Prerequisite: The "PLUS-key" appears with most
setting values only if the correct password has pre-
viously been entered.
Use the "PLUS key" to increase the value. The
entry field to be changed is displayed inversely.
The changed value becomes active only for the
control system when it has been confirmed by the
"ENTER-key".
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 21

Operation
1.2.5.18 PLUS-ENTER-key
Use the "PLUS-ENTER-key" to increase and imme-
diately save the value. The PLUS-ENTER-key is
only shown with variable values which are accep-
ted immediately. i.e. the transfer of the value need
not be explicitly confirmed with the ENTER-key.
1.2.5.19 DISPLAY button, brighten

The screen is made brighter, by presing this button
and the main screen button simultaneously.
1.2.5.20 SCREEN-key back

Use the "SCREEN-key back" to display the
previous screen. These may be data screens,
basic screens or malfunction screens. The
menu-overview displays the last data screen of the
preceding menu.
1.2.5.21 DELETE button

Prerequisite: This is not possible on keys which
accept the value immediately.
Use the "DELETE button" to delete a change of in-
put. i..e. the last value saved is displayed again.
1.2.5.22 SCREEN-key scroll forwards

Use the SCREEN-key forward to display the next
screen. The menu-overview displays the first data
screen of the menu.
1.2.5.23 ENTER-key
Press the "ENTER-key" to accept the entry/change
of value, i.e. the altered value is saved.
2 / 22 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
1.2.6 Overview of preselection buttons
1.2.6.1 LANGUAGE-key
Use the "LANGUAGE key" to go to the next con-
figured language.
1.2.6.2 BASIC display key

Use the "BASIC-DISPLAY-key" to jump from the
menu screen or some data screen into the
overview (standard basic screen or malfunction
screen).
1.2.7 Overview of the UNIcontrol system control unit
1.2.7.1 UNIcontrol operation

Prerequisite: The blow room machines are con-
trolled via UNIcontrol (1).
This type of control unit allows the machines of
the blow room to be controlled centrally.
1 Machine-specific settings have to be made in the
data screens of the respective machine.
Observe also the operating manual of the
UNIcontrol controller (1) for its operation.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 23

Operation
1.2.8 T1000V frequency converter, operating unit
1.2.8.1 Data display

Identifying feature: 7-segment display
Indicates monitoring data, parameter numbers and
settings.
1.2.8.2 ESC key

To reset the status to the state prior to when the
key DATA/ENTER was pressed.
1.2.8.3 SWITCH/RESET key

To set the active numeral for programming user
parameters. It also works as a reset key if a fault
has occurred.
1.2.8.4 RUN key

To start the frequency converter, if the frequency
converter is controlled by the operator panel.
1.2.8.5 RUN LED

The signals given by this LED have the following meanings:
Lit
The motor is running.
Flashing
The speed is being reduced.
The reference value for the frequency is “0”.
Rapid flashing
The drive has been deactivated
2 / 24 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
1.2.8.6 Down arrow key

Moves partial image downwards. Moves indicator
downwards. Reduces values.
1.2.8.7 STOP key

To stop the frequency converter.
1.2.8.8 DATA/ENTER key

To enter menu options, user parameters, and set
values. You can also use this key to switch from
one monitor to the other.
1.2.8.9 LOCAL/REMOTE key

To switch from the control system via the operator
panel (LOCAL) to the control circuit terminal (RE-
MOTE).
1.2.8.10 LO-RE LED

The signal given by this LED has the following meaning:
Lit
The frequency converter is being controlled via the digital operating unit (local mode).
1.2.8.11 ALM LED

The signals given by this LED have the following
meanings:
Flashing
The drive has the “Alarm” status
Lit
The drive has the “Fault” status
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 25

Operation
1.2.8.12 REV LED

meanings:
Lit
Reverse motion via the drive.
Not lit
Forward motion via the drive.
1.2.8.13 DRV LED

meanings:
Lit
The drive is ready.
Not lit
The drive is in one of the following modes:
“Verify”, “Setup”, “Parameter Setting”, “Auto”
1.2.8.14 FOUT LED

meanings:
Lit
The output frequency is being displayed.
Not lit
Something other than the output frequency is
being displayed.
1.2.8.15 Up arrow key

Moves partial image upwards. Moves indicator up-
wards. Increases values.
2 / 26 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
1.3 Display elements

1.3.1 Overview of the LED status indicators
1.3.1.1 LED automatic mode (production mode)

Type of element: LED
Display state
• Does not light up
Production mode has stopped.
• Lights up
Machine runs in automatic mode (production
mode).
State of the machine= Production mode
• Flashing
Going into production mode
1.3.1.2 ‘Warning’ LED

Display state
• Lights up
A warning is displayed.
1.3.1.3 ‘Fault’ LED

Display state
• Lights up
A fault has occurred, and service personnel is
required to remedy it.
-> see fault code list.
1.3.1.4 ‘Request service personnel’ LED

Display state
• Lights up
Lights up if a fault or a maintenance warning
is present, and where service personnel is re-
quired to remedy it.
-> see fault code list.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 27

Operation
1.3.1.5 LED electric power supply

Display state
• Does not light up
There is no control voltage
The main switch is off
• Lights up
There is control voltage
The main switch is on
• Due to an interruption to the power supply, the

control voltage was switched off.
After switching on, the LED flashes until one
of the operating buttons or machine buttons is
pressed.
2 / 28 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
1.3.2 Overview of LED indicator for the D95K-2 module
1.3.2.1 LED on the D95K-2 module

B1 Display state
A1 C1 • LED A1 lights up
The supply voltage 5 V is order.
The correct supply voltage of 24 V is set on the
plug X2 pin 1 and 2 or 3 and 4.
A2 C2 • LED A2 lights up
B2 CAN communication status: in operation
• LED A2 is flashing
CAN communication status: in preparation
• LED A2 is flashing erratically

CAN communication status: stopped
• The LED B1 does not light up

Watchdog has expired.
• LED B1 lights up
Watchdog is OK
• LED B2 is flashing
The data relevant to the quality of the card are
being calculated.
• LED C1 lights up
A power failure has occurred.
• LED C2 lights up
The D95K-2 module has interrupted the CAN
communication due to too many faults.
• LED C2 is flashing erratically

The D95K-2 module has many faults in the
CAN communication network, or cannot send,
since no receiver (control unit) is connected.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 29

Operation
1.3.3 Overview of card display elements and coiler (sliver deposit)
1.3.3.1 Display of machine conditions, coiler (sliver deposit) CBA

Type of element: Signal lamp
Display state
1 • Off(1)
Main switch is switched off
The machine is producing.
The cylinder, doffer or card flats are ground.
The testing mode is active.
• (1) lights up:

The main switch is on and, after completing
of the system testing, the machine is ready to
run.
A malfunction has occurred.
Comply with the text in the text display and the
blind circuit display..
• (1)blinks:
There is no empty spinning can in the can
changer. The rod switch for the can supply is
not actuated. Function only with the
corresponding data entry in the corresponding
data screen.
1.3.3.2 Display, can change, coiler (sliver deposit) CBA

Type of element: Beacons
Display state
IMPORTANT
Danger of injury during can change
There is an increase in danger in the
region of the can changer when a can
2 is being exchanged.
Do not get too close and do not use
hands.
• Beacon (2):
The beacon is active 30 seconds before the
can change is triggered and during can
change.
2 / 30 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
1.3.3.3 Malfunction indicator card

Type of element: Display screen
Malfunctions, warnings or events are displayed via
text and diagrams
1
Display state
2 • 1 Text display
5 Message designation
3
• 2 Code
Malfunction code number
4 • 3 Graphical display module
Shows graphically the range where the event
has taken place.
• 4 Current message
Shows the sequence and number of current
messages
• 5 Event area
Shows the current event in a more exact area
within the machine. This area is highlighted by
a flashing rectangle.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 31

Operation
2 / 32 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Operation
2 Operation
2.1 Safety
2.1.1 Switching on main switch Q10
Steps
– Turn the main switch to position "1".
The LED for the control voltage begins to
flash, light up
Main switch, Page 2/12
2.1.2 Switching off the main switch.

Steps
– Turn the main switch to position "0".
The LED for the control voltage goes out.
Main switch, Page 2/12
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 33

Operation
Operation
2.1.3 Switch OFF the main switch and secure

Steps
– Switch OFF the main switch.
– Pull the lever (1) in the direction of the arrow
and attach a padlock.
– Close the padlock.
2.1.4 Engaging the emergency stop

Steps
– Press the EMERGENCY STOP button.
The machine is put into a safe operating
state as quickly as possible.
EMERGENCY SHUT-DOWN
button, Page 2/11
2 / 34 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Operation
2.1.5 Resetting the EMERGENCY STOP button

Steps
– Prerequisite: The reason for engaging the
EMERGENCY STOP have been clarified and
remedied.
Turn the EMERGENCY STOP button clock-
wise.
The EMERGENCY STOP button will pop
up. Doing so has reset the EMERGENCY
STOP button; it is no longer engaged.
EMERGENCY SHUT-DOWN
button, Page 2/11
2.1.6 Opening the secured cylinder doors. (Right side of the machine,
normal operation)
Steps
– Prerequisite: The cylinder must be stationary.
The main switch (1) must have been switched
1 on for at least 60 seconds.
Press the EMERGENCY STOP button (2)
If the EMERGENCY OFF button (2) is
pressed during the self-test, the door (4)
remains locked.
2
– Always open the right-hand cylinder door (3)
first.
Note: The door to the feed (5) and the door to
the delivery (6) can only be opened when the
STOP
cylinder doors are opened.
6 4 3 5
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 35

Operation
Operation
2.1.7 Open the mechanically secured doors to the feed and delivery
(right-hand machine side, normal operation)
Preparatory work
– The electrically secured cylinder doors are opened.
Opening the secured cylinder doors. (Right side of the machine, normal operation), Page 2/35
Steps
STOP
6
4 3 5
– The door lock of door (5) or (6) is opened.
– Raise flap (7).

Hook (8) is cleared. The released door (5) or (6) can be opened.
2 / 36 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Operation
2.1.8 Close the doors to the feed and delivery (right-hand machine side,
normal operation)
Steps
STOP
6
4 3 5
– Lift the latch (7) and push it slightly inwards.
– Close door (5) or (6).

The flap (7) drops in the notch of the hook (8). The door is mechanically locked.
– Lock the door locks.

– Close door (4) first and then door (3) and lock.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 37

Operation
Operation
2.1.9 Open the secured doors in case of a power failure.

DANGER
The cylinder is not braked if there is a power failure. It will take about 20 minutes for the cylinder
to stop.
Make sure the cylinder has stopped completely, if a power failure has occurred.
Preparatory work
– The door locks can only be disengaged when the cylinder has come to a halt.
Steps
9
1
10
STOP
11
4 3
– Switch OFF main switch (2).
– Loosen the screws (11) by approx. 6 turns (about 3 mm)
– Turn the hexagonal screw (10) with a socket wrench carefully in a counter-clockwise direction as far as
the limit stop.
The door lock (9) is unlocked.
– Finally, first open the right-hand door half (4)
– When the door (4) is open, turn the hexagon (10) in the clockwise direction.
The door lock (9) is reset again.
– Screw the screw (11) back in.
2 / 38 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Operation
2.2 Start / Stop range

2.2.1 Start the feed system (UNIcontrol)
Preparatory work
– The card line is ready for production.
– The cards of the corresponding line are started; the doffers remain OFF.
Note: If the plant is started up incorrectly, this can lead to blockages in the material transport tubes.
Steps
20 21 22 14
2
1
10 11 12 13
– Select the card line (1) on the UNIcontrol user interface and start the material flow (material feed) (2).
Note: This procedure is described in detail in the operating manual for the UNIcontrol unit.
– Put the card into service beginning with the last card (14) of the corresponding line. (Sequence
14,13,12,11,10).
Note: Even if all the cards in a line are not required because of missing spinning cans, the last cards of
this line must be kept in operation.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 39

Operation
Operation
2.2.2 Stop the feed system (UNIcontrol)

Note: The card doffers must be stopped individually. All doffers for the respective cards will shut off simul-
taneously, if the material flow (material feed) is stopped on the UNIcontrol. This can lead to blockages in the
material transport tubes.
Steps
20 21 22 14
10 11 12 13
– Stop the doffers beginning with the first card (10) of the corresponding line. (Sequence 10,11,12,13,14).
– Once all doffers have stopped, switch OFF the material flow (material feed).
Note: This procedure is described in detail in the operating manual for the UNIcontrol unit.
2 / 40 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Operation
2.3 Start / Stop machine

2.3.1 Starting the machine
Cylinder ramp-up time
pulleys: All speeds
Cylinder drive with frequency 45s
500 revolutions
930 revolutions
Note: If power is again available after a power failure, the cylinder can be restarted from its rest position.
Steps
– Prerequisite: Main switch is switched on No
malfunctions are present. The free to start-up
status will be shown on the text display. «Auto-
matic mode » is selected in data screen 80.1.
Press the START button .
The cylinder motor starts up. When the
cylinder speed has reached between 150
and 200 min-1, the licker-in motor starts
up.
START button on the operator interface
panel, Page 2/14
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 41

Operation
Operation
2.3.2 Stop machine

Cylinder deceleration time
revolutions
revolutions
500 revolutions
930 revolutions
Steps
– Press the STOP key
The feed roller stops immediately. The
doffer continues to run until a sliver
breakage occurs. The sliver monitor
registers the sliver breakage and slowly
switches the doffer off. The cylinder drive
and the doffer drive are stopped.
Note: The machine can be started up again,
even if the stop procedure has not been com-
pleted.
STOP button on the operator interface
panel, Page 2/14
2.3.3 Stopping the doffer

Steps
– Press the button.
The feed roller switches off, according to
the programmed information in data
screen 41.31. The doffer continues to run
until a sliver breakage occurs. The sliver
monitor registers the sliver breakage and
slowly turns the doffer off.
Doffer STOP button, Page 2/16
41.31, Page 2/142
– Message "155" on the display of the operating

panel.
Pressing the push-button interrupts the
filling of the lower section of the card
trunk. The opening roll in the card trunk is
switched off.
2 / 42 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Operation
2.3.4 Starting production (doffer at creep speed)

Preparatory work
– If the message “153 / 154” is indicated on the operating unit display, then the bottom part of the card
chute must first be filled.
Starting production (filling card chute), Page 2/44
– The cylinder must have reached its final speed, before the doffer can be started.
Steps
– Prerequisite: “Ready for production” must ap-
pear on the text display, before production can
be started.
Press the button.
Start the cleaning roller and the doffer.
Button for starting production (doffer at
creep speed), Page 2/16
– Draw in the card sliver and guide it up to the

coiler.
Note: If a fault occurs whilst drawing the sliver
into the coiler, the card continues to produce
at creep speed. If the time taken to correct the
fault exceeds 3 minutes, the doffer stops.
– Subsequently press the button once again.

The doffer moves at high speed.
Note: If the machine is producing at creep
speed with a drawn-in sliver, it switches off
after the time duration set in the data screen.
Production at creep speed has to be restarted.
41.30, Page 2/141
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 43

Operation
Operation
2.3.5 Starting production (doffer at high speed)

Preparatory work
– The machine is operating at creep speed, the card sliver has been drawn in up to coiler.
Starting production (doffer at creep speed), Page 2/43
Doffer at high speed (automatic run-up not active)

– Press the button again and hold.
The doffer runs up to its programmed
delivery speed.
Note: As soon as the light scanner for sliver
monitoring has been uncovered for approx. 3
seconds, the doffer continues to run at its pro-
grammed speed.
41.1, Page 2/96
Doffer at high speed (automatic run-up active)

– The data screen is programmed for the automatic run-up of the doffer.
41.1, Page 2/96

The doffer switches automatically to high-speed operation, as soon as the light scanner on the
coiler has been covered for at least 3 seconds.
2.3.6 Starting production (filling card chute)

Preparatory work
– The cylinder must have reached its final speed.
– If the message “153 / 154” is indicated on the operating unit display, then the bottom part of the card
chute must first be filled.
Steps
– Prerequisite: The material feed in the blow
room is ready for production.
Press the button.
The bottom part of the card chute is filled.
Note: After the card chute has been filled,
“Ready for production” appears on the text
display.
– The doffer can be started at creep speed.

Starting production (doffer at creep
speed), Page 2/43
2 / 44 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Operation
2.3.7 Changing spinning cans

Steps
After the can change has been manually
activated, the flashing light is active for
four seconds, before the can change
takes place.
– The spinning can is replaced.

The spinning can change sets the meter
counter back to its programmed length.
Button for activating can
change, Page 2/15
2.3.8 Switching off the feed roller

Procedure, if the respective card is to be emptied.
Steps
No fresh material is fed to the card. The
machine empties itself consequently.
Switching off the feed roller, Page 2/15
2.3.9 Empty card trunk and card

Procedure, if a sliver feed trunk and the respective card are to be emptied.
Steps
The feed roll in the card trunk stops. No
material is supplied to the feeder trunk.
The card continues to produce until the
sliver breaks.
Emptying card chute and card, Page 2/15
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 45

Operation
Operation
2.3.10 Emptying AEROfeed

Procedure, if an entire line is to be emptied.
Steps
If the lead feeder machine or the UNImix
is put into the «empty» operating mode,
the card continues to produce further until
sliver break.
Note: This operating state is not suited for nor-
mal machine operation. The monitoring units
for filling the card trunk, the batt thickness in
the feed, and the sliver weight in the delivery
are no longer active.
Emptying AEROfeed, Page 2/15
2.4 Activities
2.4.1 Clean window
If the functioning of the light barrier is impaired by dirt on the window, the LED lights up to be attended to by
the service personnel. The machine does not switch off. The maintenance warning is recorded in the
respective data mask.
Steps
– The display (1) ,lights as an indication of
an immanent problem (Warning). A
corresponding text appears in the
corresponding data screen.
31.4, Page 2/93
1
– Switch off the doffer.
– Carefully bring the support (3) with the light
barrier (2) to the front
– Remove window (4) and clean.

2
If production is resumed, the display (1)
goes out after a while.
Note: The maintenance warning entries can
3 be deleted in the appropriate data screen.
4 31.6, Page 2/93
2 / 46 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Operation
2.4.2 Removing blockages in the area of the feed roller

DANGER
Do not touch anywhere in the area of the feed roller.
Note: A tail pulled off inside the fibre transport system can lead to a blockage in the area of the feed roller.
Steps
– Switch off the fibre transport system.
2 1 – The card production is stopped
– Open window (2) and clean out the material

above the feed roll.
– The card cylinder is stopped as soon as the
blue push-button (1) is pressed.
3
– Hold the blue push-button (1) depressed for a
few seconds. Feed roll (3) rotates backwards.
As a result, the jammed material from the
range of feed roll (3) is moved.
Note: If the blue push-button is pressed too
long, the seals on the feed roll may be dam-
aged.
Turn back the card feed roller, Page 2/13
– Remove the material and repeat the operation

until there is no material left between the fee
roller and the feed plate.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 47

Operation
Operation
2.4.3 Insert lap into the feed roller

Steps
DANGER
Do not touch anything in the area of
the feed roller (5). There is a danger
of fingers being drawn in between the
feed plate (4) and the rotating feed
1 2 roller (5).
the feed roller.
– Switch on the machine (1) and the doffer (2).
– Guide lap (3) from the AEROfeed card trunk

up to approx. 10 cm ahead of feed roll (5).

– Thin out the lap (3) by hand and make it into a
wedge shaped form.
4
– Start the doffer (2) again.
3 The wedge shaped lap (3) will now be

pulled into the feed roller (5).
5
2.4.4 Turn the feed roller backwards

Preparatory work
– The card delivery must be stationary.
Steps
– Press push-button (1).
1 The feed roller (2) rotates backwards.
The fed-in lap will be pushed back out.
2 / 48 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Operation
2.4.5 Display values and reset

Steps
– Information on production processes and changing the clothing for the cylinders and card flats.
70.1, Page 2/108
– Information on production processes and changing the clothing for the doffer and licker-in.
70.2, Page 2/109
– Show the amount still to be produced before the next grinding procedure.
70.3, Page 2/109
2.4.6 Clearing material out of the suction duct

WARNING
Switch off the machine via the main switch and secure the switch with a padlock.
Steps
– Open the flap (1) and clear out the material.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 49

Operation
Operation
2.4.7 Cleaning the stripping blade

Steps
2
STOP
1

– Operate the lever (2) on the left side of the machine.
– The stripping blades (1) are raised and can be cleaned carefully across their whole width with a cloth.
2 / 50 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Operation
2.4.8 Removing the blockage in the sliver funnel

Steps
DANGER
Danger of fingers being pulled with the sliver funnel (2) tilted down and rotating disc rollers (1).
Do not reach into the area around the rollers.
– Tilt the sliver funnel (2) down to approx. 80 degrees and take it out.
– Twist the sliver (3) together and pull it out towards the back.
Note: Do not use steel punches or similar tools to avoid damaging the sliver funnel (2).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 51

Operation
Operation
2.4.9 Cleaning the fleece bridge

Steps
3
STOP
1
2
– Turn the cross apron and disc roller carrier (4) down as far as possible.
– Carefully remove the special nuts (1) and the lower delivery rollers (3) downwards as far as possible.
– Dampen a cloth with water and use it to clean the fleece bridge (2).
2 / 52 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Operation
2.4.10 Initiate change sequence

IMPORTANT
Danger of injury and damage to cans
If a spinning can becomes jammed during can change, the main switch must be turned off. As a
result the pressure in the pneumatic cylinder will be run down. The spinning can be taken out of
the sliver deposit. Damaged spinning cans are not to be used.
Steps
– Press button (1).

After the can change has been manually activated, the flashing light is active for four seconds,
before the can change takes place.
– The can is changed.

When the can is changed, the length counter is reset to the programmed length.
2.4.11 Swivel out the calender rolls

Steps
– Pull lever (1) out.
1 – Swing out the support with the calender roll

(2).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 53

Operation
Operation
2.5 Operating unit

2.5.1 Change the language
The "LANGUAGE SELECTION" key allows different languages to be selected.
Steps
– Prerequisite: The required languages must
be activated in data screen .
40.3, Page 2/95
Keep pressing the “LANGUAGE SELECTION”
button (1) until the required language is dis-
played.
LANGUAGE-key, Page 2/23
2.5.2 Acknowledging fault or warning

In the event of a malfunction, the corresponding malfunction mask appears in the overview.
Note: Press the "ACKNOWLEDGE" key and/or "START" key to reset errors that no longer exist.
Steps
– Press the “ACKNOWLEDGE” button (1) .
Once the malfunction is remedied, it is
reset, i.e. no longer displayed.
Note: The "ACKNOWLEDGE" key appears
only when the displayed malfunction is no
longer current. Otherwise, the malfunction
must first be cleared.
– If several faults are present, they will be vis-

ible in the box (7). Use the button (6) to display
the next fault. Use the button (5) to display the
previous fault.
– If the “START” button is pressed, the machine

will start, provided that all faults have been cor-
rected. Otherwise, the faults that still need to
be corrected are displayed.
START button on the operator interface
panel, Page 2/14
2 / 54 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Operation
2.5.3 Troubleshooting, displaying additional help

If a malfunction is displayed, an additional help text may sometimes also be displayed.
Steps
– Press the “HELP” button (2) .
The error display is overwritten by an
additional help message.
HELP-key, Page 2/20
Example of a message
display, Page 2/72
– Press the “PREVIOUS SCREEN” button (5).

The malfunction mask is displayed again.
SCREEN-key back, Page 2/22
2.5.4 Enter password

Some entries and tests in data masks can only be executed with the required authorisation after entering a
password.
Authorization levels
Level 1 (no password Read
necessary)
Level 2 (password Edit
necessary, default password (machine-specific)
is 1001)
Master level (password Possibility for
necessary, default password changing the
is 1432) passwords at the
various
authorisation
levels
Note: The authorisation necessary for an intended action is shown in the list of menu and data masks.
Steps
– Select main mask.
Display main mask, Page 2/61
– Press the "ENTER PASSWORD" key (4) in the

main mask.
The mask for the password input is
displayed.
9, Page 2/128
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 55

Operation
Operation
– Enter the corresponding four-digit password

using the program buttons 1 - 5..
Note: The digits for the password must lie
between 0 and 4, and these correspond to the
first 5 program buttons.
– The button (6) can be used to delete the code

and re-enter it.
After correctly entering the password, the
display changes on button (4).
– After entering the password, press one of the

keys "<<", "<", ">", ">>" or the “MAIN MASK”
key.
In the main screen, the crossed-out key
(4) is displayed, i.e. the password has
been accepted. The appropriate
authorisation, e.g. for entries, is active.
PASSWORD-CANCELING
key, Page 2/21
– After entering the password, the menu over-

view is displayed.
The corresponding menus are now visible
and enabled.
2 / 56 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Operation
2.5.5 Changing passwords

The passwords for the various authorisations can be assigned and changed individually. The master pass-
word can also be changed.
Note: In order to alter the password, you must know the master password.
Steps
– Press the "ENTER PASSWORD" key (4) in the

main mask.
The mask for the password input is
displayed.
Enter password, Page 2/55
9, Page 2/128
– Use the buttons (1...5) to enter the master

password and press the “NEXT SCREEN”
button (6).
The mask for changing the password is
displayed.
9.1, Page 2/128
– For each password, enter the new code twice

and use the “NEXT SCREEN” button (6) to dis-
play the next password step.
Note: If a password is not to be changed, then
the “NEXT SCREEN” button (6) can be used to
switch to the next password step.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 57

Operation
Operation
2.5.6 Cancelling the password authorisation

By cancelling the password authorisation, you can prevent anybody not authorised from altering data or carry-
ing out test functions.
Note: The password authorisation for inputs is automatically cancelled if no key is pressed for 10 minutes.
For tests it is after 10 hours.
Steps
– Press the "CANCEL PASSWORD" key (4) in

the main mask.
The key symbol for the programming key
is no longer crossed out, i.e. the
password authorisation is cancelled. A
new password input is necessary in order
for data to be changed or tests to be run.
PASSWORD-CANCELING
key, Page 2/21
2.5.7 What do you do if you have forgotten the master password?

Note: The master password is required for changing passwords. This master password should only be
known to an administrator.
Steps
– Perform a cold start.
After the cold start is complete, the standard password 1001 is assigned to the authorisations S2 -
S3. The master password is 1423.
2 / 58 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Operation
2.5.8 Displaying an individual data mask

In order to view actual values, alter settings or run tests, it is necessary to display the appropriate data mask.
Note: Before a data mask with authorisation protection can be displayed you must first enter the appropriate
password.
Steps
– Prerequisite: A main mask (overview mask or
error) is displayed.
Press the "MENU OVERVIEW" key (3).
The menu overview is displayed.
MENU overview key, Page 2/20
– Press the "CURSOR forward" (2) or the

"CURSOR back" key (1) until the required
menu is marked.
POINTER button forward, Page 2/19
POINTER button back, Page 2/19
– Keep pressing the “NEXT SCREEN” button (6)

or the “PREVIOUS SCREEN” button (5), until
the required screen is displayed.
SCREEN-key scroll forwards, Page 2/22
Navigating to a desired data mask with
one key, Page 2/60
2.5.9 Jumping from the overview mask straight to a data mask

In the overview screen, the ‬“DIRECT FORWARD” button (first program button) can be used to select a data
screen that is repeatedly required. In data screen 40.2, the configuration is made to determine which data
screen is displayed. The data screen number indicates the corresponding screen.
Steps
– In the overview mask, press the "DIRECT for-
ward" key (1).
The data mask configured in data mask
40.2 is displayed immediately without first
having to navigate to the mask via the
menu. (In this example you jump to data
mask 30.1).
DIRECT key, forward, Page 2/19
Entered values in data
screens, Page 2/63
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 59

Operation
Operation
2.5.10 Navigating to a desired data mask with one key

Select data screens in succession.
Steps
– Press the "DISPLAY forward" key (4) or "DIS-
PLAY back" key (3).
Each touch of the key calls up the next or
the previous data mask or menu.
"DATA-DISPLAY-key-forward, Page 2/17
DATA-DISPLAY-key-back, Page 2/17
2.5.11 Display the last data mask again

In the overview mask you can use the "DIRECT back" key to return to the data mask you were viewing last.
(In this example you jump to data mask 50.2).
Steps
– Press the “DIRECT back” key (2).
The last data mask displayed is shown
again. (In this example you jump to data
mask 50.2).
DIRECT-key back, Page 2/19
2.5.12 Browsing in the same masks

Browsing from one overview mask to another if there are several of them. Display the next malfunction if
there are several pending malfunctions simultaneously.
Steps
– Press the “PREVIOUS SCREEN” button (5) or
the “NEXT SCREEN” button (6).
The next masks are selected.
SCREEN-key scroll forwards, Page 2/22
SCREEN-key back, Page 2/22
2 / 60 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Operation
2.5.13 Display main mask

Independently of which mask is on the screen, touching any key immediately changes the display back to the
main mask (standard overview mask or error display).
Steps
– Press the "MAIN MASK" key (1) once.
– If a malfunction is displayed, the standard

overview mask appears as long as the "MAIN
MASK" key (1) is pressed.
2.5.14 Browsing lists

Displayed lists may be larger and may therefore not be completely displayed on the screen. The following
programming keys are provided in the data mask for this.
Steps
– Press the "CURSOR forward" (2) or the
"CURSOR back" key (1).
The mark is moved up or down by one
field.
– Press the "START OF LIST" key (3).

This takes you to the beginning of the list.
START OF LIST key, Page 2/20
– Press the "END OF LIST" key (4).

This takes you to the end of the list
END OF LIST key, Page 2/21
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 61

Operation
Operation
2.5.15 Setting the brightness of the display

Operating unit, Page 3/34
If the display is difficult to read or if some dark areas are visible, this can be improved by adjusting the bright-
ness.
Steps
– Press the “MAIN SCREEN” button (7) and the
“BRIGHTNESS PLUS” button (3) simultan-
eously.
The mask gets lighter.
DISPLAY button, brighten, Page 2/22
– Press the “MAIN SCREEN” button (7) and the

“BRIGHTNESS MINUS” button (4) simultan-
eously.
The mask gets darker.
DISPLAY button, darken, Page 2/21
2 / 62 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Operation
2.5.16 Entered values in data screens

Values and settings can be changed in the corresponding data masks. To do so, first enter the password for
input authorisation.
Altering values / settings in data screens
– If several modifiable values are displayed in
the data mask, first use the "CURSOR
forward" (2) or the "CURSOR back" key (1) to
mark the corresponding value (7).
– Use the “PLUS” button (4), “MINUS” button (3)

or the numerical keyboard to alter the value.
MINUS-key, Page 2/20
PLUS-key, Page 2/21
Numerical keyboard, Page 2/18
– If an incorrect value was entered, you can use

the "DELETE" key (5).
The original value (before you pressed
the "+" or "-" key) is displayed again.
Note: The “DELETE” key appears only if the
changed values have to be confirmed.
DELETE button, Page 2/22
– Press the "ENTER" key (6) to confirm the input

and to save the change.
Note: The “ENTER” key appears in the bottom
right-hand corner only if the changed values
have to be confirmed.
Standard time/summer time changeover

– Prerequisite: First enter at least the input password.
Carry out alteration in the corresponding data screen 40.1.
40.1, Page 2/94
Configuring units
– Prerequisite: Enter the input password.
40.2, Page 2/94
Configuring standard-overview display

40.2, Page 2/94
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 63

Operation
Operation
Configuring direct data screen selection

40.2, Page 2/94
Manually switching the shift schedule (configuration)

50.1, Page 2/104
Entering / Configuring shift plan

50.2, Page 2/104
2.5.17 Configuring the direct selection data mask

In the overview mask, the first programming key allows direct access to a frequently required data mask. The
data mask number indicates which mask the system will jump to.
Note: This key is not included in all control systems.
Steps
– Prerequisite: First enter the password in the main mask.
Display data mask 40.2.
– Use the "PLUS ENTER" key or the "MINUS ENTER" key in the line "Direct mask selection" to select the
desired numeral. The value is changed and saved.
PLUS-ENTER-key, Page 2/22
MINUS-ENTER-key, Page 2/20
2.5.18 Testing sensors and switching the I/O status on the signal lamp
All elements, such as sensors, switches etc., whose I/O status is read in by the control unit, can be tested.
This occurs in data screen 82.1. The I/O status (1 or 0) of the selected elements is indicated in the data
screen as well as on the signal lamp.
Steps
– Display data screen 82.1.
82.1, Page 2/114
– Select element group and element.

The I/O status is displayed in the data mask as 1=24 VDC or 0=0 VDC. Display on signal lamp:
0=dark, 1=lit up.
2 / 64 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Operation
2.5.19 Executing test functions

WARNING
Activating machine functions via data screens causes mechanical movements to be triggered
immediately.
There is a risk of injury due to the sudden movement of machine components.
The operator must ensure that no person is present in the hazard zone.
Tasks performed in service mode may only be carried out by authorised and qualified personnel.
Individual machine functions can be executed for troubleshooting purposes and maintenance work.
Steps
– All doors and covers in the safety loop must be closed.
– Prerequisite: Enter the password.

Display data screen 80.1 and select the operating mode for the test function.
80.1, Page 2/111
– Call up the appropriate test data mask (82.1 to 8n.n) that allows the function test to be performed.
82.1, Page 2/114
– Select the element to be tested.

– Select the desired function.
– Press the "ENTER" key to confirm your choice.
WARNING
This service function causes movement to be triggered immediately, which may lead to a person
suffering injury.
No person is permitted to be present in the hazard zone.
– Press the green "START" button.
The function is initiated. The data mask also shows the states of the sensors concerned and, if
necessary, whether the function has started (=1) or stopped (=0).
Note: Most functions stop immediately as soon as you release the "START" button. Otherwise the func-
tion can always be stopped by pressing the "STOP" button.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 65

Operation
Operation
2 / 66 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Display screens Operator interface panel
3 Display screens Operator interface panel

3.1 Structure of menu and data screens
The screen shows an overview of the composition of the different screen displays, and which keys are used
to go from one screen display to another. In most cases, one can switch between display screens using the
normal keyboard keys or the programming keys. See chapter 1.
There are 3 types of displays:
Main screen (1) (grey):
Either an overview display or an error message will be shown if an error prevails. There might be more than
one overview display or more than one error at the same time.
Menu overview (2) (black/white):
Data displays are grouped in menus. From the menu overview the requested menu may be selected
Data screen (3) (white):
In data displays, actual values are shown, settings are changed, and test functions are started.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 67

Operation
3.2 List of menu and data screens

No. Menu /data screens Authorization Page
10 10 Production set values 2/75
10.1 Production set values Change 2/75
10.2 Production sort sliver set values Change with 2/76
password
10.3 Production setpoints options Change with 2/77
password
10.4 Production setpoints sliver test Change with 2/77
password
11 11 Production actual values 2/78
11.1 Production actual values, material No password 2/78
11.2 Production act.values work elements No password 2/79
11.3 Production efficiency/MTBA No password 2/79
12 12 Production shift data 2/81
12.1 Production current shift No password 2/81
12.2 Production last shifts No password 2/82
12.3 Events shifts No password 2/82
12.4 Production total shifts No password 2/82
12.5 Events total shifts No password 2/83
12.6 Delete shifts Change with 2/83
password
20 20 Quality data actual values, card 2/84
20.1 Q-Data actual values card A% No password 2/84
20.2 Q-data act. values card CV%..CV100 No password 2/84
20.3 Q-data act. values card spectrogram No password 2/85
20.3 Q-data act. values card spectrogram No password 2/85
20.4 Quality, actual values, card, slubs No password 2/85
22 22 Quality data set values, card 2/86
22.1 Q-data set values card A% Change with 2/86
password
22.2 Q-data set values card CV% Change with 2/86
password
22.3 Q-data set values CV% corrc. Change with 2/87
password
22.4 Q-data set values card spectrogr. Change with 2/88
password
22.5 Qual., target values, card, slubs Change with 2/89
password
30 30 General information 2/91
30.1 Information machine No password 2/91
30.2 Information freq. converter No password 2/91
31 31 Information logs, statistics 2/92
31.1 Info events occurred No password 2/92
2 / 68 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation

31.2 Info current malfunctions No password 2/92
31.3 Info current warnings No password 2/92
31.4 Info current maintenance warnings No password 2/93
31.5 Info events maintenance No password 2/93
31.6 Info delete lists Change with 2/93
password
40 40 Settings, general 2/94
40.1 Settings date/time Change with 2/94
password
40.2 Settings units/operation Change without 2/94
password
40.3 Settings languages Change with 2/95
password
41 41 Settings, machine 2/96
41.1 Settings card delivery Change with 2/96
password
41.2 Settings feed/cylinder Change with 2/97
password
41.3 Settings IGS Change with 2/99
password
42 Settings coiler I 2/100
42.3 Settings coiler I Change with 2/100
password
43 43 Settings, configuration 2/102
43.1 Machine configuration Change using 2/102
password and
operating mode
"Change Config-
uration»
43.2 Configuration options Change using 2/103
password and
operating mode
"Change Config-
uration»
50 50 Configuration, shifts 2/104
50.1 Configuration shift selection Change with 2/104
password
50.2 Configuration shifts shift schedule Change with 2/104
password
60 60 Production value groups 2/105
60.1 Value group management Change with 2/105
password
60.2 Value groups preview machine No password 2/106
60.3 Value groups preview quality Change with 2/107
password
60.4 Value groups, preview, options Change with 2/108
password
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 69

Operation

70 70 Maintenance clothings 2/108
70.1 Maintenance clothings machine I Change with 2/108
password
70.2 Maintenance clothings machine II Change with 2/109
password
70.3 Maintenance clothings IGS No password 2/109
80 80 Operating mode/Tests 2/111
80.1 Operating mode switchover Change with 2/111
password
81 81 Grind/put on 2/112
81.1 Grind cylinder clothing Change with 2/112
password
81.2 Grind doffer clothing Change with 2/112
password
81.3 Servicing, flats, clothing Change with 2/112
password
82 82 Test inputs/outputs and covers 2/114
82.1 Test digital inputs Change with 2/114
password
82.2 Test analog inputs Change with 2/115
password
82.3 Test digital outputs Change with 2/115
password
82.4 Test covers and door safeguards Change with 2/116
password
83 83 Test drives 2/117
83.1 Test feed roll chute Change with 2/117
password
83.2 Test opening roll chute Change with 2/117
password
83.3 Test fan chute Change with 2/118
password
83.4 Test licker-in Change with 2/118
password
83.5 Test cylinder Change with 2/118
password
83.6 Test, flats drive Change with 2/119
password
83.7 Test, clearer roller, flats Change with 2/120
password
83.8 Test cleaner brush Change with 2/120
password
83.9 Test feed roll card Change with 2/121
password
83.10 Test doffer card Change with 2/121
password
2 / 70 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation

83.11 Test delivery card Change with 2/121
password
83.12 Test main motor coiler Change with 2/122
password
84 84 Test/Programming devices 2/122
84.1 Test control unit Change (mainten- 2/122
ance)
84.2 Test converter Change with 2/122
password
85 85 Test optional devices 2/123
85.1 Test IGS-classic Change with 2/123
password
85.2 Test IGS-top Change with 2/124
password
85.7 Test mote knife licker-in Change with 2/126
password
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 71

Operation
3.3 Overview screen

Example of a message display
One or several messages (malfunctions, warnings,
events) are displayed on the display unit in the form
of text and diagrams. If there are several
messages pending simultaneously, these can be
displayed individually.
1 Designation of the message.
2 Message code
3 In the machine graphical display, the affected

subassembly is depicted in black.
4 Shows the order and number of current

messages.
Example 2/3: The second message of a total of
three sequential messages is currently shown.
5 In the figure for the subassembly, the precise loc-

ation of a fault is indicated by a flashing rectangle.
6 ENTER key:to acknowledge the current malfunc-

tion.
7 HELP key:to show additional help for the

displayed event.
8 MENU key: to display the menu overview.
9 PASSWORD key: to display the password entry.
10 Mask back key:displays the previous message,

if several events are reported.
11 MASK forward: displays the next message, if

several events are reported.
2 / 72 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
5.2 5.4
2 3 4 5 5.1 5.3 5.5 6
1 1
7
8
9
10
11
12
16 13
15.1
15.2
15.3
14
Overview display on the operator panel

Unless there is a malfunction, the following overview mask is displayed.
1 Image number
2 Speed of the opening roller
3 Speed of the card flats
4 Cylinder speed
5 Display for the selected shift
5.1 Network connection Ok.
5.2 No network connection
5.3 The secured doors are locked
5.4 The secured doors are unlocked
5.5 Maintenance warning
6 Production value group
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 73

Operation
5.2 5.4
2 3 4 5 5.1 5.3 5.5 6
1 1
7
8
9
10
11
12
16 13
15.1
15.2
15.3
14
7 Sliver weight
8 Production per hour
9 Delivery per minute (delivery speed)
10 Weight deviation for card sliver.
11 CV value of card sliver
12 Remaining meters to the can change
13 Remaining time till the can change
14 Licker-in speed
15.1 Code numbers 100 to 199: Display of operating modes
15.2 Code numbers 200 to 549: Display of malfunctions
15.2 Code numbers 550 to 649: Display of warnings
16 Weight of incoming lap
2 / 74 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
3.4 Menu 10: "10 Production set values"

Contains all the production data of the machine Not shift-related data
10.1 Production set values

Altering the cylinder r.p.m., Page 6/101
Sliver weight:
If the sliver weight is changed, the delivery speed
and the sliver length which are to be deposited in
the can are both changed. Thus the card produc-
tion and the weight of the material deposited in the
can remain constant. Unit of measurement for the
sliver weight:
40.2, Page 2/94
Production:
The delivery speed is calculated in evaluating the
production per hour. Unit of measurement for the
production:
40.2, Page 2/94
Delivery:
The delivery speed is calculated in evaluating the
production per hour. Unit of measurement for the
delivery speed:
40.2, Page 2/94
Can filling:
Bei der Bestimmung des Bandgewichts in der
Kanne (Materialgewicht in der Kanne) wird die
Bandlänge errechnet.
Program the required unit of measure for the sliver
weight and the sliver length in the appropriate data
screen
40.2, Page 2/94
The sliver weight in the can is calculated when de-
termining the sliver length.
The sliver length is calculated when determining
the sliver weight in the can.
Flats speed:
Die Geschwindigkeit der Kardendeckel wird mit der
PLUS-Taste bzw. MINUS-Taste verändert.
Cylinder rpm :
C 70: The PLUS and MINUS keys can be used
to change the speed of the cylinder, provided that
the drive is generated by a frequency-converter-
controlled motor
43.2, Page 2/103
min. - max.: 500 - 880 rpm
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 75

Operation
Cylinder rpm :
C 70H: The PLUS and MINUS keys can be used
to change the speed of the cylinder, provided that
the drive is generated by a frequency-converter-
controlled motor
43.2, Page 2/103
min. - max.: 500 - 930 rpm
10.2 Production sort sliver set values

In this data screen, the delivery measuring device
of the card is adjusted according to the weighed
sliver weight.
Sorted sliver weight:
An entry is only required, when a correction to the
sliver weight is necessary.
Input the effective weighed sliver weight of the
card.
Correction factor, card:

The effective weighed sliver weight is input.
The system now calculates a correction ratio re-
ferred to the SET sliver weight of the card. The cor-
rection ratio is displayed. The card sliver is now ad-
justed to the SET sliver weight via this correction
factor.
The currently calculated correction ratios remain
stored the current production value group. They
must be determined separately for each individual
production value group (1...5).
Example : Calibrating assorted sliver weights

In this example, the objective is to have a
programmed sliver weight of 5 ktex in the data
screen 10.2.
The card produce sliver during controlled running
for a minimum of 15 minutes. Determine the sliver
weight only after this length of time. Recommenda-
tion: Use 5x10 meter/yards of sliver.
Input the effective weighed sliver weight. In this ex-
ample 5.5 ktex. The correction ratio is calculated
and displayed.
The speed of the feed roller motor is now correc-
ted correspondingly so that the card produces the
required sliver weight of 5 ktex.
The correction ratio can be altered using the PLUS
button or the MINUS button. However, this option
2 / 76 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
should only be used for a necessary program

change. The displayed correction ratios must be
noted down before the program change and then
be input again for each machine and production
group after the program change.
10.3 Production setpoints options

Setting the mote knives (discharge
opening), Page 6/88
Change the licker-in speed, Page 6/83
Licker-in speed:
The speed of the licker-in at the cylinder can be
changed with the PLUS button or MINUS button as
long as the opening roll is driven by a motor con-
trolled by a frequency converter.
43.2, Page 2/103
min. - max.: 920 - 2300 rpm
Ejection dist. licker-in:

Nominal distance of licker-in mote knife to the feed
roll of the licker-in unit (discharge opening).
The distance can be changed with the PLUS button
or MINUS button as long as the mote knife is actu-
ated by an electric cylinder.
43.2, Page 2/103
min. - max.: 41.0 - 71.0 mm
10.4 Production setpoints sliver test

When carrying out a sliver test with heavy card
slivers on the autoleveller, two cans of 500 metres
of sliver can be produced with a reduced sliver
weight. After production of these two cans, the
card continues to produce with the previously set
values.
Start sequence:
Yes: The production of two cans with the reduced
sliver weight is started.
Sliver weight:
Enter the value in percent by which the sliver
weight of the card is to be reduced for this test.
The adjustable values can also be made smaller for
extreme settings of the sliver weight.
min. - max.: - 40.0 - + 40.0 %
Sliver weight actual value:

Weight of the card sliver to be produced for the
sliver test.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 77

Operation
Can:
Number of cans produced
Can change:
Sliver still to be produced until the can change.
Section 4: Data screens for extended opera-

tion.
3.5 Menu 11: "11 Production actual values"

contains shift related production data, such as efficiency and production
11.1 Production actual values, material

Adjust the light barrier at the card
trunk, Page 6/29
Adjust the lap weight by the position of the
card trunk wall, Page 6/27
No password
Sliver weight:
Current card sliver weight.
Production:
Current production rate per hour
Delivery:
Measured delivery speed on the card.
Can change:
Sliver and length and time needed until the spin-
ning can is full.
Total draft, card:

Total card draft = delivery speed divided by feed
speed.
Batt feed (calc.):

Weight of the lap feed (calculated).
Lap feed = sliver weight x total draft + weight of
waste
These values are determined over the last 30
seconds.
2 / 78 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Modulation scanner:
Signal of the distance measuring system on the
feed plate of the card.
0% => no material between feed roller and feed
trough.
100% = maximum opening (level control) between
feed roll and feed trough.
This signal is required for setting the light barrier on
the card shaft.
11.2 Production act.values work elements

No password
Cylinder rpm:
Current r.p.m. of the cylinder
Flats speed:
Display of the card flats speed
Licker-in rpm:
Current speed of the third licker-in. (Machine with 3
licker-ins.)
Current speed of the licker-in. (Machine with 1
licker-in.)
Ejection distance licker-in:

Discharge opening between feed roller and licker-in
mote knife. (This display only appears if the adjust-
ment is made via the control unit) .
43.2, Page 2/103
Opening roll rpm chute:

Current speed of the opening roll in the card trunk.
11.3 Production efficiency/MTBA

No password
Selecting efficiency type for display:
Select the efficiency type which is to be displayed
in the data screen.
40.2, Page 2/94
Setting the time period basis for the efficiency:

The efficiency is continuously calculated and is
based on the time period specified in the data
screen.
40.1, Page 2/94
The calculation is started again when the machine
is put back into service after switching on with the
main switch.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 79

Operation
Machine efficiency:
The machine efficiency again reflects the machine
availability during these hours. The time in which
the machine was not in service but without mal-
function is not included in the calculation.
Production efficiency
The production efficiency, expressed as a
percentage, indicates the actual production of a
machine compared to the theoretically-possible
production (summation of the target productions) of
a machine. The period(s) during which the
machine is inactive, is included in the calculation.
MTBA:
The calculation is updated continuously over 7
days. During this time period the normal production
time is continuously compared with the number of
malfunctions and evaluated.
(Before an event the machine had produced for at
least 50 seconds at normal production speed. At
slow speed or for running times shorter than 50
seconds after trouble shooting, a standstill is not
taken into account.)
If, during this time period, many interruptions
caused by the machine are recorded in a single
day, these are taken into account in the calculation
after the sixth day. Only after this are they dropped
from the calculation.

tion.
2 / 80 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
3.6 Menu 12: "12 Production shift data"

Shift data for the production.
12.1 Production current shift

No password
Current shift:
Display of the current shift.
The shift data are now continuously summed are
stored for this selected shift. If another shift is
selected, the data for the previous shift remain in
abeyance until that same shift is again selected.
Machine efficiency:
Display dependent on configuration in data screen .
40.2, Page 2/94
Calculation for the selected shift.
Production efficiency
Display dependent on configuration in data screen .
40.2, Page 2/94
Calculation for the selected shift only.
Normal production time:

Displays the time during which effective production
was continued during this shift.
Sliver produced:
Displays how much sliver was produced during this
shift.
Number of standstills:
Number of standstills which were caused by mal-
functions during the production.
(Before an event the machine had produced for at
least 50 seconds at normal production speed. At
slow speed or for running times shorter than 50
seconds after trouble shooting, a standstill is not
taken into account.)
Number of can changes:

Number of can changes caused during this shift.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 81

Operation
12.2 Production last shifts

Overview of the production and the efficiency of the
completed shift and the currently active shift.
No password
First line display
Data for the shift, which is currently being worked.
Second line display

Data for the shift, which was most recently worked.
12.3 Events shifts

Display of the number of faults, which led to an in-
terruption in production. The events are sorted ac-
cording to frequency, and are displayed for each
shift.
No password
Shift number:
Current
The data for the current shift are displayed.
Normal shifts
The data for the most recent shift are displayed.
12.4 Production total shifts

Summation counter of the production of a preselec-
ted shift since a given deletion date.
No password
2 / 82 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
12.5 Events total shifts

The entire set of faults since the last delete date,
which led to an interruption in production, are dis-
played for each shift.
No password
Shift number:
Selecting the shift number for which the data
should be displayed.
12.6 Delete shifts

The shift data can be deleted
Change with password
Delete shift(s):
Any single or all configured shifts can be deleted.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 83

Operation
3.7 Menu 20: "20 Quality data actual values, card"

Actual values of quality data of the card.
20.1 Q-Data actual values card A%

Percentile display of the difference between the
nominal value and the current value of the sliver
weight (card) with reference to the current value of
the sliver weight (card).
No password
Time base for the diagram:
The time base (24h / 8h / 30 min) can be changed
without any loss of data resulting from the
changeover.
A diagram is shown with the selected time base.
A%: Current value

Calculation per the measured length input shown in
the data screen.
22.1, Page 2/86
A%100: Current value

Calculation after 100 m of measured length
Calculation of the A%100 value

(Actual value sliver - nominal value sliver) x 100 /
divided by nominal value sliver
A sliver which is too light gives a negative A%100
value.
20.2 Q-data act. values card CV%..CV100

Display of the actual quality values for CV% and
CV1 - 100
No password
changeover.
CV%-CV100
Selectable cut length, for which a figure is
displayed.
CV values:
Current weight variations of the card sliver (in %)
over the programmable reference length (in
metres) .
22.2, Page 2/86
2 / 84 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
20.3 Q-data act. values card spectrogram

Wavelengths in the spectrogram ranging from 0.02
m to 100 m are displayed. Wavelengths measured
in yards must be converted accordingly (using the
multiplicative factor 0.914).
No password
Peak in spectrogram
Press the “?” button to open a subsequent data
screen where machine elements are displayed that
could have caused the fault
20.3 Q-data act. values card spectrogram

Display of machine elements that could have
caused the detected faults (peaks) indicated on
data screen 20.3
No password
Doffer
The doffer is indicated in this example as the first
possible machine element that could have caused
the problems
Press the “?” button to view suggestions on how to
eliminate the problem
Press the “Cursor” button to view additional (if ap-
plicable) machine elements that could have caused
problems
20.4 Quality, actual values, card, slubs

Display of the number of slubs in the sliver
produced
No password
changeover.
+15% - +45%
Selectable class, for which a figure is displayed.
Number of slubs:
Display of the current number of slubs per
kilometre in the card sliver produced.

tion.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 85

Operation
3.8 Menu 22: "22 Quality data set values, card"

Nominal values of quality data of the card.
22.1 Q-data set values card A%

Monitoring the data relevant to
quality, Page 6/243
Measured length:
Entry of the measured length which is needed for
the calculation of the percentile sliver weight devi-
ation A% of the delivered sliver to the card.
min. - max.: 25 - 150 m
Monitoring:
Appears only without RQM (Rieter Quality Monitor-
ing)
The monitoring can be switched on or off.
Shut-off limit:
ing)
Determination of the shutoff limit A%. If the defined
A% shutoff limit value is continually exceeded for
the set length in metres (distance to malfunction),
the card production is switched off.
min. - max.: 0,5 - 10 %
Length up to malfunction:
ing)
Enter the length of the card sliver to be produced; if
the shutoff limit A% for the given length is continu-
ally exceeded, the card production is switched off.
min. - max.: 0 - 3000 m
22.2 Q-data set values card CV%

quality, Page 6/243
Reference length:
Sliver length over which the CV values are
calculated. (Normally 3000 meters or yards are
programmed)
The shorter the reference length selected, the more
sensitive the display.
Default : 3000 m
min. - max.: 300 - 10000 m
2 / 86 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Monitoring:
ing)
Cutting length monitored:

ing)
The selected cutting length is monitored.
Shut-off limit:
ing)
Determination of the shutoff limit CV% of the card.
If the defined CV% shutoff limit value is continually
exceeded for the set length in metres (distance to
malfunction), the card production is switched off.
min. - max.: 0.5 - 10 %
ing)
Enter the length of the card sliver to be produced;
if the shutoff limit CV% for the given length is con-
tinually exceeded, the card production is switched
off.
min. - max.: 0 - 3000 m
22.3 Q-data set values CV% corrc.

Adjust the CV% value determined by the control
unit to the value measured in the laboratory. Prior
to correction, the card must have been in continu-
ous operation for at least 60 min. Make the cor-
rection while the card is running. There must be at
least 2 empty cans standing by.
CV% correct. factor:
Computed correction factor.
If the software is changed, then this value can be
re-entered.
CV% correct. start run:

ing)
Yes: After activation, a can change occurs auto-
matically. Three hundred metres of sliver is de-
posited in the empty can, which is subsequently
changed automatically.
Test the produced sliver in the laboratory.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 87

Operation
CV%, measured at card:

ing)
The CV% value of the card sliver (300 m) produced
is indicated.
CV% lab. value:

ing)
Enter the value determined in the laboratory and
confirm.
The program computes a correction factor, based
on the value measured by the card control unit and
the value determined in the laboratory. This factor
is stored in the computer and displayed. All CV%
values determined by the card are now corrected
using this factor. This ensures that the value meas-
ured by the card control unit is identical to that de-
termined in the laboratory.
Can change:
ing)
Length to be produced until the can change
(provided that the CV% correction procedure has
been started).
22.4 Q-data set values card spectrogr.

quality, Page 6/243
Interval length:
Meters (length) produced between two spectro-
gram collections
min. - max.: 400 - 10000 m
Monitoring:
ing)
Shut-off limit:
ing)
Detrmination of the shutoff limit for the spectrogram
of the card.
Example: The preset factor is 2.0 and the success-
ive amplitude measurements lie in a range of 100.
If one of the amplitudes from this range continually
has a value of 200 (factor 2 x 100) for the set length
in metres (distance to malfunction), the card pro-
duction switches off
2 / 88 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
min. - max.: 1.4 - 5
ing)
Enter the length of the card sliver to be produced;
if the shutoff limit of the spectrogram for the given
length is continually exceeded, the card production
is switched off.
min. - max.: 0 - 3000 m
22.5 Qual., target values, card, slubs

quality, Page 6/243
Reference length:
Sliver length used for measuring the number of
slubs (normally 1000 metres or yards is
programmed in).
The shorter the reference length selected, the more
sensitive the display.
Default : 1000 m
min. - max.: 300 - 10000 m
Monitoring:
(Only appears without RQM (Rieter Quality Monit-
oring).)
Class monitored:
ing)
The selected class is monitored.
Shut-off limit:
oring).)
Definition of the shutoff limit for the number of slubs
per kilometre of card sliver produced. If the defined
shutoff limit value is continually exceeded for the
set length in metres (distance to fault), the card
production is switched off.
Default : 5.0 Slubs / 1000 m
min. - max.: 0.5 - 20 Slubs / 1000 m
oring).)
Enter the length of card sliver to be produced, for
which the card production is switched off, if the
shutoff limit value is continually exceeded.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 89

Operation
min. - max.: 0 - 3000 m
2 / 90 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
3.9 Menu 30: "30 General information"

Furnishes information about machine type, software release, condition of in- and output.
30.1 Information machine

Information on the software release of the various
modules
Software release panel:
Information on software release.
Software release D95K:

Information on software release.
Network address:
The network address for the corresponding ma-
chine is displayed. .
43.2, Page 2/103
Fan temperature, CPU:

This display only appears, if the advanced opera-
tion has been activated.
40.2, Page 2/94
The CPU temperature is displayed.
Card max delivery 400 m/min WA6/7 51

This display only appears, if the advanced opera-
tion has been activated.
40.2, Page 2/94
The maximum possible delivery is displayed.
30.2 Information freq. converter

Overview of the software versions.
Freq.converter
Frequency inverter of the selected machine part.
Vers
Software-Version des angewählten
Frequenzumrichters. Kann bei nachfolgenden
Versionen ändern (Aktuell 6100).
Vers CAN
Software-Version des CAN-Adapters des
angewählten Frequenzumrichters. Kann bei
nachfolgenden Versionen ändern (Aktuell 3102).

tion.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 91

Operation
3.10 Menu 31: "31 Information logs, statistics"

contains protocols and statistics
31.1 Info events occurred

The most recent 400 events are displayed in chro-
nological order with date and time of occurrence
and duration until eliminated (h:min:sec).
Entries (two types)
Events: Faults, messages, warnings, maintenance
warnings, etc.
Operator interventions: Operation functions, target
value changes, operating mode changes, data on
tonnes produced with one set of clothing, etc.
Deleting the entries

If the entries are not needed anymore they can be
deleted.
31.6, Page 2/93
31.2 Info current malfunctions

A maximum of 20 current faults can be displayed
chronologically with code, message text
(summary), date/time of occurrence.
31.3 Info current warnings

All current warnings are displayed chronologically
with code, message text (summary) and date/time
of occurrence.
deleted.
31.6, Page 2/93
2 / 92 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
31.4 Info current maintenance warnings

A maximum of 20 current maintenance warnings
can be displayed chronologically with code, mes-
sage text (summary), date/time of occurrence.
deleted.
31.6, Page 2/93
31.5 Info events maintenance

The most recent 1200 events, such as faults, warn-
ings, maintenance warnings, messages, entries
in data screen 70.1, etc., with code, message text
(summary), and date/time of occurrence and dura-
tion (h:m:s) are displayed in chronological order.
Entries (two types)
Events: Faults, messages, warnings, maintenance
warnings, etc.
Operator interventions: Operation functions, target
value changes, operating mode changes, data on
tonnes produced with one set of clothing, etc.
31.6 Info delete lists

Enables the logs to be deleted in data screens
31.1, 31.3 and 31.4.
tion.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 93

Operation
3.11 Menu 40: "40 Settings, general"

Furnishes settings, such as time, units, and languages.
40.1 Settings date/time

Setting for date/time, operating hours counter and
time base for calculating the rolling machine effi-
ciency.
Time in:
Changeover from summer time to standard time.
(Only appears if the cards are not connected to a
network.)
Time:
Enter hours/minutes
Date:
Entry of day / month / year
Year of construction:
The machine was built in the year shown
Serial number:
Serial number of the corresponding machine
Operating hours:
Setting the time basis for calculating the rolling ma-
chine efficiency to 2, 4 or 8 h (hours).
Example 4 h: In this case the rolling machine ef-
ficiency is calculated and displayed in the basic
screen according to the last 4 hours.
The shorter the time basis, the faster the efficiency
reacts to events, e.g. machine downtimes.
Time basis efficiency:

Machine operating hours.
40.2 Settings units/operation

Settings units/operation
Selection of the units in which the dimensions of
length or weight are shown
Selection
Metric
Imperial
Unit sliver weight:

Choice of units for displaying the sliver weight.
2 / 94 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Selection
ktex
Ne
Nm
gr/yd
Basic screen:
One of two overview screens can be selected as
the standard overview screen.
Standard setting:
1 = card diameter
2 = can content
Unit sliver weight:

A data mask can be selected with the PLUS button
that then appears in the overview masks.
Efficiency selection:
Selection
Production: The efficiency is displayed as a per-
centage of the highest possible total production.
Machine: The efficiency is displayed as a
percentage of the highest possible degree of
machine availability.
Unit of measure:
Standard
The data screens are displayed for normal produc-
tion conditions.
Extended
Additional data screens are displayed. (Electronic
support)
40.3 Settings languages

Change the language, Page 2/54
Click “yes” to choose the required languages Then
use the LANGUAGE key to select them. English
and German cannot be deactivated.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 95

Operation
3.12 Menu 41: "41 Settings, machine"

Settings of the machine.
41.1 Settings card delivery

Adjust draft for take-off roll / delivery
rolls, Page 6/210
Starting production (doffer at high
speed), Page 2/44
Levelling sliver weight:
“On”: The card is operating in autolevelling mode.
The frequency converter changes the speed of the
feed roller motor, based on the signals received
from the delivery measuring device. .
“Off”: The card is operating without levelling. The
short-term feature remains active if programmed
accordingly.
41.2, Page 2/97
Automatic acceleration:
“On”: Press the button for doffer creep speed and
draw in the sliver. Subsequently press the button
once again. The machine switches automatically
from creep speed to high speed, as soon as the
sliver sensor has been covered for at least 3
seconds.
«Off»: No automatic ramp-up.
Delivery draft
The draft between the take-off roll and the delivery
rolls can be adapted to the raw material because of
the programmed drafts.
min:
Adjustable draft at low delivery speed.
min. - max.: 1.15 - 1.40
eff:
Computed draft between the take-off roller and the
delivery rollers during normal card production.
max:
Adjustable draft at maximum delivery speed. (C60:
300 m/min.)
min. - max.: 1.40 - 1.80
max:
Adjustable draft at maximum delivery speed. (C60:
400 m/min.)
min. - max.: 1.40 - 2.16
Adaptation sliver weight
2 / 96 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Card at creep speed:

Set the take-off value at 80% (3 lickers-in) or 70%
(1 licker-in).
Draw in the card sliver. If this is not possible, the
card sliver is too light or too heavy, correct the
sliver weight accordingly.
10.1, Page 2/75
Bring the machine up to the preset production
speed.
Bring the sliver weight back to the desired nominal
value.
10.1, Page 2/75
The card must now run production at high speed
for at least 15 minutes.
Switch the card to crawl speed.
Observe the actual value of the card sliver for at
least one minute.
11.1, Page 2/78
Alter the % value until the actual value corresponds
to the nominal value. If the value is raised a heav-
ier sliver is produced during crawl speed.
Reset to setup draft:

The draft of the autoleveller is set back to the de-
fault value. This is necessary when:
- a sliver which is too heavy or too light cannot be
drawn into the disc rollers. (e.g. after a change of
raw material
- the batt weight has changed significantly during
service. The malfunction, shown on the text
display, stops the production using the mounted
shutoff limit.
After resetting the calculated shutoff limit is raised
to its maximum value.
The effective threshold value is then recalculated in
service.
41.2 Settings feed/cylinder

Speisemulde, Belastung einstellen, Page 6/75
Autolevelling batt:
“On”: The short-term addition in the card feed is on.
The frequency inverter changes the speed of the
feed roller motor as based on the signal received
from the delivery measuring device.
«Off»: The short term addition is switched off.
Feed safety device threshold:

Setting the shutoff limit of the feed protection.
Example : Setting 120%
The feed roll is switched off if the lap feed lies 20%
over a calculated average value for the lap.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 97

Operation
It switches off if there is foreign material in the lap

feed that raises the feed trough by this amount.
Check the data mask if the lap can no longer be
drawn in.
min. - max.: 110 - 250 %
Threshold re.max.batt weight:

Calculated switch-off factor in proportion to the total
measurement distance of the input measurement
device.
Spring tens. angle feed trough:

Input the angle with which the torsion rod in the
feed plate of the card was pre-stretched.
Default : 30 Degree
min. - max.: 15 - 40 Degree
Monitoring cylinder rpm:

If the cylinder r.p.m. falls below the percentile
r.p.m. set, the production is switched off.
The cylinder is braked.
Default : 1.0 %
min. - max.: 0.8 - 10 %
Shut-off speed cylinder:

If the r.p.m. falls short, the cylinder drive is
switched off.
Cylinder after power failure:
Automatic braking
If power is available during the running-out of the
cylinder, it is automatically braked.
Brake/start manually
In the case of a power failure, the cylinder runs-out
unbraked. If power becomes available anyway dur-
ing the runout , there are two options.
First option: If the red STOP button is pressed, the
motor stops the cylinder.
Second option: If the green START button is
pressed, the motor accelerates the cylinder up to
its preset r.p.m.
Chute monitoring, emptying:

This input possibility appears only if the data mask
has been enabled for extended operation.
40.2, Page 2/94
2 / 98 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Normal
The doffer is stopped after a certain time, if both
light barriers at the card trunk are no longer
covered with material.
Short
The time until the production stops is reduced by
approx. 10%.
41.3 Settings IGS

Settings in the data masks, Page 6/206
Changing the prescribed service life of the
cylinder clothing, Page 6/139
Configuring the IGS, Page 6/139
Information on the lifetime and cycles of the cylin-
der clothing. This value should be changed accord-
ing to the spinning mill experience. The optimal
grinding plan together with the respective grind-
ing cycles are derived from the programmed value.
(See data mask 70.1)
Configure options in data mask 43.2.
IGS-classic
Lifetime of clothing:
Enter the scheduled production for the cylinder
clothing in tons. (Spinning mill values gained from
experience)
min. - max.: 100 - 4000 t
Enter the scheduled production for the cylinder
clothing in lbs. (Spinning mill values gained from
experience)
min. - max.: 200000 - 8800000 lbs
Grinding budget:
Cycles below 750 t total production.
min. - max.: 270 - 270 Cycles
Grinding budget:
Cycles above 750 t total production
min. - max.: 400 - 400 Cycles
IGS-top
This test mask appears only if an IGS-top is
installed and configured.
Enter the scheduled production for the card flats
clothing in lbs. (Spinning mill values gained from
experience)
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 99

Operation
Grinding time/life:
This input possibility appears only if the data mask
has been enabled for extended operation.
40.2, Page 2/94
Over the whole service life of the card flats, each of
them will be ground during the programmed time.
Default : 5.0 minutes
min. - max.: 2.0 - 8.0 minutes

tion.
3.13 Menu 42: "Settings coiler I"

42.3 Settings coiler I
Delivery funnel , Page 6/284
Adjust sliver cutting, production and material
dependent adjustments, Page 6/277
Empty can warning:
The signal lamp on the coiler (sliver deposit) starts
to blink when the preset meter number has been
reached and there is no empty spare can in the
coiler (sliver deposit).
Deliv. can change, card:

Recommendation for the delivery speed of the card
at which a can change should be made.
Default setting: Maximum delivery speed
Can filling correction:

Correction in % of the can content from the pre-
set value to the effective filling quantity in the can.
(Data mask 10.1)
Reduce percentage setting: The filling quantity
(weight) in the can is greater than the preset weight
or length given in the corresponding data screen
10.1.
Increase the percentile setting: The filling quantity
(weight) in the can is less than the preset weight or
length given in data screen 10.1.
Only cans which have been filled without a sliver
break may be used for the calculation.
2 / 100 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Blow-in time:
During a can change or the drawing-in of the sliver,
air is blown through the injector for the preset time
into the sliver duct of the coiler.
For good spinning cans, i.e. those where the can
covers are located in the region of the slide plate
after the change, air must be blown in for approx.
30 - 60 seconds.
For spinning cans with lower lying can covers, air
must be blown in until the material fits snugly on
the slide plate.
Setting «0»: No air is blown into the sliver duct.
Setting in minutes and seconds: During can
change and during the drawing-in of the sliver, air
is blown into the sliver duct for the preset time.
Max. time, funnel to top:

Adjust the delay time so that the sliver funnel of the
coiler (sliver deposit) will have reached its end posi-
tion before the piston rod extends to nip the sliver.
If the activation of sliver separation occurs before
the sliver funnel has reached its end position, then
sliver separation first occurs afterwards.
Default : 2.0 s
min. - max.: 0.0 - 4.0 s
Dwell time, bolt, front:

Adjust the time during which the piston rod nips the
sliver at sliver cutting.
Default : 0.000 s
min. - max.: 0.000 - 0.500 s
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 101

Operation
3.14 Menu 43: "43 Settings, configuration"

Prerequisite
Select the operating mode «Change configuration» in data screen 80.1 so that the settings in this data screen
can be changed.
43.1 Machine configuration

Here the one-time configuration of the machine,
such as card type, licker-in type, etc., is carried out.
The release for the configuration is carried out in
data screen 80.1.
Card type:
C 70
Machine configured for up to 120 kg/h production.
C 70H
Machine configured for more than 120 kg/h produc-
tion.
Licker-in type:
Enter the number of installed licker-ins.
Cylinder drive:
Input the type of cylinder drive, frequency inverter
or pulleys
For the model with change pulleys, the cylinder
speed is set via the pulleys. The cylinder is accel-
erated or braked using the delivery frequency con-
verter during starting or stopping. Upon reaching
the nominal speed, the motor is connected to the
mains supply.
Flat type:
Enter the type of card flats installed.
Coiler:
Enter the type of coilers used.
Disk rolls:
Input the width of the disc roller mounted in the de-
livery.
min. - max.: 9.0 / 15.0 - mm
2 / 102 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
43.2 Configuration options

Measuring the current value with the
gauge, Page 6/240
Network:
No
There is no master system (Spiderweb) connected
to the card.
Yes
A master system (Spiderweb) is connected to the
card.
Enter the network address for each machine via
the numerical keyboard on the operating unit. The
numbers can be found in the electrical documenta-
tion.
IGS-classic (cylinder):
«Yes»: The IGS classic is installed in the machine.
IGS-top (flats):
«Yes»: The IGS top is installed in the machine
Uster Sliverguard:
"Yes": The “Uster-Sliverguard” is available.
Licker-in type
Vane transposition:
Automatic
The licker-in mote knife can be adjusted in the cor-
responding data mask..
10.3, Page 2/77
Manual
The licker-in mote knife has to be adjusted manu-
ally.
Drive:
Change gears
The speed of the licker-ins is changed via the
change gears.
Converter
The speed of the licker-ins is changed via a fre-
quency converter.

tion.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 103

Operation
3.15 Menu 50: "50 Configuration, shifts"

Shift configuration, including shift schedule
50.1 Configuration shift selection

Determine shift schedule
Shift switchover:
Key
For this selection the shift must be changed manu-
ally
Shift schedule
For this selection the shift must be changed ac-
cording to the shift plan configuration (data screen
50.2).
Number of shifts:
Enter the password.
Enter the required number of shifts.
Current shift:
No password is necessary for changing the shift.
Use the buttons to select the required shift.
Partial shift report:

Only if cards are connected to SPIDERweb
“Yes”: The current shift data are being finished,
however, the shift is not changed.
50.2 Configuration shifts shift schedule

This data screen can be used to enter a shift
schedule for a week. It is recommended to create
(program) a daily schedule first and then to copy
this to the remaining days of the week. Any
individual changes can be made individually.
Changes can only be made to the values on the
left-hand side.
No action
No entries permitted
copy to:
Copies the times given for the day given on the left
into the day given on the right side.
2 / 104 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
copy to: all days

The data entered for one day on the left side can
be copied to «all days» on the right-hand side. To
do so, use the «arrow keys» to select the appropri-
ate day and use the «enter key» to finish the copy-
ing process.
3.16 Menu 60: "60 Production value groups"

Information and settings for production value groups.
60.1 Value group management

Group:
Those parameters which are necessary for the pro-
duction of a particular assortment can be determ-
ined in a production value group.
The active group is indicated with its number in the
symbol top right.
As a maximum, 5 production value groups (G1 -
G5) can be programmed.
If a production value group is to be reprogrammed,
the sequence of the screens to be programmed is
critical only for the RSB module.
With the RSB module, data screen 10.1 always
has to be programmed before programming data
screen 42.1. The sequence is not critical to the re-
maining data screens.
Function:
There are 5 different functions possible which re-
late to the production value group.
No function
No modification possible
Change name
A new designation can be given to the selected
production value group using the keyboard.
Switch over
This function is used to switch to the preselected
group.
Load with 1
For a new group which needs to be programmed,
e.g. group “3”, data from another group, e.g. group
“1”, are transferred to this group. The data valid for
group “3” only has to subsequently be changed in
the corresponding menu for this group.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 105

Operation
Load with default

The default values of this machine are copied over
to the selected production value group.
60.2 Value groups preview machine

For the displayed production value groups the ac-
tual values of the selected value groups are dis-
played in the right-hand column and the values of
another group are displayed in a preview..
Group:
The programmed values for the selected group are
shown in the left-hand column.
Modifications to the individual values must be car-
ried out in the corresponding menu screens of the
respective group.
Sliver weight:
Change sliver weight
10.1, Page 2/75
Production:
Determine production
10.1, Page 2/75
Weight of full can:

Determine can filling weight (can content)
10.1, Page 2/75
Delivery can change:

Recommendation for the delivery speed of the card
before can change.
42.3, Page 2/100
Correction factor, card:

Determine correction ratio,
10.2, Page 2/76
Cylinder rpm:
Determine the cylinder r.p.m.,
2 / 106 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
10.1, Page 2/75
Flats speed:
Determining the speed of the card flats,
10.1, Page 2/75
60.3 Value groups preview quality

Monitoring A%:
Card: Monitoring A% switched on or off,
22.1, Page 2/86
Shut-off limit A%:

Card: Determine shutoff limit A%,
22.1, Page 2/86
Monitoring CV%:
Card: Monitoring CV% switched on or off,
22.2, Page 2/86
Shut-off limit CV%:

Card: Determine shutoff limit CV%,
22.2, Page 2/86
Monitoring spectro:
Card: Monitoring for spectrogram, on or off,
22.4, Page 2/88
Shut-off limit spectro:

Card: Define the shutoff limit for the spectrogram,
22.4, Page 2/88
Monitoring for slubs

Card: Monitoring for slubs, on or off,
22.5, Page 2/89
Shutoff limit for slubs

Card: Define the shutoff limit for the number of
slubs in the card sliver,
22.5, Page 2/89
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 107

Operation
60.4 Value groups, preview, options

Licker-in speed:
Determine the licker-in speed at the cylinder.
(Provided that the licker-in drive occurs via a
frequency converter)
10.3, Page 2/77
Ejection dist. licker-in:

Set the target distance between the mote knife of
the licker-in and the feed roller of the licker-in unit
(discharge opening)
10.3, Page 2/77

tion.
3.17 Menu 70: "70 Maintenance clothings"

Maintenance of the wires.
70.1 Maintenance clothings machine I

Display values and reset, Page 2/49
IGS-cylinder grinding:
Tons or pounds produced since the last grinding
cycle IGS classic.
Cylinder reclothing:
Tons produced since the last cylinder clothing
change.
IGS-flats grinding:
Tonnes produced since the last grinding of the
clothings of the card flats.
Flats reclothing:
Tonnes produced since the last clothing change on
the card flats.
Carding elem. PCZ change:

Tonnes produced since the most recent replace-
ment of carding elements in the pre-carding zone
Carding elem. ACZ change:

ment of carding elements in the post-carding zone
2 / 108 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
70.2 Maintenance clothings machine II

Changing the prescribed service life of the
cylinder clothing, Page 6/139
Doffer grinding:
Tons produced since the last doffer wire grinding.
Doffer reclothing:
Tons produced since the last of the doffer.
Licker-in change:
Tons produced since the last flat re-clothing on the
licker-in.
Carding element change:

ment of carding elements in the licker-in range.
70.3 Maintenance clothings IGS

No password
Cylinder IGS-cl.cycle in:
Tons still to be produced before the next grinding
cycle.
Cycles completed:
Grinding cycles already carried out. (0 - 100%)
The value must be reset following wire replace-
ments.
Budget cycles:
The total number of available grinding cycles cor-
responds to 100%.
100% = 400 grinding cycles for an expected cloth-
ing service life (lifetime) over 750 tons
100% = 270 grinding cycles for an expected cloth-
ing service life (lifetime) of less than 750 tons
Grind stone position:

Indicates the time it takes to carry out one cycle of
the grinding stone (to and fro movement).
min. - max.: 10.0 s - 30.0 s
Flats IGS-top cycle in:

Tons still to be produced before the next grinding
cycle.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 109

Operation
No value (xxxx) is shown for undefined values

(card flats speed not yet known).
The calculated value is displayed only after 3
minutes in normal production.
Cycles completed:
Grinding cycles already carried out. (0 - 100%)
Budget cycles:
The total number of available grinding cycles.
(100%)
Last check, grinding force:

Average grinding pressure (current consumption)
for all card flats (79) during the most recent grind-
ing cycle.
Grinding force:
Status display of the grinding pressure during the
most recent IGS-top grinding cycle. (Status texts:
too low, low, normal, high, too high).
2 / 110 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
3.18 Menu 80: "80 Operating mode/Tests"

80.1 Operating mode switchover
Setting the T1000V frequency
converter, Page 6/343
Measure current, Page 6/199
Activating the card flats drive (for setting the
proximity switch), Page 6/176
Read measured value from
transducer., Page 6/64
Activating the card flats drive (setting,
grinding), Page 6/174
Executing test functions, Page 2/65
Choose operating mode
Automatic mode
The machine produces in the this operating mode
Test mode
All functions in the test menus are enabled in this
operating mode. (Menu screens 82 - 85)
Service mode
All functions for grinding and mounting the wires
are enabled in this operating mode. (Menu screen
81)
Change configuration
The configurations can be changed in this operat-
ing mode when the machine is stationary. (menu
screens 43.1 and 43.2)
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 111

Operation
3.19 Menu 81: "81 Grind/put on"

Settings for grinding the clothings of the cylinder, the doffer and the card flats.
81.1 Grind cylinder clothing

Grinding procedure for the drum, Page 6/309
The service-mode function can be activated via
data screen 80.1..
Execute clothing grinding:
«Yes»: The cylinder is ready for grinding operation.
Cylinder rpm set:

Input the nominal value for the cylinder r.p.m. (Only
with cylinder drive with frequency inverter)
Cylinder rpm actual:

The current cylinder r.p.m. is shown. (When the
machine is equipped with pulleys)
81.2 Grind doffer clothing

Grinding the doffer, Page 6/329
Execute clothing grinding:
«Yes»: The doffer is ready for grinding operation.
Doffer speed set:

Input the target value of the delivery speed. (Min-
imum: 150 m/min)
Doffer rpm actual:

The current doffer r.p.m. is displayed.
81.3 Servicing, flats, clothing

Kardendeckel egalisieren, Page 6/322
Grind card flats, Page 6/324
Prepare the machine for grinding the card
flats. , Page 6/318
Activating the card flats drive (setting,
grinding), Page 6/174
Execution of servicing:
“Yes”: Various functions can be selected.
Flat grinding
The START key is used to start the card flats drive
and the STOP key to stop the drive
Flat measurement
The card flats remain in motion all the while the
START button is pressed.
2 / 112 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Flat measurement
Controlled displacement of the card flats: Press
and hold the “Start” key .
If the card flats reach the required positions, re-
lease the “Start” key.
Press and hold the STOP key and then press the
START key. The machine is ready for the
controlled displacement of the card flats.
Release both keys.
Press the START key. The card flat is moved via
the drive from the first measuring point to the next
where it then stops.
Flat reversal
Press the START key. The card flat moves in re-
verse (in the direction opposite to the normal run-
ning direction), all the while the key is held.
In this mode, the card flats make small movements
only.
Target speed for flats:

Use the PLUS/MINUS keys to set the required
speed for the grinding of the card flats.
Default : 0.28 m/min
min. - max.: 0.25 - 0.35 m/min
Flats speed act. value:

The measured speed of the card flats for the grind-
ing of the flats is displayed.
Monitoring flats speed B2

If the card flats remain stationary for a programmed
length of time, the card flats drive is deactivated.
Monitoring flats position B8

If there is too large a deviation between the signals
provided by the (B2) and (B8) proximity switches,
the card flats drive is deactivated.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 113

Operation
3.20 Menu 82: "82 Test inputs/outputs and covers"

Allows for general function tests
Prerequisite
Under certain conditions faults can hinder the carrying out of tests. Pay attention to the text on the text dis-
play.
First correct the faults and then reset.
Effects
Mechanical setting of the safety switch on the door on the right side of the machine must be carried out before
putting it into service and after any dismantling or assembly of the machine.
82.1 Test digital inputs

Executing test functions, Page 2/65
Testing sensors and switching the I/O status
on the signal lamp, Page 2/64
This allows the individual controller inputs to be
tested. The individual inputs have to be activated
externally; meaning operate the element manu-
ally. The designations and numbers of the indi-
vidual elements must be taken from the electrical
documentation. The inputs are divided into groups.
First select the appropriate group and then the in-
put to be tested. The status of the selected input is
switched to the signal lamp. This enables an input
to be tested by a single person (e.g. by covering
the proximity switch).
Change with password Select “Test mode” in data
screen 80.1.
Execute test:
Yes: The tests can be carried out.
Group:
Select the appropriate group which is assigned to
the entry to be tested.
General
Safety
Chute
Then, select the input to be tested.
«0» = Low, i.e. no voltage present.
«1» = High, i.e. voltage is present.
2 / 114 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
82.2 Test analog inputs

Adjust transducer in feed, Page 6/65
Adjusting the blow-in device for the
sliver, Page 6/236
Setting the distance between the disk
rollers, Page 6/233
Calibrating the distance measuring system in
the delivery, Page 6/241
Read measured value from
transducer., Page 6/64
The individual analogue inputs can be tested with
this.
screen 80.1.
Feed scanner card B5:
Signal from the distance measuring system on the
feed plate at the input
Value without material between feed roller and feed
plate:
min. - max.: 730 - 770
Delivery scanner card B6:

Signal from the distance measuring system on the
disc rollers at delivery.
Values without sliver between the disc rollers:
min. - max.: 200 - 400
Scanner licker-in vane M29:

Check electric cylinder signal for mote knife adjust-
ment at the licker-in.
Current grinding drive M55:

Motor current consumption for the IGS-top grinding
brush when at standstill.
min. - max.: 814 - 824
82.3 Test digital outputs

With this, the outputs may be selected and
activated. The procedure for testing the inputs is
described on data screen 83.1. The outputs are
tested in the same manner.
screen 80.1. Switch off all safety switches for the
control system, except “Q15”. The test cannot be
carried out otherwise.
Execute testing of outputs:
«Yes»: The digital outputs can be tested.
Group:
Select the group which is assigned to the output to
be tested.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 115

Operation
The output is connected to the signal lamp.

The actuators are activated.
“0” denotes “low”, i.e. there is no voltage present;
the signal lamp does not light up.
“1” denotes “high‍”, i.e. there is voltage present; the
signal lamp lights up.
The outputs are set or reset with the start/stop but-
ton. Note the status change 0 / 1.
82.4 Test covers and door safeguards

Adjusting door lock and safety
switch, Page 6/248
screen 80.1.
Group:
«0» = Low, i.e. no voltage supplied
«1» = High, i.e. voltage supplied
The outputs are set or reset with the start/stop but-
ton. Note the status change 0 / 1.
2 / 116 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
3.21 Menu 83: "83 Test drives"

Enabling tests of the drive.
Prerequisite
Under certain conditions faults can hinder the carrying out of tests. Pay attention to the text on the text dis-
play.
First correct the faults and then reset.
Switch on all motor protection switches
Cross-reference
When the Start button is pressed, the selected drive is actuated.
The test function can be stopped using the STOP button.
The nominal and current speeds together with other data will be displayed.
83.1 Test feed roll chute

Run drive tests:
The feed rollers must never be turned forwards if
there is material in the upper filling trunk.
«Yes»: Activate the test function.
Direction of rotation:
«Direction of rotation forwards»: Direction of rota-
tion counterclockwise (as viewed towards the drive,
right side of the machine).
Feed roll set rpm:

The r.p.m. can be altered using the «+» / «-» but-
tons.
83.2 Test opening roll chute

Adjusting the proximity switch for monitoring
the r.p.m. of the opening roller, Page 6/54
Run drive tests:
Opening roll actual rpm:

The effective r.p.m. is displayed.
Direction of rotation in counterclockwise direction
(as viewed towards the drive, left side of the ma-
chine).
Prox. sw. PPV min:

The difference between the two measured values
may not be greater than «10».
Correction range of the measured values:
min. - max.: 50 - 70
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 117

Operation
83.3 Test fan chute

Run drive tests:
(remove the locking pin in the center of motor).
83.4 Test licker-in

Adjust the proximity switch for monitoring the
licker-in speed, Page 6/86
Run drive tests:
Licker-in setpoint rpm:

Design with frequency converter: Set the desired
speed with the PLUS button and MINUS button.
Licker-in actual rpm:

Direction of rotation in clockwise direction (as
viewed towards the licker-in motor, right side of the
machine)
Prox. sw. PPV min:

min. - max.: 50 - 70
83.5 Test cylinder

Adjust the proximity switch for monitoring the
cylinder speed, Page 6/104
Run drive tests:
«Direction of rotation forwards»: Full r.p.m.
(as viewed towards the drive, right side of the
machine.)
Cylinder set rpm:

tons.
2 / 118 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Cylinder actual rpm:

The effective r.p.m. is shown
Prox. sw. PPV min:

min. - max.: 55 - 65
83.6 Test, flats drive

Activating the card flats drive (for setting the
proximity switch), Page 6/176
Run drive tests:
Selection
Forwards: Press the START button. The card flats
move in the normal running direction. (Production
mode.)
Backwards: Press the START button. The card
flats move in the direction opposite to the normal
running direction.

Use the PLUS/MINUS keys to set the required
speed of the card flats.
min. - max.: 0.16 - 0.60 m/min

The measured speed of the card flats for the grind-
ing of the flats is displayed.
Alignment of flats, B8:

A value is determined from the signals of the (B2)
and (B8) proximity switches.
If this value is less than (- 1 mm), the (B8) proximity
switch has to be moved towards the card chute. (If
the value is greater than (+ 1 mm), this switch has
to be moved in the opposite direction.)
Monitoring flats speed B2

Display (0): The (B2) proximity switch cannot de-
tect any card flats
Display (1): The (B2) proximity switch can detect
the card flats as they pass by
Monitoring flats position B8

Display (0): The (B8) proximity switch cannot de-
tect any card flats
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 119

Operation
Display (1): The (B8) proximity switch can detect

the card flats as they pass by
83.7 Test, clearer roller, flats

Run drive tests:
83.8 Test cleaner brush

Adjust the proximity switch to monitor the
doffer speed, Page 6/218
Run drive tests:
2 / 120 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
83.9 Test feed roll card

Run drive tests:
«Direction of rotation forwards»: Direction of rota-
tion in clockwise direction (as viewed towards the
drive, left side of the machine.)
Feed roll set rpm:

tons.
83.10 Test doffer card

Run drive tests:
Feed roll set rpm:

tons.
Doffer actual rpm:

Prox. sw. PPV min:

min. - max.: 70 - 80
83.11 Test delivery card

Adjusting the proximity switch for the delivery
speed, Page 6/222, 6/245
Run drive tests:
Doffer speed set:

tons.
Delivery actual speed:

The effective speed is indicated
Prox. sw. PPV min:

may not be greater than “5”.
min. - max.: 55 - 65
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 121

Operation
83.12 Test main motor coiler

Run drive tests:
Doffer speed set:

tons.
Delivery actual speed:

The effective speed is indicated.
3.22 Menu 84: "84 Test/Programming devices"

Enabling tests and programming of the various devices.
84.1 Test control unit

The push-buttons and LEDs can be tested in this
data mask.
Test mode:
If the test mode is set to "active", all the LEDs on
the operating unit light up.
The push-buttons on the operating unit can be
tested in addition. If a push-button is pressed, the
appropriate test mask has to react.
Press the Stop button to exit the test mode.
84.2 Test converter

For test purposes, the individual frequency convert-
ers can have voltage applied to them.
Execute test:
No
CAN number: This value has to be set at the re-
spective frequency converter.
Testing the frequency inverter

Select the frequency inverter to be tested.
Use the start button to apply voltage to the selected
frequency converter.
Switch the voltage off with the STP button.
2 / 122 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
3.23 Menu 85: "85 Test optional devices"

Allow testing of optional devices.
85.1 Test IGS-classic

Ensuring straight running of the flat belt
(system with tension screws), Page 6/147
IGS test run, Page 6/141
This test screen only appears if an IGS classic is
available.
Execute test:
Select the function using the PLUS and MINUS
buttons and confirm the selection with the ENTER
button.
"Yes": Activate the test function.
Function:
Select the function to be tested using the PLUS
and MINUS buttons and confirm the selection us-
ing the ENTER button.
The electromagnet is not activated during the func-
tion test. Consequently the grinding stone is not
located in the grinding position.
An alarm is given if, after a test has been
completed, the guiding sled is not in its parking
position on the right side of the machine.
Reset the alarm and then the guiding sled can be
brought into its parking position using function «to
the right».
The selected function is started with the START
button.
Move to left position

The guiding sled is run from the parking position on
the left side of the machine.
Condition «0 / 1» of the corresponding sensor.
Move to right position

The guiding sled is driven from the left side of the
machine into its parking position on the right side of
the machine.
Raise stone
The grinding stone is raised and lowers itself again
after 22 seconds. The electromagnet must first
cool down before a renewed test can be carried
out. The test can only be carried out with the
grindstone in its parking place (on the right side of
the machine). The position of the grindstone is
monitored by a microswitch.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 123

Operation
Sealing lips
The sealing lips are put under pressure.
Cycle
As the grinding stone is lowered, the guiding sled
goes from the parking position to the left and then
back to the right side of the machine.
Stone in grinding position S53

"0 / 1" = Condition proximity switch right.
IGS-classic cyl. right B52

"0 / 1" = Condition proximity switch left.
Stone in grinding position S53

«0 / 1» = Condition monitoring sensor grinding
stone.
Grind stone position:

Time required for moving the grinding stone into
working position.
Check the grinding stone movement mechanism, if
it takes longer than the allotted time.
min. - max.: 0.10 s - 0.30 s
85.2 Test IGS-top

Measure current, Page 6/199
This test screen only appears when an IGS top is
available.
Execute test:
Select the type of test using the PLUS and MINUS
buttons and confirm the selection with the ENTER
button.
Test
Function:
button.
Raise flat
The pneumatic cylinders are activated.
Flat grinding drive

The direction of rotation of the drive motor is
checked. If the rotation direction is wrong, the
2 / 124 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
motor is switched off via the motor protection

switch.
Note:
Activate the intermediate step “No” to go from the
test type “Test” to “Check”. (also applies if
proceeding in reverse order).
Check
Select this type of test, so that the grinding pres-
sure can be checked
Preparation:
Prepare the machine for grinding the card flats.
Remove the belt for driving the cylinder.
Check grinding pressure

Start the drive of the card flats with the START key.
The main motor runs at approx. 400 rpm.
The IGS-top is started and remains in operation un-
til all the card flats have been ground. Finally, the
IGS top switches off.
The drive of the card flats remains switched on.
Act. flats no.:

Display of the current number of ground card flats
Flats speed:
Effective speed of the card flats
Targ.current,grinding drive:
Calculated current consumption of drive motor
when the grinding pressure has been set correctly
Actual curr.,grinding drive:

Current current consumption of the grinding brush
drive motor (grinding pressure)
Display in status line

The current grinding pressure (status) of the two
most recently ground card flats is displayed. The
grinding pressure has to be raised or lowered dur-
ing the continuous inspection process, unless it
equals the calculated target current.
Last check, grinding force:

Log (results) of the most recent grinding pressure
test, calculated for the previous 10 card flats.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 125

Operation
85.7 Test mote knife licker-in

Preparing the electric cylinder for mote knife
setting, Page 6/90
This test mask appears only if the licker-in has
been configured with automatic mote knife
adjustment.
Execute test:
"Yes": Activate the test function.
Function:
button.
Approach max. position

Selection
Approach min. position: The piston rod moves to
the most extreme (“maximum” or “minimum”) posi-
tion.
Approach ref. position

The piston rod moves to the reference position.
This position is stored.
Approach setpoint pos.

Enter the desired distance and start.
Ejection distance setpoint:

The piston rod moves to the set distance.
Ejection distance actual:

The current position of the mote knife is displayed.
Lifting cylinder ref. pos.:

The value of the last set reference position is dis-
played. The value relates to the piston rod of the lift
cylinder.
If no value is displayed, no valid reference position
has been stored. This position will be determined
at the next start of the card.
2 / 126 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
3.24 System functions

8.1 Cold start procedure
This mask appears on first commissioning, possibly
following a software upgrade, if the data in the
memory were erased or if an intentional cold-start
was initiated. First enter the password. You will
then be guided through all the necessary data
masks in which settings must be defined or
checked,.
Password:
Enter the corresponding 4-digit password using the
soft keys 0-4.
Then press the ">" key to go to the next mask.
Note: Press the "C" key to delete the password
code and re-enter it.

This mask appears after password entry.
660 press the "<" key
If you press the "<" key, you will be guided through
all the data masks in which the user has to make
entries.

This mask appears at the end of the cold start pro-
cess, after you have been taken through all the set-
tings. Follow the instructions in the lowermost line
to be able to start the machine afterwards.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 127

Operation
9 Password input
Certain entries and tests are possible in data
masks only if the password has been entered
previously. (Soft key "Key in basic mask).
9.1 Password change level 1

A new password may be assigned in this mask. If
several passwords "S2 to S3" were assigned, sev-
eral data masks will appear (9.2 to 9.x).
2 / 128 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Display screens (Extended operation)
4 Display screens (Extended operation)

4.1 List of menu and data screens
10 10 Production set values 2/130
10.30 Production set values extended Change with 2/130
password
11 11 Production actual values 2/132
11.30 Prodn.actual values batt graphic Change with 2/132
password
11.31 Prod. act. val. reg. sliver/deliv. Change with 2/132
password
11.32 Prod. act. val. reg. Sga (batt) Change with 2/134
password
11.33 Prod. act. values reg. chute/sag Change with 2/134
password
11.34 Prod.act.values work elements ext. 2/135
20 20 Quality data actual values, card 2/137
20.30 Q-date actual values card feed CV Change with 2/137
password
20.31 Q-data, act. val., card feed spec. No password 2/137
30 30 General information 2/138
30.30 Information converter ext. Change with 2/138
password
30.31 Information CAN slaves Change with 2/138
password
30.32 Info overview digital inputs Change with 2/138
password
30.33 Info overview digital outputs Change with 2/139
password
31 31 Information logs, statistics 2/139
31.30 Info exception list Change with 2/139
password
31.31 Info statistic events Change with 2/139
password
31.32 Info Exception Statistik D95K Change with 2/140
password
31.33 Info delete lists extended Change with 2/140
password
41 41 Settings, machine 2/141
41.30 Settings extended 1 Change with 2/141
password
41.31 Settings extended 2 2/142
41.32 Settings extended 3 2/143
43 43 Settings, configuration 2/144
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 129

Operation

43.30 Reset configuration Change with 2/144
password
60 60 Production value groups 2/145
60.30 Value groups preview extended I No password 2/145
60.31 Value groups preview extended II No password 2/145
60.33 Value groups preview extend. IV No password 2/146
4.2 Menu 10: "10 Production set values"

Contains all the production data of the machine Not shift-related data
10.30 Production set values extended

MtrVregBa:
Leveling parameter of the control circuit of the de-
livery speed. (Delivery control system)
MtrVregTn:
Explanation as for «MtrVregBa»
MtrVregKvz:
MtrVregKp:
MtrBregKvz:
Leveling parameter for the autoleveller of the sliver
weight (disc roller)
MteBregTn:
Explanation as for «MtrBregKvz»
MtrBregKp:
Explanation as for «MtrBregKvz»
MtrWaSgaKp:
Leveling parameter short term addition (feed plate
feed card)
MtrWaSgaWspw:
Same description as for “MtrWaSgaKp”
AblDuhaSgaBa:
Leveling parameters for the sag measurement ele-
ment
2 / 130 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
AblDuhaSgaKp:
Explanation as for «AblDuhaSgaBa»
SchDruNachf::
Internal levelling parameter
SchDruKorr::
Internal levelling parameter
SchSpwKscf:
Levelling parameters for the autoleveller of the ma-
terial height in the card trunk.
SchRegTstKsc:
Explanation as for «SchSpwKscf»
SchSpwDelNor:
SchRegTstKi:
SchSpwDelRed:
SchRegTstKp:
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 131

Operation
4.3 Menu 11: "11 Production actual values"

contains shift related production data, such as efficiency and production
11.30 Prodn.actual values batt graphic

Time base:
A diagram can be displayed for various hours.
The time base can be changed so that switching
can be carried out without any loss of data.
11.31 Prod. act. val. reg. sliver/deliv.

Sliver card
(Autoleveller sliver weight)
BndAD:
Analogue-digital transformer for the distance meas-
uring system in the delivery at runout (disc roller)
Band (sliver)
Unfiltered card sliver weight in ktex
Tff:
Internal leveling parameter
Activ:
Off = Autoleveller of the card sliver weight switched
off (disc rollers).
On = Autoleveller of the card sliver weight switched
on (disc rollers).
Delta:
FFant:
Plant:
SWBnd:
2 / 132 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
SWSga:
SWtot:
ExVAD
Analogue-digital (AD) converter value. External de-
livery speed specification. (card for web)
ExKAD
Analogue-digital (AD) converter value. External
web weight correction specification. (card for web)
Delivery card
Activ:
Off = Autoleveller of the delivery speed switched
off.
On = Autoleveller of the delivery speed switched on
Delta:
Nabn:
Doffer r.p.m.
Vausl:
Delivery speed disc roller unfiltered.
VaTot:
VaKoA:
VerBa
Draft between the take-off rolls and calender rolls
of the can coiler CBA.
VerAS
Draft between doffer and pulley rolls
VerAB
Draft between doffer and calender rolls of the coiler
(sliver deposit).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 133

Operation
11.32 Prod. act. val. reg. Sga (batt)

WatAD:
Analogue-digital converter value for position trans-
ducer in the feed.
Watte (batt):
Current batt weight standardized.
WatMt:
Middle batt weight standardized. (Over the last 30
minutes)
WatFk:
Shutoff limit of foreign matter checking standard-
ized.
WFmax:
WFmin:
Delta:
WMoff:
BlgSpw:
BlgWat:
AnzEle:
11.33 Prod. act. values reg. chute/sag

Chute
SpwN0:
Paend:
Ueber:
Teinf:
2 / 134 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Pmitl:
Leerl:
Watte (batt):
DruAD:
DruDi:
11.34 Prod.act.values work elements ext.

Cylinder
MaxNAend:
UnterSetz:
Flat
AktNr:
Number of card flats counted since the start of
counting
GschlDekl
Number of card flats processed since the start of
the IGS-top grinding cycle
Sollstrom (target current):

IGS-Top grinding brush drive
Schl.Dr:
Iststrom (actual current):

IGS-Top grinding brush drive
StromAD:
Analogue-digital converter value, actual current for
IGS-Top grinding drive.
Licker-in
MaxNAend:
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 135

Operation
VrzTroVrsr:
Evaluated draft calculation between the current
licker-in r.p.m. and cylinder.
MesPos:
Current position of the mote knife.
MesPosAD
A/D converter value for the position of the piston
rod
MesPosRef
Reference position of the piston rod
VrsrNO
Speed of licker-in
2 / 136 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
4.4 Menu 20: "20 Quality data actual values, card"

Actual values of quality data of the card.
20.30 Q-date actual values card feed CV

Graphical presentation following the input paramet-
ers
changeover.
Sorting length:
The cut length of the fed lap is determined using
the two left hand keys.
Example of the calculation CV 100: 100 divided by
the total draft = meters of fed lap
Values on the last line:

Coefficient of variation of the batt at feed
20.31 Q-data, act. val., card feed spec.

Wavelengths in the spectrogram ranging from 0.01
m to 10 m are displayed. Wavelengths measured
in yards must be converted accordingly (using the
multiplicative factor 0.914).
No password
Values
The height of an amplitude is a max. 233. With the
aid of this value the determination can be made at
which wavelength the maximum amplitudes are
found. (Peak)
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 137

Operation
4.5 Menu 30: "30 General information"

Contains information on the type of machine, software release, state of inputs and outputs.
30.30 Information converter ext.

Ret
Frequency inverter of the selected machine part.
Ret
Protocol repeat on the CAN bus
T
Temperature (in degrees Celsius) of the frequency
converter cooler
f
Target frequency (in Hz) of the frequency converter
I
Output current (in amps) of the frequency converter
30.31 Information CAN slaves

Overview of the information on the modules which
are attached to the CAN bus.
30.32 Info overview digital inputs

In this data screen you can test the status of inputs
in the control system, either «0» or «1»..
Module:
Select using the «+» or «-» buttons of the IO mod-
ule which of the individual input conditions should
be displayed.
The status for each entry is displayed as «0» = low
(no voltage available) or «1» = high (voltage avail-
able).
2 / 138 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
30.33 Info overview digital outputs

In this data display, the condition - "0" or "1" - of the
outputs of machine control can be checked.
Module:
Select using the «+» or «-» buttons of the IO
module the condition which should be displayed for
each of the individual outputs.
The status of each output is shown as «0» = low
(no voltage available) or «1» = high (voltage avail-
able).
4.6 Menu 31: "31 Information logs, statistics"

Contains protocols and statistics.
31.30 Info exception list

Listing of error exceptions in software processing.
31.31 Info statistic events

Shows number and duration of events.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 139

Operation
31.32 Info Exception Statistik D95K

List of exception error counters of the D95K-2 mod-
ule
31.33 Info delete lists extended

Enables the logs to be deleted in data screens
31.5, and 31.30 to 31.32. The date and time
correspond to the starting date and starting time for
the new logs.
2 / 140 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
4.7 Menu 41: "41 Settings, machine"

Settings of the machine.
41.30 Settings extended 1

trunk, Page 6/29
Starting production (doffer at creep
speed), Page 2/43
Extended set-point values
Speed creep speed:
The delivery of the card runs with the prescribed
speed.
Sliver weight piece-up:

Prescribed sliver weight when drawing in the sliver
if there is still no sliver between the disc rollers.
Range: Disc rollers 9 mm
min. - max.: 4,5 - 12 ktex
Sliver weight piece-up:

Prescribed sliver weight when drawing in the sliver
if there is still no sliver between the disc rollers.
Range: Disc rollers 15 mm
min. - max.: 8 - 20 ktex
Compensation fibre tuft:

Depending on the length of the downtime, the pre-
scribed sliver weight is increased for a period of 0 -
1.5 seconds by the selected percentile factor.
min. - max.: 100 - 550 %
Piecing-up after:
When drawing in the sliver with drawn-in lap in the
feed, the sliver monitor is not active at crawl speed
during the preselected time period.
min. - max.: 200 - 200 s
Piecing-up no feed after:

When drawing in the sliver, but with no lap in the
feed, the sliver monitor is not active at crawl speed
during the preselected time period.
Default : s
min. - max.: 250 - 250
Normal production after:

If there is a sliver break after a completed draw-in
step, the sliver monitor on the doffer is switched off
after the preselected time period.
min. - max.: 3 - 3 m
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 141

Operation
Creep speed:
If the sliver has been drawn in and the card is pro-
ducing but only at crawl speed, the production is
switched off after the preselected time period.
Default : 3 min
min. - max.: 1 - 10 min
Material flow fast after:

If the light scanner is covered during the preselec-
ted time period, the doffer switches automatically to
high speed. The automatic ramp-up must be activ-
ated however. (data screen 41.1)

Stopping the doffer, Page 2/42
Cleaning waste points licker-in Y4
Cleaning is only carried out when the card is in pro-
duction.
Intervall:
Default : 3 min
min. - max.: 1 - 60 min
Duration:
Default : 3 s
min. - max.: 0 - 15 s
Cleaning doffer room web bridge Y6 Y1

duction.
Intervall:
Default : 10 min
min. - max.: 1 - 60 min
Duration:
Solenoid valve (Y6).
Default : 1 s
min. - max.: 0 - 15 s
Duration:
Solenoid valve (Y1).
Default : 3 s
min. - max.: 0 - 15 s
Cleaning waste points cylinder Y5

duction.
2 / 142 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Intervall:
Default : 3 min
min. - max.: 1 - 60 min
Flat cleaning, clearer roller K57

duction.
Intervall:
If the length of time for the interval and the duration
are set to be equal, then the roller will run in con-
tinuous operation mode.If these values are differ-
ent, then the stop/go operation mode will be active.
Default : 30 s
min. - max.: 30 - 300 s
Duration:
Default : 30 s
min. - max.: 6 - 300 s
Cleaning, flats chamber Y7

duction.
Intervall:
Default : 30 s
min. - max.: 10 - 300 s
Duration:
Default : 0.5 s
min. - max.: 0.0 - 2.0 s

Reflex light barrier for monitoring the suction
of the card flats waste, Page 6/168
Delivery at feed roll stop:
If the doffer is stopped, the feed roller continues to
run until the delivery speed has reached its
preselected value. Finally, the feed roller switches
off. The doffer continues to run until there is a sliver
break and the delivery is stopped completely.
Default : 400 m / min.
min. - max.: 20 - 400 m / min.
Monitoring flats cleaning B11

Verzögerungszeit einstellen bis die erkannte
Verstopfung im Reinigungskanal der
Kardendeckelreinigung als Störung erkannt wird.
Default : 200 s
min. - max.: 10 s - 300 s
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 143

Operation
Test functions:
For test purposes only.
4.8 Menu 43: "43 Settings, configuration"

43.30 Reset configuration
Drive coiler:
FC delivery U12
FC coiler U60
KSS test
Reset values and functions:

«Yes»: All production and set-up values – without
the values displayed on menu 43 – are reset to
their default values.
2 / 144 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
4.9 Menu 60: "60 Production value groups"

Information and settings for production value groups.
60.30 Value groups preview extended I

Extended data in the value group (1)
Autolevelling sliver:
Autoleveller switched on or off,
41.1, Page 2/96
Autolevelling batt:
Autoleveller switched on or off,
41.2, Page 2/97
Automatic acceleration:
Activation or deactivation of automatic run-up,
41.1, Page 2/96
Feed security device:

Determine feed protection range,
41.2, Page 2/97
Spring tens. angle feed:

Determine spring tensioning angle,
41.2, Page 2/97
Monitoring cyl. speed:

Determine monitoring,
41.2, Page 2/97
Slvr wght adpt crwl spd:

Determination of monitoring system,
41.1, Page 2/96
60.31 Value groups preview extended II

Extended data in the value group (2)
Delivery can change:
Delivery speed card,
42.3, Page 2/100
Length, empty can warng:

Input length,
42.3, Page 2/100
Can filling correc:

Input correction.
42.3, Page 2/100
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 145

Operation
Blow-in time sliv. chan:

Input duration.
42.3, Page 2/100
60.33 Value groups preview extend. IV

Preview of extended data in value group (4)
Measured length A% card:
Determine measurement length A%,
22.1, Page 2/86
Length malfct. A% card:

Determine length to malfunction A%,
22.1, Page 2/86
Ref. length CV card:

Determine reference length CV,
22.2, Page 2/86
Length malfct. CV card:

Determine length to malfunction CV,
22.2, Page 2/86
Cut length monitored:

Determine cut length CV,
22.2, Page 2/86
Interval spec. card:

Determine spectrogram interval,
22.4, Page 2/88
Lngth malfct. spec card:

Determine length,
22.4, Page 2/88
Reference length for slubs

Sliver length used for calculating the number of
slubs,
22.5, Page 2/89
2 / 146 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Length fault for slubs

Enter the length of card sliver to be produced, for
which the card production is switched off, if the
shutoff limit value is continually exceeded.
22.5, Page 2/89
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 2 / 147

Operation
2 / 148 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operation
Part 3
Part / Page
1 Explanation on this section of the operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 1
2 Gearing layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 4
3 Machine set up; optimise settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 9
4 Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 47
No. of pages 54
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3/I

3 / II Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02
Contents
Part / Page

2 Gearing layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 4
2.1 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 4
2.2 Card chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 6
2.3 Sliver deposit CBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 7
3 Machine set up; optimise settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 9

3.1 Karde: Drehzahlen, Geschwindigkeiten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 9
3.1.1 Card chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 9
3.1.2 Licker-in unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 9
3.1.3 Trommeleinheit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 9
3.1.4 Coiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 9
3.2 Drafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 10
3.2.1 Draft in feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 10
3.2.2 Verzug zwischen Vorreisser und Trommel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 10
3.2.3 Drafts at delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 10
3.2.4 Verzüge Bandablage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 10
3.3 Einstellungen für einen Rohstoff festlegen, Maschine einstellen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 11
3.3.1 Einstellblätter, Grundeinstellungen bestimmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 11
3.3.2 Vorreissereinstellungen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 11
3.3.3 Trommeleinstellungen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 12
3.4 Sliver weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 13
3.4.1 Effects on an altered sliver weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 13
3.5 Optimise quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 14
3.5.1 Blow room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 14
3.5.2 Carding system (card trunk and card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 14
3.6 Tauten the tooth and flat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 15
3.6.1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 15
3.7 Setting up the feed system (Aerofeed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 16
3.7.1 Speisesystem, Einflüsse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 16
3.7.2 Materialtransport, Einstellungen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 16
3.7.3 Speisesystem, Einstellungen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 16
3.8 Change the card assignment of a plant with 2 assortments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 17
3.8.1 Kardenzuteilung, Vorbereitungen für die Veränderung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 17
3.8.2 Kardenzuteilung, Optimierung der Anlage nach einer Veränderung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 17
3.9 Settings in the area of the card chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 18
3.9.1 Card trunk settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 18
3.9.2 Effects of the settings on the batt weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 18
3.9.3 Remove and install parts in the card trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 19
3.10 Settings in the range of the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 20
3.10.1 Cover trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 20
3.10.2 Feed trough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 20
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3 / III

Part / Page
3.10.3 Position transducer in the feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 20

3.11 Licker-in unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 21
3.11.1 Licker-in speeds and draft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 21
3.11.2 Vorreisserabgangmenge beeinflussen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 21
3.11.3 Vorreissereinheit einbauen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 21
3.11.4 Feed section of licker-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 21
3.11.5 Vorreissereinheit, Einstellungen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 22
3.12 Settings in the range of the cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 23
3.12.1 Settings for cylinder covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 23
3.12.2 Settings in the tongue range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 23
3.12.3 Discharging areas and carding profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 24
3.12.4 Cylinder sealing (tension tapes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 24
3.13 IGS-classic grinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 25
3.13.1 IGS-classic, Datenbilder einstellen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 25
3.13.2 Testing IGS classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 25
3.13.3 IGS classic replacing and adjusting components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 26
3.14 Card flats unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 27
3.14.1 Removing the card flats unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 27
3.14.2 Kardendeckel, Einstellungen in diesem Bereich . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 27
3.14.3 Retaining clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 27
3.15 Cleaning unit for the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 28
3.15.1 Settings around the cleaning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 28
3.15.2 Removing parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 28
3.16 IGS-top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 29
3.16.1 General information on the IGS-top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 29
3.16.2 Sharpen card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 29
3.16.3 Adjust the card flats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 29
3.16.4 Adjustments for start-up, after a replacement of card flats or grinding brush . . . . . . . . . 3 / 29
3.17 Abnehmereinheit, Einstellungen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 30
3.17.1 Doffer unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 30
3.17.2 Doffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 30
3.17.3 Abnahmevorrichtung, Einstellungen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 30
3.17.4 Cross apron (fleece collection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 30
3.18 Scheibenwalzeneinheit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 31
3.18.1 Scheibenwalzen, Einstellungen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 31
3.18.2 Distance measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 31
3.18.3 Data relevant to quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 31
3.19 General electrical settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 31
3.19.1 Settings for proximity switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 31
3.19.2 Adjust safety switch and door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 31
3.20 Bandregulierung, Einstellungen Karde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 32
3.20.1 Bandregulierung, Einstellung aller Elemente im Prozess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 32
3.21 Replacing the frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 32
3.21.1 Frequenzumrichter, Bestückung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 32
3.21.2 Frequenzumrichter, Konfiguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 32
3.22 Bus system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 33
3.22.1 Bus-System, Einstellungen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 33
3.22.2 CAN IO-Modulen CX408 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 33
3 / IV Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Part / Page
3.23 Control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 33

3.23.1 Steuerung, Einstellungen nach einem Ersatz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 33
3.23.2 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 33
3.23.3 Cold start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 33
3.24 Operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 34
3.24.1 Bedieneinheit, Folie mit den Symbolen der Maschinentasten (Tastaturstreifen) . . . . . . 3 / 34
3.24.2 Bedieneinheit, Helligkeit der Anzeige (Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 34
3.25 Module D95K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 34
3.25.1 Replace module D95K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 34
3.26 Pneumatik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 34
3.26.1 Pneumatik, Einstellungen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 34
3.26.2 Pneumatik, Rohrkupplungen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 34
3.27 Bandablage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 35
3.27.1 Bandablage, Einstellungen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 35
3.27.2 Bandablage, Teile wechseln . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 36
3.28 Trommel -und Abnehmergarnituren warten und schleifen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 37
3.28.1 Trommel -und Abnehmergarnituren, Sicherheitsmassnahmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 37
3.28.2 Trommel -und Abnehmergarnituren, generelle Informationen zur Schleifarbeit . . . . . . . 3 / 37
3.28.3 Trommel -und Abnehmergarnituren, Zubehörteile aufbewahren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 37
3.28.4 Trommel -und Abnehmergarnituren, Schleifintervalle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 37
3.28.5 Trommel -und Abnehmergarnituren, Abklärungen vor dem Schleifen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 38
3.28.6 Dressing the grinding drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 38
3.28.7 Schleifwalze, weitere Arbeiten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 38
3.28.8 Grinding the cylinder (without IGS classic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 39
3.28.9 Grinding the doffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 40
3.29 Trommel -und Abnehmergarnituren, Werkzeug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 40
3.29.1 Trommel -und Abnehmergarnituren, mitgelieferte Teile für das Aufziehen der
Garnituren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 40
3.30 Kardendeckelgarnituren bearbeiten (Vorgang bei vorhandener Schleifmaschine in
der Werkstatt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 41
3.30.1 Kardendeckelgarnituren, Vorgang bei vorhandener Schleifmaschine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 41
3.30.2 Kardendeckelgarnituren egalisieren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 42
3.31 Kardendeckelgarnituren bearbeiten (Vorgang ohne vorhandene Schleifmaschine in
der Werkstatt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 43
3.31.1 Kardendeckelgarnituren, Vorgang ohne vorhandene Schleifmaschine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 43
3.31.2 Kardendeckelgarnituren egalisieren, Vorgang ohne vorhandene Schleifmaschine . . . 3 / 44
3.32 Kardendeckelgarnituren schleifen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 45
3.32.1 Kardendeckel schleifen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 45
3.33 Decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 46
3.33.1 Measures to be taken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 46
3.34 Recommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 46
3.34.1 Measures to be taken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 46
3.35 Disposal of Waste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 46
3.35.1 Accident Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 46
3.35.2 Operating Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 46
3.35.3 Dismantling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 46
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3/V

Part / Page
4 Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 47
4.1 Tables of locations for changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 47
4.2 Table, Setting depending upon material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 53
4.3 Tables of technological parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 54
3 / VI Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Explanation on this section of the operating
instructions
1 Explanation on this section of the operating

instructions
What is Part 3 for?
Part 3 contains checklists and tables relevant to potential tasks, such as settings, optimisation, etc.
These checklists provide an overview of all tasks that have to be carried out, such as changing to a different
type of material, for instance.
What information is contained in Part 3?

The checklists contain all the work instructions on various work situations, with reference to the relevant
tables and detailed work descriptions.
When do you need to consult Part 3?

If the machine or plant has to be set up.
If there is a material change.
If the quality or productivity is to optimised.
If work needs to be carried out on certain components.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3/1

Explanation on this section of the operating in-
structions
3/2 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Gearing layout
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3/3

Gearing layout
2 Gearing layout
2.1 Card
WS 1 M42 M41 Z16
Ø 172 1 Z34
WS 2 Ø 292 2
55 Ø 156 3
55 Ø 156 4 Ø 100
M13 WE 4
M13
55
WE 1 i=160 M10
50 Hz 60 Hz
Ø 100 5
56
Ø 253 8 Ø 124 Ø 150
9 M57
10 M56
Ø 417
M50 C 70H
Ø 128
Ø 814 11 C 70
50 Hz = Ø 417 Ø 121
60 Hz = Ø 500
M1 M50
M1 WT
12
Ø 680 13 Ø 420
60 Hz 50 Hz
Ø 100
Ø 90 Ø 80 14
Ø 70 Ø 80
WA 2 Ø 64.5 C 70 / C 70H
M14 Ø 117 15 Z 42 Ø 66.9
Z 27 Ø 80 16
Z 27 Ø 80 17 M12 M11
Z 24
Z 24 Ø 131
Ø 55.5 18
Ø 43.3 Z 22
Z 22 Ø 72 Ø 131
Z 22 Ø 72
C 70 <120 kg/h WA 6 M12 19 M11 WA 7 C 70 <120 kg/h
RSB/CBA-5:Ø 41 RSB/CBA-5:Ø 41
C 70H ...220 kg/h C 70H ...220 kg/h
RSB/SB-2/CBA-5: Ø 51 RSB/SB-2/CBA-5: Ø 51
SB: Ø 41 (V=1.0-3.5) SB: Ø 41 (V=1.0-3.5)
Ø 25 (V=3.0-5.0) Ø 25 (V=3.0-5.0)
3/4 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Gearing layout
1 Feed roll in card trunk Change pulley WE4 (licker-in drive)

2 Opening roll in card trunk and change pulley WT (cylinder
drive): Draft (VE4) between licker-in
3/4 Delivery rolls in card trunk
and cylinder, Page 3/49
5 Feed roll in licker-in unit
Speed of licker-in depends on
6 Licker-in change pulleys WE4, Page 3/51
9 Cleaning roller
Change pulley WT: Cylinder speeds
10 Stripping roller , Page 3/47
11 Cylinder Draft (VA4) between delivery roller
12 Card flats and cross apron, Page 3/50
13 Doffer Draft (VA4 x VA5) between delivery
14 Brush roll, delivery section rolls and disc rolls, Page 3/51
15 Take-off roll Draft (VA2) between doffer and
16 / 17 Delivery rolls take-off roll, Page 3/50
18 Cross apron (fleece collection) Draft (VA5) between cross apron and
pulley rolls, Page 3/50
19 Pulley rolls
Change gear WE1 Draft (VE1)
between the delivery rolls in the card
truck and the feed rolls of the
card, Page 3/48
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3/5

Gearing layout
2.2 Card chute
WS1
WS2
02.2005 Hi
Cotton/Blends: Opening roller speeds in the

card chute (50/60 Hz motor), Page 3/47
Man-made fibres: Opening roll speeds in
card trunk (50/60 Hz motor), Page 3/47
3/6 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Gearing layout
2.3 Sliver deposit CBA
60
60
H
V
C70: Z 142
C70H: Z 118
O.K
H X
CBA, cotton: Belt pulley “C” and distance CBA: Change gear “H” depends on the
between windings “X” dependent on the can production, Page 3/48
diameter, Page 3/48 Change gear “H”: Production up to 120
CBA man-made fibres and mixtures: Belt kg/h, draft “V” between the pulley rolls of the
pulley “C” and distance between windings card and the calender rolls of the coiler
“X” dependent on the can (sliver deposit), Page 3/51
diameter, Page 3/48
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3/7

Gearing layout
3/8 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Machine set up; optimise settings
3 Machine set up; optimise settings

3.1 Karde: Drehzahlen, Geschwindigkeiten
3.1.1 Card chute
– Drehzahlen Öffnungswalze
Cotton/Blends: Opening roller speeds in the card chute (50/60 Hz motor), Page 3/47
Man-made fibres: Opening roll speeds in card trunk (50/60 Hz motor), Page 3/47
3.1.2 Licker-in unit

– Licker-in r.p.m.
Table, Change pulley WE4 dependent on the material , Page 3/54
3.1.3 Trommeleinheit
– Drehzahlen
Change pulley WT: Cylinder speeds , Page 3/47
Cylinder r.p.m. as a function of the material, Page 3/53
3.1.4 Coiler
– Drehzahlen
CBA, cotton: Belt pulley “C” and distance between windings “X” dependent on the can
diameter, Page 3/48
CBA man-made fibres and mixtures: Belt pulley “C” and distance between windings “X” dependent
on the can diameter, Page 3/48
CBA: Change gear “H” depends on the production, Page 3/48
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3/9

3.2 Drafts
3.2.1 Draft in feed
– Draft VE1 between the clearing roller of the chute and the feed roller of the card
Change gear WE1 Draft (VE1) between the delivery rolls in the card truck and the feed rolls of the
card, Page 3/48
3.2.2 Verzug zwischen Vorreisser und Trommel

– Verzug VE4 zwischen Vorreisser und Trommel
Change pulley WE4 (licker-in drive) and change pulley WT (cylinder drive): Draft (VE4) between
licker-in and cylinder, Page 3/49
3.2.3 Drafts at delivery

– Draft VA2 between doffer and take-off roller
Draft (VA2) between doffer and take-off roll, Page 3/50
– Draft VA3 between take-off roller and delivery roller

Adjust draft for take-off roll / delivery rolls, Page 6/210
– Draft VA4 between delivery roller and cross apron

Draft (VA4) between delivery roller and cross apron, Page 3/50
– Draft VA5 between cross apron and disc rollers.

Draft (VA5) between cross apron and pulley rolls, Page 3/50
– Draft between delivery and disk rollers. This draft results from the two drafts VA4 and VA5.
Draft (VA4 x VA5) between delivery rolls and disc rolls, Page 3/51
3.2.4 Verzüge Bandablage

– Verzüge zwischen den Scheibenwalzen der Karde und der Bandablage
Change gear “H”: Production up to 120 kg/h, draft “V” between the pulley rolls of the card and the
calender rolls of the coiler (sliver deposit), Page 3/51
Change gear “H”: Production more than 120 kg/h, draft “V” between the pulley rolls of the card and
the calender rolls of the coiler (sliver deposit), Page 3/51
3 / 10 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

3.3 Einstellungen für einen Rohstoff festlegen, Maschine

einstellen
3.3.1 Einstellblätter, Grundeinstellungen bestimmen
– Standard settings for cotton and cotton / man-made fibre blends with a production rate of up to 120 kg/h.
Grundeinstellungen Baumwolle und Mischungen Baumwolle / Chemiefasern bis 120 kg/h
Produktion, Page 6/14
– Standard settings for cotton and cotton / man-made fibre blends with a production rate in excess of 120
kg/h.
Grundeinstellungen Baumwolle und Mischungen Baumwolle / Chemiefasern über 120 kg/h
– Standard settings for man-made fibre with a production rate of up to 120 kg/h.
Grundeinstellungen Chemiefasern und Karden Chemiefasern oder Baumwolle (Swing) bis 120 kg/h
– Standard settings for man-made fibre with a production rate in excess of 120 kg/h.
Grundeinstellungen Chemiefasern und Karden Chemiefasern oder Baumwolle (Swing) über 120
kg/h Produktion, Page 6/18
– Determine sliver weight and production and set.

10.1, Page 2/75
– Determine the production speed of the feeder machine.

Adjusting the production speed of the feeder machine, Page 6/21
3.3.2 Vorreissereinstellungen
– Determining the speed of the licker-in roller.
Speed of licker-in depends on change pulleys WE4, Page 3/51
– Define feed trough nipping distance and set.

Speisemulde und Speisewalze, Klemmdistanz verändern. Distanz «B», Page 6/70
– Set discharge outlet for mote knife of the first licker-in.

Setting the mote knives (discharge opening), Page 6/88
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3 / 11

3.3.3 Trommeleinstellungen
– Determine the cylinder speed based on the production and set.
– Adjust the cylinder cover

Setting the cylinder covers, Page 6/108
– Setting the carding profiles for cotton and for cotton / man-made fibre blends
Setting the distances between the carding profiles and the cylinder clothing (cotton), Page 6/123
– Setting the carding profiles for man-made fibre

Setting the carding profiles at the doffer section (man-made fibre), Page 6/131
– Die Schalenmesser einstellen

Setting the mote knives (cotton), Page 6/125
– Adjust the discharge distance around the mote knives according to the raw material. Pre- and
post-carding zones
Setting the extraction dimension for the mote knives (cotton), Page 6/127
– Define card flat settings for cotton and Swing and set.
Fitting the tool used for subjecting card flats to load, Page 6/184
Adjust the card flats, Page 6/185
– Define card flat settings for man-made fibres and set.

Fitting the tool used for subjecting card flats to load, Page 6/184
– Kardendeckelgeschwindigkeit bestimmen und einstellen.

Richtwerte Kardendeckelgeschwindigkeit, Page 3/53
10.1, Page 2/75
3 / 12 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

3.4 Sliver weight

3.4.1 Effects on an altered sliver weight
– Den Verzug Abnahmewalze / Auslaufwalze einstellen.
– Den Verzug Abnahmewalze / Auslaufwalzen einstellen.

– Die Bandspannung zwischen Scheibenwalzen und Bandablage anpassen.

– Die Kannenfüllmenge anpassen.

10.1, Page 2/75
– Die Materialübergabe an der Zunge beobachten und ev. Zunge neu einstellen.
Adjusting the position of the tongue, Page 6/116
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3 / 13

3.5 Optimise quality

3.5.1 Blow room
– Check the conditions in the blowing room, in particular the conditions of the opening rollers and grids.
– Alle Ausscheidestellen bezüglich Verstopfung kontrollieren.
– Die Luftverhältnisse und Ventilatoren überprüfen.

Adjusting the transport fan, Page 6/21
3.5.2 Carding system (card trunk and card)

– Die Einstellungen der Kardendeckel kontrollieren.
– Adjust the drum speed to match the material and production.

– Check the tongue setting.

Adjusting the distance from the tongue to the cylinder, Page 6/117
– Die Schalenmesser kontrollieren.

– Die Kardierelemente kontrollieren und einstellen.

– Die Verzüge und das Laufverhalten im Auslauf kontrollieren

– Die Garnituren der Karde auf Zustand, Beschädigungen und Sauberkeit überprüfen.
Evaluating card clothing edges, Page 6/289
– Alle Verschmutzungen entfernen.
– Alle Absaugstellen kontrollieren.
– Die Ausscheidestellen (Abgang) in der Putzerei und an den Karden überprüfen.
3 / 14 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

3.6 Tauten the tooth and flat belts

3.6.1 Settings
– General information
Controlling and tensioning tooth belts, Page 6/20
– Die Umlenkrolle für den Trommelriemen einstellen.

Use the deflection roller to load and relieve the cylinder belt, Page 6/103
– Den Trommelriemen vor dem Spannen markieren.

Marking the cylinder belt, Page 6/99
– Den Trommelriemen spannen.

Tensioning cylinder belts, Page 6/99
– Den Vorreisserriemen vor dem Spannen markieren

Marking the licker-in belt, Page 6/84
– Den Vorreisserriemen spannen

Tauten the licker-in belts, Page 6/84
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3 / 15

3.7 Setting up the feed system (Aerofeed)

3.7.1 Speisesystem, Einflüsse
– The filter station must be able to deal with the exhaust air arising from the machines without any difficulty
so that no back-pressure can build up in the individual machines. The vacuum in the suction ducts must
be correctly adjusted.
Adjust the vacuum for the card suction, Page 6/26
Adjust the vacuum for the exhaust air (open transfer), Page 6/24
3.7.2 Materialtransport, Einstellungen

Note: The default settings must be adapted to the actual conditions prior to initial commissioning, after a ma-
jor modification to the feed system, and for optimisations.
– Check the pressure conditions for the exhaust air and in the range of the open transfer
Measuring the vacuum for the transport air of the waste transport, Page 6/25
– Set the air volume of the transport fan.

Adjusting the transport fan, Page 6/21
3.7.3 Speisesystem, Einstellungen

– Adjust the production speed of the feeder machine.
– Adjust the acceleration flap.

Adjusting the acceleration flap, Page 6/35
– Adjust the acceleration and isolation valves.

Adjusting accelerating and isolating valves, Page 6/36
– Put the card into operation

Setting the differential pressure switch (standard setting), Page 6/32
3 / 16 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

3.8 Change the card assignment of a plant with 2 assortments

When there are frequent assortment changes, or changes in the card assignment, it is recommended to make
a note of the settings so that the change-over times are minimized.
3.8.1 Kardenzuteilung, Vorbereitungen für die Veränderung

– Determine the production speed of the feeder machine.
– Adjust the acceleration and isolation valves.

Adjusting accelerating and isolating valves, Page 6/36
– Assign cards to the corresponding feed system in UNIcontrol. Observe the separate operating manuals.
– Switch off the differential pressure switch at the card chute.

3.8.2 Kardenzuteilung, Optimierung der Anlage nach einer Veränderung

– Adjust the production speed of the feeder machine. (Stop-Go relationship)
– Set the filling height in the card trunk.

Setting the fill height, Page 6/34
– Check the switching-on point of the material feed

– Depending on the filling in the first card trunk, assemble and adjust the deflector.
Install and adjust the deflector on the first card trunk, Page 6/23
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3 / 17

3.9 Settings in the area of the card chute

3.9.1 Card trunk settings
– Define opening roll speed and set.
Changing the r.p.m. of the opening roller, Page 6/55
– Set vacuum for individual card suction.

Adjust the vacuum for the card suction, Page 6/26
– Draft VE1 between the delivery rolls in the card trunk and the feed roll of the card.
card, Page 3/48
– Change the position of the card trunk wall.

Adjust the lap weight by the position of the card trunk wall, Page 6/27
– Adjust light barrier.

Adjust the light barrier at the card trunk, Page 6/29
– Adjust the proximity switch

Adjusting the proximity switch for monitoring the r.p.m. of the opening roller, Page 6/54
3.9.2 Effects of the settings on the batt weight

– Speed of opening roll
Changing the r.p.m. of the opening roller, Page 6/55
– Adjust the position of the card trunk wall

– Adjust the light barrier in the card trunk

Adjust the light barrier at the card trunk, Page 6/29
– A lower batt weight can be attained with special raw materials, e.g. regenerates, by reducing the fan air
flow in the card trunk. To do so, insert a piece of thin plate between the fan and the air duct at the air out-
let.
– Setting for the load on the feed trough
Setting the load on the feed trough, Page 6/46
3 / 18 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

3.9.3 Remove and install parts in the card trunk

– Opening roller
Changing the opening roller, Page 6/48
– Feed roller
Replace the feed roll in card trunk, Page 6/38
– Clearing roller
Changing the delivery rollers, Page 6/56
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3 / 19

3.10 Settings in the range of the feed roller

3.10.1 Cover trim
– Removing the cover trim below the feed roller
Removing the cover trim below the feed roller, Page 6/59
– Installing the cover trim below the feed roller

Installing the cover trim below the feed roller, Page 6/61
3.10.2 Feed trough

– Clearance “B”: Change the nipping distance between the feed plate and the feed roller.
– Set the distance between the feed roller and the first licker-in.
Adjusting the distance between feed roller and licker-in, Page 6/63
– Adjust the clearance from the feed plate to the feed roller.
Speisemulde zu Speisewalze, Abstand einstellen (Klemmdistanz «B» eingestellt), Page 6/72
– Feed trough removal and installation.

Feed trough replacement, Page 6/67
– Adjust the position of the torsion rod.

Torsionsstäbe, Position, Page 6/74
– Adjust the load on the feed plate.

– Carry out the standard adjustment for the load on the feed trough.
Check default setting, Page 6/69
– Check the position transducer in the feed

Read measured value from transducer., Page 6/64
3.10.3 Position transducer in the feed

– Check the position transducer in the feed
3 / 20 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

3.11 Licker-in unit.

3.11.1 Licker-in speeds and draft
– Change the licker-in speed.
Speed of licker-in depends on change pulleys WE4, Page 3/51
Table, Change pulley WE4 dependent on the material , Page 3/54
– VE4 draft between licker-in and cylinder

Change pulley WE4 (licker-in drive) and change pulley WT (cylinder drive): Draft (VE4) between
licker-in and cylinder, Page 3/49
3.11.2 Vorreisserabgangmenge beeinflussen

– Adjust the discharge opening according to the raw material
– Set the mote knives (basic setting)

Mote knife setting (basic setting for licker-ins), Page 6/93
– Set the suction openings

Adjusting suction opening, Page 6/95
3.11.3 Vorreissereinheit einbauen

– Change the licker-in unit
Changing the licker-in unit, Page 6/77
3.11.4 Feed section of licker-in

– Set the feed plate between the card chute and the feed roller of the licker-in unit.
Adjust the feed plate between the card trunk and the licker-in, Page 6/80
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3 / 21

3.11.5 Vorreissereinheit, Einstellungen

– Check the position transducer at the feed section
– Set the position of the licker-in relative to the cylinder.

Adjusting the licker-in to the cylinder, Page 6/82
– Fit the mote knives

Mote knives, Page 6/87
– Set the mote knives (basic setting)

– Set the replacing electric cylinder.

Preparing the electric cylinder for mote knife setting, Page 6/90
– Leitblech einsetzen
Inserting the guide plate, Page 6/92
– Set the carding elements

Adjusting the carding elements in the licker-in range, Page 6/94
– Licker-in removal/installation.
Change the licker-in, Page 6/81
– Set the proximity switch

Adjust the proximity switch for monitoring the licker-in speed, Page 6/86
– Set the suction openings

Adjusting suction opening, Page 6/95
3 / 22 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

3.12 Settings in the range of the cylinder

3.12.1 Settings for cylinder covers
– Preparations for cylinder covers
Preparing the cylinder cover for the setting procedure, Page 6/107
– Cylinder cover
– Adjust the minimum distance for the cylinder covers beneath the card-flat deflection space.
Setting the cylinder covers beneath the card-flat deflection space., Page 6/110
– Cylinder bottom surface

Adjusting the cylinder lower section, Page 6/114
3.12.2 Settings in the tongue range

– Differences among applied tongues
Tongues, Page 6/115
– Measuring eccenter for tongue

Adjust the default setting for the measuring eccenter for the tongue, Page 6/118
– Adjust tongue
– Position of the tongue.

– Dismantling and installing the tongue

Removing the tongue in the range of the cylinder, Page 6/112
Installing the tongue in the range of the cylinder, Page 6/113
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3 / 23

3.12.3 Discharging areas and carding profiles

– Kardierprofile aus- und einbauen
Removing carding profiles, Page 6/119
Installing carding profiles, Page 6/121
– Setting the carding profiles for cotton and for cotton / man-made fibre blends
– Setting the carding profiles for man-made fibre

Setting the carding profiles at the doffer section (man-made fibre), Page 6/131
– Installing the mote knives for the pre- and post-carding zones
Fitting the mote knives, Page 6/111
– Setting the mote knives

– Influencing the discharge (waste) at the mote knives of the pre- and post-carding zones.
3.12.4 Cylinder sealing (tension tapes)

Note: The tension tapes very seldomly need to be replaced
– Spannband aus-und einbauen
Removing the tension tape, Page 6/97
Installing the tension tape, Page 6/98
3 / 24 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

3.13 IGS-classic grinder

In the following, all necessary settings and work in connection with the grinding apparatus are summarized.
For reasons of quality and safety, only one person should be responsible for and carry out maintenance of the
wires. The correct execution of this delicate maintenance work is only possible by appointing a single quali-
fied person to carry it out.
3.13.1 IGS-classic, Datenbilder einstellen

– Configuring IGS-classic. Expected clothing service life; programming corresponding grinding cycles.
– Altering the production amount

Changing the prescribed service life of the cylinder clothing, Page 6/139
– Display the seervice-life of the grinding stone.

– Reset the counter for the number of tons produced.

3.13.2 Testing IGS classic

– Carry out the operating tests in the corresponding data screen.
IGS test run, Page 6/141
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3 / 25

3.13.3 IGS classic replacing and adjusting components

Note: After cylinder clothing replacement, the soldered joints have to be brought up to the height of the cloth-
ing tips, so that the IGS-classic grinding stone is not damaged.
– Use an appropriate tool to equalise the soldered joint.
– Remove and install the grinder.

Removing the grinder, Page 6/137
Installing the grinder, Page 6/138
– Slackening and tightening the flat belt (system with tension screws)
Slackening and tightening the flat belt (system with tension screws), Page 6/146
– Alter the running of the flat belt.

Ensuring straight running of the flat belt (system with tension screws), Page 6/147
– Remove the rubber sealing profiles for the flat belt.

Removing the rubber sealing profiles for the flat belt, Page 6/144
– Fit the rubber sealing profiles for the flat belt.

Fitting rubber sealing profiles for flat belts, Page 6/145
– Replace the grinding stone in the IGS-classic system, if the cylinder clothing is replaced.
Removing the grinding stone, Page 6/148
Installing the grinding stone, Page 6/148
– Remove and install the electric magnet.

Remove the electromagnet, Page 6/149
Install the electromagnet, Page 6/149
– Adjust the grinding stone if the electrical magnet was replaced.

Adjust the grinding stone if the electrical magnet was replaced., Page 6/150
– Remove and install the guide carriage.

Removing the guiding sled, Page 6/142
Installing the guiding sled, Page 6/143
– Do not adjust the factory setting of the pressure reduction valve for the pressure hoses (4 bars)!
Pressure reduction valve, Page 6/138
– Check the operating pressure of 6 bar.
3 / 26 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

3.14 Card flats unit

3.14.1 Removing the card flats unit
Note: The lifting of the card flats unit out of the card is mainly required when replacing the cylinder clothing.
– Die Kardendeckeleinheit aus- und einbauen.
Removing the card flats unit, Page 6/152
Installing the carding flats unit, Page 6/156
3.14.2 Kardendeckel, Einstellungen in diesem Bereich

– Die Kardendeckel aus-und einbauen
Change card flats, Page 6/179
– Die Kardendeckel positionieren.

Activating the card flats drive (setting, grinding), Page 6/174
– Die Kardendeckel einstellen.

– Die Reinigungsbürste für die Gleitflächen der Kardendeckel einstellen

Set the cleaning brush for the sliding surfaces of the card flats, Page 6/193
– Die Schmierblöcke für die Gleitflächen der Kardendeckel positionieren

Lubricating blocks for the sliding surfaces of the card flats, Page 6/194
– Die Umlenkungen der Kardendeckel einstellen.

Setting the deflection for the card flats on the feed and delivery sides, Page 6/192
– Die Riemen der Kardendeckel spannen.

Tension belt of the card flats, Page 6/172
– Die Kardendeckelriemen aus- und einbauen.

Removing the belts for the card flats, Page 6/170
Installing the belts for the card flats, Page 6/171
– Die Näherungsschalter für die Überwachung des gleichmässigen Laufs der Kardendeckel einstellen.
Adjust the proximity switch for monitoring the smooth running of the card flats., Page 6/177
3.14.3 Retaining clips

Note: The machine must not be operated without the retaining clips installed
– Removing and installing retaining clips
Change the holding clips, Page 6/194
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3 / 27

3.15 Cleaning unit for the card flats

3.15.1 Settings around the cleaning unit
– Die Grundeinstellung der Reinigungswalze durchführen
Standard setting for the cleaning roller, Page 6/161
– Adjust the contact depth of the cleaning roller

Contact depth setting for the PW1 cleaning roller with respect to the clothing of the card
flats, Page 6/163
– Set the stripping knife for the cleaning roller

Setting the stripping knife for the PW1 cleaning roller, Page 6/164
– Set the stripping knife for the stripping roller

Setting the stripping knife for the PW2 stripping roller, Page 6/165
– Die Kupplung zwischen Motor und Reinigungswalze einstellen

Setting the coupling between the motor and the cleaning brush, Page 6/167
– Die Reflexlichtschranke zur Überwachung der Abgangabsaugung der Kardendeckel einstellen

Reflex light barrier for monitoring the suction of the card flats waste, Page 6/168
3.15.2 Removing parts

– Remove the cleaning unit.
Removing and disassembling the cleaning unit for the card flats, Page 6/157
– Remove the cleaning roller and stripping roller

3 / 28 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

3.16 IGS-top
3.16.1 General information on the IGS-top
– Observe this information
Information on the IGS-top, Page 6/202
3.16.2 Sharpen card flats

– For reasons of quality and safety, only one person should be responsible for maintaining the clothings.
The correct execution of this delicate maintenance work is only ensured by appointing a qualified person
to carry it out.
– The positions of the needles in new card flat clothings may change slightly after the production of sev-
eral tonnes of material. We recommend levelling the card flats with the grinding roller after this time has
lapsed to meet high technological requirements for quality.
3.16.3 Adjust the card flats

– Model: Card with IGS-top flats grinding system, without IGS-classic. Adjust the card flats after the cylin-
der clothing has been ground with the grinding roller. If the cylinder clothing is not ground during its ser-
vice life, the card flats will have to be adjusted after 50% of the cylinder clothing service life has lapsed.
– Model: Card with IGS-top flats grinding system, with IGS-classic. Adjust the card flats at a minimum after
1/3 or 2/3 respectively of the clothings service life has lapsed. Adjust the remaining settings in the cylin-
der range also, if needed.
3.16.4 Adjustments for start-up, after a replacement of card flats or

grinding brush
– Configure grinding brush default settings.
Adjust grinding brush parallelism to card flats (default setting), Page 6/203
– Check current consumption of grinding brush. (when the grinding brush contacts the card flats clothing).
Check current consumption (with grinding brush contact on the card flats clothing), Page 6/199
– Adjust grinding pressure.

Adjust grinding pressure, Page 6/205
– Visually assess the grinding brush contact on the card flats clothing.
Check the position of the grinding brush, Page 6/201
– Enter / reset the card flats service life (production)

– Replace grinding brush

Install grinding brush, Page 6/198
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3 / 29

3.17 Abnehmereinheit, Einstellungen

The doffer unit only has to be removed very seldomly. In replacing the doffer wires, it is sufficient to lower the
unit only as far as the rolls
3.17.1 Doffer unit

– Removing and installing the doffer unit
Changing the doffer group, Page 6/207
3.17.2 Doffer
– Adjusting the doffer
Adjusting the doffer, Page 6/216
3.17.3 Abnahmevorrichtung, Einstellungen

– Removing and replacing rollers
Changing rollers, Page 6/219
– Adjusting the rollers and clearer roller.

Setting rollers and clearer roller in the doffing device, Page 6/211
– Auslaufwalze unten an die Position der oberen Auslaufwalze anpassen

Adapt the position of the lower delivery roll, Page 6/213
– Adjusting the fleece bridge

Adjusting the fleece bridge, Page 6/215
– Adjusting the stripping blades

Adjusting the pressure of the stripping blade, Page 6/221
3.17.4 Cross apron (fleece collection)

Note: When the cross apron has been fitted the default settings have to be re-configured.
– Removal and installation of cross apron
Changing the cross-apron, Page 6/223
– Adjusting the distance between the delivery rollers and the cross apron.
Adjusting the distance between delivery rollers and cross apron, Page 6/225
– Distance between the cross aprons

Adjusting the distance between the cross aprons, Page 6/226
– Tightening the cross aprons

Tensioning cross aprons, Page 6/227
– Gas pressure spring

Adjusting the gas pressure spring, Page 6/228
3 / 30 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

3.18 Scheibenwalzeneinheit
3.18.1 Scheibenwalzen, Einstellungen
– Distance between pulley roll support and cross aprons
Adjusting the distance between cross-apron and disc roller supports, Page 6/230
– Suction, pulley rolls

Pulley roll suction adjustment, Page 6/231
– Aligning the pulley rolls

Adjusting the disc rollers, Page 6/232
– Setting the distance between the pulley rolls

Setting the distance between the disk rollers, Page 6/233
– Pressure between the pulley rolls

Adjusting the pressure between the disc rollers, Page 6/234
– Blow-in device for the card sliver

Adjusting the blow-in device for the sliver, Page 6/236
– Sliver funnel
Adjusting the sliver funnel, Page 6/235
3.18.2 Distance measuring system

Note: The position transducer needs to be replaced only if a defect has been determined.
– Removing and replacing the distance measuring system
Changing the distance measuring system in the delivery, Page 6/237
3.18.3 Data relevant to quality

– Determining exactly the parameters of the sliver weight, which will turn off the card production.
Monitoring the data relevant to quality, Page 6/243
3.19 General electrical settings

3.19.1 Settings for proximity switches
– Notice regarding proximity switch settings
Directions concerning the settings of the proximity switches, Page 6/247
3.19.2 Adjust safety switch and door locks

– Safety switch
Adjusting door lock and safety switch, Page 6/248
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3 / 31

3.20 Bandregulierung, Einstellungen Karde

The sliver control is intended exclusively to remove incoming faults (cross-sectional variations) of the card
feed system.
This must be correctly set so that the sliver control runs optimally.
3.20.1 Bandregulierung, Einstellung aller Elemente im Prozess

Note: The necessary operating data must be input before controls and settings can be carried out. See data
screens 10...41.
– Adjust the proximity switch for the delivery speed.
Adjusting the proximity switch for the delivery speed, Page 6/222, 6/245
– Adjust the distance measuring system in the feed for the sliver control.
Adjust transducer in feed, Page 6/65
– Change the distance measuring system in the delivery.

Changing the distance measuring system in the delivery, Page 6/237
– Adjust the steeping anchor in the distance measuring system in the delivery.
Setting (positioning) the solenoid plunger in the signal coil, Page 6/244
– Calibrate the distance measuring system in the delivery.

Calibrating the distance measuring system in the delivery, Page 6/241
3.21 Replacing the frequency converter

3.21.1 Frequenzumrichter, Bestückung
– The device must be equipped with the corresponding components.
Identifying the frequency converter, Page 6/335
Loading the frequency inverter, Page 6/340
Adjusting to the cooling system, Page 6/342
3.21.2 Frequenzumrichter, Konfiguration

– The components must be configured appropriately.
Configuring the frequency inverter, Page 6/341
Setting the T1000V frequency converter, Page 6/343
3 / 32 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

3.22 Bus system

3.22.1 Bus-System, Einstellungen
– Positioning the terminator
Set or wire the terminators., Page 6/345
3.22.2 CAN IO-Modulen CX408

– Set CAN addresses and test modules via the LED.
Use the LEDs to test the CAN I/O modules CX408 and their inputs and outputs, Page 6/346
Set the CAN node address of the CAN I/O module CX408, Page 6/347
3.23 Control unit

3.23.1 Steuerung, Einstellungen nach einem Ersatz
– Connect all ports.
– Setting / Testing the terminator

Set or wire the terminators., Page 6/345
– Insert Compact Flash card in the control unit and load program.
Inserting Compact Flash card into the control unit (loading PLC software), Page 6/334
3.23.2 Battery
– Replacing the battery
Removing the battery from the control system, Page 6/333
Mounting the battery in the control system, Page 6/333
3.23.3 Cold start

Note: A cold start can be considered, if the control unit no longer works correctly and all other measures
have proven to be unsuccessful.
– Performing a cold start
Performing a cold start for the control unit, Page 6/332
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3 / 33

3.24 Operating unit

3.24.1 Bedieneinheit, Folie mit den Symbolen der Maschinentasten
(Tastaturstreifen)
– Remove keyboard strip.
Pull out the keyboard strip, Page 6/349
– Insert keyboard strip.

Insert keyboard strip, Page 6/349
3.24.2 Bedieneinheit, Helligkeit der Anzeige (Display)

– Change the brightness level.
Setting the brightness of the display, Page 2/62
3.25 Module D95K

3.25.1 Replace module D95K
– Module D95K
Removing D95K-2 module, Page 6/253
Installing D95K-2 module, Page 6/253
3.26 Pneumatik
3.26.1 Pneumatik, Einstellungen
– Adjusting the pressure of the compressed air for the card.
Adjust the pressure regulator, Page 6/250
– Pneumatik, Kondensat entleeren

– Adjusting the differential pressure switch to monitor the vacuum on the card
Setting the differential pressure switch, Page 6/251
3.26.2 Pneumatik, Rohrkupplungen

– Loosen tube couplings
Disconnecting the pneumatic hose connections, Page 6/252
3 / 34 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

3.27 Bandablage
3.27.1 Bandablage, Einstellungen
– Settings for the can turntable, can coiler and locating lever
Tensioning the v-belt for the coiler drive, Page 6/279
Tighten V-belt of can plate drive, Page 6/257
Adjust the spacing between the can table to the cover sheet, Page 6/259
Changing the distance from the sliver filling to the spinning can, Page 6/260
Adjusting the positioning lever for the spinning can, Page 6/262
Setting the light sensors, Page 6/256
– Bandablage, Einstellungen im Kannenwechsler

Remove change carriage, Page 6/266
Notes on the magnetic limit switches on the pneumatic cylinder, Page 6/267
Adjusting the magnetic limit switches B9, Page 6/268
Adjust magnetic limit switch B10, Page 6/269
Adjusting magnetic limit switch B16, Page 6/270
Adjust magnetic limit switch B8 (default setting), Page 6/271
Adjusting the throttle valves for the pneumatic cylinder of the can trolley, Page 6/272
Changing and tightening the drive tape for the can trolley, Page 6/273
– Bandablage, Bandtrennung einstellen.

Adjust sliver cutting, time at which the piston rod extends, Page 6/276
Adjust sliver cutting, production and material dependent adjustments, Page 6/277
– Bandablage, Zahnriemen für Wechsel «H» spannen.

Tensioning toothed belt for change «H», Page 6/281
– Bandablage, Einstellungen an den Kalanderwalzen

Adjust calender rolls, Page 6/283
Delivery funnel , Page 6/284
Tightening the belt for the calender rolls, Page 6/282
– Adjusting the hood line switch.

Adjusting the limit switch for the hood, Page 6/285
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3 / 35

3.27.2 Bandablage, Teile wechseln

– Displacing and reassembling the sliver deposit.
Lifting and moving the sliver deposit, Page 6/255
– Changing the change gear «C»

Changing change gear «C», Page 6/264
– Replace can coiler change gear "H"

Changing the change gear «H», Page 6/280
– Bandablage, Tabellen
CBA, cotton: Belt pulley “C” and distance between windings “X” dependent on the can
diameter, Page 3/48
on the can diameter, Page 3/48
CBA: Change gear “H” depends on the production, Page 3/48
the calender rolls of the coiler (sliver deposit), Page 3/51
3 / 36 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

3.28 Trommel -und Abnehmergarnituren warten und schleifen

A condition for achieving perfect quality of the card sliver is the exact and careful maintenance of the wires.
The prime basis for a good carding is the correct grinding of the wires or, expressed better, by their «sharp-
ness».
3.28.1 Trommel -und Abnehmergarnituren, Sicherheitsmassnahmen

– The regulations covering operating safety are to be observed.
– Die Garnituren müssen von ausgebildetem Personal gewartet werden. Ein Teil der Antriebe ist offen
gelegt. In diesen Bereichen muss mit besonderer Vorsicht gearbeitet werden.
– Safety glasses are to be worn for all grinding and cleaning operations.
3.28.2 Trommel -und Abnehmergarnituren, generelle Informationen zur

Schleifarbeit
– Die meisten der heutigen Garnituren sind aus Legierungen gefertigt, bei denen beim Schleifen praktisch
keine Schleiffunken mehr sichtbar sind. Das setzt einen sehr hohen Ausbildungsgrad und eine grosse
Erfahrung voraus, um diese äusserst heikle Arbeit durchzuführen.
– For reasons of quality and safety, only one person should be responsible for and carry out maintenance
of the wires.
– The correct execution of this important and delicate work is guaranteed by using a qualified person.
3.28.3 Trommel -und Abnehmergarnituren, Zubehörteile aufbewahren

– Accessories should be kept in a separate room to protect them from damage or loss.
3.28.4 Trommel -und Abnehmergarnituren, Schleifintervalle

– It is only possible to set up general guide lines for the maintenance of the wires because so many factors
affect them including base material, production speeds, quality requirements, etc.
– A spinning plant must establish its own maintenance intervals as based on its own operating experience.
– The effective intervals can be worked out using the guide lines set out as follows.
Determining the grinding interval, Page 6/291
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3 / 37

3.28.5 Trommel -und Abnehmergarnituren, Abklärungen vor dem

Schleifen
Note: Not only the result of the nep count is crucial for grinding the clothings but the condition of the blow
room machines and the cards also has to be taken into account.
– Take a nep count. Particularly with small neps, the number of neps found in the card sliver do not always
carry through to the yarn. It is thus necessary to include the neps in the yarn in an evaluation.
Counting neps, Page 6/290
– Kardengarnituren, Gesamtproduktion der eingesetzten Garnituren.

70.1, Page 2/108
– Look for the cause of striated and contaminated clothings. (casings, settings, etc.)
– Check the settings in the area of the licker-in, card flats and doffer.
– Blend changes, climate, addition of waste (percentile).
– Take into account the condition of the opening rolls, the gratings of the blow room machines, and the air
conditions in the blow room.
3.28.6 Dressing the grinding drum

Note: Safety goggles must always be worn for this work.
– Interval: After grinding of 2 to 3 machines (doffer, cylinder, card flats) or with heavy contamination, the
grinding roll has to be dressed.
– Carry out default settings.

Default setting «10» of the grinding drum before dressing, Page 6/293
– Adjusting the dressing diamond.

Adjusting the dressing diamond, Page 6/293
– Dressing the grinding drum.

Dressing the grinding drum, Page 6/294
– Cleaning the grinding drum after dressing. Do not use compressed air
– Lubricating the grinding drum.
3.28.7 Schleifwalze, weitere Arbeiten

– Adjust the grinding drum
Adjust the grinding drum, Page 6/297
– Correct the clearance on the worm gear.

Correcting the play in the worm gear, Page 6/303
– Schleifstein auswechseln: Die Lebensdauer der Schleifsteine beträgt je nach Schleifintensität zirka 5
bis 15 Jahre. Ist die Schleifwalze auf ihren minimalen Durchmesser von 160 mm abgenützt, müssen die
Schleifsteine ausgewechselt werden. Diese Arbeit wird nur bei Rieter durchgeführt.
3 / 38 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

3.28.8 Grinding the cylinder (without IGS classic)

Note: Die Standzeit der Trommelgarnitur lässt sich nicht genau festlegen, ist sie doch stark vom
verarbeiteten Material und der Wartung abhängig. Die heutigen sehr feinen Garnituren sollen nur wenig,
dafür während ihrer Lebensdauer 3 bis 5 mal geschliffen werden. Die Lebensdauer richtet sich nach dem
Standard der Spinnerei
– Switch the machine off and clean it thoroughly. Larger parts caught up on the wires should be removed
with a fine blade.
– Die Trommelgarnitur visuell beurteilen.
Evaluating card clothing edges, Page 6/289
– Before using the grinding drum, let it warm-up for about minutes and, if needed, dress it first.
– Transport the grinding drum near to the card in its transport box and have the crane ready with further
auxiliary agents.
– Die Trommel vorbereiten.

Preparing the cylinder for grinding, Page 6/305
– Die Schleiflager einbauen und einstellen

Adjust the grinding bearing for grinding the cylinder, Page 6/307
– Die Schleifwalze anheben und einbauen.

Raising and installing the grinding drum, Page 6/298
– Die eingebaute Schleifwalze vor dem Schleifen einstellen.

Before grinding, adjust the parallel setting of the installed grinding drum to the cylinder, Page 6/308
– Die Trommel schleifen.

31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3 / 39

3.28.9 Grinding the doffer

Note: Die Standzeit der Abnehmergarnitur kann über derjenigen der Trommelgarnitur liegen. Der Abnehmer
wird nur dann geschliffen, wenn sich das Vlies vom Abnehmer löst oder wenn Störungen bei der Vliesüber-
gabe festgestellt werden. Bei neuen Garnituren werden beim ersten Schliff 100% der Zähne leicht angeschlif-
fen. Das Schleifen dauert insgesamt zirka 2 bis 5 Minuten.
– Before using the grinding drum, let it warm-up for about minutes and, if needed, dress it first.
– Switch the machine off and clean it thoroughly. Larger parts caught up on the wires should be removed
with a fine blade.
– Transport the grinding drum near to the card in its transport box and have the crane ready with further
auxiliary agents.
– Preparing the doffer.

Preparing the doffer for grinding, Page 6/326
– Assembling the grinding bracket.

Assemble the grinding bracket for grinding the doffer, Page 6/327
– Complete the presetting of the adjusting screw on the grinding bracket.

Adjusting screws for the grinding bracket, Page 6/300
– Raise and install the grinding drum.

– Before grinding, the grinding drum must be set parallel to the wire.
– Adjust the position of the micrometer screw

Position of the micrometer screw gauge for adjusting the grinding bracket, Page 6/301
– Before grinding, adjust the installed grinding drum.

Before grinding, adjust the parallel setting of the installed grinding drum to the doffer, Page 6/328
– Schleifdauer: Die Abnehmergarnitur wird nicht ausgeschliffen. Alle Zähne der Garnitur müssen jedoch
leicht angeschliffen sein. Das Schleifen insgesamt dauert zirka 2 bis 5 Minuten. Zwischendurch die
Garnitur mit einem Vergrösserungsglas begutachten.
– Grinding speed: The doffers are ground at their operating speed. E.g. the minimal delivery speed must
be at least 150 m/min.
– Grinding the doffer.
3.29 Trommel -und Abnehmergarnituren, Werkzeug

3.29.1 Trommel -und Abnehmergarnituren, mitgelieferte Teile für das
Aufziehen der Garnituren
– Several parts are provided to ensure the fitting tool can be used to drive the cylinder and/or the doffer.
Parts provided to be used for a clothing change, Page 6/288
3 / 40 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

3.30 Kardendeckelgarnituren bearbeiten (Vorgang bei

vorhandener Schleifmaschine in der Werkstatt)
Beschreibung des Vorgehens, wenn die Kardendeckelgarnituren in einer Werkstatt mit den entsprechenden
Bearbeitungsmaschinen (z.B. der Firma Graf) aufgezogen und bearbeitet wurden.
Neu aufgezogene Kardendeckelgarnituren sind in der Höhe unterschiedlich. Um diese Unterschiede zu
eliminieren müssen die Kardendeckelgarnituren die ausserhalb der Toleranz liegen, bearbeitet, d.h. egalisiert
werden.
3.30.1 Kardendeckelgarnituren, Vorgang bei vorhandener

Schleifmaschine
Note: Kurzbeschreibung vor der Verwendung der Kardendeckel auf der Maschine
– Die neuen Kardendeckelgarnituren wurden gemäss den Vorschriften aufgezogen (montiert).
– Alle montierten Kardendeckelgarnituren wurden ausgemessen.
– Einzelne Kardendeckelgarnituren die ausserhalb der festgestellten Toleranz liegen, auf der
Schleifmaschine (z.B. Graf DSM 20/1) auf das Mass der restlichen Kardendeckel bringen, (egalisieren)
– Die Kardendeckel anschliessend auf der Maschine montieren und gemäss den Vorschriften einstellen.
Das Sollmass an allen Einstellpunkten um 0.05 mm erhöhen. Beispiel: Anstatt auf 0.175 mm auf 0.225
mm einstellen.
– Nach einer Produktion von 10...15 Tonnen die Kardendeckelgarnituren auf der Maschine mit der Rieter
Schleifwalze egalisieren.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3 / 41

3.30.2 Kardendeckelgarnituren egalisieren

Note: Nach 10...15 Tonnen Produktion können einzelne Nadeln neugarnierter Kardendeckel - bedingt durch
die Kardierkraft - leicht aufgestellt sein. Mit dem Egalisieren werden hauptsächlich die vorstehenden Nadeln
bearbeitet und so wieder in ein enges Toleranzfeld gebracht.
– Die Schleifwalze in der Transportkiste in die Nähe der Karde transportieren und den Kran und alle weit-
eren Hilfsmittel für das Schleifen bereitstellen.
– Die Speisewalze ausschalten. Damit alle belegten Kardendeckel gereinigt werden, die Maschine erst
nach ca. 20 Minuten ausschalten.
– Die Maschine gründlich reinigen.
– Die Schleifwalze vor dem Gebrauch immer 60 Minuten warm laufen lassen, und wenn nötig zuvor ab-
richten.
– Die Maschine für das Schleifen der Kardendeckel vorbereiten..

Prepare the machine for grinding the card flats. , Page 6/318
– Die Schleifwalze einbauen und vorbereiten.

Preparing and installing the grinding drum, Page 6/320
– Die Kompensationsvorrichtung montieren.

Install the compensation device for grinding the card flats, Page 6/312
– Die Schleiflager montieren und einstellen.

Install and adjust the grinding bearings for the card flats, Page 6/314
– Die Halteplatten montieren.

Install the retaining plate for grinding the card flats, Page 6/313
– Die Riemenspannung der Kardendeckelriemen einstellen.

Setting the tension of the belt for the card flats, Page 6/319
– Die Halteplatten einstellen.

Adjust the retaining plates for the card flats, Page 6/315
– Die Parallelität der Schleifwalze einstellen.

Adjust the grinding roll parallel to the card flats, Page 6/321
– Die Kardendeckel egalisieren.

– Anschliessend die Kardendeckel an den Einstellpunkten auf das Sollmass einstellen.

3 / 42 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

3.31 Kardendeckelgarnituren bearbeiten (Vorgang ohne

vorhandene Schleifmaschine in der Werkstatt)
Neu aufgezogene Kardendeckelgarnituren sind in der Höhe unterschiedlich. Um diese Unterschiede zu
eliminieren müssen die Kardendeckelgarnituren bearbeitet, d.h. egalisiert werden.
Diese Situation beschreibt das Vorgehen, wenn die Werkstatt nicht mit Bearbeitungsmaschinen ausgerüstet
ist.
3.31.1 Kardendeckelgarnituren, Vorgang ohne vorhandene

Schleifmaschine
Note: Kurzbeschreibung vor der Verwendung der Kardendeckel auf der Maschine
– Die neuen Kardendeckelgarnituren wurden gemäss den Vorschriften aufgezogen (montiert).
– Die Kardendeckel anschliessend auf der Maschine montieren und gemäss den Vorschriften einstellen.
Das Sollmass an allen Einstellpunkten um 0.05 mm erhöhen. Beispiel: Anstatt auf 0.175 mm auf 0.225
mm einstellen.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3 / 43

3.31.2 Kardendeckelgarnituren egalisieren, Vorgang ohne vorhandene

Schleifmaschine
– Die Rieter-Schleifwalze vor dem Gebrauch immer 60 Minuten warm laufen lassen, und wenn nötig zuvor
abrichten.
– Die Maschine für das egalisieren der Kardendeckel vorbereiten..








– Die Schleifwalze für das Egalisieren zustellen. Das Schleifbild beachten.

– Um das Schleifbild zu beurteilen mindestens 20 Kardendeckel egalisieren. Nach guter Beurteilung des
Schleifbilds, mit der Schleifwalze alle Kardendeckel in zwei Umgängen egalisieren.
– Anschliessend die Kardendeckel an den Einstellpunkten auf das Sollmass einstellen.

3 / 44 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

3.32 Kardendeckelgarnituren schleifen

Im Gegensatz zum beschriebenen Egalisieren, werden abgenützte Nadeln der Kardendeckelgarnitur durch
das Schleifen wieder geschärft. Der Zeitpunkt variiert je nach Material, Produktion und Ansprüchen an die
Qualität.
3.32.1 Kardendeckel schleifen

– Die Schleifwalze vor dem Gebrauch immer 60 Minuten warm laufen lassen, und wenn nötig zuvor ab-
richten.
– Die Maschine für das Schleifen der Kardendeckel vorbereiten.








– Die Kardendeckel schleifen.

31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3 / 45

3.33 Decommissioning
3.33.1 Measures to be taken
– Bring the machine into its secure state.
– Disconnect the power supply.
– Protect the machine against unauthorized use.
– Secure the machine so that no one is placed at risk during the shutdown period.
– Protect the machine against contamination and corrosion.
3.34 Recommissioning
3.34.1 Measures to be taken
– Check all safety-relevant elements for proper functioning.
3.35 Disposal of Waste

3.35.1 Accident Prevention
Note: see "Workplace Safety" in Section 1
– The regulations relating to workplace safety must be absolutely complied with!
3.35.2 Operating Materials

– Ensure proper disposal of operating materials. Drain oil, coolant, etc.
3.35.3 Dismantling
Note: The following procedures may be done by trained specialists only who are familiar and comply with the
general safety regulations (see Section 1 and 6).
– The machine must be dismantled into units that can be safely transported.
– Hazardous machine parts that pose a risk during transport must be dismantled and safely packed.
3 / 46 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Tables
4 Tables
4.1 Tables of locations for changes
Cotton/Blends: Opening roller speeds in the card chute (50/60 Hz motor)
Card trunk settings, Page 3/18
Effects of the settings on the batt weight, Page 3/18
Gearing layout, Page 3/6
Card chute, Page 3/9
Opening roll Change point WS1 Change point WS2 Change point WS1 Change point WS2
speeds (50 Hz) (50 Hz) (60 Hz) (60 Hz)
(rpm)
850 (*) 29 52 29 62
1150 40 52 40 62
(*) Standard value
Man-made fibres: Opening roll speeds in card trunk (50/60 Hz motor)

Effects of the settings on the batt weight, Page 3/18
Card chute, Page 3/9
Opening roll Change point WS1 Change point WS2 Change point WS1 Change point WS2
speeds (50 Hz) (50 Hz) (60 Hz) (60 Hz)
(rpm)
850 (*) 29 52 29 62
1150 40 52 40 62
(*) Standard value
Change pulley WT: Cylinder speeds

Motor r.p.m.: 50 Hz = 2930 r.p.m., 60 Hz = 3530 r.p.m.
Trommeleinheit, Page 3/9
Trommeleinstellungen, Page 3/12
Cylinder speed Change pulley WT, cylinder drive
(rpm)
600 85.0
650 92.5
700 100.0
750 107.0
800 114.0
850 121.0
900 128.0
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3 / 47

Tables
CBA, cotton: Belt pulley “C” and distance between windings “X” dependent on the can diameter
Bandablage, Teile wechseln, Page 3/36
Coiler, Page 3/9
Can diameter Belt pulley “C” Distance between windings X in mm
600 117 22
750 117 24
800 117 24
1000 91 22
on the can diameter
Coiler, Page 3/9
Can diameter Belt pulley “C” Distance between windings X in mm
600 167 32
750 167 36
800 167 40
1000 175 40
CBA: Change gear “H” depends on the production

Coiler, Page 3/9
Production Change gear Change gear Change gear Change gear Change gear
(kg/h) “H” “H” “H” “H” “H”
Up to 120 kg/h 27 28 29 30 31
More than 120 kg/h 29 30 31 32 33
card
Change gears supplied: 22 / 24 / 26 / 28
Draft in feed , Page 3/10
Draft Number of teeth of change gear WE1
(-fold)
1.57 22
1.50 23
1.44 (*) 24
1.38 25
1.33 26
(*) Standard value
3 / 48 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Tables
Draft Number of teeth of change gear WE1

(-fold)
1.28 27
1.24 28
(*) Standard value
Change pulley WE4 (licker-in drive) and change pulley WT (cylinder drive): Draft (VE4) between licker-
in and cylinder
Licker-in speeds and draft, Page 3/21
Verzug zwischen Vorreisser und Trommel, Page 3/10
Draft from change Change pulley WE4, licker-in drive Change pulley WT, cylinder drive
pulleys WE4 and
WT
(-fold)
1.67 100 85.0
1.81 100 92.5
1.95 100 100.0
2.09 100 107.0
1.53 110 85.0
1.65 110 92.5
1.78 110 100.0
1.90 110 107.0
1.39 120 85.0
1.51 120 92.5
1.63 120 100.0
1.74 120 107.0
1.29 130 85.0
1.39 130 92.5
1.50 130 100.0
1.61 130 107.0
1.30 140 92.5
1.39 140 100.0
1.49 140 107.0
1.59 140 114.0
1.69 140 121.0
1.30 150 100.0
1.39 150 107.0
1.49 150 114.0
1.58 150 121.0
1.31 160 107.0
1.39 160 114.0
1.48 160 121.0
1.57 160 128.0
1.31 170 114.0
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3 / 49

Tables
Draft from change Change pulley WE4, licker-in drive Change pulley WT, cylinder drive
pulleys WE4 and
WT
(-fold)
1.39 170 121.0
1.48 170 128.0
1.32 180 128.0
1.39 180 128.0
1.32 190 128.0
1.26 200 128.0
Draft (VA2) between doffer and take-off roll

Drafts at delivery, Page 3/10
Draft Change gear WA2, take-off roll
(VA2)
(-fold)
1.08 66.9
1.12 (*) 64.5
(*) Standard value
Draft (VA4) between delivery roller and cross apron

Draft Toothed belt pulley
(VA4)
(-fold)
1.05 24
Draft (VA5) between cross apron and pulley rolls

Draft Belt pulley (diameter)
(VA5)
(-fold)
1.05 55.5 mm
3 / 50 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Tables
Draft (VA4 x VA5) between delivery rolls and disc rolls

Draft VA5 is fixed 1.05
Draft Toothed belt pulley
(VA4 x VA5)
(-fold)
1.10 24
calender rolls of the coiler (sliver deposit)
Verzüge Bandablage, Page 3/10
Effects on an altered sliver weight, Page 3/13
Draft «V» Change gear “H”
0.97 27
1.00 28
1.04 29
1.08 30
1.11 31
the calender rolls of the coiler (sliver deposit)
Verzüge Bandablage, Page 3/10
Draft «V» Change gear “H”
1.00 29
1.03 30
1.07 31
1.10 32
1.14 33
Speed of licker-in depends on change pulleys WE4

Licker diameter Ø = 253.0 mm, washer diameter: 50 Hz = 124.0 mm, 60 Hz = 150.0 mm
Vorreissereinstellungen, Page 3/11
Speed of the Change pulley WE4, Belt length (50 Hz) Belt length (60 Hz)
licker-in licker-in drive
(rpm)
1038 90 1550 mm 1590 mm
1153 100 1550 mm 1590 mm
1384 120 1590 mm 1640 mm
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3 / 51

Tables
Speed of the Change pulley WE4, Belt length (50 Hz) Belt length (60 Hz)
licker-in licker-in drive
(rpm)
1615 140 1640 mm 1695 mm
1845 160 1695 mm 1695 mm
2076 180 1710 mm 1760 mm
3 / 52 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Tables
4.2 Table, Setting depending upon material

Cylinder r.p.m. as a function of the material
Swing Karden = Mit Garnituren ausgerüstete Karden, die sowohl für Chemiefasern wie auch für Baumwolle
geeignet sind.
Trommeleinheit, Page 3/9
Material Cylinder speed
rpm
Baumwolle kardiert (Ne 15-30, Nm 25-50) 775 - 845
Baumwolle, Rotor, feiner Nummernbereich 775 - 845
Flockenmischungen Baumwolle / Chemiefasern 745 - 845
Baumwolle gekämmt (Ne ≥ 24, Nm ≥ 40) / Baumwolle kardiert, feiner Num- 630 - 810
mernbereich
Polyester / Polyester (Swing) 600 - 740
Viscose / Viscose (Swing) 600 - 740
Richtwerte Kardendeckelgeschwindigkeit
geeignet sind.
Material Kardendeckelgeschwindigkeit
Baumwolle kardiert (Ne 15-30, Nm 25-50), tiefer Schmutzgehalt 220 mm/min - 300 mm/min
Baumwolle kardiert (Ne 15-30, Nm 25-50), hoher Schmutzgehalt 300 mm/min - 400 mm/min
Baumwolle (tiefer Schmutzgehalt), Rotor, feiner Nummernbereich 220 mm/min - 300 mm/min
Baumwolle (hoher Schmutzgehalt), Rotor , feiner Nummernbereich 300 mm/min - 400 mm/min
Flockenmischungen Baumwolle (tiefer Schmutzgehalt) / Chemiefasern 220 mm/min - 300 mm/min
Flockenmischungen Baumwolle (hoher Schmutzgehalt) / Chemiefasern 300 mm/min - 400 mm/min
Baumwolle gekämmt (Ne ≥ 24, Nm ≥ 40) / Baumwolle kardiert (tiefer 230 mm/min - 330 mm/min
Schmutzgehalt), feiner Nummernbereich
Baumwolle gekämmt (Ne ≥ 24, Nm ≥ 40) / Baumwolle kardiert (hoher 300 mm/min - 400 mm/min
Schmutzgehalt), feiner Nummernbereich
Polyester / Polyester (Swing) 240 mm/min - 290 mm/min
Viscose / Viscose (Swing) 220 mm/min - 270 mm/min
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 3 / 53

Tables
4.3 Tables of technological parts

Table, Change pulley WE4 dependent on the material
Licker-in unit, Page 3/9
Material Material
Baumwolle / Baumwolle Baumwolle Swing / Blends Man-made
Rotorgarn Ringgarn Ringgarn fibres
kardiert gekämmt
Change pulley WE4 140 120 90 100 100
160 (*) 140 (*) 100 120 (*) 120 (*)
180 160 (*) 120 (*) 140
140
(*) Standard value
3 / 54 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Part 4
Maintenance
Part / Page
1 Overview of special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 1
2 Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 3
3 Explanations for maintenance and intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 5
4 Service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 7
5 Break-in instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 13
6 Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 15
7 Cleaning / Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 21
8 Lubricant Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 45
9 Standard lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 47
10 Special lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 49
11 Lubrication points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 51
No. of pages 54
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4/I

Maintenance
4 / II Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02
Maintenance
Contents
Part / Page

2.1 Safety precautions during cleaning work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 3
2.2 Safety precautions during lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 3
3 Explanations for maintenance and intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 5

4 Service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 7
4.1 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 7
4.2 Cylinder and card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 11
4.2.1 Cylinder unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 11
4.2.1.1 Cylinder grinding system IGS-classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 11
4.2.2 Card flats unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 11
4.2.2.1 IGS-top card flats unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 11
5 Break-in instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 13
6 Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 15
6.1 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 15
6.2 Coiler (sliver deposit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 18
6.3 Grinding roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 19
6.4 Frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 19
7 Cleaning / Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 21
7.1 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 21
7.1.1 Interval As required per need / situation (Cyclic, repeat regularly): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 21
7.1.1.1 Cleaning the feed duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 21
7.1.1.2 Clean the light barriers at the card trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 22
7.1.1.3 Removing blockages in the area of the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 23
7.1.1.4 Remove any material deposited in the card trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 23
7.1.2 Interval 1-8 Operating hours (Cyclic, repeat regularly): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 24
7.1.2.1 Cleaning the delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 24
7.1.2.2 Cleaning the stripping blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 24
7.1.3 Interval 165 Operating hours (Cyclic, repeat regularly): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 25
7.1.3.1 Check and clean the filter box. (only with separate disposal of the licker-in waste) . . . . . . . . . 4 / 25
7.1.3.2 Check and clean all suction points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 26
7.1.3.3 Cleaning the cross-members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 26
7.1.3.4 Cleaning the machine left and right completely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 27
7.1.4.1 Cleaning the delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 28
7.1.4.2 Cleaning the doffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 29
7.1.4.3 Clean the area of the card flats return point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 30
7.1.4.4 Cleaning the delivery roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 30
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4 / III

Maintenance
Part / Page
7.1.5 Interval 2000 Operating hours (Cyclic, repeat regularly): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 31

7.1.5.1 Clean the filter box (only with separate disposal of the licker-in waste). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 31
7.1.5.2 Clean the cover trim below the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 32
7.1.5.3 Suction duct below the pulley rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 33
7.1.5.4 Cleaning the carding profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 33
7.1.5.5 Clean the cylinder interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 34
7.1.5.6 Clean clearer roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 34
7.1.5.7 Clean card flats heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 35
7.1.5.8 Visually inspect the deflection rolls of the card deflection. Clean if soiled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 36
7.1.5.9 Clean belts and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 37
7.1.6.1 Clean condensation trap of pressure regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 38
7.1.7.1 Lubricating the cylinder bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 39
7.1.8 Interval 16000 Operating hours (Cyclic, repeat regularly): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 39
7.1.8.1 Check motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 39
7.1.9 Interval Service life (One time only after commissioning): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 40
7.1.9.1 Feed roll drive in the card trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 40
7.1.9.2 Feed roll drive in the licker-in unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 40
7.2 Coiler (sliver deposit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 41
7.2.1.1 CBA: Cleaning the area of the calender rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 41
7.2.1.2 Cleaning the guiding tube of the can turntable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 41
7.2.2.1 Cleaning the revolving plate and can plate drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 42
7.2.3 Interval Service life (One time only after commissioning): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 42
7.2.3.1 Cyclo gearbox for drive of revolving coiler plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 42
7.3 Grinding roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 43
7.3.1 Interval After dressing the grinding roll (Cyclic, repeat regularly): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 43
7.3.1.1 Lubricate grinding roll (after dressing grinding roll) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 43
7.3.2.1 Lubricating the grinding drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 44
7.4.1.1 Cleaning the housing of the frequency inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 44
8 Lubricant Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 45
9 Standard lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 47
10 Special lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 49
11 Lubrication points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 51
4 / IV Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
Overview of special tools
1 Overview of special tools

Brush
For cleaning the suction tube in the range of the
card
Hand fillet
For cleaning the doffer.
Handles
Are used for removing or installing the cover trim
below the feed roller in the licker-in
Nippers
Special pair of nippers to remove the retaining clips
Card flats installation aid

Auxiliary tools for card flats installation
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4/1

Maintenance
Setting auxiliary aids for card flats

Auxiliary aid used to press the card flat against the
cylinder arch
Grease gun
Lubrication of lubricating nipple
Capacity per pump stroke 0.333 cm³
Note: The capacity without counter-pressure is 0.5

cm³
Brush roll
For cleaning the guide tube in the revolving plate of
the coiler (sliver deposit).
4/2 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
Safety precautions
2 Safety precautions
2.1 Safety precautions during cleaning work
Safety precautions
Switch off main switch Q10 and secure with padlock.
All jobs requiring these security measures are indicated by an appropriate symbol on the particular page.
Inflammable fuel
If inflammable cleaning agents are used in the spinning mill, their flash point should be above 55ºC.
2.2 Safety precautions during lubrication

Remove any drops of oil and other lubricants on the floor immediately to prevent all risk of slipping and falling.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4/3

Maintenance
Safety precautions
4/4 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
Explanations for maintenance and intervals
3 Explanations for maintenance and intervals

Maintenance necessity
Periodic maintenance is a prerequisite for long life time.
Periodic maintenance avoids unnecessary down time.
Maintenance targets
To keep equipment in good conditions with a minimum of problems .
To avoid interruptions by preventing measures
Pay backs of organised maintenance

Maintenance may be scheduled and labour requirements anticipated
Not sufficient maintenance or poorly organised maintenance:

Problems will arise at any time, avoidable loss of production will be encountered
Correct cleaning procedures

Cleaning must be done in a timely manner and at the right place
Correct lubrication procedures

Lubrication procedures must be done in a timely manner with proper lubricant at the right place and in the
right amount
To be able to lubricate properly it is necessary to have good equipment and exact operational scheduling
Preparations require that machines and equipment are in appropriate conditions
Personnel must be trained and familiar with the task on hand.
Adapt maintenance schedules to operating conditions

Maintenance schedules depend upon material, trash content, air condition, and operating conditions
The recommended maintenance schedules are mere proposals to be changed according to local conditions
Intervals
There are intervals which are valid either only once or at cyclical intervals
The unique ones are only to be used after the first installation and start-up. This can apply to the whole ma-
chine or to an individual element. For example, should a newly fitted belt needed to be re-stretched after a
certain running time.
Cyclical tasks must be performed repeatedly.
For example, after a running time of 660 hours, the 165, the 330 and the 660 maintenance work must be car-
ried out.
In 3 shift operation, the following intervals correspond to the quoted times.
165 operating hours = 1 week
330 operating hours = 2 weeks
660 operating hours = 4 weeks
2000 operating hours = 3 months
Maintenance planning
The maintenance schedule serves as overview for this.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4/5

Maintenance
Explanations for maintenance and intervals
The maintenance schedule is given in tabular form and lists the intervals at which the different maintenance
work is required.
The maintenance plan permits a detailed customer-specific maintenance schedule to be drawn up.
The work description is referenced for each piece of maintenance work.
For service specialists who carry this work out on a routine basis, this need to refer to a work description is no
longer necessary.
The tabulated column "Values" gives the service specialist details of the lubrication points.
The tabulated column "Values" contains a summary of the most important data on the corresponding lubrica-
tion points.
1. Location designation of the lubrication points
2. Number of lubrication points, for example the number of lubricating nipples = 8.
3. Lubricant information, e.g. EP2
4. Lubricant type, e.g. "grease"
5. Lubricant quantity, e.g. 3 pump strokes per lubricating nipple.
4/6 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
Service life
4 Service life
4.1 Card
Service life of carding elements (cotton)
Q
t
A 0 130 240 340 430 500
B 0 210 390 550 700 800
C 0 250 460 650 820 950
D 0 280 540 760 950 1100
1 x xxx xxx xxx xxx y
1a x IGS-top y
2 xx IGS-classic y
3 xx xxx xxx xxx xxx y
4 y / oo y / oo y / oo y / oo y / oo
5 y / oo
6 y / oo
7 y y
7a 2200t=y
8 y
9 1100t=y
A Production of finely combed yarns (Ne 1 Card flats (without IGS-top)

50-180)
1a Card flats (with IGS-top)
B Production of coarsely combed yarns
2 Cylinder (clothing)
(Ne 20-50)
3 Doffer (clothing)
C Production for carded yarns
4 Pre-carding zone (carding elements and
D Production for open-end yarns
mote knives)
Q Quality standard of spinning mill
5 Post-carding zone (carding elements
t Production in tons and mote knives)
X Erstes Egalisieren der Kardendeckel- 6 Licker-in(s) (carding elements and mote
garnitur (Nach 10...15 Tonnen Produk- knives)
tion)
7 First licker-in (clothing)
XX Levelling/Activation of cylinder and/or
doffer clothing 7a First licker-in (needles)
XXX Sharpening / Grinding of clothings 8 Second and third licker-in (clothing)
OO Examine mote knives; replace damaged 9 Clothing of rollers, card flats cleaning
mote knives
Y Replace elements/clothings
Alle Garnituren und Kardierelemente der Karde sind einem Verschleiss unterworfen. Sie sollen, gemäss den
Richtlinien der Garniturhersteller, geschliffen oder ersetzt werden. Alle Elemente arbeiten zusammen und
unterstützen den Kardierprozess. Sie lösen an den Fasern haftenden Schmutz und öffnen Fasernissen. Je
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4/7

Maintenance
Service life
Q
t
A 0 130 240 340 430 500
B 0 210 390 550 700 800
C 0 250 460 650 820 950
D 0 280 540 760 950 1100
1a x IGS-top y
2 xx IGS-classic y
5 y / oo
6 y / oo
7 y y
7a 2200t=y
8 y
9 1100t=y
besser der Zustand der einzelnen Elemente ist, desto besser ist die Wirkung. Durch einen guten Zustand der
Elemente kann sich auch die Standzeit verlängern. In der Verarbeitung von Baumwolle ist das Ausmass und
das Fortschreiten des Verschleisses von verschiedenen Faktoren abhängig. Es sind dies das verarbeitete
Fasermaterial und der Schmutzgehalt, die Vorauflösung in der Putzerei und im Kardeneinlauf, die
Einstellungen zur Trommelgarnitur und die Produktionshöhe. Bei der Verarbeitung von Chemiefasern gelten
im wesentlichen die gleichen Einflussgrössen. Anstelle des Schmutzgehaltes hat dann die Avivage der
Fasern grossen Einfluss auf den Verschleiss der Elemente.
Service life of mote knives If carding elements
are exchanged, then
the mote knives must
also be examined.
Replace damaged
mote knives .
4/8 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
Service life
Service life of carding elements (man-made fibres)
Q
t
E 0 280 540 760 950 1100
1a x IGS-top y
2 xx IGS-classic y
5 y / oo
6 y / oo
7 y y
7a 2200t=y
8 y
9 1100t=y
E Production of carded and open-end 2 Cylinder (clothing)

yarns
3 Doffer (clothing)
Q Quality standard of spinning mill
4 Pre-carding zone (carding elements and
t Production in tons mote knives)
X Erstes Egalisieren der Kardendeckel- 5 Post-carding zone (carding elements
garnitur (Nach 10...15 Tonnen Produk- and mote knives)
tion)
6 Licker-in(s) (carding elements and mote
XX Levelling/Activation of cylinder and/or knives)
doffer clothing
7 First licker-in (clothing)
XXX Sharpening / Grinding of clothings
7a First licker-in (needles)
OO Examine mote knives; replace damaged
mote knives 8 Second and third licker-in (clothing)
Y Replace elements/clothings 9 Clothing of rollers, card flats cleaning
1 Card flats (without IGS-top)
1a Card flats (with IGS-top)
All clothings and carding elements are subject to wear. They are to be ground or replaced according to manu-
facturers’ guidelines. All elements operate together and support the carding process. The better the condition
of the individual elements, the higher the efficiency. The service life is longer if the elements are kept in good
condition. The same factors also apply essentially when processing man-made fibres. Instead of the degree
of soiling, the lubricant on the fibres then has a significant influence on the wear of the elements.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4/9

Maintenance
Service life
Q
t
E 0 280 540 760 950 1100
1a x IGS-top y
2 xx IGS-classic y
5 y / oo
6 y / oo
7 y y
7a 2200t=y
8 y
9 1100t=y
Service life of carding The service lives

elements (man-made fibres) depend on the raw
material and
quality
requirements of
the spinning mill.
Service life of mote knives If carding elements
are exchanged,
then the mote
knives must also
be examined.
Replace damaged
mote knives .
4 / 10 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
Service life
4.2 Cylinder and card flats

4.2.1 Cylinder unit
4.2.1.1 Cylinder grinding system IGS-classic

Service life of the IGS-classic grinding stone
The IGS-classic grinding stone becomes worn during the service life of the cylinder clothing. The correct op-
eration of the IGS classic can no be guaranteed if, during replacement of the cylinder clothing, the grinding
stone is not replaced too.
Schleifstein IGS-classic Replace grinding stone
when the cylinder
clothing is replaced
4.2.2 Card flats unit
4.2.2.1 IGS-top card flats unit

IGS-top grinding brush service life
The IGS-top grinding brush is subject to wear; proper functioning of the brush is no longer guaranteed after
extended use
IGS-top grinding brush Replace grinding brush
when heavily worn
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4 / 11

Maintenance
Service life
4 / 12 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
Break-in instructions
5 Break-in instructions
Special running-in instructions have to be followed during the running-in period, i.e. the period after the initial
commissioning.
All lubrication points must be lubricated prior to the initial commissioning.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4 / 13

Maintenance
Break-in instructions
4 / 14 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
Maintenance schedule
6 Maintenance schedule
6.1 Card
Interval As required per need / situation (Cyclic, repeat regularly):
Component name Task Values See
Card chute Cleaning the feed duct 4/21
Clean the light barriers at the 4/22
card trunk
Removing blockages in the 4/23
area of the feed roller
Remove any material depos- 4/23
ited in the card trunk.
Interval 1-8 Operating hours (Cyclic, repeat regularly):

Delivery Cleaning the delivery 4/24,
4/28
Mote knife for top and bot- Cleaning the stripping blade 4/24
tom delivery roller
Interval 165 Operating hours (Cyclic, repeat regularly):

Licker-in unit Check and clean the filter 4/25
box. (only with separate dis-
posal of the licker-in waste)
Card Check and clean all suction 4/26
points
Form building of cylinder Cleaning the cross-members 4/26
unit
Card Cleaning the machine left 4/27
and right completely

Delivery Cleaning the delivery 4/24,
4/28
Take off unit Cleaning the doffer 4/29
Card flats unit Clean the area of the card 4/30
flats return point
Delivery rolls Cleaning the delivery roller 4/30
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4 / 15

Maintenance

Card Controlling and tensioning 6/20
tooth belts
Licker-in drive Tauten the licker-in belts 6/84
Cylinder drive Tensioning cylinder belts 6/99
Feed roll drive Tensioning chains 6/41
Tensioning chains 6/41
Licker-in unit Clean the filter box (only 4/31
with separate disposal of the
licker-in waste).
Feed roll unit Clean the cover trim below 4/32
the feed roller
Disc roller-unit of fleece Suction duct below the pulley 4/33
collection rolls
Cylinder unit Cleaning the carding profile 4/33
Clean the cylinder interior 4/34
Clean clearer roller 4/34
Card flats unit Clean card flats heads 4/35
Visually inspect the deflec- 4/36
tion rolls of the card deflec-
tion. Clean if soiled.
Card Clean belts and chains 4/37

Pneumatic unit Clean condensation trap of 4/38
pressure regulator

Cylinder Lubricating the cylinder bear- Cylinder bearings, 2 4/39
ings EP 2, Grease, 2 - 3 Strokes of the pump
Card lubrication points, Location
number: 1, Page 4/51
Card flats Lubricating blocks for the 6/194
sliding surfaces of the card
flats

Card Check motors 4/39
4 / 16 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
Interval Service life (One time only after commissioning):

Feed roll Feed roll drive in the card Feed roll drive , Card trunk 4/40
trunk In accordance with manufacturer’s spe-
cifications, In accordance with manufac-
turer’s specifications, Lifetime lubrica-
tion (ex works)
Feed roll Feed roll drive in the licker-in Feed roll drive, Licker-in unit 4/40
unit In accordance with manufacturer’s spe-
tion (ex works)
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4 / 17

Maintenance
6.2 Coiler (sliver deposit)

Calender roller of sliver CBA: Cleaning the area of 4/41
deposit the calender rollers
Coiler of sliver deposit Cleaning the guiding tube of 4/41
the can turntable

Can table of sliver deposit Cleaning the revolving plate 4/42
and can plate drives
CBA-1000: Change gear Tensioning toothed belt for 6/281
H change «H»
Coiler of sliver deposit Tensioning the v-belt for the 6/279
coiler drive
Can table of sliver deposit Tighten V-belt of can plate 6/257
drive
Interval Service life (One time only after commissioning):

Coiler drive Cyclo gearbox for drive of Cyclo gearbox, Coiler 4/42
revolving coiler plate In accordance with manufacturer’s spe-
tion (ex works)
4 / 18 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
6.3 Grinding roll

Interval After dressing the grinding roll (Cyclic, repeat regularly):
Card grinding drum Lubricate grinding roll (after Traversing gears, 3 4/43
dressing grinding roll) EP 2, Grease, 2 Strokes of the pump
Grinding drum lubrication points,
Location number: 1, Page 4/53

Card grinding drum Lubricating the grinding drum Traversing gears, 4 4/44
EP 2, Grease, 2 Strokes of the pump
Grinding drum lubrication points,
Location number: 2, Page 4/53
6.4 Frequency converter

Frequency converter Cleaning the housing of the 4/44
frequency inverter

Frequency converter Regenerating the replace- 6/335
ment frequency converter

Frequency converter Replacing the frequency con- 6/336
verter
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4 / 19

Maintenance
4 / 20 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
Cleaning / Lubrication
7 Cleaning / Lubrication
Purpose of cleaning
Regular maintenance and constant cleaning of the machine contribute towards trouble-free operation.
Use of cleaning agents

Natural residue from cotton, such as honeydew, is best cleaned off with a cleaning rag and hand-warm water.
Residue from lubricants and deposits from synthetic fiber material are best cleaned with a solvent that does
not attack rubber and paint. e.g. use cleaning alcohol or water with a grease-dissolving general-purpose
cleaner
Use a high-powered industrial vacuum cleaner to remove dust and fly. The suction nozzle must be fitted with
a plastic tip.
After cleaning, the least volatile cleaning agents such as kerosine, white spirit, must be blown out of the anti-
friction bearings, using clean compressed air and without rotating the bearing.
Caution
Unauthorised conversions or modifications are not allowed, as there is then no guarantee that the machine
will function correctly.
7.1 Card
7.1.1 Interval As required per need / situation (Cyclic, repeat regularly):
7.1.1.1 Cleaning the feed duct
– Take care with completely fibre-adhesion free

surfaces and transitions.
– The transitions (2) must not hinder material fly.
O.K
2 1
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4 / 21

Maintenance
7.1.1.2 Clean the light barriers at the card trunk

Preparatory work
– Switch off the doffer
Sequence of steps
– Carefully bring the carrier with the light barrier
(1) towards the front.
– Remove window (2) and clean.
2
1
4 / 22 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
7.1.1.3 Removing blockages in the area of the feed roller

Note: A tail pulled off inside the fibre transport system can lead to a blockage in the area of the feed roller.
DANGER
2 1 the feed roller.
– Switch off the fibre transport system.
– Stop the card (cylinder).
3 – Open window (2) and clean out the material

above the feed roll.
– Hold the blue push-button (1) depressed for a
few seconds. The feed roll (3) turns
backwards. As a result, the jammed material is
transferred from feed roll (3).
Note: If the blue push-button (1) is pressed
too long, it may damage the seals on feed roll
(3).
– If the blue push-button is pressed too long, it

may damage the seals on the feed roll.
– Remove the material and repeat the operation

until there is no material left between the fee
roller and the feed plate.
7.1.1.4 Remove any material deposited in the card trunk.
1
2
– Remove the cover (2) and clean the channel (1).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4 / 23

Maintenance
7.1.2 Interval 1-8 Operating hours (Cyclic, repeat regularly):
7.1.2.1 Cleaning the delivery
STOP
– Use the cleaning materials shown in the figure to clean out the delivery.
Note: Switch off before cleaning the delivery. Consequently, the materials used cannot be drawn into the
delivery.
7.1.2.2 Cleaning the stripping blade
2
STOP
1
– Operate the lever (2) on the left side of the machine.
– The stripping blades (1) are raised and can then be cleaned carefully over their entire width using a cloth.
4 / 24 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
7.1.3 Interval 165 Operating hours (Cyclic, repeat regularly):
7.1.3.1 Check and clean the filter box. (only with separate disposal of the licker-in
waste)
WARNING
2 3
– Looking through the sight glass (1), inspect the filter cloth (2) using a torch.
Note: Remove any accumulated material (3) in the area of the filter cloth (2). For this, the filter box has
to be pulled out of the machine.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4 / 25

Maintenance
7.1.3.2 Check and clean all suction points

WARNING
– Clear blockages and clean suction tubes.

Brush, Page 4/1
7.1.3.3 Cleaning the cross-members
1 1
– Remove any material that may have accumulated on the cross-members (1) beneath the card-flat deflec-
tion space.
4 / 26 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
7.1.3.4 Cleaning the machine left and right completely

WARNING
– Cleaning the machine generally.
– Clean IGS-classic
– Clean IGS-top
– Clean the licker-in drive.

– Clean the cylinder drive.
– Clean the doffer and delivery drive.
– Clean the cross-apron.
– Clean the space under the licker-in.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4 / 27

Maintenance
7.1.4.1 Cleaning the delivery
STOP
– Use the cleaning materials shown in the figure to clean out the delivery.
Note: Switch off before cleaning the delivery. Consequently, the materials used cannot be drawn into the
delivery.
4 / 28 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
7.1.4.2 Cleaning the doffer

DANGER
Do not touch anything within range of a rotating doffer.
The cleaning of the doffers must only be carried out by trained staff.
– Check the doffer for soiling and, depending on its condition, clean the doffer wire as per regulations.

– Remove the suction tube above the doffer.
– Remove the sheet metal cover (1).
– Switch the doffer into slow motion.

– Clean the doffer clothing in sections by hand with hand card (2) starting at the side.
Note: Cleaning is completed with a few turns of the doffer.
Hand fillet, Page 4/1
Carefully push down with hand card (2) for a few seconds.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4 / 29

Maintenance
7.1.4.3 Clean the area of the card flats return point

WARNING
– Inspect the entire area of the card flats return

points for soiling and clean, if necessary.
7.1.4.4 Cleaning the delivery roller

WARNING
– In the case of cotton containing honeydew or

man-made fibers with a large brightener con-
STOP tent, clean with a water- dampened cloth.
4 / 30 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
7.1.5.1 Clean the filter box (only with separate disposal of the licker-in waste).
WARNING
1 2
– Pull the filter box (1) out of the machine and clean using a vacuum cleaner.
– During cleaning, inspect the condition of the filter cloth (2).

Note: A damaged filter cloth (2) must be replaced. The correct function of the suction system can no
longer be guaranteed if the filter cloth (2) is damaged.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4 / 31

Maintenance
7.1.5.2 Clean the cover trim below the feed roller

WARNING
Preparatory work
– The task of cleaning the cover trim requires particular attention, since it has to be removed for cleaning
purposes.
Removing the cover trim below the feed roller, Page 6/59
Sequence of steps
– Use lukewarm water and a cloth for cleaning the cover trim (1).
Note: The cover trim cleaning interval can be extended should it remain clean after the prescribed inter-
val has lapsed.
Finishing
– Install the cover trim as specified after it has been cleaned.
Installing the cover trim below the feed roller, Page 6/61
4 / 32 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
7.1.5.3 Suction duct below the pulley rolls

WARNING
– Remove the suction duct cover on the

left-hand side of the machine.
– Use a flashlight to check the suction duct for
leftover material.
Clean if necessary.
7.1.5.4 Cleaning the carding profile

WARNING
Preparatory work
– Remove the carding profile
Removing carding profiles, Page 6/119
Sequence of steps
– Check and clean the napper wires (1).
Note: The carding profiles (2) may not be in-
terchanged. That means that each carding
profile must be replaced back into the location
from which it was removed. Then, no readjust-
ment is necessary.
2 1
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4 / 33

Maintenance
7.1.5.5 Clean the cylinder interior

WARNING
– Clean the cylinder interior using a vacuum

cleaner.
7.1.5.6 Clean clearer roller

WARNING
– Remove any possible lap from around the

clearer roller.
Note: Use compressed air
STOP
4 / 34 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
7.1.5.7 Clean card flats heads

WARNING
– Check for soiling and clean if necessary.
STOP – Use a vacuum cleaner, dry cloths or similar

items for cleaning.
Note: Do not ever use a cleaning agent or a
lubricant on the contact surfaces of the card
flats heads.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4 / 35

Maintenance
7.1.5.8 Visually inspect the deflection rolls of the card deflection. Clean if soiled.
Preparatory work
– Swivel out the electrical box on the left-hand side of the machine to ensure you can see the deflection
rolls of the card flats.
– Observe the deflection rolls on the left-hand side. Use a flashlight to watch the deflection rolls on the
right-hand side. They have to turn together with the card flats.
– If a deflection roll stops, or if it turns irregularly or jerkily, the card flats will have to be removed to clean
the respective deflection roll.
Remove the card flats, Page 6/180
– Remove soiled, non-turning deflection roll.

Remove card flats deflection roll, Page 6/173
Note: Non-turning deflection rolls may adversely affect the service life of the planetary gear of the card flats
drive.
Sequence of steps
– Clean soiled deflection rolls until they turn again freely.
Finishing
– Reinstall all removed parts.
Install card flats, Page 6/181
4 / 36 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
7.1.5.9 Clean belts and chains

WARNING
3m
m
– Cleaning the belts and chains.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4 / 37

Maintenance
7.1.6.1 Clean condensation trap of pressure regulator

WARNING
If the compressed air system is under pressure, it is a potential source of danger. Compressed
air may be discharged and react explosively.
Persons may suffer injury as a result.
The pneumatic system must also be depressurised for repair and maintenance work!
Preparatory work
– Shut off compressed air supply.
– Remove the condensation trap.

Remove condensation trap, Page 6/249
Sequence of steps
– Clean the condensation trap (1) with water,
soapy water or similar neutral cleansing
agents.
4 / 38 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
7.1.7.1 Lubricating the cylinder bearings

WARNING
– Lubricate the bearings on both sides of the

machine.
Medium: EP 2
Quantity: 2 - 3 Strokes of the pump
Location number: 1
Place: Cylinder bearings
Card lubrication points, Page 4/51
7.1.8.1 Check motors
– Check the condition of all motors. (condition of fans, noises of bearings)
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4 / 39

Maintenance
7.1.9 Interval Service life (One time only after commissioning):
7.1.9.1 Feed roll drive in the card trunk

Note: The feed roll drive is lifetime lubricated according to manufacturer specifications.
– Neither open nor relubricate the feed roll drive.

Medium: In accordance with manufacturer’s specifications
Quantity: Lifetime lubrication (ex
works)
Location number: 2
Place: Feed roll drive
7.1.9.2 Feed roll drive in the licker-in unit

Note: The feed roll drive is lifetime lubricated according to manufacturer specifications.
– Neither open nor relubricate the feed roll drive.

works)
Location number: 5
Place: Feed roll drive
4 / 40 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
7.2 Coiler (sliver deposit)

7.2.1.1 CBA: Cleaning the area of the calender rollers

WARNING
– Remove contamination using a vacuum

cleaner.
– Remove any jammed material using the roller
picker.
7.2.1.2 Cleaning the guiding tube of the can turntable

WARNING
– If any blockages occur in the guiding tube of

the can turntable, these must be cleaned out
using the cleaning brush (1) provided.
Brush roll, Page 4/2
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4 / 41

Maintenance
7.2.2.1 Cleaning the revolving plate and can plate drives

WARNING
– Remove contamination using a vacuum

cleaner.
– Remove any jammed material using the roller
picker.
7.2.3 Interval Service life (One time only after commissioning):
7.2.3.1 Cyclo gearbox for drive of revolving coiler plate

Note: This Cyclo gearbox is lifetime lubricated according to manufacturing specifications.
– Neither open nor relubricate the Cyclo gearbox.

works)
Location number: 6
Place: Cyclo gearbox
4 / 42 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
7.3 Grinding roll

7.3.1 Interval After dressing the grinding roll (Cyclic, repeat regularly):
7.3.1.1 Lubricate grinding roll (after dressing grinding roll)

Preparatory work
– Clean all lubricating nipples before lubricating.
Sequence of steps
1 2
1 2 3x 2 4x
1
EP 2
2x
4 3 2
– The three lubricating nipples (1) of the traversing gears must be lubricated after every dressing.
Medium: EP 2
Quantity: 2 Strokes of the pump
Location number: 1
Place: Traversing gears
Grinding drum lubrication points, Page 4/53
Finishing
– Clean all lubricating nipples after lubricating.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4 / 43

Maintenance
7.3.2.1 Lubricating the grinding drum

Preparatory work
– Clean all lubricating nipples before lubricating.
Sequence of steps
– Lubricate the four lubricator nipples (2) for the bearings, the eccentric and the worm gear
Note: If the bearings (3) are lubricated, the lubricating nipple must first be inserted into the correspond-
ing bearing.
Medium: EP 2
Quantity: 2 Strokes of the pump
Location number: 2
Place: Traversing gears
Grinding drum lubrication points, Page 4/53
Finishing
– Clean all lubricating nipples after lubricating.

7.4.1.1 Cleaning the housing of the frequency inverter
WARNING
When the main switch is on, elements
located beyond this are still live.
Prior to commencing electrical install-
ation work, switch off the machine via
the main switch and secure the switch
with a padlock.
– Clean the entire surface of the housing with a
vacuum cleaner.
4 / 44 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
Lubricant Manufacturer
8 Lubricant Manufacturer
Lubricant Manufacturer Name
EP 2 AGIP GR MU EP 2
AVIA AVIALITH 2 EP
BP ENERGREASE LS EP-2
CASTROL SPHEEROL EPL 2
ExxonMOBIL MOBILUX EP2
KLÜBER MICROLUBE GBU-Y 131
LAGERMEISTER LAGERMEISTER TS
OPTIMOL LONGTIME PD2
PETRO CANADA PRECISION GENERAL PURPOSE EP 2
SHELL ALVANIA EP (LF) 2
TEXACO MULTIFAK EP2
VALVOLINE MULTIPLEX SG - 2
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4 / 45

Maintenance
Lubricant Manufacturer
4 / 46 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
Standard lubricant
9 Standard lubricant
Code Designation Viscosity DIN ISO Description
EP 2 Grease Viscosity of the basic oil KP2G-20 EP grease, lithium soap
100-250 (51825) or equivalent thickener,
penetration; 260 -310,
NLGI class 2.
Lead-soap-based or
phosphorus-sulphur-
based high-pressure
additives or equivalent
EP additives. Ageing
protection, anti-rust
additives. Does not
damage bronze.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4 / 47

Maintenance
Standard lubricant
4 / 48 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
Special lubricant
10 Special lubricant
Code Designation Viscosity Description
In ac- In accordance with In accordance with manu- Lifetime lubrication (ex works)
cord- manufacturer’s spe- facturer’s specifications
ance with cifications
manu-
facturer’s
specifica-
tions
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4 / 49

Maintenance
Special lubricant
4 / 50 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
Lubrication points
11 Lubrication points
Card lubrication points
2
3
4
6
1 5
Loc- Place Number Medium Quantity Special tools

ation
num-
ber
1 Cylinder bearings 2 EP 2 2 - 3 Strokes of the pump Grease gun,
Page 4/2
2 Feed roll drive Card In accord- Lifetime lubrication (ex works)
trunk ance with
manu-
facturer’s
specifica-
tions
3 Cleaning brush drive Card flat In accord- Lifetime lubrication (ex works)
cleaning ance with
manu-
facturer’s
specifica-
tions
4 Card flats drive Card In accord- Lifetime lubrication (ex works)
flats ance with
drive manu-
facturer’s
specifica-
tions
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4 / 51

Maintenance
Lubrication points
2
3
4
6
1 5

ation
num-
ber
5 Feed roll drive Licker-in In accord- Lifetime lubrication (ex works)
unit ance with
manu-
facturer’s
specifica-
tions
6 Cyclo gearbox Coiler In accord- Lifetime lubrication (ex works)
ance with
manu-
facturer’s
specifica-
tions
4 / 52 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
Lubrication points
Grinding drum lubrication points
1 2
1 2 3x 2 4x
1
EP 2
2x
4 3 2

ation
num-
ber
1 Traversing gears 3 EP 2 2 Strokes of the pump Grease gun,
Page 4/2
2 Traversing gears 4 EP 2 2 Strokes of the pump Grease gun,
Page 4/2
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 4 / 53

Maintenance
Lubrication points
4 / 54 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Maintenance
Part 5
Troubleshooting
Part / Page
2 Operator interface panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 3
3 Error not displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 37
No. of pages 38
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 5/I

Troubleshooting
5 / II Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02
Troubleshooting
Contents
Part / Page

2 Operator interface panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 3
2.1 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 3
2.2 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 33
3 Error not displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 37

3.1 Card chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 37
3.1.1 The first card trunk is not filling correctly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 37
3.1.2 Poor filling of the card trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 37
3.1.3 The material separation is poor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 37
3.1.4 Poor feed of material into the feed plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 37
3.1.5 The feed plate must be dismantled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 37
3.2 Cylinder grinding system IGS-classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 38
3.2.1 The grinding stone in the grinder of the IGS classic does not move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 38
3.3 CAN IO module CX408 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 38
3.3.1 LED "status" on module CX408 does not light up green . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 38
3.4.1 Frequency inverter, no reaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 38
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 5 / III

Troubleshooting
5 / IV Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02
Troubleshooting
instructions

instructions
What is Part 5 for ?
Part 5 helps in discovering the cause of a fault and remedying it.
What information is contained in Part 5 ?

Part 5 lists the causes of faults and gives information about remedying them.
When does Part 5 need to be consulted?

When a fault is displayed on the machine with an error code or in the case of faults which cannot be recog-
nised by the machine.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 5/1

Troubleshooting
structions
5/2 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Troubleshooting
Operator interface panel
2 Operator interface panel

2.1 Malfunction
Code Designation Cause Remedy
Reaction/consequences
200 FatalError(), see logbook Software running error Note message in data screen 31.30
Switching off the main switch.
Contact Rieter Service
201 Control module CX408 Node dial switch adjusted Adjust node dial switch correctly
fault/defect. A31 incorrectly
No power supply Plug not plugged in
No data transfer CAB bus not connected
Machine or options incor- Configure the machine correctly.
rectly configured 43.1, Page 2/102
Correctly configure options
43.2, Page 2/103
43.2, Page 2/103
43.2, Page 2/103
43.2, Page 2/103
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 5/3

Troubleshooting

208 Control, overheating A10 Excess temperature in Lower the ambient temperature
the vicinity of the control Replace operator interface panel
unit
210 Data loss maintenance data Software running error Acknowledge the error and restart the
A10 machinery.
211 Data loss Shift data A10 Software running error Acknowledge the error and restart the
machinery.
212 Data loss remanent data A10 Software running error Acknowledge the error and restart the
machinery.
213 Data loss Logbooks A10 Software running error Acknowledge the error and restart the
machinery.
214 Data loss statistiks data A10 Software running error Acknowledge the error and restart the
machinery.
215 Data loss grafik data A10 Software running error Acknowledge the error and restart the
machinery.
240 Fault relay, card EMERG.- Error relay K21.1/K21.2 Check emergency stop relay in the
OFF, stick.K21 electrics panel. Possibly replace
Monitoring watch dog re- Check emergency stop relay in the
lay does not disengage electrics panel. Possibly replace
without power
Wrong wiring Check wiring.
241 Fault relay, card EMERG.- Error relay K21.1/K21.2 Check emergency stop relay in the
OFF,switch K21 electrics panel. Possibly replace
Monitoring emergency Check emergency stop relay in the
stop relay does not switch electrics panel. Possibly replace
242 Fault relay, card doors, sticking Error relay K22.1/K22.2 Check relay K22.1/2 in the electrics
K22 panel. Possibly replace
Doors monitoring card, Check relay K22.1/2 in the electrics
relay K22.1/2 does not panel. Possibly replace
disengage without power
243 Fault relay, card doors, switch- Error relay K22.1/K22.2 Check relay K22.1/2 in the electrics
ing K22 panel. Possibly replace
Doors monitoring card, Check relay K22.1/2 in the electrics
relay K22.1/2 does not panel. Possibly replace
disengage without power
244 Fault relay, coiler covers stick- Fault, K66 relay, coiler Check relay K66 in the electrics panel.
ing K66 covers Possibly replace
Cover monitoring, K66 Check relay K66 in the electrics panel.
relay does not drop out in Possibly replace
a de-energised state
245 Fault relay, coiler cover switch- Fault, K66 relay, coiler Check relay K66 in the electrics panel.
ing K66 covers Possibly replace
5/4 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Troubleshooting

245 Fault relay, coiler cover switch- Cover monitoring, K66 Check relay K66 in the electrics panel.
ing K66 relay does not switch Possibly replace
246 Fault relay, watch-dog, sticking Error relay K20 Check relay K20 in the electrics panel.
K20 Possibly replace
Monitoring watch dog re- Check watch dog relay K20 in the elec-
lay does not disengage trics panel. Possibly replace
without power
247 Fault relay, watch-dog, switch- Error relay K20 Check relay K20 in the electrics panel.
ing K20 Possibly replace
Watch dog relay does not Check watch dog relay K20 in the elec-
switch trics panel. Possibly replace
250 EMERG.-OFF button, card S8 Emergency shutdown Release the emergency shutdown but-
button locked ton.
251 EMERG.-OFF button, coiler S1 Machine cannot start Release the emergency shutdown but-
ton.
252 Door safeguard, driving side, Open doors and covers Close the doors and covers (drive).
card S18 (drive)
253 Coiler, hood open S15 Cover open Close hood.
254 Lockswitch, flat service, ON S6 Key-operated switch is Turn key switch to position «I».
in position "II" (grind card
flats)
255 Lockswitch, flat service, OFF Key is in position “I”. (Ap- Turn key switch to position «II».
S6 pears only if the operating
mode “Grind card flats” is
selected on data screen
81.3, or if the operating
mode “Test IGS-top” is
selected on data screen
85.2)
257 Relay monitoring, EMERG.- Emergency stop relay Check emergency stop relay in the
OFF, card K21 disengaged electrics panel. Possibly replace
258 Relay monitoring, card doors Doors monitoring, relay Check the K22 relay in the electrical
K22 disengaged control cabinet. Replace if necessary
260 Blowroom not ready At least one blow-room Correct possible error on the corres-
machine is not running. ponding machine and start the blow
room.
Firm alarm system has Confirm fire alarm and start the plant up
been actuated again.
The rotary switch for ma- Switch on the rotary switch for the ma-
terial feed for the line at terial feed for the line.
the blow room indicator
board is not switch on
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 5/5

Troubleshooting

260 Blowroom not ready The filter installation is not Put the filter installation back into ser-
running. vice.
261 Production, creep speed, Indicator that the machine The warning appears 30 seconds be-
stopped produces at crawl speed fore the time shown in data screen
40.35 runs out. Production stops when
this set time has run out.
262 Ends down B7 Card sliver torn Draw in the card sliver.
263 Relay monitoring, watch-dog Watch dog relay disen- Check watch dog relay K20 in the elec-
K20 gaged trics panel. Possibly replace
Error relay K20 Check relay K20 in the electrics panel.
Possibly replace
264 MPS on, test programs The motor protection Turn on the motor protection switch
switch «Q15» is not on. «Q15» and turn off all other motor pro-
tection switches.
267 Alarm, Sliverguard USG Incorrect Sliverguard ad- Make adjustments and alignments ac-
justments cording to the Sliverguard instructions.
Material remains on the Clean and adjust the tongue.
tongue Adjusting the distance from the
tongue to the cylinder, Page 6/117
Incorrect draft in delivery Check draft between take-off roll and
section delivery roll.
Adjust draft for take-off roll /
delivery rolls, Page 6/210
Poor lap feed Check the lap feed.
Infeed draft is too great Reduce the infeed draft.
Bad wires Check the wires. Possibly grind or re-
place them.
Visual checking and assessment
of the cylinder wire, Page 6/289
Delivery contaminated Clean the delivery.
Cleaning the delivery, Page 4/24,
4/28
270 D95K communication shut- No response from D95K- Check the A1, B1, C1 and C2 LEDs on
down CAN A20 2 module the D95K-2 module.
Check the connections of the CAN bus.
The A1 LED on the Check the power supply
D95K-2 module does not
light up
The C2 LED on the Check the CAN connection with the op-
D95K-2 module lights up erator interface panel
or flashes
271 D95K fault, software version Wrong software version Replace module
A20 Changing D95K-2 module,
Page 6/252
Consult RIETER-Service
5/6 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Troubleshooting

272 D95K data loss CAN CAN bus connections are Check the connections of the CAN bus.
not in order
The C2 LED on the Check the CAN connection with the op-
D95K-2 module lights up erator interface panel
or flashes
273 D95K fault, PROM checksum Wrong check sum of the Replacing D95K-2 module
A20 program, program is des- Changing D95K-2 module,
troyed Page 6/252
Hold a consultation with RIETER Ser-
vice
274 D95K parameter fault, CAN Defective SRAM compon- Replacing D95K-2 module
A20 ent Changing D95K-2 module,
Page 6/252
vice
294 D95K fault, SRAM error A20 Defective SRAM compon- Replacing D95K-2 module
ent Changing D95K-2 module,
Page 6/252
vice
305 Card A% value overshoot B6 Material remains on the Clean and adjust the tongue.
Fleece is dropping off the Check the condition of the doffer.
doffer, or is being sucked Visual checking and assessment
off of the cylinder wire, Page 6/289
Grinding the doffer.
4/28
Card has passed the A% Check the cut-off limit values
value 22.1, Page 2/86
306 Card CV value overshoot B6 Material remains on the Clean and adjust the tongue.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 5/7

Troubleshooting

306 Card CV value overshoot B6 Infeed draft is too great Reduce the infeed draft.
place them.
4/28
Stop limit values incorrect Check the cut-off limit values
22.2, Page 2/86
307 Card spectrogram overshoot Bad wires Check the wires. Possibly grind or re-
B6 place them.
Bearing damage or mech- Replacing parts.
anical damage to parts
which come into contact
with material
Problem with a toothed Check the toothed belt and possibly
belt replace it.
Draft is not correct Check the draft.
Stop limits Check the cut-off limit values
22.3, Page 2/87
312 Card, slubs exceeded B6 Material remains on the Clean and adjust the tongue.
Infeed draft is too great Reduce the infeed draft.
place them.
4/28
Stop limit values incorrect Check the cut-off limit values
22.2, Page 2/86
321 Slide carrier to end position B9 Sliver deposit can truck Push the can truck into the end position.
is not in the end position
when the main switch is
switched on
5/8 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Troubleshooting

321 Slide carrier to end position B9 Wrong magnetic switch Check magnetic switch.
Notes on the magnetic limit
switches on the pneumatic
cylinder, Page 6/267
Fault in the pneumatic Check pneumatic and valve Y6
system
323 Carrier malfunction B9 B10 Can truck in wrong posi- Check the magnetic limit switch.
tion Adjusting the magnetic limit
switches B9, Page 6/268
Adjust magnetic limit switch B10,
Page 6/269
The can truck is jammed.
The pull strap for the carriage drive is
torn.
Changing and tightening the drive
tape for the can trolley,
Page 6/273
Check the pneumatics.
Adjusting the throttle valves for the
pneumatic cylinder of the can
trolley, Page 6/272
324 Empty can missing S11 Missing spinning can Slide in an empty can.
326 Coiler motor overheated M1 Storage motor gets too Check the entire drive of the sliver de-
warm posit for ease of operation.
327 Prod. can missing, rod switch Missing spinning can un- Carry out a correct can change.
fault S11 der the turntable
No signal from the rod Check the rod switch.
switch
328 Rod sw.or carrier drive belt de- Base draft is too small Reset draft in data screen 41.1.
fect S11
362 Fault, sliver separation B13 No compressed-air to Check the compressed-air connections.
the pneumatic cylinder
of sliver cutting
Locking rod jammed Defective pneumatic cylinder.
Magnetic limit switch set incorrectly or
defective.
Adjust sliver cutting, production
and material dependent
adjustments, Page 6/277
363 Fault, sliver separation B13 No compressed-air to Check the compressed-air connections.
the pneumatic cylinder
of sliver cutting
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 5/9

Troubleshooting

363 Fault, sliver separation B13 Locking rod jammed Defective pneumatic cylinder.
Magnetic limit switch set incorrectly or
defective.
390 MPS doffer/delivery Q11 Q12 The motor protection Check the drive for ease of motion.
switch has been triggered
The motor protection Check / replace the motor.
switch keeps being
triggered
391 MPS doffer/delivery on Q11 The motor protection The motor protection switches must
Q12 switches are still switched not be engaged when testing the digital
on outputs.
82.3, Page 2/115
392 MPS card feed roll/clean.brush The motor protection Check the drive for ease of motion.
Q10 Q14 switch has been triggered
switch keeps being
triggered
393 MPS card f.roll/clean.br. on The motor protection The motor protection switches must
Q10 Q14 switches are still switched not be engaged when testing the digital
on outputs.
82.3, Page 2/115
396 Delivery motor, max. speed R.p.m. measuring device Adjust correctly the proximity switch for
reached M12 is not functioning correctly assessing the delivery speed.
Adjusting the proximity switch for
the delivery speed, Page 6/222,
6/245
Replace the proximity switch which as-
sesses the delivery speed.
Check the wiring of the proximity switch
B3 for assessing the delivery speed.
Replace the D95K-2 module of the con-
trol system.
Changing D95K-2 module,
Page 6/252
Driving belt is error-prone Check the drive belt in the delivery and
replace if necessary.
5 / 10 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Troubleshooting

397 Delivery motor, min. speed R.p.m. measuring device Adjust correctly the proximity switch for
reached M12 is not functioning correctly assessing the delivery speed.
6/245
Replace the proximity switch which as-
sesses the delivery speed.
Check the wiring of the proximity switch
B3 for assessing the delivery speed.
Replace the D95K-2 module of the con-
trol system.
Page 6/252
398 Card feed roll, max. speed Lap in the feed is too light Increase the batt weight.
reached M10 Adjust the lap weight by the
position of the card trunk wall,
Page 6/27
trunk, Page 6/29
Lap feed is irregular.
Feed scanner is not cor- Adjust the feed scanner correctly.
rectly adjusted Replace the feed scanner.
Adjust transducer in feed,
Page 6/65
399 Delivery speed too high B3 Delivery speed is too high Correctly set proximity switch or replace
6/245
Replace proximity switch.
Check the wiring of the proximity
switch.
Delivery speed is too high Replace the D95K-2 module of the con-
trol system.
Page 6/252
400 Delivery speed too low B3 The delivery speed is too The delivery unit is blocked.
low
Delivery speed is too high Correctly set proximity switch or replace
6/245
Replace proximity switch.
switch.
401 Doffer rotating speed too low Delivery is not easy Check the delivery for ease of action
B4 enough and jammed material in the delivery
area
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 5 / 11

Troubleshooting

401 Doffer rotating speed too low Setting of the proximity Check the setting of the proximity
B4 switch is not correct switch.
Adjust the proximity switch to
monitor the doffer speed,
Page 6/218
switch.
Module D95K defective Replace module D95K in the control
system.
402 Feed roll, foreign body B5 Feed scanner has re- Remove the foreign bodies included
gistered foreign bodies between feed plate and feed roller.
Turn the feed roller backwards,
Page 2/48
Check feed area.
Carry out a functionality test on the
scanner in the feed.
Page 6/65
Setting for extraneous Check setting for the cut-off threshold
material set too sensit- and correct, if necessary.
ively 41.2, Page 2/97
403 Scanner batt cable breakage No signal from the feed Cable break to the scanner.
B5 plate scanner Check wiring.
Carry out a functionality check of the
scanner.
Page 6/65
Incorrect sliver weight at Adjust correctly the sliver weight at
crawl speed crawl speed. (data screen 41.1)
trunk, Page 6/29
404 Scanner sliver, cable breakage Current circuit to distance Check wiring.
B6 measuring system in de-
livery broken
The functioning of the dis- Carry out a functionality test of the dis-
tance measuring system tance measuring system in the delivery.
in the delivery is not cor- Check position transducer of sliver
rect autoleveller (delivery section),
Page 6/240
D95K-2 module defective Replacing D95K-2 module
Page 6/252
5 / 12 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Troubleshooting

405 Batt feeder lap too light B5 The lap in the feed is too Widen the card trunk depth by adjusting
light the card trunk wall.
Adjust the lap weight by the
Page 6/27
Adjust the light barriers on the card
trunk.
trunk, Page 6/29
Feed scanner not cor- Adjust the feed scanner correctly.
rectly adjusted or defect- Adjust transducer in feed,
ive Page 6/65
Replace the feed scanner.
406 Batt feeder lap too heavy B5 Lap in the feed is too Reduce the card trunk depth by adjust-
heavy ing the card trunk wall.
Page 6/27
Adjust the light barriers on the card
trunk.
trunk, Page 6/29
rectly adjusted or defect- Adjust transducer in feed,
ive Page 6/65
Replace the feed scanner.
407 Sliver weight too light B6 Disc roller width 9 mm (15 Sliver weight too light. Reset draft in
mm): Sliver weight less data screen 41.1.
than 3.4 ktex (6.0 ktex) Incorrect correction factor. Adjust to
1,000 and re-determine the sliver
weight.
trunk, Page 6/29
Poor air ratio in the deliv- Adjust the air ratio in the delivery better
ery so that no fleece is exhausted.
Adjust correctly the scanner in the deliv-
ery.
Calibrating the distance measuring
system in the delivery, Page 6/241
Scanner in delivery is defective.
Feed blocked by lap Clean feed.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 5 / 13

Troubleshooting

408 Sliver weight too heavy B6 Disc roller width 9 mm Reset draft in data screen 41.1, so that
(15 mm): Sliver weight the card sliver can be drawn in.
greater than 15 ktex (25 Adjust the correction factor to 1,000 and
ktex) re-determine the sliver weight.
trunk, Page 6/29
The scanner in the deliv- Adjust correctly the scanner in the deliv-
ery is either not adjusted ery.
or is defective Calibrating the distance measuring
Replace the scanner in the delivery.
409 Scanner sliver, min. level cntrl. Card sliver is too light Reset draft in data screen 41.1.
B6 Incorrect sliver weight at Adjust correctly the sliver weight at
trunk, Page 6/29
The measured value of Adjust correctly the scanner in the deliv-
the distance measuring ery.
system in the card de- Calibrating the distance measuring
livery stays in the lower system in the delivery, Page 6/241
range for too long
Scanner in the delivery is defective.
410 Scanner sliver, max. level cntrl. Card sliver is too heavy Reset draft in data screen 41.1.
B6 Incorrect sliver weight at Adjust correctly the sliver weight at
trunk, Page 6/29
The measured value of Adjust correctly the scanner in the deliv-
the distance measuring ery.
system at the delivery Calibrating the distance measuring
of the card stays in the system in the delivery, Page 6/241
upper range for too long
Scanner in the delivery is defective.
411 Controll. sliv. wght. under- Undermodulation for a Reduce lap weight at the feed area.
compens. specific control time un- Properly set the transducer in the feed.
der extreme draft ratios
Page 6/65
Card trunk wall adjust- Reduce the card trunk depth by adjust-
ment ing the card trunk wall.
Page 6/27
ery is not correctly adjus- ery.
ted Calibrating the distance measuring
5 / 14 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Troubleshooting

412 Controll. sliv. wght. Overmodulation for a spe- The web does not adhere to the dof-
over-compens. cific control time under fer or is partially suctioned off. Reduce
extreme draft ratios suction and check doffer.
Properly set the transducer in the deliv-
ery.
Base draft is too small Reset draft in data screen 41.1.
417 Error, card configuration (43.1) Machine or options incor- Configure the machine correctly.
43.2, Page 2/103
Incorrect type of coiler Configure the coiler (sliver deposit) cor-
(sliver deposit) selected rectly.
43.1, Page 2/102
423 Doffer motor has reached max. Target speed is too high Increase the draft in the delivery sec-
speed M11 for the doffer motor tion.
41.1, Page 2/96
Reduce the delivery speed.
10.1, Page 2/75
424 Doffer motor speed too slow Target speed is too low Reduce the draft in the delivery section.
M11 for the doffer motor 41.1, Page 2/96
Increasing the speed in crawl speed
mode
41.30, Page 2/141
440 MPS chute drives Q42 Q43 The motor protection Check the drive for ease of motion.
switch keeps being
triggered
441 MPS chute drives on Q42 Q43 The motor protection The motor protection switches must
switches are still switched not be engaged when testing the digital
on outputs.
82.3, Page 2/115
442 Chute is empty B42 Light barrier or wiring is Check / clean the card trunk light barri-
not in order ers.
Check wiring.
Card trunk runs empty Check the preceding feeder machine.
Remove any malfunctions in the blow-
room. If there is no longer a malfunc-
tion, the card trunk will be filled
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 5 / 15

Troubleshooting

443 Aerofeed no material The card trunk cannot be Check the AEROfeed plant.
filled Check the card trunk for fibre accumu-
lation.
444 Chute opening roller speed too Opening roll speed in the Increase the r.p.m. of the opening
low B44 card trunk was too low for roller.
a short time Changing the r.p.m. of the
opening roller, Page 6/55
Check the opening roller for lap.
Adjust correctly the proximity switch for
speed monitoring.
monitoring the r.p.m. of the
Replace the proximity switch for speed
monitoring.
Page 6/252
445 Chute opening roller blocked Opening roller does not Check the opening roller for lap.
B44 rotate or the r.p.m. is too Check the feed roller for lap.
low
Increase the r.p.m.
Changing the r.p.m. of the
Set proximity switch for speed monitor-
ing correctly.
monitoring.
Page 6/252
446 Chute opening roller start-up Opening roll in the card Check the opening roller for lap.
speed B44 trunk does not reach the Check the feed roller for lap.
speed
Increase the r.p.m.
Set proximity switch for speed monitor-
ing correctly.
monitoring.
5 / 16 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Troubleshooting

446 Chute opening roller start-up D95K-2 module defective Replacing D95K-2 module
speed B44 Changing D95K-2 module,
Page 6/252
447 Chute opening roller over- Drive, opening roll, card The maximum torque of the motor has
heated M42 trunk overheated been exceeded.
Tension the belts and clean the belt
pulley.
Controlling and tensioning tooth
belts, Page 6/20
Check the opening roller for easy run-
ning.
451 Chut open. roller r.p.m. too Incorrect change pulleys Install the correct combination of
high B44 were fitted change pulleys.
Proximity switch is defective
452 Chute door open S40 Right-hand door is open Close door.
Adjust the limit switches.
453 MPS chute feed roll Q41 The motor protection Check the drive for ease of motion.
switch keeps being
triggered
454 MPS chute feed roll on Q41 The motor protection The motor protection switches must
switches are still switched not be engaged when testing the digital
on outputs.
82.3, Page 2/115
455 MPS cylinder/licker-in Q1 Q13 The motor protection Check the drive for ease of motion.
switch keeps being
triggered
456 MPS cylinder/licker-in on Q1 The motor protection The motor protection switches must
on outputs.
82.3, Page 2/115
457 Cylinder speed above 999 /min Cylinder r.p.m. too high Apply correct change gear for the cylin-
B1 der drive
Inverter defective Replace cylinder inverter.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 5 / 17

Troubleshooting

458 Cylinder proximity switch de- Proximity switch reports Wait for 15 minutes if the main switch is
fective B1 a non-plausible speed switched on.
change Adjust proximity switch for monitoring
the cylinder.
Adjust the proximity switch for
monitoring the cylinder speed,
Page 6/104
Replace proximity switch for monitoring
the cylinder.
Check wiring.
Page 6/252
459 Cylinder speed too high B1 Incorrect change applied, Apply correct change gear for the cylin-
for machines with drum der drive
frequency converter
460 Cylinder speed too low B1 Cylinder r.p.m. below the clean the cylinder covered with mater-
adjusted value ial.
Check the running of the cylinder in
terms of ease of action.
Clean the belt pulley.
Tauten belt.
Turn the cylinder by hand and then re-
set after the malfunction.
Adapt the cylinder shut-off limit. (Data
screen 41.2)
461 Cylinder below production Cylinder speed less than Cleaning belt pulleys.
speed B1 390 r.p.m. Tauten belt.
Tensioning cylinder belts,
Page 6/99
Adjust proximity switch for monitoring
the cylinder
Page 6/104
the cylinder
5 / 18 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Troubleshooting

462 Cylinder does not start up B1 Proximity switch, cylinder Driving belt dropped in front of the belt
without pulse pulley.
Remove carding elements from the pre-
and post-carding zones and allow the
blocked cylinder to rotate again (only let
the card flats run).
Changing the carding elements in
the area of the cylinder,
Page 6/132
Check wiring.
Page 6/252
463 Cylinder coasting, prox. Power interrupt after es- Wait for 15 minutes if the main switch is
sw.fault B1 tablishing proximity switch switched on.
failure Adjust proximity switch monitoring.
Page 6/104
the cylinder.
Page 6/252
464 Cylinder fails to remain station- The cylinder proximity Adjust proximity switch for monitoring
ary B1 switch does not signal the the cylinder.
cylinder still-stand Adjust the proximity switch for
Page 6/104
the cylinder.
Page 6/252
465 Draft licker-in/cylinder too small Draft for licker-in drum is Increase cylinder r.p.m.
lower than 1.15 Lower the licker-in r.p.m.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 5 / 19

Troubleshooting

466 Licker-in proximity switch de- Proximity switch With the main switch engaged, wait 4
fect. B9 announces implausible minutes before opening the covers.
r.p.m. changes in the Check parts in the range of the licker-in
licker-in unit for ease of motion.
Clean belt pulleys.
Tighten belts
Set proximity switch for monitoring the
licker-in(s).
monitoring the licker-in speed,
Page 6/86
the licker-in(s).
Page 6/252
467 Licker-in rot. speed not R.p.m. of licker-in not Cleaning belt pulleys.
reached B9 achieved Tauten belt.
Tauten the licker-in belts,
Page 6/84
Check parts in the region of the licker-in
group for easy motion.
the licker-in speed.
Page 6/86
Page 6/252
468 Licker-in blocked B9 R.p.m. of licker-in too low Cleaning belt pulleys.
Tauten belt.
Page 6/84
Page 6/86
5 / 20 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Troubleshooting

469 Licker-in rotating speed too low R.p.m. of licker-in too low Cleaning belt pulleys.
B9 Tauten belt.
Page 6/84
Page 6/86
470 Congestion, flat cleaning B11 Reinigung der Oberfläche im Absaugrohr reinigen.
Kardendeckel, Reflexlichtschranke im Absaugrohr rein-
Absaugrohr verstopft igen.
Zustand der Reinigungsbürsten über-
prüfen.
Reflexlichtschranke im Absaugrohr ein-
stellen.
Reflex light barrier for monitoring
the suction of the card flats waste,
Page 6/168
Defaultwert Erkennung Störung kontrol-
lieren.
41.32, Page 2/143
471 Flat alignment faulty B8 Skew running belts of the Bring the card flats back into line.
card flats Adjust the proximity switches of the
card flats on left and right.
monitoring the smooth running of
the card flats., Page 6/177
Check wiring.
472 Flat standstill B2 Card flats monitor signals Remove any soiling in the area of the
standstill of the card flats card flats.
Remove any loose or jammed card flats
in the area of the card flats.
Ascertain the cause of the standstill.
Adjust the proximity switch for monitor-
ing the card flats.
monitoring the smooth running of
the card flats., Page 6/177
Replace the proximity switch for monit-
oring the card flats.
473 Low suction S3 Central suction is blocked Check and clean the entire central suc-
tion.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 5 / 21

Troubleshooting

473 Low suction S3 Hose between measuring Clean the hose.
point and differential pres-
sure switch is blocked
Vacuum lower than the Differenzdruckschalter kontrollieren.
set value
Defective differential Replace the defective differential pres-
pressure switch sure switch.
Tube diameter is too Exchange tube from the central suction
small system to the machine for a larger one.
Input switch of the IO Replace the corresponding IO module.
module is defective
474 Cylinder not stopped B1 Error occurs while braking Belt is no longer on the belt pulley.
Clean the belt and the belt pulley.
Tighten if necessary.
Page 6/99
The cylinder proximity Adjust proximity switch for monitoring
switch does not signal the the cylinder.
cylinder still-stand Adjust the proximity switch for
Page 6/104
the cylinder.
475 Cylinder speed not reached B1 Cylinder speed less than Cleaning belt pulleys.
390 r.p.m. Tauten belt.
Page 6/99
the cylinder
Page 6/104
the cylinder
476 Cylinder speed not reached B1 Proximity switch, cylinder Driving belt dropped in front of the belt
without pulse pulley.
Remove carding elements from the pre-
and post-carding zones and allow the
blocked cylinder to rotate again (only let
the card flats run).
Changing the carding elements in
the area of the cylinder,
Page 6/132
Check wiring.
5 / 22 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Troubleshooting

477 Configuration fixed flats X1.3 Incorrect type of card flats The type of card flats installed was con-
A31 figured incorrectly.
43.1, Page 2/102
Incorrect wiring for option Run wire from A31 terminal X1/3 to ter-
“fixed flats” (stationary minal 301.
card flats).
478 Configuration fixed flats X1.3 Incorrect type of card flats The type of card flats installed was con-
A32 figured incorrectly.
43.1, Page 2/102
Incorrect wiring for option Run wire from A31 terminal X1/4 to ter-
“fixed flats” (stationary minal 300.
card flats).
479 Licker-in lift.cyl.pos.not Incorrect position Check mechanical default setting of lift
reached M29 cylinder
Incorrect wiring Check wiring.
Replace lift cylinder
Defective lift cylinder Replace lift cylinder
480 Licker-in lift.cylinder.ref.positon Incorrect position Check mechanical default setting of lift
M29 cylinder
Incorrect wiring Check wiring.
Replace lift cylinder
Defective lift cylinder Replace lift cylinder
482 Cylinder motor overheated M1 Cylinder motor has over- The maximum torque of the motor was
heated exceeded.
Tighten the belts and clean the belt pul-
ley.
Page 6/99
Check cylinder for smooth running.
Check the clothings condition in the
area of the cylinder
483 Licker-in rotating speed too Incorrect change pulleys Install the correct combination of
high B9 were fitted change pulleys.
Change the licker-in speed,
Page 6/83
Proximity switch is defective
Page 6/86
484 MPS, flats, drives, Q50 Q57 A motor protection switch Check the motors and rollers for ease of
Q58 has been triggered motion
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 5 / 23

Troubleshooting

485 IGS-cl. proximity sw. position IGS classic: No signal Bring the grinding equipment carriage
left B51 when the grinding equip- into the correct position (data screen
ment carriage is on the 85.1).
left-hand side of the ma- Replace proximity switch.
chine
Check wiring.
Check the setting and position of the
grinding stone.
Adjust the grinding stone if the
electrical magnet was replaced.,
Page 6/150
Check the mechanism.
Clean the interior of the IGS.
Removing the guiding sled,
Page 6/142
Defective sealing lips.
486 IGS-cl. proximity sw.position IGS classic: No signal Replace proximity switch.
right B52 when the grinding equip- Check wiring.
ment carriage is on the
Check the setting and position of the
right-hand side of the ma-
grinding stone.
chine
Page 6/150
487 IGS-classic not in park position IGS classic: Grinding Check the drive.
B52 equipment carriage not Bring the grinding equipment carriage
in the starting position to the starting position (parking position)
on the right-hand side of the machine
(data screen 85.1).
488 MPS, flats, drives on, The motor protection The motor protection switches must
Q50,Q57,Q58 switches are still switched not be engaged when testing the digital
on outputs.
82.3, Page 2/115
489 IGS-classic grindstone position The grinding stone does Check for mechanical defects in the
S53 not reach the grinding grinding stone area.
position.
The electromagnet is de- Replacing the electromagnet.
fective Remove the electromagnet,
Page 6/149
Install the electromagnet,
Page 6/149
Adjust the grinding stone if the electrical
magnet was replaced.
Page 6/150
5 / 24 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Troubleshooting

489 IGS-classic grindstone position No signal issued by the Replace and set the proximity switch.
S53 proximity switch that mon-
itors the position of the
grinding stone.
490 MPS power supply 24 VDC F2 The motor protection Check the drive for ease of motion.
The motor protection Check M29 servomotor
switch keeps being 85.7, Page 2/126
triggered Replace M29 servomotor.
Test IGS-classic Use the data screen to carry out the test
85.1, Page 2/123
491 MPS power supply 24 VDC on The motor protection The motor protection switches must
F2 switches are still switched not be engaged when testing the digital
on outputs.
82.3, Page 2/115
492 MPS IGS-top grinding drive The motor protection Check the drive for ease of motion.
Q55 switch has been triggered
switch keeps being
triggered
493 MPS IGS-top grinding drive on The motor protection The motor protection switches must
on outputs.
82.3, Page 2/115
494 IGS-classic motor fails to start Defective drive Check the drive for mechanical defects
M51 Operating pressure not Check the pneumatic lines and connec-
reached tions.
Check the operating pressure of the
card.
495 IGS-top cable breakage, curr. Cable breakage Replace cable.
meas. D55 Check the D 55 current transformer and
replace it, if necessary.
Page 6/252
496 IGS-top grinding force too high Setting the grinding brush Check the position of the grinding
brush.
Check the position of the grinding
brush, Page 6/201
Check the current consumption.
Check current consumption (with
grinding brush contact on the card
flats clothing), Page 6/199
497 Malfunction suction licker-in S9 Central suction is blocked Check and clean the entire central suc-
tion.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 5 / 25

Troubleshooting

497 Malfunction suction licker-in S9 Hose between measuring Clean the hose.
point and differential pres-
sure switch is blocked
Vacuum lower than the Differenzdruckschalter kontrollieren.
set value
Defective differential Replace the defective differential pres-
pressure switch sure switch.
Tube diameter is too Exchange tube from the central suction
small system to the machine for a larger one.
Input switch of the IO Replace the corresponding IO module.
module is defective
500 Chute f.roll FC parameter in- Inverter programming Power supply switch off-on
correct U41 defective Check the terminating resistor of the
Reaction CAN bus
The fault messages are Set or wire the terminators.,
identical for all frequency Page 6/345
converters used. The electrical
Inverter defective Replace inverter.
designations of the affected
frequency converters are Replacing the frequency
indicated in the text display. converter, Page 6/336
(U1, U3, U10, U11, U12, Wrong inverter type fitted Fit correct inverter type.
U41,U42 and U60) Communication broken Check wiring.
off between machine and Check communication addresses.
frequency inverter Check address and baudrate
Configuring the frequency inverter,
Page 6/341
Possibly replace the communication
modules.
501 Chute f.roll Inverter programming Power supply switch off-on
FC,communicat.shutdown U41 defective Check the terminating resistor of the
CAN bus
Set or wire the terminators.,
Page 6/345
Replacing the frequency
Wrong inverter type fitted Fit correct inverter type.
Communication broken Check wiring.
Page 6/341
modules.
5 / 26 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Troubleshooting

501 Chute f.roll Converter not initialised Initialise converter
FC,communicat.shutdown U41 Setting the T1000V frequency
502 Chute f.roll FC CAN node stat. Inverter programming Power supply switch off-on
inc. U41 defective Check the terminating resistor of the
CAN bus
Page 6/345
Page 6/341
modules.
503 Chute f.roll FC mot.overcurrent Motor overloaded Check the machine part being driven
M41 U41 under light running conditions.
Motor defective Replace the motor.
504 Chute f.roll FC converter over- Load is too high. Check the load, the lengths of run-up
load U41 Ramp-up, ramp-down and run-down times and the switching-
and switching-on times on time.
are too short.
Motor overloaded Check the machine part being driven
under light running conditions.
Belts insufficiently ten- Tauten belt. Check the belt tension.
sioned
505 Chute f.roll FC, unrecognised Load is too high. Check the load, the lengths of run-up
fault U41 Ramp-up, ramp-down and run-down times and the switching-
are too short.
Motor overloaded Check the machine part being driven
under light running conditions.
sioned
506 Chute f.roll FC, unrecognised Material has blocked or Remove material.
fault U41 jammed the drive/rollers
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 5 / 27

Troubleshooting

507 Chute f.roll FC, unrecognised The drive is interrupted Check the entire driving unit, e.g.
fault U41 whether a mechanical connection is
interrupted.
508 Chute f.roll FC conv. earth fault Short to earth due to worn Check the cabling for insulation dam-
U41 insulation or fire damage age or other damage.
509 Chute f.roll FC, unrecognised Short circuit At least 2 electrical conductors have
fault U41 short-circuited / are connected. Elimin-
ate short circuit or replace converter.
Load is too high. Check the load, the lengths of run-up
Ramp-up, ramp-down and run-down times and the switching-
are too short.
Short to earth due to worn Check the cabling for insulation dam-
insulation or fire damage age or other damage.
510 Chute f.roll FC phase Poor electrical network Check the pre-fusing of the network and
fail.p.supply U41 line power.
511 Chut.f.roll FC Mains voltage supply too Check mains voltage supply.
interm.circ.overvolt.U41 high
512 Chu.f.roll FC Short-term mains power Guarantee that the mains power supply
interm.circ.undervolt.U41 supply breakdown or the is more stable.
variations in the mains
are too high.
Mains power voltage too Check mains voltage supply.
low
Missing phase Connect missing phase.
513 Chute f.roll FC loading Charging contactor has Test switching off and switching on the
cont.faulty U41 failed power supply.
Energizing coil of the Replace the frequency inverter.
charging contactor is
burned out
514 Chute f.roll FC inter. phase Cable to motor is broken Check the wires of the cable connection
output U41 to the motor.
Connect the output terminals correctly.
Check the motor windings.
Too low motor power Check motor and frequency inverter
power.
515 Chute f.roll FC overheating, Cooling duct not connec- Kühlkanal auf Rückseite Steuerschrank
h.sink U41 ted anschliessen.
Cooling duct blocked Kühlkanal auf Rückseite Steuerschrank
reinigen.
Insufficient cooling Lower ambient temperature.
5 / 28 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Troubleshooting

515 Chute f.roll FC overheating, No heat-conductive paste Apply heat-conductive paste between
h.sink U41 has been applied inverter and heat sink.
Adjusting to the cooling system,
Page 6/342
516 Chute f.roll FC, unrecognised Motor overloaded Check the machine part being driven
fault U41 under light running conditions.
sioned
Loosen the input for the Motortemperatur und Verbindung an
excess temperature der Klemme S4/MT prüfen.
517 Chute f.roll FC, unrecognised Load is too high. Check the load, the lengths of run-up
fault U41 Ramp-up, ramp-down and run-down times and the switching-
are too short.
No retarding resistor con- Connect retarding resistor to the in-
nected verter.
518 Chute f.roll FC conv.hardware Low voltage at the control Switch off the power supply then back
fault U41 board on again.
If further problems occur, then the fre-
quency inverter must be replaced.
519 Chute f.roll FC conv.hardware Low voltage at the control Switch off the power supply then back
fault U41 board on again.
If further problems occur, then the fre-
quency inverter must be replaced.
520 Chute f.roll Charging contactor has Test switching off and switching on the
FC,fault,brake.transis.U41 failed power supply.
Retarding transistor is Replace the frequency inverter.
defective
521 Chute f.roll FC, ext.fault chain Inverter programming Power supply switch off-on
U41 defective Check the terminating resistor of the
CAN bus
Page 6/345
522 Chute f.roll FC motor overheat- Inverter programming Power supply switch off-on
ing M41 defective Check the terminating resistor of the
CAN bus
Page 6/345
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 5 / 29

Troubleshooting

CAN bus
Page 6/345
CAN bus
Page 6/345
CAN bus
Page 6/345
CAN bus
Page 6/345
527 Chute f.roll FC,fault,optional The option board is not Switch off the power supply and plug
card U41 correctly connected. the board in again.
Option board is defective Replace the options board.
528 Chute f.roll FC, unrecognised The output transistor has Check the motor and motor cable for
fault U41 been damaged by a short short circuit or insulation damage.
circuit or ground connec- Replace the frequency inverter.
tion
529 Chute f.roll FC conv.hardware Inverter programming Power supply switch off-on
fault U41 defective Check the terminating resistor of the
CAN bus
Page 6/345
5 / 30 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Troubleshooting

529 Chute f.roll FC conv.hardware Inverter defective Replace inverter.
fault U41 Replacing the frequency
Control circuit is damaged Test switching off and switching on the
power supply.
If the fault occurs again the frequency
inverter must be replaced.
Converter has not been Initialise converter
initialised following Setting the T1000V frequency
change of software or converter, Page 6/343
replacement
530 Chute f.roll FC, unrecognised Inverter programming Power supply switch off-on
CAN bus
Page 6/345
power supply.
531 Chute f.roll FC, unrecognised Circuit overshoots occur Adjust the amplification.
fault U41 R.p.m. settings are not Check r.p.m. settings and adjust them
correct correctly.
Load is too high. Check the load, the lengths of run-up
Ramp-up, ramp-down and run-down times and the switching-
are too short.
532 Chute f.roll FC, unrecognised Wiring of the impulse Check the wiring of the impulse gener-
fault U41 generator is not in order ator.
No voltage across the Check the voltage connection to the
impulse generator impulse generator.
The mechanical brake of Check whether the brake is released at
the motor is not correctly the start signal.
controlled
533 Chute f.roll FC, torque standstill Wiring of the impulse Check the wiring of the impulse gener-
U41 generator is not in order ator.
534 Chute f.roll FC, unrecognised General malfunctions Contact the RIETER Service depart-
fault U41 ment
535 Chute f.roll FC, unrecognised The inertia of the connec- Be aware that the concern here is the
fault U41 ted motor is too high. inertial load.
536 Chute f.roll FC, unrecognised No signal from the im- Check the feedback signal from the im-
fault U41 pulse generator for the pulse generator.
r.p.m. control Check the wiring.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 5 / 31

Troubleshooting

537 Chute f.roll FC conv.hardware Inverter programming Power supply switch off-on
CAN bus
Page 6/345
power supply.
538 Chute f.roll FC,fault,optional Communication broken Check wiring.
card U41 off between machine and Check communication addresses.
Page 6/341
modules.
539 Chute f.roll FC,fault,optional Communication error be- Check the wiring of the communication.
card U41 cause of signal malfunc- Check the communication arrange-
tion ments and the signals.
540 Chute f.roll FC, wrong conv. Wrong inverter type fitted Fit correct inverter type.
type U41
541 Chute f.roll FC, unrecognised Inverter programming Power supply switch off-on
CAN bus
Page 6/345
Page 6/341
modules.
5 / 32 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Troubleshooting
2.2 Warning
551 Low battery A10 Battery empty Acknowledge the error.
Replace the battery.
Change battery of control system,
Page 6/333
560 EMERG-OFF button card, Emergency stop circuit Test for emergency stop circuit cannot
EMERG-OFF tst blocked be carried out.
Emergency shutdown Release the emergency shutdown but-
button locked ton.
561 Lock doors, test EMERG-OFF Emergency stop circuit Test for emergency stop circuit cannot
circuit blocked be carried out.
Door open Close door.
Open covers Close the covers.
574 D95K Spectrogram inactive !!! Defective SRAM compon- Replacing D95K-2 module
ent Changing D95K-2 module,
Page 6/252
Consult RIETER-Service
576 Prox. switch, carrier centre de- The magnetic switch for Check magnetic switch, replace if ne-
fect B16 activation of the position- cessary
ing levers does not switch
580 Prox. switch, carrier centre de- The magnetic switch for Check magnetic switch, replace if ne-
fect B8 activation of the position- cessary
ing levers does not switch
581 Sliver cutting delay Incorrect sliver separation Set time for sliver separation
procedure Adjust sliver cutting, time at which
the piston rod extends,
Page 6/276
Incorrect sliver separation procedure
Check settings.
Check procedure settings (time out)
42.3, Page 2/100
596 Standard draft too small The fleece does not ad- The web fleece does not adhere to the
here to the doffer doffer or is partially suctioned off. Re-
duce suction and check doffer.
Adjust correctly the scanner in the deliv-
ery.
rectly adjusted Adjust transducer in feed,
Page 6/65
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 5 / 33

Troubleshooting

596 Standard draft too small Base draft is too small Reset draft in data screen 41.1.
597 Standard draft too large Base draft is too great Reduce lap weight at the feed area.
Adjust the feed scanner correctly.
Page 6/65
Card trunk wall adjust- Reduce the card trunk depth by adjust-
ment ing the card trunk wall.
Page 6/27
601 Chute photocells soiled B43 The light barrier at the Clean card trunk window
card trunk is not receiving Clean the light barriers at the card
a signal trunk, Page 4/22
Align the light barrier.
604 IGS-classic solenoid cooling Lifting magnet too hot for Wait until the lifting magnet has cooled
further cycles down.
606 IGS-cl. max. grinding cycles IGS classic: Programmed Check the cylinder wire.
reached number of grinding cycles Program additional grinding cycles as
reached long as the cylinder wire is still usable.
41.3, Page 2/99
Press on new cylinder wire. Reset data
mask.
70.1, Page 2/108
Replace the grinding stone.
Replacing the grinding stone,
Page 6/147
607 IGS-classic cycle incomplete IGS classic: Incompletely Check the pneumatics.
B51 executed grinding cycle Belt tension for grinding equipment car-
riage is too low.
Slackening and tightening the flat
belt (system with tension screws),
Page 6/146
Remove jammed material in the region
of the grinding equipment carriage belt.
5 / 34 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Troubleshooting

608 IGS-classic inactive (fault) IGS classic no longer act- Check the pneumatics.
ive Belt tension for grinding equipment car-
riage is too low.
Slackening and tightening the flat
belt (system with tension screws),
Page 6/146
Remove jammed material in the region
of the grinding equipment carriage belt.
609 IGS-top max. grinding cycles IGS top: Programmed Inspect the clothing of the card flats
reached number of grinding cycles Check the IGS top mechanics.
reached
Programme additional grinding cycles if
the clothing of the card flats can still be
used.
41.3, Page 2/99
Replace the set of card flats. Reset
data mask.
70.1, Page 2/108
Replace grinding brushes.
610 IGS-top cycle aborted Cylinder was stopped The cycle continues automatically after
during the grinding cycle starting
Motor protection switch Check IGS-top default setting.
“Q55” was triggered dur- Adjust grinding brush parallelism
ing the grinding cycle. to card flats (default setting),
Page 6/203
Adjust grinding pressure,
Page 6/205
Check IGS-top current consumption.
611 Licker-in lift. cylinder blocked Blocked lift cylinder when Check mechanics of mote knife adjust-
M29 checking in the test pro- ment mechanism. (Default setting).
gram
612 IGS-top grinding force too high Setting the grinding brush Check the position of the grinding
brush.
brush, Page 6/201
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 5 / 35

Troubleshooting

613 IGS-top grinding force too low Setting the grinding brush Check the position of the grinding
brush.
brush, Page 6/201
614 IGS-top inactive (fault) Checking states and set- Check mechanical settings.
tings Adjust grinding brush parallelism
to card flats (default setting),
Page 6/203
Adjust grinding pressure,
Page 6/205
Check the pneumatic system.
Setting the grinding brush Check the position of the grinding
brush.
brush, Page 6/201
615 Wait until flat clean.monitor. Reflexlichtschranke, Maschine wird nach einer gewissen Zeit
act. B11 Überwachung gestoppt. (Störung 470)
Absaugrohr, erhält keine Oberfläche im Absaugrohr reinigen.
Signale
5 / 36 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Troubleshooting
Error not displayed
3 Error not displayed

3.1 Card chute
3.1.1 The first card trunk is not filling correctly
Cause Remedy
The deflector as provided has not Install deflector.
been assembled. Install and adjust the deflector on the first card trunk, Page 6/23
3.1.2 Poor filling of the card trunk

Cause Remedy
Material deposited in the channel Remove the cover and clean the channel.
Remove any material deposited in the card trunk., Page 4/23
Feed duct is blocked Eliminate the bad transitions in the feed duct.
Cleaning the feed duct, Page 4/21
3.1.3 The material separation is poor

Consequences:
Poor lap formation in card trunk
The opening roller is winding
Cause Remedy
Install new opening roller The opening roller has to be replaced because of damage.
Changing the opening roller, Page 6/48
3.1.4 Poor feed of material into the feed plate

Reaction
A new feed plate is mounted as a test.
The feed roller is so badly damaged that it has to be replaced.
Cause Remedy
Replace the feed roller Replace the feed roll in card trunk, Page 6/38
3.1.5 The feed plate must be dismantled

Reaction
Before the feed roller can be removed, the feed plate must first be removed.
Cause Remedy
Removing the feed plate The feed plate is removed when the feed roller must be removed.
Replacing the feed plate, Page 6/42
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 5 / 37

Troubleshooting
Error not displayed
3.2 Cylinder grinding system IGS-classic

3.2.1 The grinding stone in the grinder of the IGS classic does not move
Cause Remedy
The guiding sled is not in its parking Bring the guiding sled into its parking position.
position on the right-hand side of the IGS test run, Page 6/141
machine
The movement is being hindered by a Check the guiding sled and possibly remove and install it again.
mechanical cause in the guiding sled. Removing the guiding sled, Page 6/142
Installing the guiding sled, Page 6/143
The diode in the socket for connect- Replace the diode.
ing to the cylinder grinding system is
defective.
The electromagnet is defective Replacing the electromagnet.
Remove the electromagnet, Page 6/149
Adjust the grinding stone if the electrical magnet was replaced.
Adjust the grinding stone if the electrical magnet was replaced.,
Page 6/150
3.3 CAN IO module CX408

3.3.1 LED "status" on module CX408 does not light up green
Cause Remedy
CAN I/O module may be faulty Check module and possibly replace.
Checking CAN I/O module CX408, Page 6/346

3.4.1 Frequency inverter, no reaction
Cause Remedy
No power Check the supply voltage and re-connect if necessary. See electrical
manual.
Hardware defective The equipment has be replaced.
The equipment has to be configured.
5 / 38 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Troubleshooting
Part 6
Part / Page
2 Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 3
3 Overview of special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 5
4 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 13
5 Card chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 23
6 Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 59
7 Cylinder and card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 97
8 Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 207
9 Covers and central systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 247
10 Sliver deposit CBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 255
11 Card-accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 287
12 Control technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 331
13 Operating and display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 349
14 Torque standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 351
No. of pages 352
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6/I

6 / II Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02
Contents
Part / Page

2.1 Safety precautions during dismantling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 3
2.2 Safety precautions during installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 3
2.3 Safety precautions during adjusting jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 3
2.4 Work safety for checking tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 3
2.5 Safety precautions during measuring jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 3

4 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 13
4.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 13
4.2 Grundeinstellungen Baumwolle und Mischungen Baumwolle / Chemiefasern bis 120
kg/h Produktion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 14
4.3 Grundeinstellungen Baumwolle und Mischungen Baumwolle / Chemiefasern über
120 kg/h Produktion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 15
4.4 Grundeinstellungen Chemiefasern und Karden Chemiefasern oder Baumwolle
(Swing) bis 120 kg/h Produktion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 16
4.5 Grundeinstellungen Chemiefasern und Karden Chemiefasern oder Baumwolle
(Swing) über 120 kg/h Produktion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 18
4.6 Controlling and tensioning tooth belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 20
4.7 Adjusting the production speed of the feeder machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 21
4.8 Adjusting the transport fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 21
5 Card chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 23
5.1 Install and adjust the deflector on the first card trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 23
5.2 Adjust the vacuum for the exhaust air (open transfer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 24
5.3 Waste transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 25
5.3.1 Measuring the vacuum for the transport air of the waste transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 25
5.3.2 Adjust the vacuum for the card suction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 26
5.4 Sliver feed trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 27
5.4.1 Adjust the lap weight by the position of the card trunk wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 27
5.4.2 Light barrier, sliver feed trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 28
5.4.2.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 28
5.4.2.2 Adjust the light barrier at the card trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 29
5.5 Removal head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 31
5.5.1 Differential pressure switch, Aerofeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 31
5.5.1.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 31
5.5.1.2 Setting the differential pressure switch (standard setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 32
5.5.1.3 Setting the fill height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 34
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / III

Part / Page
5.5.2 Slider removal head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 35

5.5.2.1 Adjusting the acceleration flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 35
5.5.2.2 Adjusting accelerating and isolating valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 36
5.6 Feed roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 37
5.6.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 37
5.6.2 Replace the feed roll in card trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 38
5.6.3 Remove the feed roll in card trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 38
5.6.4 Install the feed roll in card trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 40
5.6.5 Feed roll drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 41
5.6.5.1 Tensioning chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 41
5.7 Feed trough unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 42
5.7.1 Feed trough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 42
5.7.1.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 42
5.7.1.2 Replacing the feed plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 42
5.7.1.3 Removing the feed plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 43
5.7.1.4 Installing the feed plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 44
5.7.1.5 Adjust feed trough. (minimum distance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 45
5.7.1.6 Setting the load on the feed trough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 46
5.8 Opening roll unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 47
5.8.1 Opening roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 47
5.8.1.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 47
5.8.1.2 Changing the opening roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 48
5.8.1.3 Removing the opening roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 49
5.8.1.4 Installing opening roller and fallers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 51
5.8.1.5 Proximity switch, opening roll speed, Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 53
5.8.1.6 Adjusting the proximity switch for monitoring the r.p.m. of the opening roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 54
5.8.2 Opening roll drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 55
5.8.2.1 Changing the r.p.m. of the opening roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 55
5.9 Delivery roll unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 56
5.9.1 Delivery rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 56
5.9.1.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 56
5.9.1.2 Changing the delivery rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 56
5.9.1.3 Removing the delivery rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 57
5.9.1.4 Installing the clearing roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 58
6 Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 59
6.1 Feed roll unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 59
6.1.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 59
6.1.2 Removing the cover trim below the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 59
6.1.3 Installing the cover trim below the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 61
6.1.4 Feed roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 63
6.1.4.1 Adjusting the distance between feed roller and licker-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 63
6.1.5 Sliver regulation of the card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 64
6.1.5.1 Check transducer in feed (function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 64
6.1.5.2 Adjust transducer in feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 65
6.2 Feed plate of feed-unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 67
6.2.1 Feed trough replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 67
6.2.2 Feed trough removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 67
6.2.3 Feed trough installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 67
6.2.4 Check feed trough (condition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 68
6.2.5 Check the position of the indicators for loading the feed trough (default setting) . . . . . 6 / 69
6 / IV Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Part / Page
6.2.6 Speisemulde und Speisewalze, Klemmdistanz verändern. Distanz «B» . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 70

6.2.7 Speisemulde zu Speisewalze, Abstand einstellen (Klemmdistanz «B» eingestellt) . . . . 6 / 72
6.2.8 Torsionsstäbe, Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 74
6.2.9 Speisemulde, Belastung einstellen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 75
6.3 Licker-in unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 76
6.3.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 76
6.3.2 Changing the licker-in unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 77
6.3.3 Removing the licker-in assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 77
6.3.4 Installing the licker-in unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 79
6.3.5 Adjust the feed plate between the card trunk and the licker-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 80
6.3.6 Licker-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 81
6.3.6.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 81
6.3.6.2 Change the licker-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 81
6.3.6.3 Remove the licker-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 81
6.3.6.4 Install the licker-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 82
6.3.6.5 Adjusting the licker-in to the cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 82
6.3.7 Licker-in drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 83
6.3.7.1 Change the licker-in speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 83
6.3.7.2 Marking the licker-in belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 84
6.3.7.3 Tauten the licker-in belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 84
6.3.7.4 Adjust the proximity switch for monitoring the licker-in speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 86
6.3.8 Carding element and knife of licker-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 87
6.3.8.1 Mote knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 87
6.3.8.2 Setting the mote knives (discharge opening) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 88
6.3.8.3 Preparing the electric cylinder for mote knife setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 90
6.3.8.4 Inserting the guide plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 92
6.3.8.5 Mote knife setting (basic setting for licker-ins) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 93
6.3.8.6 Adjusting the carding elements in the licker-in range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 94
6.3.9 Form building of licker-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 95
6.3.9.1 Adjusting suction opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 95
7 Cylinder and card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 97

7.1 Cylinder unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 97
7.1.1 Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 97
7.1.1.1 Removing the tension tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 97
7.1.1.2 Installing the tension tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 98
7.1.2 Cylinder drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 99
7.1.2.1 Marking the cylinder belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 99
7.1.2.2 Tensioning cylinder belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 99
7.1.2.3 Altering the cylinder r.p.m. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 101
7.1.2.4 Use the deflection roller to load and relieve the cylinder belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 103
7.1.2.5 Cylinder speed proximity switch, Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 104
7.1.2.6 Adjust the proximity switch for monitoring the cylinder speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 104
7.1.3 Form building of cylinder unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 105
7.1.3.1 Fastening the cylinder cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 105
7.1.3.2 Information on setting distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 106
7.1.3.3 Preparing the cylinder cover for the setting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 107
7.1.3.4 Setting the cylinder covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 108
7.1.3.5 Setting the cylinder covers beneath the card-flat deflection space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 110
7.1.3.6 Fitting the mote knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 111
7.1.3.7 Removing the tongue in the range of the cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 112
7.1.3.8 Installing the tongue in the range of the cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 113
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6/V

Part / Page
7.1.3.9 Adjusting the cylinder lower section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 114

7.1.3.10 Tongues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 115
7.1.3.11 Adjusting the position of the tongue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 116
7.1.3.12 Adjusting the distance from the tongue to the cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 117
7.1.3.13 Adjust the default setting for the measuring eccenter for the tongue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 118
7.1.3.14 Removing carding profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 119
7.1.3.15 Installing carding profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 121
7.1.3.16 Setting the distances between the carding profiles and the cylinder clothing (cotton) . . . . . . 6 / 123
7.1.3.17 Setting the mote knives (cotton) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 125
7.1.3.18 Setting the extraction dimension for the mote knives (cotton) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 127
7.1.3.19 Setting the distances between the carding profiles and the cylinder clothing (cotton) . . . . . . 6 / 130
7.1.3.20 Setting the carding profiles at the doffer section (man-made fibre) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 131
7.1.3.21 Changing the carding elements in the area of the cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 132
7.1.3.22 Removing the carding elements in the area of the cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 133
7.1.3.23 Install carding elements in the cylinder area into the supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 134
7.1.4 Cylinder grinding system IGS-classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 135
7.1.4.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 135
7.1.4.2 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 135
7.1.4.3 Removing the grinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 137
7.1.4.4 Installing the grinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 138
7.1.4.5 Pressure reduction valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 138
7.1.4.6 Configuring the IGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 139
7.1.4.7 Changing the prescribed service life of the cylinder clothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 139
7.1.4.8 IGS test run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 141
7.1.4.9 Removing the guiding sled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 142
7.1.4.10 Installing the guiding sled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 143
7.1.4.11 Removing the rubber sealing profiles for the flat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 144
7.1.4.12 Fitting rubber sealing profiles for flat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 145
7.1.4.13 Slackening and tightening the flat belt (system with tension screws) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 146
7.1.4.14 Ensuring straight running of the flat belt (system with tension screws) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 147
7.1.4.15 Replacing the grinding stone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 147
7.1.4.16 Removing the grinding stone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 148
7.1.4.17 Installing the grinding stone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 148
7.1.4.18 Remove the electromagnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 149
7.1.4.19 Install the electromagnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 149
7.1.4.20 Adjust the grinding stone if the electrical magnet was replaced. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 150
7.2 Card flats unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 152
7.2.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 152
7.2.2 Removing the card flats unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 152
7.2.3 Installing the carding flats unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 156
7.2.4 Card flats cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 157
7.2.4.1 Removing and disassembling the cleaning unit for the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 157
7.2.4.2 Standard setting for the cleaning roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 161
7.2.4.3 Contact depth setting for the PW1 cleaning roller with respect to the clothing of the card
flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 163
7.2.4.4 Setting the stripping knife for the PW1 cleaning roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 164
7.2.4.5 Setting the stripping knife for the PW2 stripping roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 165
7.2.4.6 Setting the coupling between the motor and the cleaning brush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 167
7.2.4.7 Reflex light barrier for monitoring the suction of the card flats waste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 168
7.2.5 Card flats set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 169
7.2.5.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 169
7.2.5.2 Removing the belts for the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 170
7.2.5.3 Installing the belts for the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 171
6 / VI Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Part / Page
7.2.5.4 Tension belt of the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 172

7.2.5.5 Remove card flats deflection roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 173
7.2.5.6 Activating the card flats drive (setting, grinding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 174
7.2.5.7 Activating the card flats drive (for setting the proximity switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 176
7.2.5.8 Adjust the proximity switch for monitoring the smooth running of the card flats. . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 177
7.2.5.9 Card flats, Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 179
7.2.5.10 Change card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 179
7.2.5.11 Remove the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 180
7.2.5.12 Install card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 181
7.2.5.13 Fitting the tool used for subjecting card flats to load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 184
7.2.5.14 Adjust the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 185
7.2.5.15 Setting the deflection for the card flats on the feed and delivery sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 192
7.2.5.16 Set the cleaning brush for the sliding surfaces of the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 193
7.2.5.17 Lubricating blocks for the sliding surfaces of the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 194
7.2.5.18 Change the holding clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 194
7.2.5.19 Remove the retaining clips of the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 195
7.2.5.20 Install the retaining clips of the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 196
7.2.6 IGS-top card flats unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 197
7.2.6.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 197
7.2.6.2 Install grinding brush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 198
7.2.6.3 Check current consumption (with grinding brush contact on the card flats clothing) . . . . . . . 6 / 199
7.2.6.4 Check the position of the grinding brush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 201
7.2.6.5 Information on the IGS-top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 202
7.2.6.6 Adjust grinding brush parallelism to card flats (default setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 203
7.2.6.7 Adjust grinding pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 205
7.2.6.8 Settings in the data masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 206
8 Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 207
8.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 207
8.2 Changing the doffer group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 207
8.3 Removing the doffer group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 208
8.4 Installing the doffer group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 209
8.5 Take off unit of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 210
8.5.1 Adjust draft for take-off roll / delivery rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 210
8.5.2 Setting rollers and clearer roller in the doffing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 211
8.5.3 Adapt the position of the lower delivery roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 213
8.5.4 Adjusting the fleece bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 215
8.5.5 Take off unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 216
8.5.5.1 Adjusting the doffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 216
8.5.5.2 Adjust the proximity switch to monitor the doffer speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 218
8.5.6 Delivery rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 219
8.5.6.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 219
8.5.6.2 Changing rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 219
8.5.6.3 Removing rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 220
8.5.6.4 Installing rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 221
8.5.6.5 Adjusting the pressure of the stripping blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 221
8.5.6.6 Adjusting the proximity switch for the delivery speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 222
8.6 Fleece collection of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 223
8.6.1 Cross apron of fleece collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 223
8.6.1.1 Changing the cross-apron. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 223
8.6.1.2 Removing the cross-apron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 223
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / VII

Part / Page
8.6.1.3 Installing the cross-apron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 224

8.6.1.4 Adjusting the distance between delivery rollers and cross apron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 225
8.6.1.5 Adjusting the distance between the cross aprons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 226
8.6.1.6 Tensioning cross aprons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 227
8.6.1.7 Adjusting the gas pressure spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 228
8.6.2 Disc roller-unit of fleece collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 229
8.6.2.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 229
8.6.2.2 Adjusting the distance between cross-apron and disc roller supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 230
8.6.2.3 Pulley roll suction adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 231
8.6.2.4 Adjusting the disc rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 232
8.6.2.5 Setting the distance between the disk rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 233
8.6.2.6 Adjusting the pressure between the disc rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 234
8.6.2.7 Adjusting the sliver funnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 235
8.6.2.8 Adjusting the blow-in device for the sliver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 236
8.6.2.9 Changing the distance measuring system in the delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 237
8.6.2.10 Removing the distance measuring system in the delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 238
8.6.2.11 Installing the distance measuring system in the delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 239
8.6.2.12 Check position transducer of sliver autoleveller (delivery section) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 240
8.6.2.13 Calibrating the distance measuring system in the delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 241
8.6.2.14 Monitoring the data relevant to quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 243
8.6.2.15 Setting (positioning) the solenoid plunger in the signal coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 244
8.7 Take off unit of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 245
8.7.1 Delivery rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 245
8.7.1.1 Adjusting the proximity switch for the delivery speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 245
9 Covers and central systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 247

9.1 Directions concerning the settings of the proximity switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 247
9.2 Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 248
9.2.1 Door, right-hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 248
9.2.1.1 Adjusting door lock and safety switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 248
9.3 Pneumatic unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 249
9.3.1 Remove condensation trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 249
9.3.2 Adjust the pressure regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 250
9.3.3 Pressure switch for pneumatic unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 251
9.3.3.1 Setting the differential pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 251
9.3.4 Pneumatic line coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 252
9.3.4.1 Disconnecting the pneumatic hose connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 252
9.4 B&R control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 252
9.4.1 External I/O card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 252
9.4.1.1 Module D95K, Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 252
9.4.1.2 Changing D95K-2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 252
9.4.1.3 Removing D95K-2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 253
9.4.1.4 Installing D95K-2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 253
10 Sliver deposit CBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 255

10.1 Lifting and moving the sliver deposit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 255
10.2 Setting the light sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 256
10.3 Can table of sliver deposit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 257
10.3.1 Tighten V-belt of can plate drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 257
10.3.2 Adjust the spacing between the can table to the cover sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 259
6 / VIII Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Part / Page
10.3.3 Changing the distance from the sliver filling to the spinning can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 260
10.3.4 Adjusting the positioning lever for the spinning can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 262
10.3.5 Belt pulley "C" for rotary can plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 264
10.3.5.1 Changing change gear «C» . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 264
10.3.5.2 Removing the change gear «C» . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 264
10.3.5.3 Installing the change gear «C» . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 265
10.4 Can changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 266
10.4.1 Remove change carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 266
10.4.2 Notes on the magnetic limit switches on the pneumatic cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 267
10.4.3 Adjusting the magnetic limit switches B9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 268
10.4.4 Adjust magnetic limit switch B10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 269
10.4.5 Adjusting magnetic limit switch B16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 270
10.4.6 Adjust magnetic limit switch B8 (default setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 271
10.4.7 Adjusting the throttle valves for the pneumatic cylinder of the can trolley . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 272
10.4.8 Changing and tightening the drive tape for the can trolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 273
10.5 Sliver cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 274
10.5.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 274
10.5.2 Adjust sliver cutting, time at which the piston rod extends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 276
10.5.3 Adjust sliver cutting, production and material dependent adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 277
10.6 Coiler of sliver deposit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 279
10.6.1 Tensioning the v-belt for the coiler drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 279
10.6.2 CBA: Change gear H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 280
10.6.2.1 Changing the change gear «H» . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 280
10.6.2.2 Removing the change gear «H» . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 280
10.6.2.3 Installing the change gear «H» . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 280
10.6.2.4 Tensioning toothed belt for change «H» . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 281
10.7 Calender roller of sliver deposit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 282
10.7.1 Tightening the belt for the calender rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 282
10.7.2 Adjust calender rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 283
10.7.3 Delivery funnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 284
10.8 Cover of top part of sliver deposit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 285
10.8.1 Adjusting the limit switch for the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 285
11 Card-accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 287
11.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 287
11.2 Parts provided to be used for a clothing change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 288
11.3 Card wire maintenance set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 289
11.3.1 Visual checking and assessment of the cylinder wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 289
11.3.2 Counting neps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 290
11.3.3 Determining the grinding interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 291
11.3.4 Dressing bed grinding drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 292
11.3.4.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 292
11.3.4.2 Default setting «10» of the grinding drum before dressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 293
11.3.4.3 Adjusting the dressing diamond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 293
11.3.4.4 Dressing the grinding drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 294
11.3.5 Card grinding drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 296
11.3.5.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 296
11.3.5.2 Adjust the grinding drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 297
11.3.5.3 Raising and installing the grinding drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 298
11.3.5.4 Adjusting screws for the grinding bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 300
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / IX

Part / Page
11.3.5.5 Position of the micrometer screw gauge for adjusting the grinding bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 301
11.3.5.6 Adjusting the grinding bracket during grinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 302
11.3.5.7 Correcting the play in the worm gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 303
11.3.6 Maintenance and grinding cylinder wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 304
11.3.6.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 304
11.3.6.2 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 304
11.3.6.3 Preparing the cylinder for grinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 305
11.3.6.4 Adjust the grinding bearing for grinding the cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 307
11.3.6.5 Before grinding, adjust the parallel setting of the installed grinding drum to the cylinder . . . 6 / 308
11.3.6.6 Grinding procedure for the drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 309
11.3.7 Tools for card flats maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 311
11.3.7.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 311
11.3.7.2 Install the compensation device for grinding the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 312
11.3.7.3 Install the retaining plate for grinding the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 313
11.3.7.4 Install and adjust the grinding bearings for the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 314
11.3.7.5 Adjust the retaining plates for the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 315
11.3.8 Maintenance and grinding of card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 316
11.3.8.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 316
11.3.8.2 Prepare the machine for grinding the card flats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 318
11.3.8.3 Setting the tension of the belt for the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 319
11.3.8.4 Preparing and installing the grinding drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 320
11.3.8.5 Adjust the grinding roll parallel to the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 321
11.3.8.6 Kardendeckel egalisieren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 322
11.3.8.7 Grind card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 324
11.3.9 Service and grind licker-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 326
11.3.9.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 326
11.3.9.2 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 326
11.3.9.3 Preparing the doffer for grinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 326
11.3.9.4 Assemble the grinding bracket for grinding the doffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 327
11.3.9.5 Before grinding, adjust the parallel setting of the installed grinding drum to the doffer . . . . . 6 / 328
11.3.9.6 Grinding the doffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 329
12 Control technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 331

12.1 Basic module of the control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 331
12.1.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 331
12.1.2 Performing a cold start for the control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 332
12.1.3 Control system battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 333
12.1.3.1 Change battery of control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 333
12.1.3.2 Removing the battery from the control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 333
12.1.3.3 Mounting the battery in the control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 333
12.1.4 PCMCIA data storage in the control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 334
12.1.4.1 Inserting Compact Flash card into the control unit (loading PLC software) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 334
12.2 Frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 335
12.2.1 Identifying the frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 335
12.2.2 Regenerating the replacement frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 335
12.2.3 Frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 336
12.2.3.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 336
12.2.3.2 Replacing the frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 336
12.2.3.3 Removing the frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 337
12.2.3.4 Installing the frequency inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 339
12.2.3.5 Loading the frequency inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 340
12.2.3.6 Configuring the frequency inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 341
6/X Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Part / Page
12.2.3.7 Adjusting to the cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 342

12.2.3.8 Setting the T1000V frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 343
12.3 Bus systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 345
12.3.1 Terminating resistor for CAN bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 345
12.3.1.1 Set or wire the terminators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 345
12.4 External I/O card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 346
12.4.1 CAN IO module CX408 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 346
12.4.1.1 Checking CAN I/O module CX408 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 346
12.4.1.2 Set the CAN node address of the CAN I/O module CX408 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 347
13 Operating and display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 349

13.1 Operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 349
13.1.1 Key strip of the operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 349
13.1.1.1 Pull out the keyboard strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 349
13.1.1.2 Insert keyboard strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 349
14 Torque standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 / 351
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / XI

6 / XII Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02
instructions

instructions
What is Section 6 for?
Section 6 contains the detailed function and task descriptions, such as “Description of components”,
“Dismantling”, “Installation”, “Setting”, etc.
Reference is made in other sections of the operating instructions to these detailed descriptions.
What information is contained in Section 6?

For a specific subassembly, the necessary descriptions are given in the following order: Function description,
dismantling, installation, checking, setting.
The special tools required are listed at the start.
The information regarding threaded connections is listed at the end.
When does Section 6 need to be consulted?

Sections 2-5 can be consulted according to the situation. Within these sections, reference is made to the de-
tailed function and task descriptions of Section 6.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6/1

structions
6/2 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Safety precautions
2 Safety precautions
2.1 Safety precautions during dismantling
When tackling dismantling jobs it is necessary to take suitable safety precautions.

2.2 Safety precautions during installation

2.3 Safety precautions during adjusting jobs

When tackling adjusting jobs it is necessary to take suitable safety precautions.
2.4 Work safety for checking tasks

When tackling checking jobs it is necessary to take suitable safety precautions.
2.5 Safety precautions during measuring jobs

When tackling measuring jobs it is necessary to take suitable safety precautions.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6/3

Safety precautions
6/4 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

3 Overview of special tools

Foil
Protection for the surrounding parts during removal
of the opening roller.
Pedestal
For assembly and dismantling on the card chute
Assembling lift
For the assembling and dismantling of the feed
plate, feed roller, and opening roller in the card
chute
Side supports
For the assembly and dismantling of the opening
roller in the card chute
Pull-off tool
Pull-off tool for the shaft journals of the opening
roller and the feed rollers
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6/5

Torque wrench
For tightening screws in the area of the card
Supports
For the assembly and dismantling of the feed plate
in the die card chute
Torque wrench
For tightening screws in the area of the card chute.
Supports
The removed licker-in unit is supported, if it lies on
a flat base. The suction tubes will thereby avoid
sustaining any damage.
6/6 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Guide rails
Are required for the removal and installation of the
licker-in unit.
Carriage
For transporting the licker-in and the whole doffer
unit.A working platform can be created using the
additional support structures.
Hydraulic pump
Is required for the removal and installation of the
licker-in and doffer units.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6/7

Lifting device, rolls and licker-in(s)

Lifting device and adapter for the removal and in-
stallation of licker-in and rolls in the delivery sec-
tion.
Support
Support for removal and installation of the set of
card flats
Setting gauges for the IGS-classic

Gauges for height adjustment of grinding stone
Nippers
6/8 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02



cylinder arch
Gauge for calibrating the distance measuring

system
The gauge is clamped between the disc rollers in
the delivery. Subsequently the nominal value of the
distance measuring system is adjusted.
Card gauge
For general setting and checking
Transport case for the grinding drum

The grinding drum must be stored in the transport
box and transported to the machine in it.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6/9

Grinding brackets for doffers and cylinders

For grinding of doffer and cylinder.
Lifting device for the grinding drum

Together with the flaps and the crane, this is used
to lift the grinding drum into the machine.
Installation aids for the grinding roller

These are required for moving the grinding roller on
to the grinding brackets.
Brush
For cleaning the suction tube in the range of the
card
Hand fillet
For cleaning the doffer.
6 / 10 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Handles
Grease gun
Lubrication of lubricating nipple
Capacity per pump stroke 0.333 cm³
Note: The capacity without counter-pressure is 0.5

cm³
Brush roll
For cleaning the guide tube in the revolving plate of
the coiler (sliver deposit).
Grinding bearing for card flats

For grinding the card flats.
Support
The doffer unit has to be pushed on the supports to
fit the doffer clothing.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 11

Clamping hub and extension pipe

To connect the cylinder or doffer drive when fitting
new clothings.
Compensation device
C 70
C 70
Loading levers
The loading levers press the card flats onto the
guiding plates via the retaining plates.
Retaining plates
The retaining plates with their special screws are
needed for grinding the card flats.
6 / 12 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card
4 Card
4.1 Description
Purpose: Carding
2 5
3 4
7
9 8 6
Setting the fibers parallel and separating out foreign matter

Method of operation
• The tufts go into the removal head (1) via the AEROfeed system.
• The tufts are separated at the opening unit (2) and are then cast into the lower section of the card trunk.
• From there, the material is transported to the material opening section of the card (3).
• The tufts are cleaned by the licker-in (fitted with a clothing cover or needles), and then pre-opened by the
mote knives and carding elements before being conveyed to the cylinder. Depending on the machine
version, the material is either processed by one licker-in or by three
• The pre-opened tufts are separated further and cleaned again in the tiny gap between the teeth of the
cylinder (4) and the hooks of the card flats (5), which move in opposite directions.
• The doffer (9) guides the web over the doffing device (8) and the cross apron (17) of the take-off rollers
(6).
• From there, the finally formulated sliver is put into the sliver deposit via the into spinning cans.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 13

Card
4.2 Grundeinstellungen Baumwolle und Mischungen

Baumwolle / Chemiefasern bis 120 kg/h Produktion
Einstellungen für einen Rohstoff festlegen, Maschine einstellen, Page 3/11
72 -1.50 73 -2.00
71 0.60
70 0.80 52 x.xx
51 x.xx 53 x.xx
54 x.xx
50 x.xx
55 1.30
47 1.30 56 1.20
46 1.00
45 0.50 0.75 82 0.225 83 0.10 84 2.60
44 0.45 0.70 59 0.40 0.65
43 0.40 0.65 60 0.40 0.65
42 0.40 0.65 61 0.50 0.70 85 0.15
27 3.00 86 3.00
41 1.00
28 0.10
66 2.50 63 2.50 81 x.xxx
16 «B» 64 1.50
25 0.30
17 «C»
87 0.50
65 2..25 mm
88 0.15
18 0.90 29 0.60
19 0.50 30 0.60 06.2011 BTH
Default settings of all set points for a given raw material. The distances listed are to be considered as default
settings.
Following start-up, the machine can be adjusted to the material being processed by slightly modifying the
standard settings. Note the detailed description of the setting tasks and the accompanying tables.
Sequence of steps
– The specified dimensions refer to the minimum values that can be set at the edge of the cylinder and at
the centre of cylinder. Settings made following separate instructions.
Information on setting distances, Page 6/106
– Comply with the guidelines for adjustment of adjustment point (16).

– Comply with the guidelines for the setting of the adjustment point (17).
6 / 14 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card
– Comply with the guidelines when making the settings for the adjustment points (43/45/60).
– Comply with the guidelines for the setting of the adjustment points (50...54).

4.3 Grundeinstellungen Baumwolle und Mischungen

Baumwolle / Chemiefasern über 120 kg/h Produktion
72 -1.50 73 -2.00
71 0.60
70 0.80 52 x.xx
51 x.xx 53 x.xx
54 x.xx
50 x.xx
55 1.30
47 1.30 56 1.20
46 1.00
45 0.55 0.80 82 0.225 83 0.10 84 2.60
44 0.50 0.75 59 0.45 0.70
43 0.45 0.70 60 0.45 0.70
42 0.45 0.70 61 0.50 0.70 85 0.15
27 3.00 86 3.00
41 1.00
28 0.10
66 2.50 63 2.50 81 x.xxx
16 «B» 64 1.50
25 0.30
17 «C»
87 0.50
65 2..25 mm
88 0.15
18 0.90 29 0.60
19 0.50 30 0.60 06.2011 BTH
Default settings of all set points for a given raw material. The distances listed are to be considered as default
settings.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 15

Card
Sequence of steps

– Comply with the guidelines when making the settings for the adjustment points (43/45/60).

4.4 Grundeinstellungen Chemiefasern und Karden

Chemiefasern oder Baumwolle (Swing) bis 120 kg/h
Produktion
6 / 16 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card
72 -1.50 73 -2.00
71 0.60
70 0.80 52 x.xx
51 x.xx 53 x.xx
54 x.xx
50 x.xx
55 1.30
47 1.30 56 1.20
46 1.00
48 0.40 0.55 82 0.225 83 0.10 84 2.60
59 0.40 0.55
44 0.50 0.65 60 0.40 0.55
61 1.00 1.30 85 0.15
42 0.60 0.75
27 3.00 86 3.00
41 1.00
28 0.10
66 2.50 63 2.50 81 x.xxx
16 «B» 64 1.50
25 0.30
17 «C»
87 0.50
65 2..25 mm
88 0.15
18 0.90 29 0.60
19 0.50 30 0.60 06.2011 BTH
geeignet sind. Einstellung dieser Karden gemäss den Grundeinstellungen für Chemiefasern. Die
aufgeführten Distanzen sind als Grundeinstellungen zu betrachten.
Swing Karden = Mit Garnituren ausgerüstete Karden, die sowohl für Baumwolle wie auch für Chemiefasern
geeignet sind. Einstellung dieser Karden gemäss den Grundeinstellungen für Chemiefasern.
Sequence of steps

31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 17

Card

– The carding element at adjustment point (61) has been fitted in such a way that it guides material.
4.5 Grundeinstellungen Chemiefasern und Karden

Chemiefasern oder Baumwolle (Swing) über 120 kg/h
Produktion
72 -1.50 73 -2.00
71 0.60
70 0.80 52 x.xx
51 x.xx 53 x.xx
54 x.xx
50 x.xx
55 1.30
47 1.30 56 1.20
46 1.00
48 0.45 0.60 82 0.225 83 0.10 84 2.60
59 0.45 0.60
44 0.55 0.70 60 0.45 0.60
61 1.00 1.30 85 0.15
42 0.65 0.80
27 3.00 86 3.00
41 1.00
28 0.10
66 2.50 63 2.50 81 x.xxx
16 «B» 64 1.50
25 0.30
17 «C»
87 0.50
65 2..25 mm
88 0.15
18 0.90 29 0.60
19 0.50 30 0.60 06.2011 BTH
geeignet sind. Einstellung dieser Karden gemäss den Grundeinstellungen für Chemiefasern. Die
aufgeführten Distanzen sind als Grundeinstellungen zu betrachten.
6 / 18 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card
Sequence of steps


– The carding element at adjustment point (61) has been fitted in such a way that it guides material.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 19

Card
4.6 Controlling and tensioning tooth belts

WARNING
Setting aim: Appropriate preliminary tensioning and

maintenance of the belts are required to ensure an
optimal service life and optimal power transfer. If
the belts are too tight, bearings and belts can be-
come damaged. If the belts are too slack, the teeth
of the belt may skip leading to faults and damage.
In addition, care must be taken to ensure the clean-
liness of belts and belt pulleys as well as to remove
any dirt accumulation from the base of the teeth.
Sequence of steps
– The length (L) of the toothed belt is determined by the axial spacing of the tooth wheels. In the centre of
this distance, the belt must be able to be deflected by approx. 1.5 % of the length (L) with the load (F).
Example of the flexing of a toothed belt with 640 mm axle distance (L)
Deflection (d) as a % of 1.50 %
the distance between
shafts (L)
Deflection (d) at approx. approx. 10 mm
1.5% of the distance
between shafts (L=640
mm)
Force (F) Press the belt in
carefully until
some resistance
can be felt.
D
F
6 / 20 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card
4.7 Adjusting the production speed of the feeder machine

Setting up the feed system (Aerofeed), Page 3/16
Change the card assignment of a plant with 2 assortments, Page 3/17
The optimum production speed of the feed machine (except B 51) is set in the program of the corresponding
machine. The adaptation is described in the corresponding instructions.
Setting aim: If all the cards of a feeder system are operating, the feeder machine of this system should supply
material to the card with as few breaks as possible.
Ideal setting for the running of the feeder machine

– The running time should be 90% and the downtime 10% of the service time
4.8 Adjusting the transport fan

Optimise quality, Page 3/14
Default setting of the r.p.m. of the transport fan in the feeder system.
Sequence of steps
– The speed of the transport fan (2) must
generate the air volume (1) prescribed for the
suction of the material from the corresponding
feed machine.
2 Note: The appropriate air ratios of the feeder
machine are to be found in the corresponding
instructions.
1
Example B 60: Air volume at the suction
point before the transport fan
Air volume at the suction 0.40 - 0.50 m³/s
point
Vacuum (static) 200 Pa
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 21

Card
6 / 22 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card chute
5 Card chute
5.1 Install and adjust the deflector on the first card trunk
If the first card trunk in a feed system is not properly filled in spite of correct settings, deflector (1) which was
supplied has to be installed and set.
Sequence of steps
– Install deflector (1) supplied in the rectangular
1 300 mm channel ahead of the first card trunk.
– Twist the deflector (1) until the ideal position
for material deflection is achieved.
250 mm
11 mm
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 23

Card chute
5.2 Adjust the vacuum for the exhaust air (open transfer)
The filter installation must accept as exhaust air the
transport air as blown into the feeder system from
100mm 1 2 the transport fan. Variations in the suction power
in this filter installation are evened out by the open
transfer of this transport air.
500mm
3
-
Sequence of steps
– A low vacuum must be measured at check point (1). This value is achieved by throttling back the suction
power with a slider at position (2).
Note: Dust-containing air must never be blown out near the dead air intake (3).
Vacuum at check point (1) 50 - 150 Pa
6 / 24 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card chute
5.3 Waste transport

5.3.1 Measuring the vacuum for the transport air of the waste transport
2
+
Pa
1
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
– Using a U-tube, measure the pressure difference at check point (1).

Note: The difference in column heights represents the vacuum.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 25

Card chute
5.3.2 Adjust the vacuum for the card suction

2
+
Pa
1
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Setting aim: The maximum and minimum vacuum for each suction point (1) has to lie within the prescribed
range for the card suction to work properly.
First and subsequent cards in the line (example with 8 cards)

– Prerequisite: The Aerofeed unit and the filter system must be in operation.
The vacuum must lie within the prescribed range for the card (17) nearest to the filter system (3).
Note: Set the vacuum accordingly using the slide valves (2) of the cards (10...17).
Vacuum range at 1000 - 1300 Pa
measurement point (1) of
the card
6 / 26 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card chute
5.4 Sliver feed trunk

5.4.1 Adjust the lap weight by the position of the card trunk wall
Optimal adjustment of the lap weight in the card trunk
Sequence of steps
WARNING
Switch off the machine via the main
switch and secure the switch with a
padlock.
– The top opening (a / b) of the card trunk wall
(3) is adjusted according to the perforated
sheet (5) (card trunk depth).
Top position of card trunk wall
Cotton Position (b)
Synthetic fibers Position (b)
ba 1 – The lower opening (a / b) of the card trunk wall

(3) is adjusted according to the perforated
sheet (5). (card trunk depth).
Bottom position of card trunk wall
2 Cotton In the range of positions (b)
or (a)
5 Synthetic fibers In the range of position (b)
3 – Adjust the height (position) of light barrier (2)

after the mechanical adjustments have been
ba made in the card trunk. The position of the
light barrier influences the lap weight.
4 Adjust the light barrier at the card
trunk, Page 6/29
– Batt weight measured at the feed plate of the

card:
Ideal batt weight at the feed plate of the
card:
Cotton 600 - 800 g/m
Synthetic fibers 700 - 900 g/m
11.1, Page 2/78
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 27

Card chute
5.4.2 Light barrier, sliver feed trunk
5.4.2.1 Description
Purpose: Light barriers (3) and (4) control the material feed to the card trunk.
2 3
5
Method of operation
• The upper light barrier (3) controls the material feed to the card when it is running in normal production
mode.
• The lower light barrier (4) controls the material feed to the card when it is running in slow production
mode.
Condition: Upper light barrier (3) not interrupted.

The card is in normal production mode.
The material feed to card trunk (1) is increased.
Condition: Upper light barrier (3) interrupted.

The material feed to card trunk (1) is reduced.
Condition: Lower light barrier (4) not interrupted.

The card is in slow production mode.
The material feed to card trunk (1) is increased.
Condition: Lower light barrier (4) interrupted.

The card is in slow production mode.
The material feed to card trunk (1) is reduced.
Condition: Upper light barrier (3) not interrupted.

The card production is stopped
Opening roll (5) in the card trunk is switched off after 60 seconds.
6 / 28 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card chute
Condition: Light barriers (3 )and (4) interrupted.

The card production is stopped
Opening roll (5) in the card trunk is switched off.
Condition: Light barrier (3 )or (4) no longer interrupted.

Opening roll (5) in the card trunk is started again.
5.4.2.2 Adjust the light barrier at the card trunk

Description Light barrier, sliver feed trunk, Page 6/28
The setting has to be made at each card chute while the machine is running.
Setting aim: Correct setting of the light barrier for controlling material transport to the card.
Preparatory work
– Check whether the upper and lower light barriers are correctly connected to the corresponding ports.
(electric manual)
– The card chute and waste air adjustments must have been carried out.
– The fed lap must have the necessary lap weight.

– The card must produce at the predetermined production speed.
Sequence of steps
2 3
10...20 mm
60 mm
– Prerequisite: The blow room must not switch off during the setup procedure.
Fix the light barrier (3) in place, approx. 10 mm above the perforations of the perforated plate (1). The
lower light barrier (4) is 60 mm away from it.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 29

Card chute
2 3
10...20 mm
60 mm
1
– Selecting the data screen.

11.1, Page 2/78
– The card produces for approx. 30 minutes with the required production speed.
– Move the upper light barrier (3) in small steps (approx. 5 mm) in such a way that a value between 40 and
50% is displayed on the data screen selected. At the same time, move along the lower light barrier (4)
keeping a distance of 60 mm.
– Wait for 15-30 minutes after the displacement, to allow the system to settle. The values must remain in
the 40 to 50% range
– Switch the card to slow speed.

Note: The doffer is switched off according to the time set in ‘advanced operation’. For this reason this
value has to be set at the maximum time possible.
41.30, Page 2/141
– Move the lower light barrier (4) in small steps (approx. 5 mm) until a value between 40 and 50% appears
on the data screen.
– Wait for 15-30 minutes after the displacement, to allow the system to settle. The value must remain in the
range 40 to 50%.
– The values 40 to 50% must be assessed at normal production speed as well as at slow speed for a
period of approx. 15-30 minutes. You may have to repeat the process.
– Once you're finished with the settings, reset the value on the data screen to the value previously set.
41.30, Page 2/141
6 / 30 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card chute
5.5 Removal head

5.5.1 Differential pressure switch, Aerofeed
5.5.1.1 Description
Purpose: Pressure measurement and control of the feed machines (UNIcontrol)
1 2
Method of operation
• Depending on the fill height (2) in the lower feed chute (3) and the number of cards involved in the
production, different pressure values are present in the feed system (1). These pressure differences are
converted into electrical signals via the differential pressure switch (4) of the first card chute. The feed
machine is then controlled by these signals.
• More pressure: Switch off feeder machine.
• Less pressure: Switch on the machine.
• The start-up and shut-off pressures for the feed machine are set using UNIcontrol.
Note: Observe the UNIcontrol operating manual.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 31

Card chute
5.5.1.2 Setting the differential pressure switch (standard setting)

The procedure has to be carried out only on commissioning or after a major change within the system.
Switch off the differential pressure switch in readiness for the material feed
1 2 3
– Start the cylinder (2).

Note: The doffer (3) is stationary.
– Reduce the working pressure (4) at the UNIcontrol user interface.

The motors of the feed rollers (1) are still stationary.
– Activate the feeding of material (5) to the cards at the UNIcontrol user interface.
The motors of the feed rollers (1) are still stationary.
6 / 32 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card chute
Define the switching-on point for the material feed
– Switch on the doffer (3) for the first card downstream of the feed machine.
– At the UNIcontrol user interface, increase the working pressure (4) until the feed machine starts to supply
material to the feed chutes (6).
The feed trunks are filling. The pressure in the feed line slowly increases.
– Alter the working pressure (4) in small steps until the correct fill height for the feed chutes (6) is reached.
The differential pressure switch has to deactivate the feed roller of the feed machine for the cards,
once the correct fill height for the feed chutes has been reached.
Put the cards into operation
7 4
– Put the cards (7) of this system into operation, according to their sequence.
– As a result of the changed pressure conditions, the working pressure (4), responsible for activating and
deactivating the feed machine for the cards, may have to be corrected.
Note: The correction must be carried out in small steps to avoid blockages of the machine.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 33

Card chute
5.5.1.3 Setting the fill height

Description Differential pressure switch, Aerofeed, Page 6/31
Optimal setting of feed trunk filling.
Filling height in order
a) 2
3
1 4
O.K
– For cotton (4), if the feeder chutes (1) are filled to a level no higher than the bottom edge of the window
(2), then the setting is in order.
– For man-made fibres (3), if the feeder chutes (1) are filled up to a level within the lower half of the window
(2), then the setting is in order.
Filling level too high
b) 2
5
3
1 4
– For cotton (4), if the feeder chutes (1) are filled to a level within the upper part of the window (2), then the
working pressure (5) has to be reduced.
– For man-made fibres (3), if the feeder chutes (1) are filled to a level higher than the top edge of the win-
dow (2), then the working pressure (5) has to be reduced.
– For cotton (4), if the feeder chutes (1) are filled to a level below the bottom edge of the window (2) then
the working pressure (5) has to be increased.
– For man-made fibres (3), if the feeder chutes (1) are filled to a level within the window (2), then the work-
ing pressure (5) has to be increased.
6 / 34 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card chute
5.5.2 Slider removal head
5.5.2.1 Adjusting the acceleration flap

1 2
150...200 mm
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 3
The sliders (2) serve to accelerate the transport air into a feeder system with a feeder machine (3). A max-
imum of 8 cards (4) are assigned to a feeder system.
Sequence of steps
– Lid (1) seals the feed duct immediately after the last card trunk.
– The first acceleration flap (2) is in the lowest position. The dimension «X» can steadily raised at the later
acceleration flaps (2).
Note: The material should not be rolled forwards in the transport duct if at all possible.
– The dimension of the last acceleration flap (2) lies in the range 150...200 mm.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 35

Card chute
5.5.2.2 Adjusting accelerating and isolating valves

7 2
150...200 mm 7 150...200 mm
7
5 6 6 6 4 4 4 4 3
2 2
With 2 feed systems (3) and (5), the sliders (2) serve to accelerate the transport air. Using the sliders (7) the
cards (4) and (6) are assigned to the appropriate feed system (3) or (5).
Sequence of steps
– The acceleration flaps (2) have to be adjusted.
Adjusting the acceleration flap, Page 6/35
6 / 36 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card chute
5.6 Feed roll

5.6.1 Tools
Assembling lift
chute
Supports
Side supports
Pull-off tool
Torque wrench
For tightening screws in the area of the card chute.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 37

Card chute
5.6.2 Replace the feed roll in card trunk

Remove the feed roll in card trunk, Page 6/38
Install the feed roll in card trunk, Page 6/40
5.6.3 Remove the feed roll in card trunk

WARNING
Sequence of steps
1
3
2
1
3
1 4
2
5
6
7
9
M16
– Prerequisite: The opening roller and the feed plate have to be removed first
The opening roller is removed first.
Removing the opening roller, Page 6/49
– Remove the feed plate.

Removing the feed plate, Page 6/43
6 / 38 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card chute
– Assemble the lifting device (5).

Assembling lift, Page 6/37, 6/42, 6/47
– Put the supports (3) on the platform (4) and move the platform under the feed roller (2) until the supports
(3) stop against the feed roller (2).
Supports, Page 6/37, 6/42
– Unscrew the screw (9) by a maximum of 1...11/2 turns (= 2...3 mm) and the tension element (7) is un-
done by a sharp tap on the screw head.
– Remove the shaft journals (1).
– Run the platform (4) with the lifting device until the feed roller is resting on the supports (6).
Note: The feed roller (2) must not get jammed in the process.
Side supports, Page 6/37, 6/42, 6/47
The shaft journal cannot be undone.

– Remove screw (9).
– Screw in the complete pulling off device (8) (long M16 screw with displaceable weight) into the M16
screw thread at the end of the shaft journal (1).
Pull-off tool, Page 6/37, 6/48
– Using light blows on the weight against the pulling off device (8) the shaft journal (1) can be removed.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 39

Card chute
5.6.4 Install the feed roll in card trunk

WARNING
Sequence of steps
1
3
2
1
3
1 4
11
2
5
10
6
7
7a
9
M16
– Clean the hole for the shaft journal (1) and the tensioning element (7).
Note: Do not flush out with solvents.
– Lightly oil the tensioning elements (7) and (7a) with spindle oil.
Note: Do not use paste.
– Coat the area beneath the bolt head and the bolt thread (9) with grease.
Note: When tightening the bolt firmly, the torque generated will thereby transfer to the tensioning ele-
ments more effectively.
– The slots (7a) of the tensioning element (7) are set at 90 degrees to each other.
– The bolts (10) must be tightened firmly.
6 / 40 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card chute

IMPORTANT
Do not damage the feed roller felt seal
When raising the feed roller to the correct height, any blockages or jams must be avoided. The
felt seals installed on the sides must not be damaged. If necessary for protecting the felt seals,
place thin metal strips (thickness between 0.1 and 0.2 mm) between the front of the feed roller
and the card chute wall. Adjust the lateral clearance between the feed roller and the card chute
walls so that it is evenly aligned.
– Raise the feed roller (2) to the correct height.
– When the correct height has been reached, slide in the journal bearings (1).
– Tighten the screws (9)

torque
Clamping strength: 56.0 kN
Value 130.0 Nm
Torque wrench, Page 6/37
5.6.5 Feed roll drive
5.6.5.1 Tensioning chains

WARNING
The chain must not be tensioned too loosely nor

too tightly.
3m
m
Sequence of steps
– When checking you should be able to push down on the chain to the degree specified.
Note: If this distance is not correct, then displace the feed roller motor to adjust the chain tension.
Impressing the chain 3.0 mm
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 41

Card chute
5.7 Feed trough unit

5.7.1 Feed trough
5.7.1.1 Tools
Assembling lift
chute
Supports
Side supports
5.7.1.2 Replacing the feed plate

Removing the feed plate, Page 6/43
Installing the feed plate, Page 6/44
6 / 42 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card chute
5.7.1.3 Removing the feed plate

WARNING
Preparatory work
– Removing the opening roller
Sequence of steps
7 6
6 2 8
2 3
5 2
– Loosen the spring assembly tubes (8) and remove the spring assembly.

– Put the supports (2) onto the platform (3) and move the platform under the feed plate (6) until the sup-
ports (2) are in contact with the feed plate (6).
Supports, Page 6/37, 6/42
– Unscrew the adjusting screws (7) of the bolts (1).
– From the inside knock the bolts (1) out of the feed plate (6).
– Move the platform (3) with the lifting device (5) down until the feed plate (6) is resting on the supports (5).
Note: The feed plate (6) must not get jammed when being lowered.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 43

Card chute
5.7.1.4 Installing the feed plate

WARNING
Sequence of steps
1 6
– Assemble the lifting device (4)

Note: The sliding surface of the feed plate must be free of oil and grease.
IMPORTANT
Do not damage the felt seals on the feed plate
When raising the feed plate to its correct height, it must not get stopped or jammed anywhere.
The felt seals installed on the sides must not be damaged. If necessary for the protection of the
felt seals, put thin metal shims approx. 0.1...0.2 mm thick between the front of the feed roll and
the card trunk wall.
– Raise the feed plate (6) to the correct height.
– When the correct height has been reached, slide in the bolts (1).
Finishing
– Adjust the eccentric for setting the minimum distance between the feed roll if it was changed during re-
moval.
Adjust feed trough. (minimum distance), Page 6/45
– Make the setting for the load on the feed trough

Setting the load on the feed trough, Page 6/46
6 / 44 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card chute
5.7.1.5 Adjust feed trough. (minimum distance)

WARNING
The eccentric (2) was set at the works for the minimum distance (X) between feed roll (4) and feed trough (5).
An adjustment consequently only has to be made if the distance (X) no longer conforms to the default setting.
Preparatory work
– Undo the front covers until the feed roll and the feed trough are freely accessible to make the adjustment.
Adjust (on both sides)

– Set tube (3) to the fifth notch on the scale.
– Use eccentric (2) to adjust the distance (X) between the feed roll (4) and the feed trough (5).
Note: The eccentrics have to be flush on both sides with the bearing plates(1).
Distance
Distance “X” 1.00 - 1.20 mm
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 45

Card chute
5.7.1.6 Setting the load on the feed trough

WARNING
Sequence of steps
«5» 4
3
– Prerequisite: Task to be performed on both sides

The standard setting is made by positioning the tubes (4) at the fifth visible mark.
Finishing
– The setting for operation has to be determined by trail and error.
– Increase or reduce the load, depending on the material type and density. When making initial assess-
ments, first increase or reduce the setting by two marks and examine the material flow.
6 / 46 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card chute
5.8 Opening roll unit

5.8.1 Opening roller
5.8.1.1 Tools
Foil
Protection for the surrounding parts during removal
of the opening roller.
Pedestal
For assembly and dismantling on the card chute
Assembling lift
chute
Side supports
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 47

Card chute
Pull-off tool
Torque wrench
For tightening screws in the area of the card
5.8.1.2 Changing the opening roller

Installing opening roller and fallers, Page 6/51
6 / 48 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card chute
5.8.1.3 Removing the opening roller

WARNING
Preparations
10
11
2
3
4
19 12
5
6 13
18
17 9
14
7
7a
15
16
M16
30
– Remove the driving belt (19).
– Remove cover (1).
– Remove guide sheet (2) and front card trunk wall (4).
– Pull in two polymer belts (18) to protect the needles.

Foil, Page 6/47
– Remove the tension element (6) and the felt seal (5).
– Remove the screws (3).
– Assemble the pedestal (15).

Pedestal, Page 6/47
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 49

Card chute
10
11
2
3
4
19 12
5
6 13
18
17 9
14
7
7a
15
16
M16
30

– Installing the supports (14).

Removing the opening roller

– Put the platform (12) of the lifting device (13) under the opening roller (10).
– Loosen screw (16) by 1 - 1 1/2 turns (2 - 3 mm); now strike the screw head to release the tension ele-
ment (7).
– Remove the screws of the bearing flange (17) and pull off the shaft journals (9) and (11) together with the
bearing flanges (17).
– Take the platform (12) downwards until the opening roller is resting on the support (14).
Note: Take care during this procedure that the opening roller does not get stopped or jammed anywhere.
– Remove the lifting device (13).
6 / 50 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card chute
IMPORTANT
Do not damage the opening roller
When lowering, the opening roller may not get stopped or jammed anywhere.
IMPORTANT
Wear gloves.
– Roll the opening roller forwards.
– Slide a tube through the hole in the opening roller and move the roller opening away using the assembly
crane.
The shaft journal cannot be undone.

– Screw in the complete pulling off device (30) (long M16 screw with displaceable weight) into the M16
screw thread at the end of the shaft journal (9).
Pull-off tool, Page 6/37, 6/48
– Using light blows on the weight against the pulling off device (30) the shaft journal (9) can be removed.
5.8.1.4 Installing opening roller and fallers

WARNING
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 51

Card chute
Installing opening roller
10
11
5
6 13
18
17 9
8 14
7
7a
8
16
– Clean the hole for the shaft journal (9) and the tensioning element (7).
Note: Do not flush out with solvents.
– Lightly oil the tensioning elements (7) and (7a) with spindle oil.
Note: Do not use paste.
– Coat the area beneath the bolt head and the bolt thread (16) with grease.
Note: When tightening the bolt firmly, the torque generated will thereby be transferred to the tensioning
elements more effectively.
– The slots (7a) of the tensioning element (7) are set at 90 degrees to each other.
– The bolts (8) must be tightened firmly.

– Lay the opening roller (10) on the support (14).

Note: Note the direction (tilt) of the needles.
6 / 52 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card chute
– Lay the belts (18) on the opening roller (10) to protect the needles.
Foil, Page 6/47
– Pull the opening roller (10) up to the correct height.

Note: Be careful that the opening roller does not get stopped or jammed anywhere.
– Once the correct height has been reached push in the shaft journals (9) and (11) with the bearing flanges
(17).
– Fasten the bearing flanges (17).
– Move the opening roller (10) until it makes contact with the shaft pins (9) (drive side)..
– Assemble the felt seal (5) and the tension element (6).

torque
Value 130.0 Nm
Torque wrench, Page 6/48
Installing fallers
– The fallers are fastened with screws to the
roller.
1 Note: Apply a coating of Loctite 243
(non-hardening) to the screw threads only.
2
Thread dimension Special bolt M6 x 16
mm
torque 10 Nm
Order of tightening: Tighten bolts firmly.
Start at the middle of
the faller.
– Small openings between the screwed profiles

of the fallers and the roller must be sealed with
silicone.
There are no fibres hanging at the
openings.
5.8.1.5 Proximity switch, opening roll speed, Description

Purpose: Opening roller proximity switch
Monitoring the r.p.m. of the opening roller
Method of operation
• The impulse generator produce impulses at the proximity switch.
Note: The production of the machine switches off if the opening roller r.p.m. falls below a determined
value (blocking protection. Observe the text display.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 53

Card chute
5.8.1.6 Adjusting the proximity switch for monitoring the r.p.m. of the opening roller
Description Proximity switch, opening roll speed, Page 6/53
X
2
Adjust the proximity switch

– Adjusting the proximity switch (1) to the distance «X» from the impulse generator (2).
Distance «X» 2 mm
Checking the settings

– Selecting the data screen
83.2, Page 2/117
– Start the opening roller
– Check the displayed values on the data screen.

Note: The difference between the two values indicated must not be greater than «10».
Displayed value on the 60 (min. 50,
data screen max. 70)
6 / 54 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card chute
5.8.2 Opening roll drive
5.8.2.1 Changing the r.p.m. of the opening roller

Setting aim: Adjusting the r.p.m. of the opening roller to the material being processed.
Change speed with change pulleys

WARNING
– After changing the toothed belt pulleys (1) or

1 (3), tighten the toothed belt (2) following the
directives.
Note: After changing toothed belt pulley (3),
tighten screw (4).
torque
2 Clamping strength: 56.0 kN
Value 130.0 Nm
– Check and adjust the tension in the toothed

belt (2).
Controlling and tensioning tooth
belts, Page 6/20
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 55

Card chute
5.9 Delivery roll unit

5.9.1 Delivery rolls
5.9.1.1 Description
Purpose: Longitudinal and perpendicular grooves
In the execution for man-made fibers, the clearing roller (5a) has longitudinal and lateral grooves. In the exe-
cution for cotton, the clearing rollers (5a) and (5b) only have longitudinal grooves.
5.9.1.2 Changing the delivery rollers

Removing the delivery rollers, Page 6/57
Installing the clearing roller, Page 6/58
6 / 56 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card chute
5.9.1.3 Removing the delivery rollers

WARNING
Description Delivery rolls, Page 6/56

Note: Support the delivery roller with wooden blocks, so that it is secured.
Note: The lifting device cannot be used for removing.
Sequence of steps
5b
5a
2 = 4 5 6
3 8
– Remove the toothed-belt pulley (1) and loosen the gudgeons (2).
– Remove the flange bearings (3) and (8).
– Loosen the bolt (4) on the drive side.

Note: There is no bolt on the opposite side. (Movable bearing.)
– Remove the drive shaft (6) from the delivery roller (5).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 57

Card chute
5.9.1.4 Installing the clearing roller

WARNING
Description Delivery rolls, Page 6/56

Sequence of steps
5b
5a
2 = 4 5 6 7 =
3 8
9 9
– Mount the gaskets (7) per the drawing.
– Introduce the delivery roll (5) into the card trunk.

Note: In doing so make sure that the delivery roller (5) is not obstructed or blocked anywhere, and that
the laterally fitted seals (7) are not damaged or displaced. If necessary, put thin metal shims between the
front of delivery roller (5) and card chute wall (9).
– Coat the drive shaft (6) with assembly paste and insert.
– Assemble and tighten the flange bearing (8) on the right-hand side of the machine.
Note: Do not use any gudgeons (2).
– Align the clearing roller (5) horizontally.
– Move the drive shaft (6) until it is aligned externally with the ball bearing in the flange bearing (8).
– Adjust the delivery roller (5) laterally, so that is evenly aligned, and subsequently tighten the bolt (4)
firmly.
– assemble the flange bearing (3) and tighten the gudgeons (2).
– Check the lateral distribution of the clearing roller again (5).
– Toothed belt pulley (1) must be aligned with the drive pulley.
6 / 58 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Feed
6 Feed
6.1 Feed roll unit
6.1.1 Tools
Handles
6.1.2 Removing the cover trim below the feed roller

WARNING
Remove the feed plate
2
3
– Remove feed plate (3).
– Mark the position (1) of bracket (2) and remove it.

Note: Prior to installing feed plate (3), install bracket (2) at the identical location where it was originally
installed. The batt (4) will thus enter at the same location as previously.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 59

Feed
Removing the cover trim
a)
X max
0
90
2
1
3
5
70 +
40 c)
b)
3 3
– Set the mote knives (5) of the licker-in to the bottommost position. (Largest discharge opening).
– Insert the handles (1) in the recesses on both sides of the cover profile (3) and turn through 90 degrees
in an anticlockwise direction.
Note: The handles may sustain damage if they are rotated in the wrong direction.
Handles, Page 4/1, 6/59
– Remove bolts (2) from both sides.
– Slide cover trim (3) in parallel in the direction of the licker-ins until the pins (4) no longer guide the side
plates.
– Remove the cover trim (3).
6 / 60 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Feed
6.1.3 Installing the cover trim below the feed roller

WARNING
Installing the cover trim
a) b)
4
1
3
3
0
90
c) d)
4
2
3 1
3
– Insert the handles (1) in the recesses on both sides of the cover profile (3) and turn through 90 degrees
in an anticlockwise direction.
Note: The handles may sustain damage if they are rotated in the wrong direction.
– a): Slide the cover profile (3) towards the licker-ins keeping it parallel to the side parts.
– b): Push the cover profile (3) upwards so that it is above the pins (4).
– c): Pull back the cover profile (3) in this position until the pins (4) on both sides rest in the recesses.
– d): Fit the screws (2).
– Prerequisite: Prior to tightening bolts (2), push down the ends of cover trim (3).
Carefully tighten the screws (2) firmly. (Max. torque: 4 Nm.)
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 61

Feed
Installing the feed plate
2
3
– Install bracket (2).

Note: Pay attention to marking (1) designated during the removal process.
– Install the feed plate (3).
Finishing
– Position the mote knife at the same location where it was before it was removed.
6 / 62 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Feed
6.1.4 Feed roll
6.1.4.1 Adjusting the distance between feed roller and licker-in

Settings in the range of the feed roller, Page 3/20
WARNING
3 2 1
6 7
8
2 4
Sequence of steps
– Remove suction tube (8) above licker-in (1).
Reduce distance (on both sides)

– Loosen bolt (5) and tighten again lightly.
Note: Do not loosen bolts (4).
– Loosen nuts (6) and use nuts (7) to reduce the distance between feed roll (2) and licker-in (1).
Increase distance (on both sides)

– Loosen nuts (7) and use nuts (6) to increase the distance between feed roll (2) and licker-in (1).
Finishing
– After this adjustment, check the distance between feed plate and feed roller.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 63

Feed
6.1.5 Sliver regulation of the card
6.1.5.1 Check transducer in feed (function)

Read measured value from transducer.
1 1
2
2
– Remove adjustment plate (2).
– Select the data screen for the test mode.

80.1, Page 2/111
– Select the data mask with the value display.

82.2, Page 2/115
– Read the value from the data screen.

– Install adjustment plate (2) with one screw.
– Push installed adjustment plate (2) towards transducer (1) until it comes into contact.
– Read the value from the data screen.
Required situation / nominal value

Measurement value of position transducer
With adjustment plate min. 4090
removed
Action
Actual value = min. Screen display: 4090
– The transducer is working properly.
6 / 64 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Feed

Measurement value of position transducer
The adjustment plate max. 500
touches the position
transducer
Action
Actual value = max. Display in the data mask:500
– The transducer is working properly.
6.1.5.2 Adjust transducer in feed

Setting aim: Adjust and check after changing the transducer or if the sliver autoleveller does not work prop-
erly.
Preparatory work
– The pre-stress on the torsion rod must be adjusted.
– The transducer is set at the works. The value need only be checked on commissioning.
Sequence of steps
3
5
1 4
1
6
X
– The nipping distance between the feed plate (4) and the feed roller (5) must be correctly adjusted.
– The distance from the feed roller (5) to the feed plate (4) must be correctly adjusted.
– No material must be present between the feed roller (5) and the feed plate (4).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 65

Feed
3
5
1 4
1
6
X
– Check the distance "X" between nut (6) and the surface of transducer (2) and adjust, if necessary.
Transducer position, 4.0 mm
distance “X”

82.2, Page 2/115
– Adjust the adjustment plate (2) on the left-hand side of the machine to transducer (1) until the value is
correct according to the values on the data mask.
Note: An alternative default setting is not permissible.
Default setting without 750 (min. 730,
material max. 770)
– Values which switch off the delivery.

Transducer value if delivery is switched off
Lap too thin smaller than 850
Lap too thick greater than 3800
Finishing
– Checking the settings
Check transducer in feed (function), Page 6/64
– Set and adjust the load on the feed plate

6 / 66 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Feed
6.2 Feed plate of feed-unit

6.2.1 Feed trough replacement
Feed trough removal, Page 6/67
Feed trough installation, Page 6/67
6.2.2 Feed trough removal

WARNING
The feed trough weighs 75 kg. Use the assembly crane to secure the feed trough prior to re-
moval.
Preparatory work
– Remove the licker-in unit
Removing the licker-in assembly, Page 6/77
Sequence of steps
– Prerequisite: Carry out all work on both sides
6 To protect the licker-in (1) insert some thin
sheet metal (11) between feed roll (2) and
10
licker-in (1).
4
– Undo bolt (4).
5 11 In this way, the clamping lever (5) is used
3
to relieve the initial tension of torsion rods
1
(10) in feed trough (3).
2
– Remove torsion rods (10).
– Fixate eyebolts (6) and prepare the feed

trough (3) so that it can be removed by means
7 of the assembly crane.
8 – Loosen nuts (7).
– Remove bolts (9).

9
– Pull out bearing journals (8).
Note: Secure feed trough (3) beforehand.
– Use the assembly crane to lift feed trough (3).
6.2.3 Feed trough installation

Check the feed trough before installation.
– Check the feed trough for its condition prior to installation.
Check feed trough (condition), Page 6/68
– Installation is carried out in reverse order of removal.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 67

Feed
6.2.4 Check feed trough (condition)

Check feed trough
WARNING
Insert a wooden wedge between the feed trough and the feed roll with the feed trough opened.
– Undo bolts (4).

4 – Remove clamping levers (5) and the guide
bushes.
5
– Open up feed trough (3).
3
Note: For the purpose of safety, insert a
11 wooden wedge (11) between the feed trough
and the feed roll.
Action
If the actual situation does not correspond to the required situation.
– Remedy minor damage.
– The feed trough will have to be replaced, if its clamp edge is broken off or deformed.
Feed trough replacement, Page 6/67
6 / 68 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Feed
6.2.5 Check the position of the indicators for loading the feed trough (de-
fault setting)
Check default setting
WARNING
A standard adjustment of indicator (4) has to be carried out only if it was moved by error, or if a new feed
trough was installed.
Preparatory work
– The torsion rods are installed.
4 – The clamping levers (2) are now relieved

through torsion rods (1).
3
– Slightly push down clamping levers (2) until the
play between clamping lever (2) and torsion
0 spring (1) is counterbalanced.
5
– Check positions of indicators (4) in reference
1 to markings (3) in the clamping levers (2).
Action
– Move the indicators until they point to the next possible mark on the clamping levers.
– Secure the indicators with the screws.

Note: This position of the indicators must not be changed again (default setting).
Action
If the actual situation corresponds to the required situation.
– The indicators are set correctly.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 69

Feed
6.2.6 Speisemulde und Speisewalze, Klemmdistanz verändern. Distanz

«B»
WARNING
IMPORTANT
The scale (8) for adjustment of nipping distance "B" was ex works and fixated for correct posi-
tion. Do not remove the scale screws. If the two marks (9) and (10) are positioned exactly op-
posite each other, the nipping distance "B" will be 13 mm.
10
8
9
«B
30
25
»
20
15
3 «B»: 3
«B»:
2 2
4 4a
1 1
5 5a
6 6a
7 7
Adapt the nipping distance («B») between the feed trough (3) and the feed roll (7) to match the staple length.
Setting aim: The distance has to be adapted always to match the material to be processed.
6 / 70 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Feed
Spacing B: Nipping distance between feed plate and feed roller (licker-in)
Raw material: long staple 22.0 - 26.0 mm
(larger than 1 2/32 inch)
Peru Pima, Sudan 1 1/2 inch
Man-made fibre up to 60 mm
Raw material: Middle staple 20.0 - 22.0 mm
(1 inch to 1 3/32 inch)
USA, Brazil, Turkey, Russia,
Greece, El Paso
Man-made fibre up to 40 mm
Raw material: Short staple 19.0 - 21.0 mm
(less than 1 inch)
Texas, Russia, India
Raw material: Noil 18.0 - 20.0 mm
Waste mixture
The data in the table are to be regarded as guidelines.
Reduce nipping distance "B"

– Loosen bolts (1) on the left-hand and right-hand sides of the machine and then tighten again slightly.
– On the left-hand side of the machine, loosen nuts (5a) and (6a).
– On the right-hand side of the machine, loosen nut (5).
– Using nut (6), set the distance (B) on scale (8).
Increase nipping distance "B"

– Loosen bolts (1) on the left-hand and right-hand sides of the machine and then tighten again slightly.
– On the left-hand side of the machine, loosen nuts (5a) and (6a).
– On the right-hand side of the machine, loosen nut (6).
– Using nut (5), set the distance (B) on scale (8).
Adjust the feed trough parallel to the feed roll.

– On the left-hand side of the machine, using nuts (5a) and (6a), provisionally adjust the distance between
feed trough (3) and feed roll (7).
Distance of the feed roller 0.10 - 0.15 mm
to the feed plate
– Counter-turn nuts (5a) and (6a) slightly.

Note: The position on this side is now provisionally adjusted and fixated.
– On the left-hand side of the machine, undo bolt (4a).

It must no longer contact lever (2).
– On the right-hand side of the machine, adjust the distance between feed trough (3) and feed roll (7) at the
closest point with bolt (4).
to the feed plate
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 71

Feed
– On the left hand side of the machine, use nuts (5a) and (6a) to adjust the distance between feed trough
(3) and feed roll (7) at the closest point.
to the feed plate
– Tighten bolts (1) on both sides.
– Check the set distance again over the whole width. Finally tighten bolt (4a) up to lever (2) and lock.
Note: Bolt (4a) on the left-hand side of the machine is not an adjustment bolt. It serves only as a stop.
6.2.7 Speisemulde zu Speisewalze, Abstand einstellen (Klemmdistanz

«B» eingestellt)
WARNING
IMPORTANT
If the feed plate is not set parallel to the feed roller then the setting of the feed plate must be cor-
rected.
3
3 3
7
2 2
4 4a
1 1
5 5a
6 6a
Check the adjustment of the parallelism without changing nipping distance (B).
Setting aim: The feed plate must be set parallel to the feed rollers.
6 / 72 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Feed
Preparatory work
– The torsion rods are prestressed.
Check the distance

– Check the setting over the whole width.
to the feed plate
– Differences in the distance have to be corrected.
Adjust the feed trough parallel to the feed roll.

– On the left-hand side of the machine, undo bolt (4a).
Note: It must no longer contact lever (2).
– Loosen bolts (1) on both sides and then tighten again slightly.
– Measure the distance between feed trough (3) and feed roll (7) on the right-hand side of the machine.
– On the right-hand side of the machine, adjust the distance between feed trough (3) and feed roll (7) at the
closest point with bolt (4).
to the feed plate
– With nuts (5a) and (6a), adjust feed trough (3) to the same distance as on the right-hand side of the ma-
chine.
to the feed plate
– Tighten bolts (1) on both sides.
– Finally tighten bolt (4a) up to lever (2) and lock.

Note: Bolt (4a) on the left-hand side of the machine is not an adjustment bolt. It serves only as a stop.
– Check the adjustment once again.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 73

Feed
6.2.8 Torsionsstäbe, Position

WARNING
Setting aim: The torsion rods (2) must be

1 2 positioned in the guides (1).
6 / 74 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Feed
6.2.9 Speisemulde, Belastung einstellen

WARNING
IMPORTANT
If the load of the feed plate is changed, the new setting must be input on the respective data
screen.
Setting aim: Optimal setting of the feed plate load

4 relative to the applied material.
Loading the feed plate
3
Cotton 3 graduation lines = 30 degrees
Mixture 4 graduation lines = 40 degrees
10
Synthetic fibers 4 graduation lines = 40 degrees
5
1
Preparatory work
– The standard adjustment for the load on the feed trough has been carried out.
Check the position of the indicators for loading the feed trough (default setting), Page 6/69
Setting for the all materials (carryout on both sides)

– Unscrew screw (5) so far until the tension lever (2) is completely undone.
– Subsequently, press the tension lever (2) downwards until the clearance in the bearing of the torsion rod
(1) is maintained.
– Screw in screw (5) until it rests on the tension lever (2).
– The indicator (4) now points to the first graduation mark (3) of the clamping lever (2).
Note: Unless this is the case, carry out the standard adjustment again.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 75

Feed
– Starting from this position, screw in screw (5) until the clamping lever (2) has turned by the desired num-
ber of graduation marks (3).
Note: After setting, the load in degrees must be input into the corresponding data screen.
41.2, Page 2/97
6.3 Licker-in unit

6.3.1 Tools
Supports
The removed licker-in unit is supported, if it lies on
a flat base. The suction tubes will thereby avoid
sustaining any damage.
Guide rails
Are required for the removal and installation of the
licker-in unit.
Carriage
6 / 76 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Feed
Hydraulic pump
Is required for the removal and installation of the
licker-in and doffer units.
6.3.2 Changing the licker-in unit

Installing the licker-in unit, Page 6/79
6.3.3 Removing the licker-in assembly

WARNING
Note: The licker-in unit can be moved onto the supplied rack as a complete unit and it can then be taken to
the workshop.
Note: When removing the licker-in assembly, great attention must be paid to the connected motors and
sensors. These cables are fitted with plugs and can therefore be disconnected easily.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 77

Feed
Preparatory work:
4 2 1
5 6 7 8 4 9 10 11 12 13
– Install the supports (14).

Note: If no supports are mounted, the suction tubes will be damaged, if the licker-in unit is transported
without the frame provided.
Supports, Page 6/76
– Remove all connections to the exhaust pipes (1) and disconnect the blow-in device.
– Disconnect the plugs to the licker-in motor, to the transducer at the feed trough and to the proximity
switch at the licker-in.
– Put the cables to one side so that they are not damaged when the licker-in assembly is brought out.
– Remove the feed roll / delivery roll toothed belt of the card trunk.
– Unhinge and remove the batt feed channel between the card trunk and the card.
– Install the yellow rails (8) supplied on the inner side of the chute.
Guide rails, Page 6/76
– Position the transport system (5) behind the card trunk (7) align to the rail height (8) at the inside of the
card trunk and secure at (6).
Carriage, Page 6/76, 6/207
– Locate the hydraulic lift (4) exactly under the support (3).
Hydraulic pump, Page 6/77
Remove
– Raise the hydraulic lift (4) to within a few millimeters under the support (3).
6 / 78 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Feed
– Carefully turn nuts (10) anticlockwise on both sides.

In this way, the licker-in unit (2) swings down until the support (3) lies on the hydraulic lift (4).
– Remove the dowel screws (9) and rotate the spindle away.
– Using the hydraulic lift, carefully swing down the licker-in unit until both transport rollers rest on the ma-
chine frame.
Note: It may be necessary to dismantle the draft change gear WE 1.
– Remove the lock bolts (13) from the holes.

Note: The transport rolls (11) and (12) are set at the factory so that the holes align with the safety bolts
(13).
– Slide the licker-in assembly onto the transport equipment and secure it.
6.3.4 Installing the licker-in unit

Sequence of steps
– The sequence for fitting follows in the reverse sequence from the dismantling.
– Align the licker-in unit so that both holes for lock bolts (13) in the licker-in unit and in the machine frame
are lined up.
– Fit the lock bolts (13) lubricated with assembly paste into the holes by hand.
Note: Do not use a hammer to install the lock bolts (13).
– If necessary, the transport rollers can be adjusted by loosening the mounting bolts of the transport rollers
(11) and realigning them using the eccentric. Tighten the bolts again.
– Coat dowel screws (9) with assembly paste and fix.
– Adjust the licker-in to the cylinder.

Adjusting the licker-in to the cylinder, Page 6/82
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 79

Feed
6.3.5 Adjust the feed plate between the card trunk and the licker-in
2
3
Setting aim: The thickness of the incoming lap (4) is different depending upon the material. Thus, the feed
plate must be adjusted accordingly.
Sequence of steps
– Using the holders (2) the position of the position of the feed plate (3) must be adjusted to the incoming
material. The incoming lap (4) must not bank up ahead of the feed plate (1).
6 / 80 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Feed
6.3.6 Licker-in
6.3.6.1 Tools
tion.
6.3.6.2 Change the licker-in

Remove the licker-in, Page 6/81
Install the licker-in, Page 6/82
6.3.6.3 Remove the licker-in

WARNING
Sequence of steps
1 – Remove the licker-in unit.
Removing the licker-in
assembly, Page 6/77
2 – Lift the licker-in (3) out of the assembly using a

lifting device (1) and the straps (2).
Lifting device, rolls and
licker-in(s), Page 6/81, 6/219
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 81

Feed
6.3.6.4 Install the licker-in

WARNING
Sequence of steps
– Use the lifting device to fit the licker-in into the assembly.
Lifting device, rolls and licker-in(s), Page 6/81, 6/219
6.3.6.5 Adjusting the licker-in to the cylinder

WARNING
IMPORTANT
Changes in the setting must always be carried out on both sides so that no damage occurs to
the machine.
1 2
25
3
4
Setting aim: Adjusting the licker-in to the cylinder.

Licker-in/Cylinder setting
Adjustment point “25” 0.30 mm
6 / 82 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Feed
Preparatory work
– Remove the lower cylinder cover (1).
Reducing the distance (-)

– Loosen nuts (4) and turn nuts (3) in the counterclockwise direction.
Note: The distance between the licker-in (2) and the cylinder is reduced.
Increasing the distance (+)

– Loosen nuts (4) and turn nuts (3) in the clockwise direction.
Note: The distance between the licker-in (2) and the cylinder is increased.
Finishing
– Once the nut has been tightened the setting must be checked again.
6.3.7 Licker-in drive
6.3.7.1 Change the licker-in speed

Karde: Drehzahlen, Geschwindigkeiten, Page 3/9
WARNING
Adjust the licker-in speed to the material being processed
Speed change for licker-in drive without frequency converter

– Loosen bolts (4).
2 1
– Loosen the bolts (2) of the belt tensioner (1).
The belt is slackened.
– After replacement of belt pulley (3) tighten the

belt with belt tensioner (1).
Tauten the licker-in belts, Page 6/84
– Tighten bolts (4).

torque
Value 51.0 Nm
4 3
Speed change for licker-in drive with frequency converter

– Change the speed in the appropriate data screen.
10.3, Page 2/77
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 83

Feed
6.3.7.2 Marking the licker-in belt

Setting aim: New or used belts must be marked
1 1 with 2 markings (1) so that they can be correctly
tensioned. Used belts stretch in service. They may
always still be tensioned starting from their original
dimension.
X Measurement «X» 200.0 mm
6.3.7.3 Tauten the licker-in belts

WARNING
2 1 1
4
200mm
3
Preparatory work
– The slack, new belts are marked with two lines on the inside.
Marking the licker-in belt, Page 6/84
6 / 84 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Feed
Determine belt length (50 Hz motor)

– Determine the belt length based on the belt pulley diameter.
Belt tension at the licker-in (50 Hz) Change gear WE4
Disc diameter: 90 / 100 1.60 %
mm
Belt length: 1540.0 mm
Disc diameter: 120 mm 1.60 %
Determine belt length (60 Hz motor)

– Determine the belt length based on the belt pulley diameter.
Belt tension at the licker-in (60 Hz) Change gear WE4
Disc diameter: 90 / 100 1.60 %
mm
Disc diameter: 140 / 160 1.60 %
mm
Tighten belts
– Slightly loosen bolts (3) of belt tensioner (2).
– Apply a 22 mm open-jaw spanner at the belt tensioner and tighten belt (4) with belt tensioner (2).
Note: Do not tighten belt (4) in one work step. The licker-in must be turned at least 3 times during the
tensioning procedure. This distributes the tension evenly over the belt.
– Measure the tension of belt (4) between markings (1).

Dimension “X” with belt taut.
Dimension “X” with belt 200 mm + 1.6%
taut; measure between the Tension= 203.20
markings mm
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 85

Feed
6.3.7.4 Adjust the proximity switch for monitoring the licker-in speed
The machine will stop producing if the monitored
licker-in speed drops below a certain level (blocking
protection). Note the text display.
X
2
1
Sequence of steps
– Adjust proximity switch (1) to distance “X” to pulse generator (2).
Distance «X» 2 mm

– Select the data mask.
83.4, Page 2/118
– Start the licker-in

Note: The difference between the two values must not be greater than “10”.
6 / 86 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Feed
6.3.8 Carding element and knife of licker-in
6.3.8.1 Mote knives

Fitting a mote knife at the first licker-in
b a b
– Prerequisite: Place the mote knife (2) in the correct position for fitting.
Insert the mote knife (2) and position it in the centre of the support.
– Screw in the screws (1) but do not tighten them firmly yet.
– Starting in the centre at position (a), press the mote knife (2) against the stop face and simultaneously
tighten the screw (1 ) firmly, applying the prescribed torque.
Thread dimension 6 mm
torque 4.0 Nm
– Firmly tighten all screws (1) to the left and right of the central position (a) in the same manner.
Finishing
– After the mote knife support has been fitted, set the distance between the mote knife and the licker-in.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 87

Feed
6.3.8.2 Setting the mote knives (discharge opening)

WARNING
Adjust the position of mote knife (2) according to the raw material, if the composition of the licker-in waste is
to be altered.
The discharge opening dimension (X) (ejection distance) between the feed roller (1) and the mote knife (2) is
altered via the setting mechanism (5). The setting procedure is carried out manually or electrically depending
on the model.
Setting aim: Optimal composition of licker-in waste for the given raw material.
Mote knife setting (manual)
X max
X min
2
40 70
4
5
min. X max.
- +
– Determine the discharge opening dimension (X).
Note: The discharge opening dimension has to be determined according to the required amount of
waste.
Discharge outlet
Minimum gap: Minimum min. 40.0 mm
amount of waste
Default setting, gap: All 50.0 mm
materials
Maximum gap: Maximum max. 70.0 mm
amount of waste
– Stop the machine production, but do not shut down the machine.
6 / 88 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Feed
DANGER
If the minimum or maximum gap for the discharge outlet is exceeded, the adjustment device may
be damaged.
– Turn the adjusting screw (5) until the required distance for the discharge opening is indicated on the
scale (4) by the mark (3).
Mote knife setting (motor-driven)

– Determine the discharge opening dimension (X).
Discharge outlet
Minimum gap: Minimum min. 40.0 mm
amount of waste
Default setting, gap: All 50.0 mm
materials
Maximum gap: Maximum max. 70.0 mm
amount of waste
– Stop the machine production, but do not shut down the machine.
– Select the data screen for the discharge opening setting

10.3, Page 2/77
– Set the required distance (X) using the respective buttons on the operating unit.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 89

Feed
6.3.8.3 Preparing the electric cylinder for mote knife setting

DANGER
The fork head on the piston rod must neither be loosened nor twisted after an electric cylinder
was removed or if a new electric cylinder is to be installed.
The basic setting of the mote knife has to be checked, if the electric cylinder has been exchanged or replaced
with a spare part.
Moving to reference positions

– Prerequisite: The electric cylinder has been installed.
Select the reference position in the data screen and confirm.
85.7, Page 2/126
The electric cylinder moves to the reference position.
Moving to target position.
1
3
40 70
4
min. max.
– Prerequisite: The reference position has been determined.

Select the target position in the data screen and confirm.
Target position to check a 50 mm
replaced electric cylinder
85.7, Page 2/126

The electric cylinder (1) moves to the target position.
– Check whether the marking (3) on scale (4) to indicate the position of mote knife (2) is consistent with the
target position.
Note: Correct the mote knife position if there is a discrepancy.
6 / 90 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Feed
Setting position of mote knife mechanically.
3
1 70
40
4
5 min. max.
– Prerequisite: The mote knife (2) is at the target position.

Move the bracket (5) to adjust the position of the mote knife (2), so that the marking (3) on the scale (4)
corresponds to the target position indicated on the data screen.
Setting check
– Prerequisite: The position of the mote knife (2) has been adjusted to the target position.
Make the minimum and maximum discharge opening (ejection distance) settings in the data screen.
Note: Compare the target positions with the mechanical positions on the scale (4) and correct again if
necessary.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 91

Feed
6.3.8.4 Inserting the guide plate

WARNING
When processing regenerated products (prepared

fibre), the waste discharged by the first mote knife
used may be too high. If this is the case, replace
the mote knife with the supplied guide plate.
Sequence of steps
– Remove the licker-in unit.
– Make the setting for the discharge opening (ejection distance) corresponding to a minimum amount of
waste.
6 / 92 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Feed
6.3.8.5 Mote knife setting (basic setting for licker-ins)

WARNING
Correct basic setting is required after replacing mote knife (2).

The service life of the mote knife (2) depend on the production, material and degree of cleanliness. Mote
knives with damaged or very rounded cutting edges should be replaced.
Preparatory work
– Remove the licker-in unit.
Sequence of steps
1 19 1
2
3
4
– Make the maximum discharge opening setting for the mote knife.
– Loosen screws (5) on both sides.
– Insert an Allen wrench into the opening (3) of the eccentric (4).
– Use the Allen wrench to adjust the eccentric (4) so that the correct dimension is set at adjustment point
(19), between mote knife (2) and licker-in (1).
mote knife / licker-in
– Tighten screws (5) firmly.

Note: Then check the distance set.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 93

Feed
6.3.8.6 Adjusting the carding elements in the licker-in range

WARNING
The service life of carding elements (5) depends on the production, material and contamination.
Setting aim: Replace carding elements with rounded tooth tips. The wire manufacturer recommends chan-
ging the carding elements at the latest with the cylinder wires.
Sequence of steps
4
1 2
1 5
6
3
3 Nm
9 8
– Remove cover (9).

Note: The adjusting procedure is described only for one carding element. The procedure is the same for
other carding elements.
– Measure the distance between the carding element (5) and the licker-in (1).
– Determine the thickness of the shim (8) according to this distance, which must be between the element
holder (6) and the carding element (5).
Note: There are thicker and thinner spacer shims.
– Remove the bolts (3) and the clamping piece (4).
– Remove the element holder (6).
– Remove bolts (7) and change shim (8).
6 / 94 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Feed

Note: Without fail, note the correct torque.
Tightening torque for the 3.0 Nm
bolts of the carding
elements
– Re-install the element holder (6).
– Engage the bolt (3) on the clamping piece (4) with a slight pressure then tighten with 1/4 turn.
– Check the adjustment after tightening bolts (3).
6.3.9 Form building of licker-in
6.3.9.1 Adjusting suction opening

Setting aim: The opening (3) for exhausting the polluted air has to be adjusted according to the material and
Sequence of steps
1
2
4 3

Note: Do not loosen bolts (2).
– Move the casing (5) to the desired position within range (X).
Note: Secure the position of the casing using markings (4) in reference to the bolts (1).
Setting range, dimension “X”
Setting range 0.0 - 6.0 mm
Ex works setting.(The 3.0 mm
markings are located in
the centre of the bolts)
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 95

Feed
6 / 96 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Cylinder and card flats
7 Cylinder and card flats

7.1 Cylinder unit
7.1.1 Cylinder
7.1.1.1 Removing the tension tape

WARNING
Sequence of steps
– Loosen the tension screws in the lower position of the cylinder and take out the seal on the cylinder
shield top.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 97

7.1.1.2 Installing the tension tape

WARNING
Installation
3 3
~ 5 mm
2 4 2
– Install both tape halves (3) according to the figure.

Note: Note the direction of rotation of the cylinder.
– The tension screws (4) must engage in the corresponding counter piece (2).
Tensioning the tapes

– Using the tension screws (4) tighten as much as possible.
Note: The tape halves must not come away from the inside of the cylinder.
– The gap between the tension pieces (2) should be the same.
Locate the tapes

– Pull the seal (3) as far outwards as possible.
6 / 98 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.1.2 Cylinder drive
7.1.2.1 Marking the cylinder belt

Setting aim: New or used belts (1) must be marked
1 1 with 2 markings so that they can be correctly ten-
sioned. Used belts stretch in service. They may al-
ways still be tensioned starting from their original
dimension.
X Measurement «X» relax the 500.0 mm
belt
7.1.2.2 Tensioning cylinder belts

WARNING
3
4
2
+%
-%
1 2 3
Preparatory work
– The cylinder belt is marked
Marking the cylinder belt, Page 6/99
– The cylinder belt is assembled
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 99

Sequence of steps
– The deflection roller (1) is in the relaxed position.
– Loosen screw (3) slightly.

The weight of the motor (2) cause the belt (4) to be slightly pre-stressed
– Swing the deflection roller (1) upwards.

Note: The cylinder must then be turned at least 3 times. This distributes the tension evenly over the belt
(4).
– Measure the distance between the markings on the belt (4).
– If the distance is not correct (belt tensioning too large or too small) unload the deflection roller (1). Using
the position of the motor (4) correct the dimension («X») correspondingly.
Measurement «X» belt 508.0 mm
tensioned
– Measure the distance between the markings and repeat the setting procedure again should it be neces-
sary.
– Belt length and belt tension for a 50 Hz motor

Tension in the cylinder belt (50 Hz) Change gear WT
Pulley diameter, motor: Belt tension
85.0 / 92.5 / 100.0 mm 1.60%
Belt length 2956.0 mm
Number of teeth 107.0 / 1.60%
114.0 / 121.0 / 128.0
– Belt length and belt tension for a 60 Hz motor

Tension in the cylinder belt (60 Hz) Change gear WT
85.0 / 92.5 / 100.0 mm 1.60%
107.0 / 114.0 / 121.0 / 1.60%
128.0
– Belt length and belt tension for a motor with a frequency inverter
Tension in the cylinder belt (with frequency inverter)
Pulley diameter for the C Belt tension
70 motor: 121.0 mm 1.60%
Pulley diameter for the C
70 H motor: 128.0 mm
6 / 100 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.1.2.3 Altering the cylinder r.p.m.

WARNING
Setting aim: Einstellung der optimalen Trommeldrehzahl auf den verarbeiteten Rohstoff. Gleichzeitig mit der
Trommeldrehzahl auch die Einstellung der Kardendeckel anpassen.
Richtwerte für die Trommeldrehzahl
950
900
850 A
800 B
Rpm / min
750 C
700
D+E
650
600
550
500
kg/h 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240 270
A Rotorgarn grob: 100% Baumwolle, Kur- C Ringgarn kardiert, fein: 100% Baum-
zstapel wolle, Mittelstapel
B Ringgarn kardiert grob: 100% Baum- D 100% Polyester: 1.1-2.0 dtex (-51 mm),
wolle, Kurz-und Mittelstapel und Swing: Polyester oder Baumwolle
B Rotorgarn fein: 100% Baumwolle, Mittel- E 100% Viscose: 1.1-2.0 dtex (-51 mm),
stapel und Swing:Viscose oder Baumwolle
B Mischungen: Baumwolle /
Chemiefasern, Kurz-und Mittelstapel
C Ringgarn gekämmt: 100% Baumwolle,
Mittel-und Langstapel
– Die Trommeldrehzahl gemäss den Richtlinien für die Anwendung festlegen.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 101

Speed change for cylinder drive without frequency converter

– Loosen screws (2).
– Use the deflection roller (3) to slacken the belt

4 (4).
Use the deflection roller to load and
relieve the cylinder belt, Page 6/103

torque
Value 25.0 Nm
– After changing the belt pulley (1) tighten the

belt (4) according to the guidelines.
3 2 1
Speed change for cylinder drive with frequency converter

– Change the speed using the appropriate data screen.
10.1, Page 2/75
Kardendeckel einstellen
DANGER
Falsch eingestellte Kardendeckel, in Bezug zur Trommeldrehzahl, können Maschinenschäden
verursachen.
Die Kardendeckel zwingend gemäss den Vorschriften einstellen.
– Neben der richtigen Einstellung der Trommeldrehzahl müssen auch die Kardendeckel auf das Material
und die Trommeldrehzahl eingestellt werden.
6 / 102 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.1.2.4 Use the deflection roller to load and relieve the cylinder belt
WARNING
Loading and unloading the cylinder belt without al-

tering the position of the main motor.
2
1
3
1
Unloading:
– Press the deflection roller (1) downwards using an open mouth wrench. The belt is slackened.
Loading (without changing the belt pulley)

– Apply the belt correctly and press the deflection roller (1) upwards to the limit stop (2) using an open
mouth wrench.
Loading (after a belt pulley change)

– The belt must be correctly tensioned after a belt pulley change. Position the drive motor accordingly.
– Apply the belt correctly and press the deflection roller (1)upwards to the limit stop (2) using an open
mouth wrench.
Note: Use the bolt (3) to fix the deflection roller (1) in place, if the drum has to be ground.
Secure the deflection roller

– Secure the deflection roller (1) with screw (3) when the deflection roller (2) is in the loaded position.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 103

7.1.2.5 Cylinder speed proximity switch, Description

Purpose: Proximity switch to compute the cylinder speed and to monitor different conditions
Method of operation
• Check the minimum cylinder speed. Production can start only if the cylinder has attained a minimum
speed dependent of the type of drive.
• The machine will stop its production, if the cylinder speed drops below a certain level (blocking protec-
tion). Observe the text display.
• The speed is monitored if the brakes are applied.
• The proximity switch for the licker-in speed and the minimum required draft between the licker-in unit and
the cylinder are monitored together.
7.1.2.6 Adjust the proximity switch for monitoring the cylinder speed
Description Cylinder speed proximity switch, Page 6/104
1
X
Sequence of steps
– Adjusting the proximity switch (1) to the distance «X» from the impulse generator (2).
Distance «X» 2.0 mm

– Selecting the data screen
83.5, Page 2/118
– Start the cylinder

Note: The difference between the two values indicated must not be greater than «5».
6 / 104 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.1.3 Form building of cylinder unit
7.1.3.1 Fastening the cylinder cover

WARNING
Note: All cylinder covers are fastened down with special screws.
Sequence of steps
1
2 4
3
– Prerequisite: The shoulder (3) of the screw (2) must be located in the screw hole of the cylinder cover
(1). If this is not the case then the spring unit (4) which permits a certain expansion of the cover is not
longer being effective.
Carefully locate and fasten down the cylinder cover.
– Install the cylinder cover (1) and screw in the screws (2) a few turns.
Note: First pull the cylinder cover (1) to the side with the screw holes on the outside so that the shoulder
(3) of the screw (2) can locate into the center into the screw hole.
– First tighten screw (2) on the side with the screw hole. The finally tighten the screw with the slot.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 105

7.1.3.2 Information on setting distances
xx 0.40 0.65 xx 0.40 0.65 xx 0.40 0.65
A)
0.40 0.65 0.40
1
B) 0.50 0.65 0.50
1
C) 0.40 0.55 0.40
The elements around the cylinder have concave forms due to prior factory-processing. Consequently, the
distance between any such element and the cylinder is largest at the centre of the cylinder. In the setting
guidelines, the second dimension for each adjustment point refers to the minimum distance to the centre of
the cylinder, and this value must be complied with.
Setting aim: The second dimension applies to the centre of the machine and this value must be complied
with. If there is a drop below this value, the distances at the sides have to be suitably adjusted until the
correct distance is achieved at the centre of the machine.
Setting example: Distance of 0.40 mm at the sides of the machine, and 0.65 mm at the centre of the
machine
– Prerequisite: Concave element (A) (example):
An Seiten der Trommel gemessen beträgt das Mass (0.40 mm). In der Mitte der Maschine muss das
zweite Mass von (0. 65 mm) erreicht werden.
– Prerequisite: Concave element (B) (example):

Here, in order to avoid the adjusted element (1) being positioned too close to the cylinder, the minimum
acceptable setting distance given by the second dimension (e.g. 0.65 mm) has to be complied with.
– Prerequisite: Concave element (C), incorrect setting

If the minimum acceptable distance given by the second dimension is not adhered to, then the element
(1) will be too close to the cylinder at the centre of the machine.
Note: Do not straighten concave elements.
6 / 106 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.1.3.3 Preparing the cylinder cover for the setting procedure

WARNING
5
1
4
7
7
3 6
The cylinder covers (1-5) and the tongue (6) must not make contact with the clothing. If necessary, alter the
positions of the adjusting segments (7) before fitting the covers.
Sequence of steps
– If necessary, alter the positions of the adjusting segments (7) before fitting the covers.
– Take note of the directions for fastening the cylinder covers.

Fastening the cylinder cover, Page 6/105
– Install only the cylinder covers (1-5) and the tongue (6) before adjusting the cylinder covers.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 107

– Fastening the cylinder covers correctly.

7.1.3.4 Setting the cylinder covers

WARNING
Set the cylinder covers according to the installation instructions.
Preparatory work
– The cylinder covers have been prepared for the setting procedure.
Preparing the cylinder cover for the setting procedure, Page 6/107
Setting measurement points for pre-carding zone (all raw materials)

– At the narrowest locations, set the adjustment
46 points according to the dimensions specified in
the setting guidelines.
Note: Check the setting over the entire ma-
chine width.
Information on setting
distances, Page 6/106
– Move the adjusting nuts (1) and (2) towards

one another, until there is firm contact between
1 them.
2
1 – Increasing the distance: Loosen nut (1) and
tighten nut (2).
– Reducing the distance: Loosen nut (2) and

2 tighten nut (1).
41
6 / 108 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Setting measurement points for post-carding zone (cotton; cotton / man-made fibres)
56
5
1 4
2
61
3
1
3
– Prerequisite: The spacers (4) of thickness 0.3 mm (factory setting) have to be fitted between the sup-
port for the carding element (3) and the adjusting segment (5). The spacers (4) have to be parallel to the
adjusting segments (5).
At the narrowest locations, set the adjustment points according to the dimensions specified in the setting
guidelines.
Note: Check the setting over the entire machine width.
– Move the adjusting nuts (1) and (2) towards one another, until there is firm contact between them.
– Increasing the distance: Loosen nut (1) and tighten nut (2).
– Reducing the distance: Loosen nut (2) and tighten nut (1).
Setting measurement points for post-carding zone (man-made fibres)

– Prerequisite: No carding element (6) is available for this design.
Setting is performed in the same manner, however, only with different setting distances.
Finishing
– Adjust the distance at the centre for the cylinder covers beneath the card-flat deflection space.
Setting the cylinder covers beneath the card-flat deflection space., Page 6/110
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 109

7.1.3.5 Setting the cylinder covers beneath the card-flat deflection space.
WARNING
Stabilisation and setting of the cylinder covers (1) beneath the card-flat deflection space (at centre of
machine).
Setting aim: At the centre of the machine, the adjustment points (46) and (56) have to be set according to the
distance specifications.
Preparatory work
– Remove the card flats unit.
– Set the cylinder covers.

Sequence of steps
1
3
2
– Prerequisite: The distances from the centres of the cylinder covers(1) to the cylinder have to be
increased.
Loosen the screw (3) and use the gudgeon (2) to increase the distance. Then slightly tighten the screw
(3) again.
– Prerequisite: The distances from the centres of the cylinder covers(1) to the cylinder have to be
reduced.
Die Stiftschrauben (2) lösen und mit der Schraube (3) die Distanz verringern. Anschliessend die Stifts-
chrauben (2) wieder leicht festziehen.
6 / 110 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.1.3.6 Fitting the mote knives

WARNING
Note: The following describes the procedure for fitting the mote knives in the pre-carding zone. A similar fit-
ting procedure is used in the post-carding zone.
Sequence of steps
3
4
2
1
b a b
– Prerequisite: Place the mote knife (2) in the correct position for fitting.
Push in the mote knife (2) up to the limit stop (3).
– Starting in the centre at position (a), press the mote knife (2) against the stop face (4) and simultaneously
tighten the screw (1 ) firmly, applying the prescribed torque.
Thread dimension 6
torque 4.0 Nm
– Firmly tighten all screws (1) to the left and right of the central position (a) in the same manner.
– After the mote knife support has been fitted, set the distance between the mote knife and the cylinder.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 111

7.1.3.7 Removing the tongue in the range of the cylinder

WARNING
IMPORTANT
The surface of the tongue must not be scratched, it must remain fibre-adhesion free.
Removing and installing the tongue carefully
Sequence of steps
4
3
– Loosen the screw (3) with an Allen wrench. Push tongue (1) as far as possible in the direction of doffer
(2) and slightly re-tighten again.
– Remove the IGS-classic or cylinder cover (4).
– Hold the tongue (1) firmly and at the same time remove screws (3). Carefully move the tongue (1) out of
the machine.
Note: Make sure the seal strip that is fastened to the tongue does not sustain damage during the
removal process.
6 / 112 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.1.3.8 Installing the tongue in the range of the cylinder

WARNING
IMPORTANT
The surface of the tongue must not be scratched, it must remain fibre-adhesion free.
Removing and installing the tongue carefully
Sequence of steps
4
3
– Lift the tongue (1) on both sides at the same time, position it and screw in the screws (3). Do not tighten
screws (3)!
Note: Make sure the seal strip that is fastened to the tongue does not sustain damage during the install-
ation process.
– Push tongue (1) as far as possible in the direction of doffer (2) and slightly re-tighten.
– Carefully install the IGS-classic or cylinder cover (4). Finally push the tongue (1) towards the IGS-classic
or cylinder cover again.
Note: Make sure the seal strip that is fastened to the tongue does not sustain damage.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 113

7.1.3.9 Adjusting the cylinder lower section

WARNING
2 1 2 1
«Z»
3 «Y» 4
«X»
Preparatory work
– In order that no incorrect adjustments are made, the tongue must be pushed into the lowest position to-
wards the licker-in and secured in this position.
Sequence of steps
– Prerequisite: Note the description for assembling the cylinder cover.
Secure the cylinder covers correctly.
Adjust measuring points "X" and "Z".Description with the licker-in assembly removed
– Prerequisite: Set all cylinder covers at the narrowest point to the size noted in the setting guides. Finally
check the whole width.
Increasing the distance: Loosen the nuts (2) and tighten nuts (1).
– Reducing the distance: Loosen the nuts (1) and tighten nuts (2).
6 / 114 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Set check point “Y”. Description with the licker-in assembly installed.
– Prerequisite: As it is not possible in this case to check the setting at check point (Z), you will have to
check the setting at check point (Y).
Increasing the distance: Loosen the nuts (2) and tighten nuts (1).
– Reducing the distance: Loosen the nuts (1) and tighten nuts (2).
Distance at check point “Y”
Distance “Y” Distance specification at check
point “Z”- 0.40 mm
7.1.3.10 Tongues
1 2
The long tongue (1) is utilised for cotton and mixtures. The short tongue (2) is used for man-made fibres.
Seal strip
– Prerequisite: The seal strip (3) typically re-
mains fitted to the tongue. Only a damaged
seal strip must be removed from the tongue.
Coat the bolts (4) with a few drops of
non-hardening “Loctite 243” and tighten firmly
with the prescribed torque.
4 Bolt tightening torque
Bolt Torque: 1.20 Nm
3
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 115

7.1.3.11 Adjusting the position of the tongue

Sliver weight , Page 3/13
WARNING
In addition to the distance from tongue (1) to cylinder (3), the distance between tongue (1) and the fibre trans-
fer point at doffer (2) is also important. This fibre transfer point can be influenced by moving the tongue (1).
(range: approx. 2 to 25 mm)
Setting aim: Optimal setting for the tongue. The opening between tongue (1) and cylinder cover (7) or the
IGS-classic respectively, is closed off with a seal strip (6).
Sequence of steps
1 4
1
6
5
7
2...25 mm
– Move the tongue until the markings (5) on tongue (1) are positioned on both sides at the selected location
on the scale (4).
6 / 116 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.1.3.12 Adjusting the distance from the tongue to the cylinder

WARNING
IMPORTANT
The control eccentric default setting was configured at the works during installation.
The control eccentric default setting must not be changed in the subsequent operation of the ma-
chine.
For problems with the fibre transfer point at the doffer, the tongue / doffer position has to be taken into ac-
count in addition to the tongue / cylinder distance.
When the cylinder cover is installed and the doffer adjusted, the distance from tongue (1) to cylinder cloth-
ing (4) can only be measured via the measurement between the control eccentric (2) and the cylinder shield
(5). If the control eccentric (2) is adjusted correctly, this measurement corresponds to the distance between
tongue (1) and cylinder (4).
Sequence of steps
7 6 5 4 2
X
X
– Prerequisite: The default setting of control eccentric (2) was not changed. You must not undo screw (3).
Increasing the distance: Loosen screw (6) and screw in screw (7).
Note: Screw the screws (6) and (7) only lightly together.
– Reducing the distance: Loosen screw (7) and screw in screw (6).
Note: Screw the screws (6) and (7) only lightly together.
– If required, adapt the position of the tongue to the doffer.

31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 117

7.1.3.13 Adjust the default setting for the measuring eccenter for the tongue
WARNING
The control eccentric (2) was set at the factory. The control eccentric default setting has to be configured only
if it was adjusted by error or if the default setting is no longer correct for other reasons.
Preparatory work
– Set the distance from the doffer to the cylinder to approx. 2.0 mm.
– The covers of the cylinder lower section must be adjusted.

Adjusting the measuring eccenter
5 4 5
2
X1
X2
3
3
2
X1
1
«X»
– Prerequisite: Note the description for assembling the cylinder cover.

Possibly first fasten the cylinder cover correctly.
– The tongue at check point (X) is set.

– Adjust the tongue (1) at the check point (X1) to the cylinder (4).
Note: Tongue (1) must be located in the lowest position.
Check point “X1”: 1.30 mm
Distance from tongue to
cylinder
– Loosen screw (3).
6 / 118 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

– Adjust control eccentric (2) so that the distance (X2) between the control eccentric (2) and the cylinder
shield (5) is the same as measured at check point (X1).
Note: The adjustments follow from this default setting per the setting guidelines or from the values de-
termined in the tests.
– Check the distance at the control point (X).

7.1.3.14 Removing carding profiles

WARNING
Carding profile design for cotton and for cotton / man-made fibre blends
3
4
– Remove the clamps (3) situated between the knife holder (4) and the carding profile (1).
– Remove the carding profile (1).

Note: Keep the washers (2) safe. These washers have to be fitted whenever the carding profile is rein-
stalled.
– Note the positions of carding profiles (1) prior to removal.
Note: When reinstalling any carding profile (1), ensure that this is carried out at the location from where
it was removed, so that the distance to the cylinder matches the original value. Take the position of the
clothing teeth into account.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 119

Carding profile design for man-made fibre

Note: Keep the washers (2) safe. These washers have to be fitted whenever the carding profile is rein-
stalled.
– Note the positions of carding profiles (1) prior to removal.
Note: When reinstalling any carding profile (1), ensure that this is carried out at the location from where
it was removed, so that the distance to the cylinder matches the original value. Take the position of the
clothing teeth into account.
6 / 120 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.1.3.15 Installing carding profiles

WARNING
1a
2
5
4
– Note the description for assembling the cylinder cover.

– Prepare the carding profile (1) for fitting.

Note: Install the carding profiles at the same place from which they were removed. Take the position of
the wire teeth into account.
– Prerequisite: The bottom protective plate and the knife holder (4) have to be installed.
The washers (2) for the carding profiles (1) have to be fitted at the adjustment segments (5) above the
doffer.
– Fix the carding profiles (1) and (1a) in place using screws (6).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 121

1a
4 3
– Note the description for assembling the cylinder cover.

– Prepare the carding profiles (1) and (3) for fitting.

Note: Install the carding profiles at the same place from which they were removed. Take the position of
the wire teeth into account.
– Prerequisite: The bottom protection plate has to be fitted.
In the post-carding zone, the first task is to install the carding profile (3)
– The washers (2) for the carding profiles (1) have to be fitted at the adjustment segments (4) above the
doffer.
– Fix the carding profiles (1) and (1a) in place using screws (5).
6 / 122 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.1.3.16 Setting the distances between the carding profiles and the cylinder clothing
(cotton)
WARNING
The adjustment segments (4) are used to set the cylinder covers (1). A change to the factory-set distances
between the cylinder covers (1) and the cylinder clothing results in the factory-set distances between the
carding profiles (3) and the cylinder clothing being changed too. The distances between the carding profiles
(3) and the cylinder clothing now need to be adjusted using spacers (2).
Increasing the distance to the cylinder wires. (Changing the factory setting)
7 +/-
6
2
5
3
4
+/-
3
1
– Remove the shims (2) and determine their total thickness.

Note: The grooves (6) give information about the thickness of the distance shims (2).
Grooves determining the thicknesses of the spacers
Long grooves in the 0.10 mm
spacer
Short grooves in spacer 0.05 mm
– Make up the required thickness of the shims (2).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 123

7 +/-
6
2
5
3
4
+/-
3
1
– Slide the distance shims (2) between the bases and tighten the screws (5)
6 / 124 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.1.3.17 Setting the mote knives (cotton)

WARNING
2
1
9
11 +/-
10
5 6
4
+/-
7 1
The adjustment segments (4) are used to adjust the cylinder covers (1). A change in the factory setting of cyl-
inder covers (1) to cylinder clothing (7) also changes the distances between the mote knives (5) set at the
factory. The distance between the mote knives (5) and the cylinder clothing (7) must then be adjusted using
spacers (2).
Preparatory work
– The adjusting segment must be adjusted.
Increase the distance to the cylinder clothing (change works setting, precarding zone)
– Observe the instructions for fitting the cylinder cover.
– Remove the carding element (6).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 125

– Measure the distance between the cylinder clothings (7) and the mote knife (5).
Note: Great care is required when measuring the distance, since otherwise the mote knife (5) could be
raised leading to an incorrect setting.
– Remove the screws (3) and the support (11).

Note: The grooves (9) give information about the thickness of the shims (2).
spacer
– Adjust the distance by adding or removing the supplied shim (2).

Note: Do not confuse the shims (2) installed on each side.
– Prerequisite: Check the adjustment after tightening bolts (3).

Measure the distance between the mote knife (5) and the cylinder clothing (7) again. The distance must
be the same for the left- and right-hand sides of the machine.
Note: The extraction quantity can be modified by applying strips at the carding element (6).
– Re-install the carding element (6).
Adjust the mote knives in the post-carding zone

– When adjusting the mote knife, it is recommended to first remove the card flats unit.
– The adjustment procedure is the same as for the mote knife (5) in the precarding zone.
6 / 126 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.1.3.18 Setting the extraction dimension for the mote knives (cotton)
WARNING
«X» + / -
1
8 5 2 0
Optimised discharge of undesirable fibre parts.

Changing the raw material can affect the extraction properties at the mote knives (1).
The extraction dimension (X) between the mote knife (1) and the strip (2) is dependent on the dimension of
the strip (2). The extraction dimension changes accordingly.
Setting aim: Set the extraction dimension (X) optimally given the raw material being processed.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 127

«X» + / -
1
8 5 2 0
Supplied strips
Factory-fitted in the pre- and Strip no.: 5
post-carding zones (medium amount
of discharged
waste)
Additionally supplied strips 1x strip type 0
(maximum amount
of discharged
waste)
(relatively large
amount of
discharged waste)
(relatively small
amount of
discharged waste)
Preparatory work
– The carding profiles have to be adjusted.
– The mote knives must be adjusted.

6 / 128 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Changing the discharge distance (pre- and post-carding zones)

IMPORTANT
The cylinder can be accessed, unless a strip has been installed.
One strip must always remain installed.
– Prerequisite: Check whether terminal strip (3) has been properly installed before fitting strip (2).
Pull out strip (2) and insert the strip with the appropriate number into the groove.
Note: The strips are marked with numbers.
Effect of strip on discharge of waste
Strip type 0 Maximum amount of discharged
waste
Strip type 2 More waste is discharged than
normal
Strip type 5 Normal amount of waste is
discharged
Strip type 8 Less waste is discharged than
normal
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 129

7.1.3.19 Setting the distances between the carding profiles and the cylinder clothing
(cotton)
WARNING
The adjustment segments (4) are used to set the cylinder covers (1). A change to the factory-set distances
between the cylinder covers (1) and the cylinder clothing results in the factory-set distances between the
carding profiles (3) and the cylinder clothing being changed too. The distances between the carding profiles
(3) and the cylinder clothing now need to be adjusted using spacers (2).
Increasing the distance to the cylinder wires. (Changing the factory setting)
7 3
+/- 4
6
5
3
3
+/- 1

Note: The grooves (6) give information about the thickness of the distance shims (2).
spacer
– Make up the required thickness of the shims (2).
– Slide the distance shims (2) between the bases and tighten the screws (5)
6 / 130 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.1.3.20 Setting the carding profiles at the doffer section (man-made fibre)
WARNING
2
3
6 +/-
+/-
7 8
60
1
6 5
4
The adjustment segments (4) are used to set the cylinder covers (1). A change to the distances between the
cylinder covers (1) and the cylinder clothing results in the distances between the carding profiles (4) and the
cylinder clothing being changed too. The distances between the carding profiles (4) and the cylinder clothing
(6) now need to be adjusted using spacers (3).
Setting aim: Making the optimal carding element setting for the raw material being processed
Preparatory work
– The adjusting segment must be adjusted.
Sequence of steps
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 131

– Measure the distance between the cylinder clothing (6) and the carding element (4). The distance
between these two elements can be adjusted by adding or removing the spacers supplied (3) until the
required dimension is achieved.
– Remove the support (4).
– Remove the spacers (3) and determine their total thicknesses.

Note: The grooves (2) indicate the thicknesses of the spacers (2).
spacer
– Combine the spacers (3) until the required thickness is achieved, and fit in place
– Fit the support (4).
– The distance between the carding element (8) and the cylinder clothing (6) has to be equal on both sides.
7.1.3.21 Changing the carding elements in the area of the cylinder

Removing the carding elements in the area of the cylinder, Page 6/133
Install carding elements in the cylinder area into the supports, Page 6/134
6 / 132 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.1.3.22 Removing the carding elements in the area of the cylinder

WARNING
Note: The service-life of the carding elements depends on the production speed, material and contamination.
Replace carding elements with rounded tooth tips. The wire manufacturer recommends changing the carding
elements at the latest with the cylinder wires.
Removing carding elements (pre- and post-carding zones)
– Remove the carding profiles.
2 1 Removing carding profiles, Page 6/119
– Loosen all screws (2) of carding element (1) by

1 to 2 turns and pull the carding element out to
the side.
– Remove the support with the carding element.
2 – Loosen the nuts (2) and bolts (3) of the carding

1 elements (1) by 1 to 2 turns and remove the
carding element laterally.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 133

7.1.3.23 Install carding elements in the cylinder area into the supports
Installing the carding elements in the carding profile
– Install carding element (1), position laterally
2 1 and tighten bolts (2).
Note: Tighten the bolts to the correct torque.
Thread dimension M4
torque 3 Nm
Installing carding element (post-carding zone)

– Fit the carding element (1), adjust it laterally so
that it is properly positioned and firmly tighten
2 the screws (2) using the correct torque.
1
Thread dimension M4
torque 1 Nm
Installing carding element at the doffer section

– Install carding element (1), position laterally
and tighten bolts (2).
Note: Tighten screws (2) firmly, applying the
correct torque.
Thread dimension M4
torque 3 Nm
1 2
Finishing
– After installing the carding profiles, check their adjustment.
– After the carding element has been installed in the post-carding zone, check the setting
, Page 6/108
6 / 134 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.1.4 Cylinder grinding system IGS-classic
7.1.4.1 Tools
Setting gauges for the IGS-classic
Gauges for height adjustment of grinding stone
7.1.4.2 Description
Structure
1
2
3 4
The IGS classic cylinder grinding system (1) comprises an aluminium profile as support and a linearly-guided
grinding stone (4) with spring-pressure stabilisation (5). In the parking position (on the right-hand side of the
machine), the flat belt (3) is forced upwards by rubber sealing profiles (2), so that neither dust nor fibre waste
can enter the interior of the machine.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 135

Purpose: The cylinder grinding system grinds the cylinder clothing automatically
4 3 6 7 4 8
10 11 10 9 5
A condition for achieving perfect quality of the card sliver is the exact and careful maintenance of the wires.
The correct grinding of the clothing, better expressed as “sharpening”, provides the foundation for a good
carding.
The IGS (Integrated Grinding System) classic cylinder grinding unit is used to periodically sharpen the tooth
tips of the cylinder clothing throughout their entire service life.
The parameters which are necessary for the grinding operation can be input into the programming of the
card. The programming calculates the grinding program distributed over the service-life of the cylinder wires
for the optimum distribution of the defined grinding cycles (270 or 400 grinding cycles). At the beginning of
the grinding plan, the time intervals between the cycles is longer than at the end.
Replace the grinding stone (4), if the cylinder clothing is replaced.
Method of operation
• The grinding stone (4) is located on the right-hand side of the machine (parking position).
• A the beginning of a grinding cycle the rubber seals are broadened out with compressed air so that the
flat belt (3) comes free.
• The grinding stone (4) subsequently moves in a lowered position to the left-hand side of the machine.
• On the left-hand side of the machine, the magnetic limit switch (10) activates the electromagnet (9),
which releases the grinding stone (4). The springs (5) press the grinding stone (4) very slightly against
the cylinder clothing(6). At the same time, the direction of rotation of the motor (8) is reversed.
• The grinding stone processes the cylinder clothing en route to the right-hand side of the machine and, at
the end of the grinding cycle, is carried through the connecting link (11) beneath the cylinder segment.(7)
• If the grinding stone does not reach its original position within 20 seconds of the start of the procedure,
the cycle will be interrupted. The grinding stone is lowered and moves back to the parking position auto-
matically. A warning message appears on the text display. If the fault occurs again during the next cycle,
the IGS is shut down. The corresponding fault message appears on the text panel.
6 / 136 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.1.4.3 Removing the grinder

DANGER
The grinding stone must be in its parking position on the right side of the machine when assem-
bling or removing the device.
DANGER
Two persons are required when handling the grinder.
Weight 21 kg.
Remove carefully, avoid dropping it.
Sequence of steps
– Connecting the compressed air supply to the
4 3 card.
– Loosen the pneumatic hose (3) on the grinder
(2) on the left-hand side of the machine and
disconnect the electric plug.
2
– Mark the position of the tongue (4) and move
it as far as possible towards the doffer, or re-
move it.
– Remove all 4 screws (1), lower the grinder (2)
1 and move it sideways to the right.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 137

7.1.4.4 Installing the grinder

DANGER
The grinding stone must be in its parking position on the right side of the machine when assem-
bling or removing the device.
DANGER
Two persons are required when handling the grinder.
Weight 21 kg.
Remove carefully, avoid dropping it.
Description Cylinder grinding system IGS-classic , Page 6/135

Sequence of steps
– The drive must be located on the right-hand
4 3 side of the machine.
– Place the grinder (2) under the machine. For
fixturing lift on both sides simultaneously and
screw in the screw (1).
2
Note: When fitting do not jam the seal onto the
protective plate.
– Re-attach the pneumatic hose (3) to the

grinder (2) and connect the electric plug.
1 – Assemble the tongue (4) in its original position.
– Open the compressed air connection. Operat-

ing pressure 6 bar.
Note: The grinder must be tested after each
installation.
7.1.4.5 Pressure reduction valve

The pressure reduction valve (1) has a factory set-
ting of 4 bars, and this setting must not be altered.
1
6 / 138 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.1.4.6 Configuring the IGS

Carry out the settings in the data screen
Sequence of steps
– Confirm the available cylinder grinder "IGS classic" in the data mask.
43.2, Page 2/103
– Input in the data screen the expected lifetime of the wire as based on the experimental value and the cor-
responding cycles.
41.3, Page 2/99
7.1.4.7 Changing the prescribed service life of the cylinder clothing

Settings in data screens
Setting aim: The production quantity prescribed for the cylinder clothing until the next change of clothings
(lifespan) set in the corresponding data screen can be changed at any time. The program then computes the
number of remaining grinding cycles based on the new entered data.
Information (examples with 400 grinding cycles)

– If the specified service life is increased, it will become absolutely imperative to check the grinding stone
and replace it if necessary.
– If the service life is increased, more than the originally planned grinding cycles will be performed due to
the new computation
– If the service life is reduced, less than the originally planned grinding cycles will be performed due to the
new computation
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 139

Example of increasing the service life
X Y
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200
400
350
3
1
300
250
242 2 5
200
150
136 4
100
50
X Grinding cycles 3 After a production output of 700 tonnes,

the output is increased to 1200 tonnes.
Y Production in tonnes
1 Computed curve of grinding cycles 4 A new curve is computed due to the out-
based on the prescribed production put increase. The number of grinding
output of 900 tonnes. cycles is reduced to 136.
2 242 grinding cycles were performed until 5 264 grinding cycles are still to be per-
the moment the change took place. formed.
– Enter the new value for the service life in the data screen.
41.3, Page 2/99
– The new value is displayed in the data screen with the changed number of grinding cycles.
70.2, Page 2/109
Example of reducing the service life
X Y
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200
400
1
350 3
300 5
250
242 4
200
150
136 2
100
50
6 / 140 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

X Grinding cycles 3 After a production output of 700 tonnes,

the overall output is decreased to 900
Y Production in tonnes
tonnes.
1 Computed curve of grinding cycles
4 A new curve is computed due to the
based on the prescribed production
overall output decrease. The number
output of 1200 tonnes overall.
of grinding cycles increases to 242.
2 136 grinding cycles were performed until
5 158 grinding cycles are still to be per-
the moment the change took place.
formed.
– Enter the new value for the service life in the data screen.
41.3, Page 2/99
– The new value is displayed in the data screen with the changed number of grinding cycles.
70.2, Page 2/109
7.1.4.8 IGS test run

The test run is carried out following the corresponding data screen.
Sequence of steps
– Select the desired test function in the data screen.
85.1, Page 2/123
– Start the selected function using the START button.

Note: The exact description of the test functions is given in the data screen.
85.1, Page 2/123
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 141

7.1.4.9 Removing the guiding sled

Preparatory work
– The grinding stone must be located in its parking position (right-hand machine side).
– The grinder must be connected to the compressed air supply at the place where the guiding sled is re-
moved. The pressure must not exceed 6 bar.
Umlenkeinheit ausbauen
2 1
The flat belt (1) will slacken.
– Remove the cover (5) under the support.
– Remove the screws (6) at the coupling position

of the flat belt.
– Remove the cover plate (2) and pull out the
guiding unit (4) of the support towards the rear.
3 4 5 6
Removing the guiding sled:

– Remove the clamping sheet (7) at the driving
1 7 position of the guiding sled (8).
– Remove the locking plug (11) in the middle of

the support.
– Raise the cable loop (9) on the opposite side

as much as possible. This will make screws
(10) accessible.
– Remove the screws (10) at the beginning of

the chain using the long 2.5 mm Allen wrench.
10 9 8 – Move the guiding sled (8) carefully towards the
rear.
11
6 / 142 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.1.4.10 Installing the guiding sled

Fasten the beginning of the chain
1 2 3 4
– Introduce the guiding sled (6) into the profile.
– Prerequisite: As access to the screw holes is so difficult, the following procedure is recommended:
Stick a piece of wire (3) or something similar into the threaded hole.
– Join the screw (5) to the Allen wrench using adhesive tape.
– Bent cable (4) upwards.
– Screw in screw (5). The wire indicates approximately the location of the threaded hole.
Drawing in the flat belt:

– Assemble the guiding unit and introduce the flat belt (2) into the guiding unit. Take note of the flaps of the
flat belt (2).
– Switch on the compressed air supply. The sealing lips (1) get broader.
Note: The pressure must not exceed 6 bar.
– Next, insert the flat belt (2) carefully between the sealing lips (1) and the profile.
Note: Complete this operation with very great care because the pressure hose inserted into the sealing
lips (1) are very delicate.
– Assemble the remaining parts in the reverse order from dismantling.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 143

7.1.4.11 Removing the rubber sealing profiles for the flat belt
Sequence of steps
3 4 5 4
7 6
– Remove the grinder (1).

– Prerequisite: Place the grinder on the left-hand side of the machine on the floor and make the connec-
tion for the compressed-air supply again.
Loosen screws (1).
– Remove the rear wall (2).
– Remove the clamping plates (7).
– Loosen the connection for the flat belt (4) near the guide carriage (6).
– Prerequisite: The rubber sealing profiles (5) have been expanded by the pressure hoses.
Remove the flat belt (4).
– Loosen the connection for the compressed-air supply again.
– Pull the guide mechanism (3) out of the profile.
– Pull the rubber sealing profiles (5) with the pressure hoses out of the profile.
6 / 144 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.1.4.12 Fitting rubber sealing profiles for flat belts

Note: The pressure hoses have smooth linings and must not have oil or grease applied to them!
Sequence of steps
4
3
2 5
6
1 7
8
– Insert screw (2) into the new pressure hose (1).
– Fasten a string (3) to the head of the screw and then pull this into the rubber sealing profile (4).
– Use the inserted string (3) to carefully draw the pressure hose (1) into the rubber sealing profile (4).
Note: The pressure hose has to be evenly aligned in the rubber sealing profile.
– Insert the rubber sealing profile in the support profile.

Note: The connecting piece (8) is directed towards the drive unit (5). Note the position of the rubber
sealing profile.
– Using screw (6) (M5x8 mm) and its washer, fasten the connecting piece (8).
– Make the connection for the compressed-air supply at connection point (7).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 145

7.1.4.13 Slackening and tightening the flat belt (system with tension screws)
Tension the flat belt correctly.
Slackening
Tightening
– Mark two lines with a distance between them of 1000 mm on the slackened flat belt (7).
– Using screws (1), uniformly adjust the position of the guiding unit (2) (moving it to the rear).
Tensions for the flat belt of 0.8 - 1.0 %
the grinder
1008.0 - 1010.0
mm
6 / 146 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.1.4.14 Ensuring straight running of the flat belt (system with tension screws)
Preparatory work
– Place the IGS on the left-hand side of the machine on the floor.
– Make connections at the terminals.
Sequence of steps
– Prerequisite: Perform the test via the data
screen .
85.1, Page 2/123
In the “Cycle” test mode, allow the grinding
stone to move back and forth several times.
– Belt running to the left: Turn screw (A) slightly
in a clockwise direction or turn screw (B) by
the same amount in an anticlockwise direc-
tion.
«A»
– Repeat the test procedure and note the
change in behaviour.
– Correct the belt running once more if required

«B»
(depending on the change in behaviour).
«A» Note: The acceptable total tension of the belt
must not be exceeded, however!
– Belt running to the right: Turn screw (A)
slightly in an anticlockwise direction or turn
«B» screw (B) by the same amount in a clockwise
direction.
Note: Then follow the same procedure as be-
fore.
7.1.4.15 Replacing the grinding stone

Note: Replace the grinding stone in the IGS-classic system, if the cylinder clothing is replaced.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 147

7.1.4.16 Removing the grinding stone

Sequence of steps
1 2
DANGER
The spring plate can be damaged during an incorrect removal procedure.
When loosening the grinding stone it must be held so that the spring plate cannot turn and thus
get damaged.
– Holding the grinding stone (2).

Note: Do not damage the spring plate (4).
7.1.4.17 Installing the grinding stone

DANGER
The spring plate can be damaged during an incorrect fitting procedure.
The grinding stone must be held when tightening the screw so that the spring plate cannot turn
and thus get damaged.
Sequence of steps
1 2
– Prerequisite: The facet (3) of the grinding stone must always be directed against the running direction of
the cylinder.
The grinding stone (3) is positioned with the holes in the support plate and the positioning pins in the
spring plate (4).
– Tighten the screw (1) as tightly as possible.

Note: However, do not distort the grinding stone (2) as a result.
6 / 148 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.1.4.18 Remove the electromagnet

Sequence of steps
– The removal is done in the reverse order from the installation.
7.1.4.19 Install the electromagnet

Sequence of steps
– Set up the nut (5) according to the drawing and
secure it with non/hardening «Loctite».
1
Max.4 mm – Install the electromagnet (1).
– Screw the piston rod (3) into the shaft (6) and
2 5
6 fasten the electromagnet (1).
3 Note: The bolts (2) have different lengths. In
order to avoid damaging the inside of the elec-
4 tromagnet (1) the screws (2) should not penet-
rate more than 4 mm into its housing. There-
fore the screws should not be interchanged.
1
Loctite
Ca.5 mm
Finishing
– For checking purposes, introduce the guiding sled carefully into the support.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 149

7.1.4.20 Adjust the grinding stone if the electrical magnet was replaced.
Do not adjust the working position of the grinding stone unless the electrical magnet was replaced.
Sequence of steps
– The electromagnet is installed.
Using the gauge «+» check the pre-adjustment of the height of the grinding stone:
«B» «C»
«A»
4 5
– At point «A» slide the piston rod (3) forwards.
– At the same time, hold the gauge (7) lengthwise in position “B” and crosswise in position “C” on the guide
block, and thus check the end position of the grinding stone (8).
Setting gauges for the IGS-classic, Page 6/135
– An air gap must be visible between the gauge (7) and the grinding stone (8).
6 / 150 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Using the gauge “-” check the presetting of the height of the grinding stone:
«B» «C»
«A»
4 5
– In positions “B” and “C”, no air gap should be visible any longer between the gauge “-” (9) and the grind-
ing stone (8).
Correcting the height of the grinding stone:

– If the grinding stone (8) is positioned too high, the piston rod (3) must be turned clockwise. Proceed in
reverse order if grinding stone (8) is positioned too low.
Locking nuts:
– If the setting is correct, the nut (5) must be tightened.
– As a result of the small opening, the nut must be held with pointed pliers or clamped firmly with a screw-
driver. The piston rod (3) is turned with a gudgeon set in the opening (4).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 151

7.2 Card flats unit

7.2.1 Tools
Support
Support for removal and installation of the set of
card flats
7.2.2 Removing the card flats unit

WARNING
6 / 152 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Preparatory work prior to removal
– Remove the proximity switches for the card flats and suction monitoring on the left-hand side of the ma-
chine.
– Disconnect or remove all connecting parts necessary for suction at the card flats unit plus the pneumatic
lines.
– On both sides, remove the red connecting pieces, used to secure the card flats unit.
– Fold up the safety flaps (1).
– Screw the dismantling aids (2) on to the sides of the card flats unit (4).
Support , Page 6/152
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 153

5 5
Right
Left 2
2
7 4
Left Right
Units
4+6+7 9 5
4+7 12 8
4+6 7 5
– Attach the hooks (5) of the chain hoist, appropriate to the layout of the card flats unit (4), to the dismant-
ling aid (2) via the holes provided.
Note: The different hook positions are necessary for ensuring that the card flats unit (4) is correctly posi-
tioned during dismantling.
6 / 154 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Lifting the card flats unit
10
9 9
8 8
– Remove the locking screws (10) on both sides.
– Loosen all screws and bolts (8).
– Apply a half-turn to the eccentric (9).

The card flats unit (4) will lift slightly.
– Tighten the screws and bolts (8) firmly.
– Carefully lift the card flats unit (4) using the installation crane (3) and remove it from the machine.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 155

7.2.3 Installing the carding flats unit

WARNING
Sequence of steps
7 8 8 7
6 6
5 5
– Do not loosen the screws (5).
– Position the card flats unit (4) above the place of installation as accurately as possible and then carefully
lower it.
Note: Take care that no component becomes damaged.
– Lower the card flats unit (4) sufficiently so that the levers (7) on all sides lie in the recesses of the cross-
members (8).
– Loosen the screws (5).
– Use the eccentric screws (6) to lower the card flats unit (4) further until it is in its final position.
Note: The eccentric screws have to be able to move freely.
– Tighten the screws (5) firmly.
– Re-fit the locking screws (9) on both sides.
6 / 156 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Finishing
– Adjust the card flats.
– Replace all removed parts in their original positions.
7.2.4 Card flats cleaning
7.2.4.1 Removing and disassembling the cleaning unit for the card flats
WARNING
1 5
3
1 4
– Loosen all connections such as motor, pneumatic air line and card suction connections.
– Remove all covers, thereby enabling free access to the cleaning unit.
– Close the cover (1).
– Use the locking mechanism (2) to secure the cover (1).
– Remove the nuts (3) on both sides.
– Pull back the cleaning unit (4) carefully until the bolt (5) rests against the limit stop.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 157

Removing the cleaning unit
– Attach the chain hoist (6) to the cleaning unit on both sides via the holes (7).
Note: Use suitable rope or hooks.
– Lift the cleaning unit carefully, keeping it horizontally positioned, and remove it from the machine.
6 / 158 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Removing the PW1 cleaning roller
3 4
– Prerequisite: The cleaning unit has been removed.

Remove the screw (1).
– Remove the casing (2).
– Remove the screws (4) from the bearing plate.

Note: Do not remove the bearing plate.
– Move the cleaning roller (3) outwards as far as possible, and then remove from above.
Removing the PW2 stripping roller
8
9
6 5
– Prerequisite: The cleaning unit has been removed.

Remove the casing (7).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 159

8
9
6 5
– Remove the screws (5).
– Remove the motor (6).

Note: The coupling halves remain at the motor or at the stripping roller. The coupling has to be set fol-
lowing installation of the stripping roller.
– Remove the screws (9) from the bearing plate.

Note: Do not remove the bearing plate.
– Move the stripping roller (8) outwardly as far as possible, and then remove from above.
6 / 160 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.2.4.2 Standard setting for the cleaning roller

Cleaning unit for the card flats, Page 3/28
WARNING
Make the standard setting if the scale is accidentally shifted or the clothing for the cleaning roller is replaced.
Preliminary setting for the PW1 cleaning roller
X
2
4
1 5
– Prerequisite: Driving of the card flats has been enabled via the relevant data screen.
Move a card flat (1) to the centre of the recess (2).
– Open the cover (3).
– Use the nuts (6) to adjust the distance (X) between the cleaning roller (4) and the card flats (5) on both
sides.
Note: Check for parallelism.
Dimension for standard 1.00 mm
setting
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 161

Setting the scale
1 mm
– Prerequisite: The standard setting has been made.

Move the scales (7) on both sides until the indicator (8) points to the line (+ 1mm).
Note: The contact depth setting for the clothing of the cleaning roller (4) with respect to the clothing of
the card flats can now be made using the scale(7).
Contact depth setting for the PW1 cleaning roller with respect to the clothing of the card
flats, Page 6/163
6 / 162 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.2.4.3 Contact depth setting for the PW1 cleaning roller with respect to the clothing
of the card flats
WARNING
This is necessary after the standard setting has been made, or if there is an insufficient degree of cleaning
due to the clothing of the cleaning roller being worn.
Sequence of steps
5
4
2 3
72 -X
.XX
– The standard setting for the positioning of the cleaning roller has been made.
Standard setting for the cleaning roller, Page 6/161
– Use the nuts (6) to adjust the cleaning unit (3) on both sides until the position of the indicator (1) on the
scales (2) corresponds to the required contact depth.
Adjustment point 72, - 1.50 mm
contact depth of the (max. - 2.50)
cleaning roller
The needles of the cleaning roller (4) make the required degree of contact with the card flats (5).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 163

7.2.4.4 Setting the stripping knife for the PW1 cleaning roller
WARNING
The stripping knife (5) in the cleaning unit is generally factory-set. In rare instances, it may be necessary to
make the standard settings for the stripping knife.
Preparatory work
– Remove the cleaning unit and place it in a suitable location, before making the settings.
– Remove the PW2 stripping roller.

Sequence of steps
X
X .X
6
71
4 2
– Prerequisite: Position the cleaning unit according to the figure. The PW2 stripping roller has to be re-
moved.
Loosen screws (2).
– Prerequisite: All screws (6) need to be tightened firmly to prevent inaccurate measurement of the set-
ting point (71).
Turn the eccentric screws (4) to alter the distance between the stripping knife (5) and the cleaning roller
(1). (Setting point (71)).
Adjustment point 71, 0.60 mm
distance between cleaning
roller and stripping knife
6 / 164 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.2.4.5 Setting the stripping knife for the PW2 stripping roller
WARNING
The stripping knife (2) in the cleaning unit is generally factory-set. In rare instances, it may be necessary to
make the standard settings for the stripping knife.
Preparatory work
– Remove the cleaning unit and place it in a suitable location, before making the settings.
– Remove the PW1 cleaning roller.

– The stripping knife of the cleaning roller has to be set before the stripping knife of the stripping roller is
set.
Setting the stripping knife for the PW1 cleaning roller, Page 6/164
Sequence of steps
70 X.XX
3 4 2 3
– Prerequisite: Position the cleaning unit according to the figure. The PW2 stripping roller has to be re-
moved.
Loosen screws (4).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 165

70 X.XX
3 4 2 3
– Turn the eccentric screws (3) to alter the distance between the stripping knife (2) and the stripping roller
(1). (Setting point (70)).
Note: The eccentric screws (3) have to be turned alternately and in small steps each time.
Setting point 70, distance 0.80 mm
between stripping roller
and stripping knife
6 / 166 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.2.4.6 Setting the coupling between the motor and the cleaning brush
The coupling (3) has to be set each time the cleaning brush (4) is installed or the motor (1) is set
WARNING
Sequence of steps
– Displace the coupling half until the dimension

2 3 (X) is attained
Coupling for cleaning roller
Distance X between the 1.00 mm
coupling halves
– Tighten screws (2) firmly using a torque of 10

Nm.
1 Abnormal noise following start-up
X 4 indicates an incorrectly set coupling.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 167

7.2.4.7 Reflex light barrier for monitoring the suction of the card flats waste
The light beam (3) will remain broken all the while the card flats waste in the suction tube is not being extrac-
ted. After a specified period of time, the machine will be stopped.
Making the height setting for the light beam
1 2
4
3
6 5
– Prerequisite: There must be no material present in the suction tube.

Loosen screw (2).
Note: The pivot of the reflex light barrier (6) is at screw (5).
– Move the reflex light barrier (6) down until the LED (1) goes out or flickers.
– Move the reflex light barrier (6) up until the LED (1) goes out or flickers.
– Fasten the light barrier (6) at a point roughly halfway between the end positions
Note: The LED(1) must now be continuously lit.
Making the lateral setting for the light beam
7 8
1
3 4
– Prerequisite: There must be no material present in the suction tube. Do not loosen screw (9).
Using screws (7) and (8), move the reflex light barrier in such a way that the light barrier (3) is directed
towards the centre of the reflector (4) as much as possible.
Note: The LED (1) must now be continuously lit.
6 / 168 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Verzögerungszeit einstellen
– Prerequisite: Die Reflexlichtschranke ist korrekt eingestellt.
Ist der Lichtstrahl während der eingestellten Zeit nicht frei, wird eine Störung ausgegeben.
Note: Absaugleitung kontrollieren, Absaugkanal reinigen, Verzögerungszeit kontrollieren.
– Verzögerungszeit einstellen.
41.32, Page 2/143
7.2.5 Card flats set
7.2.5.1 Tools

cylinder arch
Nippers
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 169

7.2.5.2 Removing the belts for the card flats

Note: Both belts are removed from the left-hand side of the machine.
2
5
– Remove all card flats.

– Loosen the setting collar (1) and the deflection roller (3) and move them inwards.
– Maintain the position of the drive shaft (5) using belts or ropes (4).
– Remove the bearing cover (2).

Pull the card flats belt out laterally, through the open space that has been created.
6 / 170 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.2.5.3 Installing the belts for the card flats

Sequence of steps
– Insert the card flats belt (1) through the open space and fit it around the deflection pulleys.
Finishing
– The same procedure is used for assembly, but carried out in reverse order.
– Install the card flats.

31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 171

7.2.5.4 Tension belt of the card flats

WARNING
Sequence of steps
2 1 4
5
3

Note: The tensioning device (2) is located in the lowest setting.
– Using the wrench (3) raise the tensioning device (2).

Note: The marking (5) must lie on a line with the upper edge of the tensioning device (2).
– First tighten finally the upper screw (1).
6 / 172 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.2.5.5 Remove card flats deflection roll

WARNING
Remove deflection roll

– Removing the card flats
5 Remove the card flats, Page 6/180
1
– Remove the entire deflection roll (1).
2
3
4
Dismantle the deflection roll removed

– Remove covering flange (2).
Note: Remove soiling around ball bearing (4).
– Remove the seals (3) and (5).

Note: Replace the seals (3) and (5) if they are defective
– Remove ball bearing (4).

Note: Replace ball bearing (4) if damaged.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 173

7.2.5.6 Activating the card flats drive (setting, grinding)

I II
1
4 3
80.1
2
8x.x
x.xx A
x.xx A
xxxxxxxx
This function enables operation of the card flats for grinding, measurement and reverse motion purposes.
Preparing the machine

– Select the service-mode function from the data screen.
80.1, Page 2/111
– The functions can be selected from the data screen.

81.3, Page 2/112
Activate the card flats drive for grinding

– Prerequisite: Grinding of the card flats has been enabled via the relevant data screen
Select the “Grind card flats” function from the data screen.
– Turn the key-operated switch (1) to the position for grinding the card flats.
The safety device for the door unlocks.
– Press the “Start” key (3).

The drive for the card flats starts.
– Use the data screen to set the required speed of the card flats.
– Press the “Stop” key (4).

The drive for the card flats stops.
Activating the jog mode for the positioning of the card flats
– Prerequisite: Operation of the card flats has been enabled via the relevant data screen
Select the “Measure card flats” function from the data screen.
– Press and hold the “Start” key (3).
6 / 174 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

– If the card flats reach the required positions, release the “Start” key (3).
Activating the measurement mode for the positioning of the card flats
Select the “Measure card flats” function from the data screen.
– Press and hold the “Start” key (3).
– If the card flat at the first measuring point reaches the feed section for the card flats, release the “Start”
key (3).
– Make the settings for the first card flat.

– Prerequisite: The card flat for the first measuring point is set.
Press the “Stop” key (4) and, after a brief delay, the “Start” key (3).
Note the text in the status line of the data screen. Measurement for the card flats can now be
carried out.
– Tap the “Start” key (3).
The previously set card flat is moved via the drive to the next measuring point where it stops
automatically.
– Set the remaining card flats in this manner.

Note: Press the “Stop” key (4) to exit the mode.
Activating reverse operation for the card flats

Select the “Card flats, reverse motion” function from the data screen.
– If the card flats reach the required positions, release the “Start” key (3).
Note: In this mode, the card flats make small movements only.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 175

7.2.5.7 Activating the card flats drive (for setting the proximity switch)
I II
1
2 1
80.1
8x.x
x.xx A
x.xx A
xxxxxxxx
The card flats are operated for test purposes via this function.
Preparing the machine

– Select the test-mode function from the data screen.
80.1, Page 2/111
– Enable the testing of the card flats drive via the data screen
83.6, Page 2/119
– Choose the minimum selectable card flats speed.

83.6, Page 2/119
Starting and stopping tests

– Use key (1) to start and key (2) to stop.
– Set the proximity switch for the monitoring of the card flats.
Adjust the proximity switch for monitoring the smooth running of the card flats., Page 6/177
6 / 176 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.2.5.8 Adjust the proximity switch for monitoring the smooth running of the card
flats.
Both proximity switches (1) and (2) detect skewed card flats. The machine is switched off.
Preparatory work
– Turn off the machine. The main switch remains switched on.
Position the proximity switch in the bracket.
– Use the nuts (2) to adjust the distance (Y).

Note: Tighten the nuts to a maximum torque of 40 Nm.
Distance "Y" 10.0 mm (min. 9.0, max. 11.0)
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 177

Adjust the proximity switch to the card flats
1 (B2) 2 (B8)
4 4
3 X 6 6 3
X
5 5
– Start the test

Activating the card flats drive (for setting the proximity switch), Page 6/176
– By starting and stopping the test, move the card flats until the openings (5) of a card flat (3) are precisely
situated beneath the proximity switches (1) and (2).
– Using the brackets (4), adjust the common distance X of the proximity switches (1) and (2) to the contact
surfaces (6).
Distance "X" between 5.0 mm
proximity switch and (min. 4.2,
contact surface of the card max. 5.8)
flat

– Restart the test
Activating the card flats drive (for setting the proximity switch), Page 6/176
– As soon as the card flats are in motion, the altered values («0») and («1») for the proximity switches (1)
and (2) appear on the data screen.
– These continuously-calculated results are displayed.
Correcting settings
– Prerequisite: Displayed value larger than (- 1.0).
Move the proximity switch (2) towards the card chute.
– Prerequisite: Displayed value larger than (+ 1.0).

Move the proximity switch (2) towards the card delivery section.
6 / 178 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Checking the setting (with IGS-Top)

– A thin metal plate is fitted to the card flat clip on the right-hand side of the machine with this model (regis-
tration of first card flats).The LEDs must remain lit in the vicinity of this thin metal plate.
Note: The proximity switches work in the same manner as in the model without the IGS-Top.
7.2.5.9 Card flats, Description

Purpose: Functions of the setting mechanism
+ (Max)
3 1 2 3
4 - (Min)
3
3a 3a
Method of operation
• The nuts (1) are used to raise or lower the cylinder arch (2).
• The eccentric screws (3) are used to make rough settings at the individual adjustment points.
Note: In order to stabilise the setting mechanism (6), the clip (4) is turned so that it is positioned against
the cylinder shield and then fixed in this position using the screw (3a). The nuts (5) are subsequently
loosened.
• The adjustment screws (3a) are used to set the positions of the individual adjustment points to the correct
distances.
Note: The adjustment screws (3a) can be used to correct differences ranging from -0.10 mm to + 0.10
mm.
• Do not turn the adjustment screws (3) beyond the limit stops.
7.2.5.10 Change card flats

Note: The machine must not be operated without the holding clips installed.The holding clips must rest on the
belt for the card flats drive.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 179

7.2.5.11 Remove the card flats

Sequence of steps
1 3
1
2
6
5
4
1
7
2.50
CAUTION
If the settings for the deflection of the card flats are incorrect when replacing all of the card flats,
or individual flats, the cylinder covers will be damaged at the feed and delivery sides for the card
flats.
Make the settings for the deflection of the card flats.
– Prerequisite: All the card flats, or individual flats, are to be removed.
The setting dimension for the deflection of the card flats (5) is 2.50 mm.
– The retaining clips (2) must be removed from the belts.

Remove the retaining clips of the card flats, Page 6/195
– On both sides, push back the lubricating blocks (7) for lubricating the slide shoes of the card flats and fix
in place.
– Move the card flats (1) to the area behind the tensioning device (6).
IMPORTANT
Risk of damage to the sliding parts of the card flats
The card flats must not be levered out of their fixtures using a screwdriver or similar tool. Other-
wise the sliding pieces will be damaged.
– Prerequisite: In order to retain the belt tension, do not remove every card flat initially, but leave every
sixth one (1) fitted.
Press the card flats out of the brackets (4) on both sides by hand.
Note: Do not damage the sliding parts (3).
6 / 180 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.2.5.12 Install card flats

IMPORTANT
Risk of damage to the card flats if the holding clips are not fitted.
The holding clips must be fitted.
CAUTION
Do not simultaneously install card flats equipped with differently designed sliding parts.
Machine damage
Card flats equipped with differently designed sliding parts must not belong to the same set of
card flats.
Preparatory work
7 6
1
2 6
X
3
3 3
.0 mm
~20.0 4 ~20
mm
– At both deflection points (4), the distance between the cylinder and the deflection roller must be approx.
20 mm.
– At the measuring slot (3), position and adjust a card flat (1).
– Remove the card flat (1) and measure the distance (X) from the cylinder arch (6) to the cylinder.
– Adjust the cylinder arch (6) at all measuring slots (3) according to the dimension (X).
– The belts for the card flats are marked with arrows (5).
Note: The belts have to be positioned on the toothed-belt pulleys (7) so that the markings (5) are directly
opposite one another and are not offset at all.
– Move the belt tighteners (2) to the top position.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 181

Identifying different types of card flats

IMPORTANT
The card will be damaged if incorrect
card flats are installed.
Only card flats which can be allocated
C 70 to the respective machine type are to
be used.
– On the right-hand side of each card flat is a la-
bel which identifies the machine version.
C 60 Note: Card flats for different machine versions
may not be installed.
Install card flats
1
10
1
12
11 13
1
2
– Set the card up for card-flat grinding operation.

– Prerequisite: Prior to installation, check that each card flat is of the correct type (check the label in each
case).
Install every sixth card flat (1).
Note: Each card flat (1) has a recess (10) across its entire width. This recess faces the card chute in the
feed section during assembly.
Continually check the belt tension and the markings (5) on the belts.
– The card flats (1) can only be installed in the area behind the return rail (11).
– Place the card flats (1) at a slight angle on both sides onto the clamping studs of the card flats belt.
– Use a hand or the tool (13) to force the card flat (1) to snap into place between the carding studs.
Note: Force the clamping studs forwards using the tool (13) and allow the card flat (1) to snap into place.
6 / 182 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

– Fit the retaining clips (12).

Note: The machine must not be operated without the assembled holding clips (12).
Install the retaining clips of the card flats, Page 6/196
Install the last card flat
16
13
1 1
– Position the tool (13) according to the illustration.

Card flats installation aid, Page 4/1, 6/169
– Force the clamping studs forwards using the tool (13) and allow the card flat (1) to snap into place.
Note: Do not use a screwdriver (16).
Finishing
– Adjust the card flats.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 183

7.2.5.13 Fitting the tool used for subjecting card flats to load
The tool (2) has to be used at adjustment points (50...54) for all card flat settings
DANGER
Machine damage can occur, if the setting procedure is not carried out in accordance with instruc-
tions.
Follow the instructions when making card flat measurements.
Sequence of steps
1
52
53
51
2
50 54
4
3
– Move a card flat (4) to the centre of the measuring point (3).
– Insert the tool (2) into the measuring slot and attach the spring to the screw (1).
Setting auxiliary aids for card flats, Page 4/2, 6/169
The bearing surface of the card flat is now subjected to load
6 / 184 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.2.5.14 Adjust the card flats

Kardendeckelgarnituren bearbeiten (Vorgang bei vorhandener Schleifmaschine in der
Werkstatt), Page 3/41
Kardendeckelgarnituren bearbeiten (Vorgang ohne vorhandene Schleifmaschine in der
Description Card flats, Page 6/179
Adjust the distance between the card flats and the cylinder according to the material being processed and the
production speed.
Preparatory work
– Information to be determined at measuring point (52): Move the card flats several times and take meas-
urements to determine which flat is closest to the cylinder.
Beispiel Kardendeckel einstellen
0.275
0.250 Y1
Settigpoints mm
X
0.225
Y
0.200 50 X1
0.175 51
52
0.150
53
0.125 54
0.100
Cylinder 775 795 805 815 825 835 845
Rpm 785
Production
kg / h 85 95 105 115 125 135
Flat speed Low
mm/min High
– Prerequisite: Trommeldrehzahl (X) hoch, Produktion (X1) tief.

Die Kardendeckel für die hohe Trommeldrehzahl (X) einstellen.
– Prerequisite: Trommeldrehzahl (Y) tief, Produktion (Y1) hoch.

Die Kardendeckel für die hohe Produktion (Y1) einstellen.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 185

Einstellwerte Baumwolle kardiert / Rotorgarn feine Garnnummer / Mischungen Baumwolle /

Chemiefasern
0.275
0.250
Settigpoints mm
0.225
0.200 50
0.175 51
52
0.150
53
0.125 54
0.100
Cylinder 775 795 805 815 825 835 845
Rpm 785
Production
kg / h 85 95 105 115 125 135
Flat speed Low 220 230 240 250 280 300
mm/min High 300 320 340 360 380 400
– Prerequisite: Die Einstellwerte der Einstellpunkte bestimmen.

For new card flats, increase the setting value by 0.05 - 0.10 mm.
Note: Nach ca. 10...15 Tonnen produziertem Kardenband die Kardendeckel egalisieren und auf das
Mass gemäss Tabelle einstellen.
Einstellwerte Baumwolle gekämmt, Baumwolle kardiert feine Garnnummer
0.250
0.225
Settingpoints mm
0.200
0.175 50
0.150 51
52
0.125 53
0.100 54
0.075
Cylinder 670 710 730 750 770 790 810
Rpm 690
Production
kg / h 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Flat speed Low 230 250 270 290 310 330
mm/min High 300 320 340 360 380 400
6 / 186 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02


Einstellwerte Chemiefasern und Chemiefasern oder Baumwolle (Swing)
0.550
0.500
Settingpoints mm
0.450
0.400
0.350 50
51
0.300 52
0.250 53
0.200 54
Cylinder 600 640 660 680 700 720 740
Rpm 620
Production
kg / h 50 70 90 110 130 150
Flat speed 240 250 276 270 280 290
mm/min

31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 187

Einstellwerte Viscose und Viscose oder Baumwolle (Swing)
0.450
0.400
Settingpoints mm
0.350
0.300
0.250 50
51
0.200
52
0.150 53
0.100 54
Cylinder 600 640 660 680 700 720 740
Rpm 620
Production
kg / h 45 65 85 105 115 135
Flat speed 220 230 240 250 260 270
mm/min

Increasing the distances between the card flats and the cylinder
IMPORTANT
Failure to use the tool can result in the card flats being set incorrectly.
Correct measurement of the space between the card flats clothing and the cylinder clothing is
only possible using the tool
6 / 188 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7 1 2
52 8
51
6 53
50 54
5 4 3
– Prerequisite: Following the setting procedure, always remove the tool (8). Always set the middle adjust-
ment point (52) first.
Loosen the nut (2) slightly and use the (1) to increase the distance.
Note: Subsequently, set the distances for the adjustment points (50/51) and (53/54) to the approximate
corresponding values.
– Prerequisite: Note the direction of rotation of the driving pulley.

Using the eccentric screws (4), set the distances for the adjustment points (50/51/53/54) as accurately as
possible.
Note: When making settings for the adjustment points (50/54), use a tool (8) to press the card flat
against the cylinder arch. This is the only way of achieving a correct measurement.
– Use the clips (6) to stabilise all the setting mechanisms for the adjustment points (50/51/53/54).
– Tighten all nuts (5) firmly, applying a torque of .20 Nm approx.

The setting mechanisms are now in position and have no play.
– Subsequently move the clips (6) back to their starting positions.
– Prerequisite: All adjustment points now have rough settings.

Check the setting at the adjustment point (52).Correct the setting, if necessary.
Note: Subsequently tighten the nuts (1) and (2) firmly.
DANGER
tions.
– Check the adjustment points (50/51/53/54) and, if necessary, correct using the screw (3) (precise set-
ting).
Note: When measuring at the adjustment points (50/54), use a tool (8) to press the card flats against the
cylinder arch.
– Use the nut (7) to fix the setting at the adjustment points (50/51/53/54).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 189

Reducing the distances between the card flats and the cylinder
IMPORTANT
Failure to use the tool can result in the card flats being set incorrectly.
Correct measurement of the space between the card flats clothing and the cylinder clothing is
only possible using the tool
7 1 2
52 8
51
6 53
50 54
5 4 3
– Prerequisite: Prior to making adjustments, turn the eccentric screws (4)for the adjustment points (51)
and (53) so that they have no effect (are not subject to stress).(Pay attention to the direction of rotation.)
Use the clip (6) to stabilise the setting mechanism. Following the setting procedure, always remove the
tool (8).
Set the adjustment points (50) and (54).
Note: When making settings for the adjustment points (50/54), use a tool (8) to press the card flat
against the cylinder arch. This is the only way of achieving a correct measurement.
– Set the distance for the adjustment point (52) to the corresponding value. Slightly loosen nut (1) and use
nut (2) to set the distance.
– Using the eccentric screws (4), set the distances for the adjustment points (51) and (53) as accurately as
possible.
Note: Note the direction of rotation of the driving pulley.
– Use the clips (6) to stabilise the setting mechanisms for the adjustment points (51) and (53).
– Tighten the nuts (5) firmly, applying a torque of .20 Nm approx.

The setting mechanisms are now in position and have no play.
– Subsequently move the clips (6) back to their starting positions.
– Prerequisite: All adjustment points now have rough settings.

Check the setting at the adjustment point (52).Correct the setting, if necessary.
Note: Subsequently tighten the nuts (1) and (2) firmly.
6 / 190 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

DANGER
tions.
– Check the remaining adjustment points and, if necessary, correct using the screw (3) (precise setting).
Note: When measuring at the adjustment points (50/54), use a tool (8) to press the card flats against the
cylinder arch.
– Use the nut (7) to fix the setting at each adjustment point.
Finishing
– Recheck the set clearance after tightening the nuts.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 191

7.2.5.15 Setting the deflection for the card flats on the feed and delivery sides
Production mode settings (feed and delivery sides)
1 1
4
X
47
3 3
X
X.
2 2
X.
XX
55
5
– Prerequisite: Settings for the deflection of the card flats on the feed and delivery sides are made identic-
ally.
Position the beginning or end of a card flat (1) precisely on the marking (2) of the cylinder arch (3).
– Loosen the screws (4).
– Use the eccentric (5) to adjust the distance between the card flat (1) and the cylinder arch (3).
Grundeinstellungen Baumwolle und Mischungen Baumwolle / Chemiefasern bis 120 kg/h
Setting prior to removal of card flats (feed and delivery sides)

CAUTION
If the settings for the deflection of the card flats are incorrect when replacing all of the card flats,
or individual flats, the cylinder covers will be damaged at the feed and delivery sides for the card
flats.
Make the settings for the deflection of the card flats.
– Prerequisite: All the card flats, or individual flats, are to be removed.

In order to avoid damage when removing card flats, the setting dimension for the adjustment points
(47)and (55) is 2.50 mm.
Finishing
– Check the settings for the card flats.
6 / 192 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.2.5.16 Set the cleaning brush for the sliding surfaces of the card flats
WARNING
Setting the cleaning brush for the contact surface
1
2
3
73
0 1
– Prerequisite: Position a card flat (1) precisely underneath the cleaning brush (4)
Loosen the screws (2).
– Move the cleaning unit (3) so that the cleaning brush (4) touches the contact surface (5) of the card flat
(1).
– From this position, move the cleaning unit (3) further by the specified distance.
Cleaning brush
Adjustment point “73”‎ - 2.00 mm
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 193

7.2.5.17 Lubricating blocks for the sliding surfaces of the card flats
If the lubricating blocks have been stripped down to a height of 15 mm, they have to be replaced. New blocks
can be ordered from the spare parts service centre (Rieter Parts).
Fixing the lubrication blocks in place
3
2
1
~ 15 mm
– Prior to removing the card flats, push back the lubricating blocks (1) and fix them in place using the lock-
ing screw (2).
Replacing lubricating blocks

– Use the locking screw (2) to fix the lubricating block (2) in place.
– Remove the holder (3) and replace the lubricating block (1).
7.2.5.18 Change the holding clips

Remove the retaining clips of the card flats, Page 6/195
Install the retaining clips of the card flats, Page 6/196
Note: The machine must not be operated without the holding clips installed. The holding clips must rest on
the belt for the card flats drive.
6 / 194 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.2.5.19 Remove the retaining clips of the card flats

Note: The machine must not be operated without the holding clips in assembled.
Note: We recommend that the card flats are pushed over the card flats drive using a separate drive (drill,
auxiliary motor).
Sequence of steps
1 2 3
– The retaining clips (2) on the return rail (1) must be levered out of the belt for the card flats drive (3).
– Using gripper (4), clamp the card flats clips (2) and then lever them out.
Note: Store the removed metal plate (5) for the IGS-top grinder for the card flats.
Nippers, Page 4/1, 6/169
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 195

7.2.5.20 Install the retaining clips of the card flats

Note: The machine must not be operated without the holding clips in assembled.
Note: We recommend that the card flats are pushed over the card flats drive using a separate drive (drill,
auxiliary motor).
Sequence of steps
1 2 3
2
3
– The holding clips (2) must be pressed on the return rail (1) into the drive belt of the card flats (3).
– Using gripper (4), clamp a holding clip (2) and press it into the drive belt of the card flats (3) until it is flush
with the drive belt of the card flats (3).
– A machine assembly fitted with IGS top must have, on its holding clip (2), the metal shim (5) mounted on
it.
6 / 196 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.2.6 IGS-top card flats unit
7.2.6.1 Description
Purpose: Sharpen card flats clothing needles
1 2
3
4
5
6
7
In order to keep the needles of card flats clothing (8) sharp, the grinding brush (1) works these needles at
computed grinding cycles (intervals).
This results in more uniform carding for the entire service life of the card flats (8).
Method of operation
• A grinding cycles and hence also the motor (2) of grinding brush (1) is started via programming.
• Pneumatic cylinders push up the spring mounted shoes (6). This raises the card flats (8). The slider for
dust extraction opens at the same time.
• The bristles (7) contact the card flats clothing (8) and ensure sharp working edges of the card flats cloth-
ing needles.
• If the metal plate (4) fitted to a card flat clip (5) passes proximity switch (3), the controller will register the
card flats position.
Note: The following card flats will be counted.
• The grinding brush (1) remains active for one turn of all card flats (8). The proximity switch (3) of the card
flats monitoring unit counts the card flats as they pass by.
• If the power fails during a grinding cycle, the controller will register the previously processed card flat.
Note: Once power is restored, the controller is able to continue with the grinding cycle on the correct
card flat as a result of the stored data. All card flats are always ground evenly in this way.
• Once the cycle is finished, the pneumatic cylinders are relieved, the exhaust is closed and the motor of
the grinding brush (2) is switched off.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 197

7.2.6.2 Install grinding brush

WARNING
Note: Replace the grinding brush only if the bristles are heavily worn.
Sequence of steps
– Prerequisite: Both parts of the grinding brush
1 (3) are numbered in pairs at the front and they
must be installed in pairs only.
Lightly screw in all bolts (1).
2 Note: The tips of the bolts have to be coated
with material (2) for bolt retention.
3
– Starting from the centre (4) tighten the bolts (1)
firmly, using the prescribed torque.
Thread dimension Special bolt M6 x 12
mm
4 3 1 torque 10.0 Nm
Order of tightening: Tighten bolts firmly.
Start from the centre of
the grinding brush.
– Adjust the grinding pressure after installation.

6 / 198 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.2.6.3 Check current consumption (with grinding brush contact on the card flats
clothing)
Measure current
Preparatory work
– The parallelism setting of the grinding brush relative to the card flats has been made (standard setting.)
– Activate the card flats drive.

9 I II
1
2
3
80.1 4
85.2
5
x.xx A
x.xx A
6 7
xxxxxxxx
8
– The function test for the IGS-top has been carried out.
85.2, Page 2/124
– Select the ready-to-test operating state in the data screen.

80.1, Page 2/111
– Turn the key-operated switch (1) to the position for grinding the card flats.
The door safeguard (3) unlocks.
– Remove the covers (2) for the IGS top and the card drive.
– Start the card flats drive.

The card flats move accordingly.
– Select the “Check” function in the data screen.

85.2, Page 2/124
The motor for driving the grinding brush is started. It remains in operation for a single revolution of
the card flats. The test mode is then switched off automatically.
– Select the function “Check grinding pressure” in the data screen and start the grinding procedure.
85.2, Page 2/124
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 199

9 I II
1
2
3
80.1 4
85.2
5
x.xx A
x.xx A
6 7
xxxxxxxx
8
– The target current consumption computed by the controller is indicated under (6) in the data screen.
Note: This value is calculated based on the current supply voltage.
– The pneumatically-operated lever moves the first card flat into the grinding position after approx. 10
seconds.
– The measured grinding pressure is indicated via a text message in the status line (8).
Note: The measured actual current consumption is indicated under (7) in the data screen.
Signal lamp indicator (9). Lights up: if the current consumption is too high. Does not light up: in
case of proper current consumption. Flashes: if the current consumption is too low.
Action
– Change the grinding pressure until the target current consumption equals the actual current consumption
as much as possible.
Note: A measurement involving at least 2 card flats has to be carried out before a change can be made.
Finishing
– Wait 10 card flats at a minimum after the last change in grinding pressure. Only afterwards will the result
of the grinding pressure test be saved.
6 / 200 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.2.6.4 Check the position of the grinding brush

Position of the grinding brush
If the card flats are raised in the sharpening process, the bristles of the grinding brush will have to contact the
card flats clothing, but they are not to penetrate them.
The purpose of visual inspection is to check whether the grinding brush bristles evenly contact the card flats
on the right-hand and left-hand sides.
This visual inspection ensures that the current consumption is not effected by an incorrect default setting.
– Use a flashlight to check the grinding brush
from the side of the card trunk.
– Use the opening in the side panel to carry out
the visual check.
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Action
– Check the default setting once again.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 201

7.2.6.5 Information on the IGS-top

IGS-top, Page 3/29
Recommendations for levelling new card flat clothings

– The positions of the needles in new card flat clothings may change slightly after the production of sev-
eral tonnes of material. We recommend levelling the card flats with the grinding roller after this time has
lapsed to meet high technological requirements for quality.
Adjusting the card flats (with IGS-top, without IGS-classic)

– Adjust the card flats after the cylinder clothing has been ground with the grinding roller.
Note: If the cylinder clothing is not ground during its service life, the card flats will have to be adjusted
after 50% of the cylinder clothing service life has lapsed.
Adjusting the card flats (with IGS-top and IGS-classic)

– Adjust the card flats at a minimum after 1/3 or 2/3 respectively of the clothings service life has lapsed.
Note: Adjust the remaining settings in the cylinder range also, if needed.
Adjusting and/or replacing the grinding brush

– Check all IGS-top settings after replacement of the card flats.
– Replacing the grinding brushes

IGS-top grinding brush service life
IGS-top grinding brush Replace grinding
brush when heavily
worn
The IGS-top grinding brush is subject to wear; proper functioning of the brush is no longer guaranteed
after extended use
6 / 202 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.2.6.6 Adjust grinding brush parallelism to card flats (default setting)

IGS-top, Page 3/29
WARNING
Description IGS-top card flats unit, Page 6/197
4
3
11 1
14
8 13 9 12
10
8
4
«X»
+/-
3
1
-5
-4 2
-3
-2
-1
0
+1 6
+2
+3 15
+4 7 5
+5
The grinding bristle (10) parallelism to the card flats (2) is important to the system functioning.
The default setting has to be configured after the card flats clothing or the grinding brush is replaced.
Preparatory work
– Correctly adjust the card flats belt tension
Preparation
– Line up a card flat (2) and a line of bristles (10) of grinding brush (11) exactly with one another.
– Loosen the connecting piece (8) for the pneumatic cylinder(9).
– Set the actuating lever (6) relative to the lever (7) positioned behind it, so that the top of the lever (7) is
directed towards position («0»).
– Firmly tighten bolts (5).

Note: The slide shoes (15) must not make contact with the card flats (2). The card flats (2) must rest on
the return rail, however.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 203

Configure default setting (adjust on both sides)

– Loosen bolt (1) slightly.
– Loosen nuts (3).
– Prerequisite: Zugang mit den Lehren (12) aus der Richtung des Materialeinlaufs.
Use screws (4) to set the distance («X») between the bristles (10) and the grinding brush (11).
Note: The dimension («X») is a standard setting.
Standard setting for the grinding brush relative to the card flats
Distance “X” (standard 4.0 mm
setting)
– Re-tighten the bolts (1) and nuts (3) firmly.
Setting the fork head

– Prerequisite: The standard setting has been made on both sides.
Screw the fork head (13) in or out as required, until the bore holes (8) are aligned.
Note: The piston rod has to be inserted in the pneumatic cylinder (9).
– Once this has been carried out, tighten nut (14) firmly.
6 / 204 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

7.2.6.7 Adjust grinding pressure

IGS-top, Page 3/29
6
« » -5
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
7
-5
-4
6
-3
-2
-1
0
« » +1
+2
+3
+4
+5
7a 6 5
Adjust the grinding pressure based on the current measured.

Adjust the grinding pressure on card start-up and after the replacement of card flats.
The position of actuator lever (6) changes the pressure of the grinding brush on the card flats clothing. This
effects the grinding brush resistance relative to the card flats clothing. The actuator levers can compensate
approx. 0.5 Ampère current consumption.
Preparatory work
– The grinding brush default setting to the card flats clothing has been configured.
– The current has been measured during grinding (sharpening).

Reduce grinding pressure (current consumption / grinding brush pressure is too high)
– Prerequisite: Make the adjustments on both sides.
Loosen bolt (5) slightly.
– Move actuator levers (6) by a few notches on scale (7) in direction (-).
– Check the current consumption again and further adjust the grinding pressure with actuator levers (6).
Note: If too much current is consumed still, increase the mechanical default setting to 4.5...5.0 mm.
Increase grinding pressure (current consumption / grinding brush pressure is too low)
– Prerequisite: Make the adjustments on both sides.
Move actuator levers (6) by a few notches on scale (7a) in direction (+).
Note: If the current consumption is still too low, then the standard mechanical setting must be reduced to
a value lying in the range 3.0 - 3.5 mm
– Check the current consumption again and further adjust the grinding pressure with actuator levers (6).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 205

Finishing
– Check the current consumption every time an adjustment is made.
7.2.6.8 Settings in the data masks

IGS-top, Page 3/29
Enter the card flats clothing service life (production)

– Prerequisite: The value for the card flats clothing service life is derived from the values gained from the
experience of the spinning mill.
Enter the value for the required service life in the data screen.
Note: If the cylinder clothings and the card flats clothings are changed at the same time, the values
entered for both parts have to be identical.
41.3, Page 2/99
Changing the specified service life (production)

– The service life (production) entered can be increased or reduced at any time in the respective data
mask.
41.3, Page 2/99
– After the change(s) the newly computed values are displayed in the respective data mask.
70.2, Page 2/109
Reset the service life after a card flats clothing change

– After a card flats change, the value has to be reset to («0») in the corresponding data mask.
Note: The value has to be reset for the data displayed on the data mask to be correct.
70.1, Page 2/108
6 / 206 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Delivery
8 Delivery
8.1 Tools
Carriage
8.2 Changing the doffer group

Removing the doffer group, Page 6/208
Installing the doffer group, Page 6/209
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 207

Delivery
8.3 Removing the doffer group

WARNING
Preparation:
16 15 14
13 160 mm
12
4 5 6 5 8 9 10 11
– Remove the cover over the delivery traverse, the front cover in the base assembly, as well as the cover
over the delivery shield.
– On the right-hand side of the machine, remove the connecting pipe (15) for the suction system.
– Disconnect all external cables and pneumatic lines which lead to the doffer group.
– Unplug the cables to the proximity switch and the scanner, and uncouple the compressed air to the blow-
in device.
– Lay the cables and plugs in channels so that they are not damaged when the doffer group (12) is taken
out.
– Remove the driving belts for driving the brush roll, the web collection (16) and the doffer.
– Place the hydraulic lift (14) on a wooden block (13) 160 mm in height and locate it exactly under the sup-
port (1).
– Raise the hydraulic lift (14) to within one millimetre under support (1).
6 / 208 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Delivery
Remove doffer assembly

– Carefully turn nuts (8) anticlockwise on both sides.
In this way the doffer assembly (12) is swung downwards until the support (1) rests on the hydraulic
lift.
– Remove the dowel screws (9) and swing away the spindles (10).
– Using hydraulic lift (12), carefully swing the doffer assembly downwards until the transport rollers (5) rest
on the machine frame (6).
– Place the transport system(11) in front of the machine, line it up at the height of the machine frame and
secure it.
Carriage, Page 6/76, 6/207
– Remove lock bolts (4) from the holes using a leverage tool (bolt and washer).
– Carefully push the doffer assembly (12) onto the transport system (11) and secure it with the bolts
provided for this.
8.4 Installing the doffer group

Sequence of steps
– The installation follows the dismantling sequence but in reversed order.
– Align the doffer assembly so that both holes for lock bolts (4) in the doffer assembly and in the machine
frame are lined up.
– Fit the lock bolts (4) lubricated with assembly paste into the holes by hand.
Note: Do not use a hammer to install the lock bolts (4).
– If necessary, the transport rollers can be adjusted by loosening the mounting bolts of the transport rollers
(5) and realigning them using the eccentric. Tighten the bolts again.
– Coat dowel screws (9) with assembly paste and fix.
– Adjust the doffer to the cylinder.

31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 209

Delivery
8.5 Take off unit of delivery

8.5.1 Adjust draft for take-off roll / delivery rolls
Drafts, Page 3/10
Sliver weight , Page 3/13
1
2.10
7
2.00 15
1.90 16
17 5
1.80
1.70 8/8a
1.60
1.50
8a
4 6
1.40
1.30
3
1.20 2 8
1.10
1.00
m/min 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
1 Drafting zone between take-off roll and 7 Maximum adjustable draft at high deliv-
delivery rolls ery speed
2 Minimum adjustable draft at low delivery 8 Draft in intersection of set draft at low
speed delivery speed to set draft at high deliv-
ery speed. The draft will increase with
3 Set draft at low delivery speed. (Data
a higher delivery speed starting at this
mask 41.1 Min. delivery draft)
intersection point.
4 Maximum adjustable draft at low deliv-
8a Computed effective draft between the
ery speed
take-off roll and the delivery rolls based
5 Set draft at high delivery speed. (Data in the set drafts min. / max. (Data mask
mask 41.1 Max. delivery draft) 41.1 Eff. delivery draft)
6 Minimum adjustable draft at high deliv- 15 Take-off roll
ery speed 16 / 17 Delivery rolls
The draft ratios between take-off roll (15) and delivery rolls (16/17) can be influenced. According to the draft
(3) entered and the draft entered at maximum delivery speed (5), the controller computes the draft (8/8a) for
the set delivery speed.
Setting aim: Optimised draft ratios depending on delivery speed and raw material.
6 / 210 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Delivery
Default setting, all materials

– Select the data mask for entering the data.
41.1, Page 2/96
– Set the minimum draft (3).

Draft, slow delivery speed
Draft, all materials 1.25
– Set the maximum draft (5).

Draft, high delivery speed
C 60: Draft, all materials 1.60
C 60H: Draft, all materials 1.80
Adjust drafts
– If there are problems with material transfer, one of the two, or both drafts, will have to be adapted to
match the conditions.
8.5.2 Setting rollers and clearer roller in the doffing device

WARNING
4
13
1
2
5
6
7
8 3
9
10
11 12
The rollers and clearer roller are set using adjustment screws and lock nuts.
Settings (the sequence must be maintained)

– 1. Adjust take-off roll (1).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 211

Delivery
– 2. Adjust upper delivery roller (2).
– 3. Adjust lower delivery roll (3).
– 4. Adjust clearer roller (4).
Adjust take-off roll.

– Prerequisite: Carry out the adjustments on both sides.
Loosen the lock nuts (5).
– Use the adjustment screw to adjust the distance between the doffer and the take-off roll (1) and lock.
Adjustment point “82”
Distance, doffer / take-off 0.175 mm
roll
Adjust upper delivery roll.

– Prerequisite: Carry out the adjustment on both sides.
– Use the adjustment screw to adjust the distance between delivery roll (2) and take-off roll (1) and lock.
Distance, take-off roll / 0.15 mm
delivery roll
Adjust lower delivery roll.

Loosen nut (9) and twist the gudgeon (8) out so far that it does not abut on the bearing lever during the
adjustment procedure.
– Nut (10) must not be loosened.
– Adjust the distance with the special nut (7) and nut (6).
Distance, lower delivery 0.50 mm
roll / upper delivery roll
– Tighten the special nut (7) and nut (6) against each other.
Note: After tightening, the setting must be checked across the whole width.
– Finally, set the gudgeon (8) on the bearing lever and lock it with nut (9).
Note: This gudgeon (8) serves as limit stop for the bearing lever of the delivery roller (1).
Adjust clearer roller.

6 / 212 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Delivery
– Use the adjustment screw to adjust the distance between the take-off roller (1) and the clearer roller (4)
and lock.
Distance, bottom take-off Approx. 0.10
roller / clearer roller mm (must not
contact the
take-off roll)
8.5.3 Adapt the position of the lower delivery roll

WARNING
7
2
3
1
5
4
3 2
5 9
1
4
6
The heights of the doffer (1) clothings and the take-off roll (2) employed vary depending on the manufacturer
and the type of clothing. This affects the position of the adjusted upper delivery roll (3). The position of the
upper delivery roll (3) relative to the lower delivery roll (4) has to remain within a certain range. This is
achieved by the position of the support shafts (5) for the lower delivery roll (4).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 213

Delivery
Define the position of the support shafts

– Define the support shaft position based on the doffer height or the height of the take-off roll clothing re-
spectively
Position, support
Doffer: Clothing height 5.0 Shaft adjustment
mm to position 1
Take-off roll: Clothing
height 3.50 mm
mm to position 1
height 4.0 mm
mm to position 2
height 3.50 mm
Doffer: Clothing height Shaft adjustment
4.70 mm to position 3
height 3.50 mm
mm to position 4
Doffer: Clothing height
4.70 mm
height 4.00 mm
Adjust the position of the support shafts

– Prerequisite: Carry out on both sides
Remove the bolts (6).
– Use and open-jaw spanner to turn the faces (7) of shafts (8) to the required number (9) on the supports
(5).
Note: The faces (7) of the shafts (8) have to be in the same position on both sides.
– Fit the previously removed bolts (6) into the corresponding threaded holes
– Line up faces (7) exactly at a right angle to bolts (6) and then tighten bolts (6).
– Adjust lower delivery roll (4).

6 / 214 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Delivery
8.5.4 Adjusting the fleece bridge

WARNING
3
6
X
Adjust the distance between web bridge (5) and take-off roll (6).
Sequence of steps
– Remove the suction connection of the suction duct (7).
– Swing the suction duct (7) to the back until it rests on the cover.
– Remove the drive belts of clearer roller (1) and delivery rollers (2).
– Swing brush roll (1) to the rear.
– Raise the upper delivery roller (2) and support it left and right with two wooden battens (3).
– Set the specified distance between take-off roll (6) and web bridge (5) using a gauge.
Distance “X” between web bridge and take-off roll
– Tighten screws (4) and check the set distance («X») over the entire width.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 215

Delivery
Checks
– Remove the wooden battens (3) and swing the delivery roller (2) back.
– Check the distance between the delivery rollers (2).
– Swing the clearer roller (1) and the suction duct (7) back to their initial positions and check the settings.
8.5.5 Take off unit
8.5.5.1 Adjusting the doffer

WARNING
4
1
A simple check can be carried out on both side at (1).
Preparatory work
– The covers over the doffer and a carding profile on the cylinder must be removed to allow for an exact
setting and control to be made.
Increase the distance between the drum and the doffer (+)
– Loosen nuts (3) and turn nuts (4) anticlockwise.
Note: The changes must always be carried out on both sides.
6 / 216 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Delivery
Setting between cylinder 1 = Range of

and doffer as a function of settings if the
the production speed machinery was
warmed up
2 = Range of
settings if the
machinery is
cold
mm
0.350
0.300
0.250
0.225
0.200
0.175
0.150
30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180 195 210 225 kg/h
01.2006 Hi
Setting between cylinder and doffer as a function of the production speed
The doffer displaces itself downwards.
– Once nut (3) has been tightened the setting must be checked again.
Note: The check must be carried out over the full width of the doffer.
Reduce the distance between the cylinder and the doffer (-)
– Loosen nuts (3) and turn nuts (4) in the clockwise direction.
Note: The changes must always be carried out on both sides.
The doffer is displaced upwards.
– Once nut (3) has been tightened the setting must be checked again.
Note: The check must be carried out over the full width of the doffer.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 217

Delivery
8.5.5.2 Adjust the proximity switch to monitor the doffer speed

The machine will stop producing, if the doffer speed
drops below a certain level (blocking protection).
X Note the text display.
1
Sequence of steps
– Adjust proximity switch (1) to distance “X” to pulse generator (2).
Distance «X» 2.0 mm
Check setting
– Select the data mask
83.8, Page 2/120
– Start the doffer

– Check the displayed values on the data mask.
Note: The difference between the two displayed values must not be greater than “10”.
6 / 218 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Delivery
8.5.6.1 Tools
tion.
8.5.6.2 Changing rollers

Removing rollers, Page 6/220
Installing rollers, Page 6/221
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 219

Delivery
8.5.6.3 Removing rollers

WARNING
Note: Each element (roller) of the machine can be swung out . The side parts of these machine parts are
fixed using bearing pivots
Prepare rolls for removal
5
1
6
2
– Remove parts, until the machine element to be removed (3...7) is accessible and can be removed.
– Twist out the safety threaded pin (1) out by approx. 2 mm.
Note: Pull out the bearing journals (2) only after the respective roll has been secured with the lifting
device.
Raise roll
– Hook the lifting device (8) with the straps onto
8 the crane and lift until the straps (9) can be fit-
ted to the roll.
Lifting device, rolls and
licker-in(s), Page 6/81, 6/219
– Carefully raise the lifting device (8) a little.

9
Note: Do not raise all the way as the bearing
journals have not been removed yet.
– Remove bearing pins (2) from the holes, and

use the lifting device to remove the roller.
6 / 220 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Delivery
8.5.6.4 Installing rollers

Sequence of steps
– The installation follows the removal sequence but in reversed order.
– Use the lifting device (8) to position the roll correctly.
– Fit the bearing journals (2) lubricated with assembly paste into the holes by hand.
Note: Do not use a hammer to fit the bearing journals (2).
– Adjust the rolls.

8.5.6.5 Adjusting the pressure of the stripping blade

WARNING
Sequence of steps
– Loosen the setting collar (1)
– Leave the stripping blade (2) resting on the

lower or upper delivery roller (3).
Note: Carry out the settings left and right.
– Using an appropriate tool (4) turn the setting

collar (1) approx. 1/8 of a rotation and tighten it
again.
Note: Thus the stripping blades (2) are
pressed with a light pressure on to the delivery
rollers (3).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 221

Delivery
8.5.6.6 Adjusting the proximity switch for the delivery speed

Correct setting of the distance so that the delivery speed is measured correctly.
Sequence of steps
– Adjusting the proximity switch (1)
X setting)
2 1 – Selecting the data screen.

83.11, Page 2/121
– Start the doffer.

– Check the displayed values on the data
screen.
Note: The difference between the two
displayed values must not be greater than “5”.
6 / 222 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Delivery
8.6 Fleece collection of delivery

8.6.1 Cross apron of fleece collection
8.6.1.1 Changing the cross-apron

Removing the cross-apron, Page 6/223
Installing the cross-apron, Page 6/224
8.6.1.2 Removing the cross-apron

WARNING
Sequence of steps
1
3 3
– Remove the upper and lateral covers (4).
– Remove the belts (1).
WARNING
Heavy components can crush or overwhelm persons.
This can result in injury, bruising or spinal damage.
When working with heavy components always use safe and suitable hoisting devices.
– Remove the screws (3) and lift the entire cross-apron unit (2) out of the machine.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 223

Delivery
8.6.1.3 Installing the cross-apron

WARNING
Sequence of steps
5
3 3
WARNING
Heavy components can crush or overwhelm persons.
This can result in injury, bruising or spinal damage.
When working with heavy components always use safe and suitable hoisting devices.
– Lift the cross-apron unit (2) into the machine and screw in the screws (3).
– Adjust the cross-apron unit (2) as parallel as possible to the delivery rollers (5) and then tighten the
screws (3).
– Finally tighten the screws (3).

Note: Fit the drive belt (1) as shown in the figure.
6 / 224 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Delivery
8.6.1.4 Adjusting the distance between delivery rollers and cross apron
WARNING
The rubber buffer (3) is used to set the distance between the belts (1) of the cross apron and the delivery
rollers (2). This setting can deviate from the standard setting depending on the material and the delivery
speed.
Sequence of steps
2 1
«X»
– The belts (1) of the cross apron must be as parallel as possible to the delivery rollers (2).
– Use the rubber buffer (3) to set the required dimension.

Default setting «X» 3.0 mm
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 225

Delivery
8.6.1.5 Adjusting the distance between the cross aprons

WARNING
Setting aim: The distance between the cross-aprons can be adapted to the material delivered.
Works setting "X" 18.0 mm
Sequence of steps
1 2
– The deflection rollers (1) and (2) are mounted eccentrically can be turned through 180 degrees. The dis-
tance between the belts can vary depending on their built-in position.
Distance «X» between the 13.0 mm
cross-aprons
18.0 mm
23.0 mm
6 / 226 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Delivery
8.6.1.6 Tensioning cross aprons

WARNING
The cross aprons must be correctly tightened (2) after replacement.
Sequence of steps
1 2
– Loosen the stress in the cross-aprons with screws (3) and with screw (4).
– Mark the slack belt with two lines at the specified distance.
Note: These lines are needed to check the tension.
Separation between the 200.0 mm
lines in the unstressed
condition
– Apply the marked sliver (2).
– Tighten the cross-apron with the screws (4) until the required measurement is achieved between the
lines.
Separation between the 202.0 mm
lines in the stressed
condition
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 227

Delivery
8.6.1.7 Adjusting the gas pressure spring

WARNING
2
1
Sequence of steps
– The two units (1) and (2) must be adjusted and be in the closed position.
IMPORTANT
The gas pressure spring can be damaged if it is incorrectly set.
When closing a unit, the piston of the gas pressure spring must never come into contact with the
lower limit stop.
– Use an appropriate tool to push up support (4) all the way and tighten bolts (3).
6 / 228 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Delivery
8.6.2 Disc roller-unit of fleece collection
8.6.2.1 Tools
Card gauge
For general setting and checking
Gauge for calibrating the distance measuring

system
The gauge is clamped between the disc rollers in
the delivery. Subsequently the nominal value of the
distance measuring system is adjusted.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 229

Delivery
8.6.2.2 Adjusting the distance between cross-apron and disc roller supports
WARNING
Sequence of steps
1 3
– The distance between the delivery rolls and the cross-apron (1) is set.
Adjusting the distance between delivery rollers and cross apron, Page 6/225
– Use the rubber buffer (3) to position the take-off roller supports (2) vertically.
Note: The pulley roll support (2) must not extend beyond the cross-apron support (1).
6 / 230 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Delivery
8.6.2.3 Pulley roll suction adjustment

WARNING
4
2
Sequence of steps
– Adjust pulley roll support (1).
Adjusting the distance between cross-apron and disc roller supports, Page 6/230
– Loosen the bolts of suction tube (3).
– Adjust the position of suction tube (3) so that the rubber seal (4) is flush with suction housing (2) of pulley
roll support (1).
Note: The position of pulley roll support (1) must not be changed in the process.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 231

Delivery
8.6.2.4 Adjusting the disc rollers

WARNING
The disc rollers must be aligned exactly so that the disc rollers do not touch the sliver funnel.
Checking and adjusting
3
1
2 1
– Prerequisite: The alignment of the pulley rolls (1) and (2) are checked with a straight edge. If
differences are found, then these must be evened out with backing (4).
The correction of the difference can be carried out, depending on the situation, on the upper (1) and
lower (2) disc rollers.
Note: If the setting of the disc rollers are changed then the settings of the sliver funnel must be checked.
Adjusting the sliver funnel, Page 6/235
– If the disc rollers (1) and (2) are changed then a calibration of the sliver control must be carried out.
6 / 232 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Delivery
8.6.2.5 Setting the distance between the disk rollers

WARNING
Preparatory work
– Before you can finalize the distance setting between the disk rollers, the distance measuring system in
the outlet has to be calibrated.
Complete the standard setting.
1
»X
2
»
– Loosen nut (1) slightly and set the clearance «X» with bolt (2).
Note: The contact surfaces of the disk rollers must not come in contact, if the card sliver is missing.
Standard setting: 0.15 mm
Distance «X» between the
disk rollers
Check the settings.

– Select the respective data screen
82.2, Page 2/115
– Move lever (3) up and then let go off it

Note: The value displayed on the data screen has to be in the range specified.
Correct value without the 200 - 400
gauge between the disc
rollers
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 233

Delivery
– Repeat this process several times to avoid flawed measurements.

Note: If the value remains consistently above or below the specified value, the distance between the disk
rollers will have to be changed accordingly.
8.6.2.6 Adjusting the pressure between the disc rollers

WARNING
3 4
1 600 N / 1150N
Setting aim: Spring pressure (default setting) as a function of the width of the disc rollers used
Spring pressure at:
Width of disk roller: 9.0 mm 600 N
Width of disk roller: 15.0 mm 1150 N
Spring pressure adjustment

– Align sheet (1) with the scale on the lower edge of the ring (2), or align it with the end of the spring (3).
– Load or unload the spring (3) using screw (6) until the upper edge of the ring (5), or the beginning of the
spring (3) comes up to the height of marking (4).
Note: The spring pressure now corresponds to the default value.
6 / 234 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Delivery
8.6.2.7 Adjusting the sliver funnel

WARNING
6 7
X» 4
»
8
4
2
1
Preparatory work
– The alignment of the disc rollers must be adjusted.
– The clearance between the disk rollers (without card sliver) must have been set.
Adjusting the lateral play between the sliver funnel and the feed rollers
– Slightly loosen the screw (2).
– Using feeler gauge (3), measure the distance to the left and right between the take-off rolls (4) and the
sliver trumpet (5).
Card gauge, Page 6/229
– Move the funnel plate (1) until the clearances to the left and right are the same.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 235

Delivery
IMPORTANT
Avoid damaging the sliver trumpet.
The sliver funnel must not under any conditions come into contact with the disc rollers.
– Tighten screws (2) and check the settings again.
Adjusting the position of the sliver funnel

– Loosen the screws (7) slightly.
– Use the bolt (8) to adjust the distance «X» between the funnel plate (1) and disk roller's bearing.
Note: The sliver funnel (5) must not ever drag on the disk rollers (4). With certain materials, increasing
distance «X» may, in effect, reduce the degree of fly.
Distance «X» between the 2.10 mm
support plate and the disk
roller bearing
– The spring (6) has to pull flush the funnel plate (1) to the bolt (8).
8.6.2.8 Adjusting the blow-in device for the sliver

1
7
3 2
8
»X »
9
6 4 5
The deflection of the lower disc roller (1) actuates the lever (5) of the pneumatic switch (3). Starting at certain
position, compressed air is blown in the region of both disc rollers (1). This blowing action must not actuated
during normal production by any sliver weight.
Preparatory work
– The clearance between the disk rollers (without card sliver) has been set.
– The pressure between the disk rollers has been set.

Adjusting the pressure between the disc rollers, Page 6/234
6 / 236 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Delivery
Standard setting without card sliver between the disk rollers

– If the lever (5) is resting on the bolt (6), the distance «X» between the cams (8) and the spinning ring (9)
has to conform to the standard setting.
Note: Use the bolt (6) to adjust, if the standard setting is wrong.
Distance «X» between the 0.20 - 0.40 mm
cams and ring
Checking the point in time when compressed air is being emitted:

– Prerequisite: Main switch is switched on
Selecting the data screen
82.2, Page 2/115
– Lift the lever (2) slowly upwards.
– The compressed air must only be emitted if the display on the data screen indicates the prescribed value.
Value indicated on the 3600 (min. 3500,
Correcting the setting if compressed air is emitted below the value prescribed:
– Remove the covers in the range of the disk rollers (1) and the cover to access the pneumatic switch (3).
– With a few turns remove bolt (7).
– Move up pneumatic switch (3).
– Repeat the check.
– When the adjustment is correct, tighten bolts (4) and tighten bolt (7) up to pneumatic switch (3).
8.6.2.9 Changing the distance measuring system in the delivery

Removing the distance measuring system in the delivery, Page 6/238
Installing the distance measuring system in the delivery, Page 6/239
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 237

Delivery
8.6.2.10 Removing the distance measuring system in the delivery

WARNING
Sequence of steps
6
2
3 4
1 2
– Remove the holder (4) with the armature (5).
– Pull the signal coil (2) downwards.

Note: Do not damage the cable (3).
– Remove the measuring converter (1) with the attached signal coil (2).
6 / 238 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Delivery
8.6.2.11 Installing the distance measuring system in the delivery

WARNING
Sequence of steps
6
8 (2 Nm)
2
5
2
1 2 4
– Install the measuring converter (1) with the attached signal coil (2).
– Push the signal coil into the hole in the holder piece (8). The bottom of the signal coil (2) has to be flush
with the holder (8).
Note: Do not damage the cable. When installed, the cable connection is underneath.
– Tighten screw (6) up to 2 Nm.
– Secure holder (4) again with the solenoid plunger (5).

Note: Correctly position the solenoid plunger in the signal coil.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 239

Delivery
8.6.2.12 Check position transducer of sliver autoleveller (delivery section)

Measuring the current value with the gauge
1
2
0.8 mm 3
– Select the data mask.

43.2, Page 2/103
– Pull up the lever (7) and insert gauge (1) 0.8 mm between pulley rolls (2) and (3).
Gauge for calibrating the distance measuring system , Page 6/229
– Read off the value displayed in the text display panel

Correct value with the gauge 1288 - 1328
is 0.8 mm between the disc
rollers
Action
If the actual situation corresponds to the required situation.
– If the values agree with the recommendation, the scanner does not have to be calibrated.
Action
– If the values do not agree with the recommendation, then the scanner has to be calibrated.
6 / 240 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Delivery
8.6.2.13 Calibrating the distance measuring system in the delivery

Correctly set the distance measuring system so that it does not lead to error functions.
Preparatory work
– The disc rollers must be aligned exactly.
– The distance between the disc rollers must be adjusted.

Sequence of steps
1
2
0.8 mm 3
4
1 2
2x0.8 mm 6
3
1 5 7 3

82.2, Page 2/115
– Pull up the lever (7) and insert the gauge (1) 0.8 mm between the pulley rolls (2) and (3).
Gauge for calibrating the distance measuring system , Page 6/229
– Using a screw driver, set the immersion armature (4) such that the value in the data screen corresponds
to the correct value.
Correct value with the 1288 - 1328
gauge is 0.8 mm between
the disc rollers
– Once set properly to specifications, fixate the solenoid plunger (4) via the screw (6).
Torque to fixate the 2.0 Nm
solenoid plunger
– Slide both gages (1), 2x0.80 mm, in between the disk rollers (2) and (3)
Correct value with the 2550 - 2750
gauge is 1.6 mm between
the disc rollers
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 241

Delivery
1
2
0.8 mm 3
4
1 2
2x0.8 mm 6
3
1 5 7 3
– Remove gauge (1).

Correct value without the 200 - 400
gauge between the disc
rollers
– Values which switch off the delivery.

Value when the delivery is switched off
Sliver too thin (width of the Value less than
disc roller 9 mm): 680
Sliver too thin (width of the Value less than
disc roller 15 mm): 780
Sliver too thick Value greater
than 3110
Finishing
– Checking the settings
Check position transducer of sliver autoleveller (delivery section), Page 6/240
– Check the setting of the solenoid plunger

6 / 242 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Delivery
8.6.2.14 Monitoring the data relevant to quality

The quality of the sliver delivered at the disk rollers
1 (1) can be monitored via the signals processed by
the distance measuring system.
Sequence of steps
– Set the value for which the card production is switched off, once the shutoff limit for the sliver weight
change has been exceeded.
22.1, Page 2/86
– Set the value for which the card production is switched off, once the shutoff limit for the sliver weight vari-
ation (CV%) has been exceeded.
22.2, Page 2/86
– Set the value for which the card production is switched off, once the shutoff limit for spectrogram errors
has been exceeded.
22.4, Page 2/88
– Set the value for which the card production is switched off, once the shutoff limit for the number of slubs
in the card sliver has been exceeded.
22.5, Page 2/89
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 243

Delivery
8.6.2.15 Setting (positioning) the solenoid plunger in the signal coil

WARNING
Adjust the armature correctly
Sequence of steps
8
2
5
9
O.K 4
– Use the bolts to loosely fix the holders (4) and (8) in place.
IMPORTANT
The plunger armature and the plunger coil can be damaged if they are incorrectly set.
The plunger armature must never touch the plunger coil during movement of the disc roller.
– Using light displacements of the holders (4) and (8) the armature (5) must be aligned in the middle of the
signal coil (2).
– To check the pulley rolls (9) push them down using the lever (7).
Note: The armature (5) must not come into contact with the signal coil (2). It must be located in the
middle of the signal coil (2). If necessary displace the holders again.
6 / 244 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Delivery
8.7 Take off unit of delivery

8.7.1.1 Adjusting the proximity switch for the delivery speed

Correct setting of the distance so that the delivery speed is measured correctly.
Sequence of steps
– Adjusting the proximity switch (1)
X setting)
2 1 – Selecting the data screen.

83.11, Page 2/121
– Start the doffer.

– Check the displayed values on the data
screen.
Note: The difference between the two
displayed values must not be greater than “5”.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 245

Delivery
6 / 246 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Covers and central systems
9 Covers and central systems

9.1 Directions concerning the settings of the proximity
switches
WARNING
Optimal setting of the proximity switches
Sequence of steps
– Set the switching distance to the prescribed distance (X).
Note: The LED lights up --> the proximity switch is activated. The LED dose not light up --> the proximity
switch is not activated.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 247

9.2 Covers
9.2.1 Door, right-hand
9.2.1.1 Adjusting door lock and safety switch

WARNING
Sequence of steps
5
3
4
– The trip cam (3) is fastened with non-detachable screws (4).
– The trip cam must pass exactly into the opening (2) of the safety switch (5). The safety switch can only
be displaced slightly. The adjustment onto the fixed trip cam (3) is carried out with the fastening plate (1).
IMPORTANT
Checking the functioning of the safety switch
After the mechanical setting of the safety switch, it has to be tested electrically using the test pro-
gram.
– Checking the safety switch electrically.
82.4, Page 2/116
6 / 248 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

9.3 Pneumatic unit

9.3.1 Remove condensation trap
WARNING
If the compressed air system is under pressure, it is a potential source of danger. Compressed
air may be discharged and react explosively.
Persons may suffer injury as a result.
The pneumatic system must also be depressurised for repair and maintenance work!
Sequence of steps
– Move the grooved tube (2) downwards.
The compressed air supply is cut off.
– Turn the condensation trap (1) in the direction

of the arrow.
Note: Do not lose the sealing ring (3) for the
removed condensation trap.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 249

9.3.2 Adjust the pressure regulator

Adjust the working pressure for the card

– Lift the adjustment wheel (1) and adjust the pressure.
Operating pressure for the 6.0 bar
card
Cut off the compressed air supply

– Move the grooved tube (2) downwards.
Drain condensation water by hand

– Turn the drain plug (3) in the direction of the arrow.
Note: With the automatic draining feature, the drain valve will open as soon as the condensation water
has reached a certain level.
6 / 250 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

9.3.3 Pressure switch for pneumatic unit
9.3.3.1 Setting the differential pressure switch

DANGER
For a vacuum below the minimum value, the suction points will not be correctly emptied.
The vacuum setting must not be lower than the minimum value for which the machine is
switched off.
Blocked suction points affect waste suction and can lead to machine damage.
+
-
1
2
5 3
4
7
6
+ No connection 5 Screwed connection

- Connection for exhaust 6 Differential pressure switch for monit-
1 No Opens if the vacuum is dropping oring the vacuum on the card exhaust
system
2 Nc No connection
7 Differential pressure switch for monit-
3 Setting dial oring the vacuum with a separate and
4 Com Incoming voltage continuous waste removal at the first
mote knife of the licker-in unit.
Setting aim: The minimum vacuum is monitored at the exhaust. The machinery switches off, if the vacuum
measured drops below the value set on the dial.
Standard value (machinery turns off)

– Use the dial (3) to set the desired value.
Monitoring systems, minimum vacuums
Minimum vacuum of card min. 600 Pa
exhaust system. The
machine is switched off.
Minimum vacuum with min. 600 Pa
continuous waste removal
at first mote knife.The
machine is switched off.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 251

9.3.4 Pneumatic line coupling
9.3.4.1 Disconnecting the pneumatic hose connections

Sequence of steps
– Press in ring (1).
1 – Pull on the nylon hose (2) at the same time.
b) a)
9.4 B&R control system

9.4.1 External I/O card
9.4.1.1 Module D95K, Description

Structure
LED (1): status displays
Plug (X1): CAN bus interface
Plug (X2): power supply
Plug (X3): digital counting inputs
Plug (X4): digital inputs
(X5) connector: digital outputs
(X6) connector: analogue inputs
Front plate(2)
2 1
X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
Purpose: Recording of signal data in the D95K-2 module

These recorded data are used to compute the values for controlling the card sliver, as well as for quality data.
9.4.1.2 Changing D95K-2 module

Removing D95K-2 module, Page 6/253
Installing D95K-2 module, Page 6/253
6 / 252 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

9.4.1.3 Removing D95K-2 module

WARNING
Description Module D95K, Page 6/252

Sequence of steps
– Disconnect all plug connections (X1...X6).
– Undo both screws.

– Lift out the module.
9.4.1.4 Installing D95K-2 module

WARNING
Sequence of steps
– Install the module in reverse order of the removal procedure.
– Connect and firmly tighten the plugs (X1...X6) again.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 253

6 / 254 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Sliver deposit CBA
10 Sliver deposit CBA

10.1 Lifting and moving the sliver deposit
WARNING
Sequence of steps
– Disconnect all connections to the card.
WARNING
Heavy components can crush or over-
whelm persons.
This can result in injury, bruising or
spinal damage.
When working with heavy components
always use safe and suitable hoisting
devices.
– Fit the supports (1) and the caster jacks to the
coiler according to the figure.
Note: Weights: CBA-5-600/750/800/1000: ap-
prox. 400/550/550/800 kg.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 255

Sliver deposit CBA
10.2 Setting the light sensors

The card sliver is properly detected and the signal is transmitted to the control system by correctly setting the
light sensors.
Sequence of steps
LED
1
X
2
– The bracket (2) is used to set the distance (X) and the position to the card sliver.
Note: The LED lights up when the card sliver passes the light sensor. The LED flashes if the card sliver
stands still. The LED does not light up when card sliver is not available or when the light sensor has not
been set correctly.
Light sensors
Distance "X" 15.0 mm (min. 10.0, max. 20.0)
6 / 256 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Sliver deposit CBA
10.3 Can table of sliver deposit

10.3.1 Tighten V-belt of can plate drive
WARNING
IMPORTANT
Tensioning the belts per regulations. Possible belt and bearing damage from too strongly ten-
sioned belts.
Preparatory work
– Remove the can plate.
Tighten belt (can diameter 1000/800/750 mm)
3 F
2
– Using belt tensioner (1), tighten V-belt (2).

Note: Check deflection (s) at check point (3).
V-belt loading (F) and flexing (s)
Load (F) at can diameter 50 N = 5.0 kg
1000/800/750 mm
Deflection (s) at can 20.0 mm
diameter 1000/800/750
mm
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 257

Sliver deposit CBA
Tighten belt (can diameter 600 mm)
4
3 F
2
1
s
– Using tension roll (1), tighten V-belt (2).

Note: The tension roll (1) can be moved with an appropriate tool (screwdriver, pin).
– Check deflection (s) at check point (3).

Load (F) at can diameter 50 N = 5.0 kg
600 mm
Deflection (s) at can 12.0 mm
diameter 600 mm
6 / 258 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Sliver deposit CBA
10.3.2 Adjust the spacing between the can table to the cover sheet
WARNING
4 1 2 3 4
5 5
9 8 7 6
Adjust distance «X»

– Remove the bolts from can plate (1).
Note: You can now move can plate (1) on the can plate drive (3) from one adjustment point to the next.
– Through the opening (2) at all four adjustment points use the jackscrews (8) to adjust the distance (X)
from the can plate (1) to the cover plate (4).
Note: The shims (7) are fixed to the baseplate (6) and must be pressed onto the ground by the
jackscrews (8).
Distance from can plate to cover plate
Distance “X” 2.0 - 3.0 mm
Check the distance

– Turn the can plate by hand. In this way, distance “X” can be checked at various positions.
Final adjustment
– Once the distance (X) is set, make sure the jackscrew (9) is also reinforced by the floor.
Plastic support fixtures

– If the can plate load is too high, e.g., can filled too much, the plastic support fixtures (5) provide additional
support for the can plate.
Note: The plastic support fixtures are non-adjustable.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 259

Sliver deposit CBA
10.3.3 Changing the distance from the sliver filling to the spinning can
WARNING
In order to adjust the diameter of the material filling to the diameter of the can, the can plate drive for the re-
volving plate must be displaced.
Setting aim: The sliver filling (2) should have approx. 8 - 10 mm lateral clearance compared to the spinning
can (3), if this is ¾ full.
Displacing the can plate drive
1
8...10mm
O.K
«+»
2 5 A=
4
3
5 6
B= «-»
– Define the change in distance between the can (3) and the sliver filling (2).
– Remove the can table (1).
– Loosen tension roller (6).
– Loosen all bolts (5) needed to secure the can plate drive (4).
– To increase the sliver filling (2) diameter, push the can plate drive (4) in the direction of the arrow («A»).
Note: Push the can plate drive (4) in the direction of the arrow («B») to decrease the distance.
– Firmly tighten all bolts (5) needed to secure the can plate drive (4).
6 / 260 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Sliver deposit CBA
Cover plate position adjustment
4
7
8 9 6
– Prerequisite: The can plate drive (4) has been adjusted.

Loosen all bolts (7) but do not remove.
– Place the can plate (1) on the can plate drive (4).
Note: Do not secure the can plate yet.
– Use the adjustment screw (8) to move the cover plate (9) in such a way that the opening in the cover
plate (9) corresponds exactly with the can plate (1).
Note: The gap between the cover plate (9) and the can plate (1) must be as small in all directions.
– Use the tension roller (6) to tighten the drive belt.

Tighten V-belt of can plate drive, Page 6/257
– Tighten the bolts (7) firmly, apart from at the positioning levers.
– Tighten the bolts for the can plate firmly.
– Finally, check the gap between the cover plate (9) and the can plate (1) once more.
– Adjust the positioning levers according to the new can position.

Adjusting the positioning lever for the spinning can, Page 6/262
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 261

Sliver deposit CBA
10.3.4 Adjusting the positioning lever for the spinning can

WARNING
WARNING
Risk of injury due to automatic movements
The pneumatic system must be depressurised for repair and maintenance work!
The default setting of levers (1) and (2) was configured at the works. They may just need to be adapted to the
cans used.
Preparatory work
– Shut off the compressed air supply for the machine.
Adjust levers and rollers (adjust on both sides)
2 1
m
5m
7 6 4 3
X 8
– Remove the support (7) of levers (1) and (2).
– Extend piston rod (3) completely.
– Undo nut (4) and remove clamp (5).
– Use fork head (6) to decrease or increase the distance (X) according to the guidelines.
Standard setting for distance “X”
Can diameter 1000 mm 740.0 mm
6 / 262 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Sliver deposit CBA
– To ensure that the rollers (8) of levers (1) and (2) centre the can sufficiently, the rollers (8) have to be ap-
prox. 5 mm away from the can.
Note: The rollers (8) can be fixed in three different positions.
Setting the throttles for the pneumatic cylinders of the positioning levers
Z
X 1
Y1
9
-
+
10
11
– The throttle valve (10) can be used to influence the extension speed of the piston rod for the pneumatic
cylinder (9).
The time taken for the positioning levers (1) to close is thereby increased or decreased. Position
(X).
– The throttle valve (11) can be used to influence the retraction speed of the piston rod for the pneumatic
cylinder (9).
The time taken for the positioning levers (1) to open is thereby increased or decreased. Position (Z).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 263

Sliver deposit CBA
10.3.5 Belt pulley "C" for rotary can plate
10.3.5.1 Changing change gear «C»

Removing the change gear «C», Page 6/264
Installing the change gear «C», Page 6/265
10.3.5.2 Removing the change gear «C»

WARNING
Sequence of steps
– Remove hood (1).
2 – Slacken the belt (7).
1 – Loosen the bolts (3) of the coupling (4) and

3 move the coupling (4) upwards.
4
5 – Remove drive shaft (2).
6
C
– Install gear box (5) with change gear “C”.
7
6 / 264 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Sliver deposit CBA
10.3.5.3 Installing the change gear «C»

WARNING
Sequence of steps
– Install gear box (5) with change gear “C”.
2 – Insert bolts (6) for securing the supporting
plate (8) but do not tighten at this stage.
3 – Install drive shaft (2) with coupling (4).

8 4
5 – Move coupling (4) downwards.
6 Note: Do not tighten bolts (3) yet on both
sides.
7
– Turn the drive shaft (2) by hand.
Note: Align the support plate (8) in such a way
that it exerts no stress on the coupling (4)
– After the support plate (8) has been aligned,

tighten the bolts (6) and (3) firmly.
– Tighten V-belt (7).

Tighten V-belt of can plate
drive, Page 6/257
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 265

Sliver deposit CBA
10.4 Can changer

10.4.1 Remove change carriage
WARNING
Sequence of steps
1
2

Note: The bolts (2) for clamping the driving belt do not have to undone.
– Remove the change carriage (3).
6 / 266 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Sliver deposit CBA
10.4.2 Notes on the magnetic limit switches on the pneumatic cylinder

WARNING
Risk of injury due to automatic movements
The pneumatic system must be depressurised for repair and maintenance work!
The main switch remains switched on, however, during the process of adjustment.
B9 B16 B10
B8
B8 Magnetic limit switch, determines when B10 Magnetic limit switch, monitoring of
sliver separation occurs change carriage, front
B9 Magnetic limit switch, monitoring of B16 Magnetic limit switch, close positioning
change carriage, rear lever initiation
The magnetic limit switches are set at the works. The settings just may need to be adapted to the situation at
hand.
Sequence of steps
– To check the setting, carry out a can change and observe the process.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 267

Sliver deposit CBA
10.4.3 Adjusting the magnetic limit switches B9

Adjust the magnetic limit switch for the rear position of the change carriage.
Preparatory work
– Switch off the compressed air.
Sequence of steps
LED
B9
LED + 3mm
– Prerequisite: The change carriage must be in its rear end position.

Displace the magnetic limit switch (B9) externally in the direction of the arrow.
– As soon as the LED lights up, move the magnetic limit switch 2 - 3 mm further and fix it in place.
6 / 268 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Sliver deposit CBA
10.4.4 Adjust magnetic limit switch B10

Adjust the magnetic limit switch for the front position of the change carriage.
Preparatory work
– Switch off the compressed air.
Sequence of steps
LED LED
B10 B10
+ 3mm LED
– Prerequisite: The change carriage must be in its front end position. (The spinning can is ejected)
Displace the magnetic limit switch (B10) externally in the direction of the arrow.
– As soon as the LED lights up, move the limit switch 2 - 3 mm further and fix it in place.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 269

Sliver deposit CBA
10.4.5 Adjusting magnetic limit switch B16

B9 LED B10
B16
X
1
Adjust the time at which the positioning lever (1) closes.
Preparatory work
– Switch ON the compressed air.
– Both of the magnetic limit switches B9 and B10 have been adjusted.
– One empty can each is located under the revolving plate in the change carriage.
– To check the setting, carry out a can change and observe the process.
Magnetic limit switch position (default setting)

– Adjust the magnetic limit switch (B16) to the corresponding distance (X) depending on the can diameter.
Default setting, magnetic limit switch “B16”
Can diameter: 600 / 1000 127.0 mm
mm: Distance "X"
The positioning levers are closing too early

– Move the magnetic limit switch (B16) by the desired distance in the direction of magnetic limit switch
(B9).
Note: The can trolley drive is offset. Should the position of the can or can trolley be changed by 20 mm,
for example, the magnetic limit switch (B16) must only be moved by 10 mm.
The positioning levers are closing too late

– Move the magnetic limit switch (B16) by the desired distance in the direction of magnetic limit switch
(B10).
Note: The can trolley drive is offset. Should the position of the can or can trolley be changed by 20 mm,
for example, the magnetic limit switch (B16) must only be moved by 10 mm.
6 / 270 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Sliver deposit CBA
10.4.6 Adjust magnetic limit switch B8 (default setting)

Description Sliver cutting, Page 6/274
LED B8
X
The position of the magnetic limit switch defines the initiation time at which the locking rod (1) nips the card
sliver.
Magnetic limit switch position (default setting)

– Adjust the magnetic limit switch (B8) to the corresponding distance (X) depending on the can diameter.
Standard setting, magnetic limit switch “B8”
Can diameter 1000 mm: 238.0 mm
Distance "X"
Can diameter 600 mm: 175.0 mm
Distance "X"
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 271

Sliver deposit CBA
10.4.7 Adjusting the throttle valves for the pneumatic cylinder of the can
trolley
Setting aim: The speed for ejecting the can must be adapted to the filling level of the can.
Increase the can trolley speed
Y4Y5
3 1
-
2
+
– Remove hood (3).
– Prerequisite: Keep the can trolley speed as slow as possible. An adjustment that results in excessive
speed adversely effects the service life of the driving belt.
The piston speed in the corresponding pneumatic cylinder is increased by turning the adjustments
screws (1) or (2) anticlockwise.
Note: Throttle (1) influences the speed of the can carriage in the rear end position. Throttle (2)
influences the speed for the ejection of the can.
6 / 272 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Sliver deposit CBA
10.4.8 Changing and tightening the drive tape for the can trolley
WARNING
5 6
600 mm
1 2
12
8 7 750/800/1000 mm
5+/-1mm
1 2 2
3 7 8
Change the drive tape (2) for the can trolley (6) and tighten the drive tape depending on the type.
Replacing the drive tape

– Pull in the drive tape (2) and tighten the nuts (1) lightly and counter-lock them.
Tightening the drive tape

– Prerequisite: The change carriage (6) must be flush with the baseplate of the can coiler at the rear. The
driving belt between the clamping sheet (5) and the counter piece (4) must still be easy to move before
tensioning.(give max. 1 mm play.)
Pre/tension the drive tape (2) using the tensioning device (3). At this point, the cover (8) must be resting
on the tube (7).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 273

Sliver deposit CBA
– From this point, tension the drive tape using the tensioning device:
Drive tape tensioning distance
Tensioning distance, can 5.0 mm
diameter 750/800/1000 (min. 4.0,
mm max. 6.0)
Tensioning distance, can 12.0 mm
plate diameter 600 mm (min. 11.0,
max. 13.0)
– Align the can trolley flush with the base plate and tighten the clamping plate (5).
10.5 Sliver cutting

10.5.1 Description
Condition: Sliver trumpet position during pro-
duction
The sliver trumpet (funnel) (1) is in the lower initial
1 position.
Condition: Start sliver cutting

2 The can is filled.
1 The can change procedure is started.
The number of metres lapsed initiates the sliver
cutting procedure.
Depending on the piston rod speed set in the
pneumatic cylinder, the piston rod (2) will push
up the sliver trumpet (funnel) (1).
6 / 274 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Sliver deposit CBA
1 4 6
5
7
LED B8
Condition: Sliver cutting

The sliver funnel (1) must have extended and the set duration in data screen 42.3 must have elapsed, before
the piston rod (3) reaches the magnetic limit switch (B8). If this is not the case, then the piston rod (4) cannot
extend.
The extending piston rod (3) of the can changer activates the magnetic limit switch (B8).
The piston rod (4) (clamp bolt) extends quickly. The magnetic limit switch (6) registers the position of the pis-
ton rod (4).
The card sliver (5) is nipped briefly.
The card sliver (5) is torn apart because the calender rolls (7) continue to rotate during this nip.
Condition: Finish sliver cutting

After as short a duration as possible (set in data
screen 42.3), the piston rod (4) returns to the ori-
2 4 6 ginal position.
1
The magnetic limit switch (6) is no longer activated.
The piston rod (2) along with the sliver trumpet (1)
quickly return to the initial position.
The calender rolls(7) grip the card sliver (5)
5 during this process and transfer it to the guide
7 tube of the can revolving plate.
Sliver cutting is finished.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 275

Sliver deposit CBA
10.5.2 Adjust sliver cutting, time at which the piston rod extends
Description Sliver cutting, Page 6/274
Sequence of steps
B9 B10
B8 X
1
– Check to make sure the default setting of magnetic limit switch (B8) is correct, if the can position is not
optimally adjusted for the sliver cutting at a can change.
Adjust magnetic limit switch B8 (default setting), Page 6/271
– Prerequisite: When evaluating the initiation time for sliver cutting, the position of the revolving plate also
has to be taken into account.
If the piston rod (1) is activated too early, i.e. sliver cutting is initiated too early, gradually move the mag-
netic limit switch (B8) by a few millimetres in the direction of magnetic limit switch (B10).
Note: Proceed in reverse order if sliver cutting is initiated too late.
6 / 276 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Sliver deposit CBA
10.5.3 Adjust sliver cutting, production and material dependent

adjustments
-
4 + 6
3
3 5 1 5
2
X
2
1
Adjust the standard settings for the sliver separation, according to the circumstances.
Raise sliver funnel; adjust speed

– Prerequisite: The speed is too high if the card sliver is torn by piston rod (1) before its cut. Reduce the
speed of the piston rod (3), if short fibres are involved. The speed is too low, if the set delay duration has
not yet elapsed, before the piston rod has reached the magnetic limit switch (B8).
To reduce the speed of the piston rod (3):
Note: Turn the reduction valve clockwise.
– To increase the speed of the piston valve(3):
Note: Turn the reduction valve anticlockwise.
– Prerequisite: The piston rod (3) has extended.
In the corresponding data screen, set the delay duration in such a way that it elapses before the piston
rod has reached the magnetic limit switch (B8).
42.3, Page 2/100
Set the duration of card sliver nipping

– Prerequisite: For all conditions, as small a duration as possible should be set.
Adjust the time in the data mask at which the piston rod (1) (locking rod) is nipping the card sliver (2).
Note: For high delivery speeds and / or heavy card slivers, increase the duration for the short-term nip-
ping of the card sliver ..
42.3, Page 2/100
Extend piston rod (locking rod) delayed

– Prerequisite: The set delay duration must have elapsed, before the piston rod has reached the mag-
netic limit switch (B8). Time delay has to be programmed so that the sliver funnel (4) will have reached
its final position before the piston rod (1) (locking rod) extends.
Set the delay in the data mask.
42.3, Page 2/100
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 277

Sliver deposit CBA
Adjust the position of the magnetic limit switch to the sliver weight
– Check the default setting of the magnetic limit switch (B8).
Adjust sliver cutting, time at which the piston rod extends, Page 6/276
– Adjust the magnetic limit switch (5) so that it detects the position of the extended piston rod (1) with each
sliver weight.
Note: Increase dimension “X” with heavy sliver.
Default setting, magnetic limit switch
Default setting between 6.0 mm
edge and magnetic limit
switch: Dimension “X”
6 / 278 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Sliver deposit CBA
10.6 Coiler of sliver deposit

10.6.1 Tensioning the v-belt for the coiler drive
WARNING
Preparatory work
– Remove the hood over the changing point.
Sequence of steps
1 2
s
3
4
DANGER
Possible belt and bearing damage from too strongly tensioned belts.
Tension the belts per regulations.
– Using the belt tensioner (3), tension the belt (1). Check the load (F) at the control point (4).
Revolving plate CBA 10 N = 1.0 kg
1000/800/750/600: Load
(F) on V-belt
Revolving plate CBA 2.0 mm
1000/800/750/600:
Deflection (s) of V-belt
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 279

Sliver deposit CBA
10.6.2 CBA: Change gear H
10.6.2.1 Changing the change gear «H»

Removing the change gear «H», Page 6/280
Installing the change gear «H», Page 6/280
10.6.2.2 Removing the change gear «H»

WARNING
Sequence of steps
«H» – The belt (3) is slackened with the tensioning
device (2).
– Exchanging the change gear «H».
2 1 3
10.6.2.3 Installing the change gear «H»

Sequence of steps
– Fitting follows the same sequence as removal but in reverse order.
Finishing
– Tension the toothed belt.
Tensioning toothed belt for change «H», Page 6/281
6 / 280 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Sliver deposit CBA
10.6.2.4 Tensioning toothed belt for change «H»

WARNING
Sequence of steps
2
F
1 4
IMPORTANT
Tensioning the belts per regulations. Possible belt and bearing damage from too strongly ten-
sioned belts.
– Using the belt tensioner (2), tension the belt (3).
– Check the deflection (s) at the check point (4).

Load (F) flexing (s)
Load (F), toothed belt 10 N = 1.0 kg
Deflection at (s) 2.7 mm
Controlling and tensioning tooth belts, Page 6/20
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 281

Sliver deposit CBA
10.7 Calender roller of sliver deposit

10.7.1 Tightening the belt for the calender rolls
WARNING
Sequence of steps
– Prior to fitting, mark the belt (4) in two places
(1) with the belt slack.
Dimension X
Distance between 200.0 mm
3
markings
– Loosen the screws (2) and attach the belt (4)

while slack.
2
DANGER
Possible belt and bearing damage
from too strongly tensioned belts.
1 1 4 Tension the belts per regulations.
– Use the tensioning device (3) to tighten the
belt (4) to the prescribed tension.
X Note: If there is insufficient tension, the belt
will run off the guide rails.
Dimension X with belt taut.
Dimension X with belt taut. 200 mm + 1.6%
(Measured distance extension =
between markings.) 203.20 mm
6 / 282 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Sliver deposit CBA
10.7.2 Adjust calender rolls

WARNING
Adjust the distance between the calender rolls
4
3 3 1
2
X
– Measure the distance between calender rolls (3).
IMPORTANT
The calender rollers will become damaged if the minimum distance between them is not
correctly adjusted.
The calender rollers must never rest on each other.
– Using adjustment screw (4), adjust the distance (X) between the calender rolls (3).
Distance "X" between the 0.10 mm
calender rolls
– Use lever (1) to relieve the load on the housing (2) and to put it under load again.
Note: Check the distance with the calender rolls closed (3).
Adjust guide
– Use bolts (5) to adjust the play between the plastic guide and the housing (2).
Note: The housing (2) must not become jammed in the swivelling range during opening and closing.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 283

Sliver deposit CBA
10.7.3 Delivery funnel

WARNING
1 2
4
Adjust the distance to the calender rolls

– Use shims (2) to adjust the distance (X) between the delivery funnel (1) and the calender rollers (3).
Distance "X" between max. 1.00 mm
calender rolls and delivery
funnel
Adjust air injector

– Prerequisite: An air injector (4) is installed depending on the coiler (sliver deposit) variant.
The time during which compressed-air is blown into the air injector (4) has to be adapted to the material
to be processed and the can condition.
42.3, Page 2/100
6 / 284 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Sliver deposit CBA
10.8 Cover of top part of sliver deposit

10.8.1 Adjusting the limit switch for the hood
Sequence of steps
– The counter piece (1) must pass exactly into the opening in the safety switch (2).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 285

Sliver deposit CBA
6 / 286 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card-accessories
11 Card-accessories
11.1 Tools
Support
The doffer unit has to be pushed on the supports to
fit the doffer clothing.
Clamping hub and extension pipe

To connect the cylinder or doffer drive when fitting
new clothings.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 287

Card-accessories
11.2 Parts provided to be used for a clothing change

Sequence of steps
1 3
– The doffer unit has to be pushed on the supports (1) for fitting the doffer clothing.
Support, Page 6/287
– The clamping hub (2) and the extension pipe (3) have to be installed to connect the cylinder drive or the
doffer drive and for fitting new clothings.
Clamping hub and extension pipe, Page 6/287
6 / 288 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card-accessories
11.3 Card wire maintenance set

11.3.1 Visual checking and assessment of the cylinder wire
Evaluating card clothing edges
c)
a)
2 4
b) d)
3 5
– A magnifying glass with magnification of 30 - 50x is a suitable tool for evaluating card clothing edges.
Note: The teeth as shown in the figure are over-magnified for clarification.
– a) correctly ground tooth. The card clothing is operating optimally.

Note: Correctly ground teeth have a sharp carding edge with no visible grinding grooves on the tooth
surface.
– b) carding edge no longer recognizable. In place of a carding edge a slightly reflecting radius can be
seen. The card clothing is no longer working optimally.
Note: The clothings of the cylinder and the card flats should be ground as long as the number of neps
remains in the upper tolerance range.
– c) the radius of the worn tooth tip has only been partially ground. No carding edge is available yet.
Note: The fine grinding grooves do not extend to the carding edge thus the shiny radius is still visible.
– The tooth tips show «burrs». This condition is to be completely avoided.

Note: The grinding drum was pressed too strongly against the tooth tips, or the surface of the die grind-
ing stone is blunt.
Action
a) correctly ground tooth
– Example a) shows a correctly ground tooth with sharp carding edges, good tooth shape and small visible
grinding lines on the tooth surface.
– The card clothing is operating optimally.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 289

Card-accessories
b) carding edge no longer recognizable

– In place of a carding edge a slightly reflecting radius can be seen.
– The clothings of the cylinder and the card flats should be ground as long as the number of neps remains
in the upper tolerance range.
c) worn out tooth tips

– The radius of the worn tooth tip has only been partially ground. No carding edge is available.
– The fine grinding grooves do not extend to the carding edge thus the shiny radius is still visible.
d) tooth tip with burrs

– The ground tooth tip has a «burr».
Note: The condition must be avoided completely.
– Possible causes: The grinding drum was pressed too hard against the tooth tip or the grinding stone is
blunt.
11.3.2 Counting neps

– Particularly with small neps, the number of neps found in the card sliver do not always carry through to
the yarn. It is thus necessary to include the neps in the yarn in an evaluation. Nep counting in the card
sliver must always be carried out the same way, by hand or by visual measurement, always by the same
person. Only thus can values from many counts be mutually compared.
6 / 290 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card-accessories
11.3.3 Determining the grinding interval

It is only possible to set up guidelines for the grinding intervals for the wires because of the many parameters
involved such as raw material, production speeds, quality requirements, etc. The effective grinding intervals
must be established by the spinning mill based on its own operating experience. It is possible to work out the
effective intervals using the guidelines described below. The grinding intervals are best worked out in practice
as based on the sliver or yarn quality. Each mixture and card has to be considered for itself.
Guidelines for determining the intervals

– The number of neps which should be the key factor for regrinding must lie below the value which is ac-
ceptable to the spinning mill. One possibility for determining the grinding interval is offered by the «Nep
ladder» system. See the figure below.
– A grinding interval should never be begun as based on one nep count which lies above the defined value!
This value should be confirmed by nep counts carried out at large time intervals.
Explanation of a «Nep ladder» (example):
3
2 2 2 2
7
1 8
– 1 = new wire
– 2 = partial production
– 3 = minimum nep number
– 4 = determined nep number when grinding must be done
– 5 = maximum permissible nep number
– 6 = neps
– 7 = production speed
– 8 = replace wire
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 291

Card-accessories
11.3.4 Dressing bed grinding drum
11.3.4.1 Description
IMPORTANT
A badly assembled dressing bed impairs the straightness of the grinding drum when dressing,
and thus also the straightness of the wire surface when grinding.
The dressing bed must be installed firmly before the grinding drum is dressed for the first time.
The dressing bed must not be bolted to the foundation.
The grinding drum must not be stored in the dressing bed but in the transport box designed for it.
Structure
2 3
1
600..650
5
6
8 1900
0
55
7
The location and the correct placing of the dressing bed is an absolute necessity for dressing the grinding
drum. Only when mounted on a firm, vibration-free base can it dress correctly with the drawing-off device.
Purpose: Firm installation of the dressing bed

Method of operation
• The top of a concrete base (7) serves as ideal location for the dressing bed (1). The foundation (7) can
also be built from a steel construction which is firmly screwed to the floor.
• Line up the dressing bed (1) with the jack screws (5).
• Locking bars (6) are fastened on against lateral displacement.
• The plug (3) is supplied. The supply line to this plug (3) is provided by the customer. The power supply to
the plug (3) must carry 400V.
Note: Check the rotation direction of the grinding drum (2) is in the clockwise direction. If the direction of
rotation is incorrect, this can be changed with the phases in the power supply to plug (3).
6 / 292 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card-accessories
11.3.4.2 Default setting «10» of the grinding drum before dressing

Description Dressing bed grinding drum, Page 6/292
Before dressing, the grinding drum must be brought into this position.
Sequence of steps
– Remove the fixing bolt (3).
– Set the area (6) vertically, and attach the grind-

ing roller (1), using the clamping screw (2).
– On the index (5) bring the position «10» to the

marking (4).
– Before dressing, tighten the fixing bolt (3).
11.3.4.3 Adjusting the dressing diamond

Locate the dressing diamond with reference to the grinding drum.
Sequence of steps
IMPORTANT
Preventing the one-sided wear of the
7 1 dressing diamond.
Turn the dressing diamond through 90
degrees before each dressing opera-
90 tion on the grinding drum. This avoids
one-sided wear of the diamond.
– When the grinding drum is in position «10» the
dressing diamond (7) must be brought as close
as possible to the grinding drum (1).
7 – Undo the screw (8) and displace the dressing
diamond (7) accordingly.
8
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 293

Card-accessories
11.3.4.4 Dressing the grinding drum

Kardendeckelgarnituren schleifen, Page 3/45
DANGER
Danger of injury: One part of the drive is laid open. The work in these areas must be carried out
with extreme care.
Wear safety glasses for all grinding and cleaning operations. The wires must be maintained by
trained personnel. The general operating safety precautions must be observed.
Description Dressing bed grinding drum, Page 6/292
7 1 9
3
12
10
11
Before the wire in the card can be ground with the grinding drum, the grinding drum must be dressed, i.e.
leveled.
Preparatory work
– The dressing diamond is adjusted.
Setting the grinding drum parallel relative to the dressing diamond:

– Prerequisite: The grinding drum (1) is switched off.
Lightly prestress the plate spring (12) with the nut.
– Using the hand wheel (11), carefully bring the dressing diamond (7) from the left-hand side under the
grinding drum (1).
6 / 294 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card-accessories
– Using the micrometer screw gauge (9), set the grinding drum (1) against the dressing diamond (7). At the
same time, move the grinding drum (1) slightly by hand until the grinding drum (1) contacts the dressing
diamond (7).
– Mark the position of the micrometer screw gauge (9) and put aside.
– Using the hand wheel (11), move the dressing diamond (7) to the right. It must not touch the grinding
drum (1) in the process of movement.
– Using the micrometer screw gauge (9), set the grinding drum (1) against the dressing diamond (7). At the
same time, move the grinding drum (1) lightly by hand.
– Turn the micrometer screw gauge (9) further until the dressing diamond (7) contacts the grinding drum
(1).
– Note the position of the micrometer screw gauge (9).
– Should a difference result between the left-hand and the right-hand control points, then these must be
corrected using the nut (10). The grinding drum (1) can be set lower on the right-hand side by turning
the nut (10 )in the clockwise direction. To set the grinding drum higher, turn the screw in the
counter-clockwise direction.
– As a check, repeat the procedure until the grinding drum (1) and the dressing diamond (7) are as near
parallel to each other as possible.
Dressing:
IMPORTANT
Do not grind with a cold grinding drum.
The grinding drum should be run to warm up for an hour before a grinding operation.
– Bring the dressing diamond (7) with the hand wheel (11) into the left-hand position.
– Start the grinding drum (1). It must turn in the direction of the arrow.
– Using the micrometer screw gauge (9) locate the grinding drum (1) until it just contacts the dressing dia-
mond (7).
– Add 1...2 graduation lines to the micrometer screw gauge (9).
– Tighten the fixing bolt (3).
– Using an even turning movement at the outside of the hand wheel (11) move the dressing diamond (7
)slowly to the right.
– Repeat this procedure until the grinding drum (1) is dress over its entire width.
– At the end, 1...2 passages must be made without any adjustment.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 295

Card-accessories
11.3.5 Card grinding drum
11.3.5.1 Tools
Lifting device for the grinding drum
Together with the flaps and the crane, this is used
to lift the grinding drum into the machine.
Installation aids for the grinding roller

These are required for moving the grinding roller on
to the grinding brackets.
6 / 296 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card-accessories
11.3.5.2 Adjust the grinding drum

5 5
4 1 4 1
2 2
3 3
Parallel adjustment of the grinding drum to the wires.
Sequence of steps
– The micrometer screw gauge (3) is used to adjust the grinding roller until it is parallel.
Note: Undo the fixing bolt (5) first before the micrometer screw gauge (3) is turned at all.
– The fineness of the control corresponds, depending on the setting of the eccenter, 0.002...0.01 mm per
graduation line on the micrometer screw gauge (3).
Reducing the distance to the wire:

– By turning the micrometer screw gauge (3) in the clockwise direction (direction «+») the grinding drum (1)
is brought closer to the wire (2).
Increasing the distance to the wire

– By turning the micrometer screw gauge (3) in the counter-clockwise direction (direction «-») the grinding
drum (1) is moved away from the wire (2).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 297

Card-accessories
11.3.5.3 Raising and installing the grinding drum

IMPORTANT
Danger of damage to the grinding drum during fitting.
The fitting must be carried out with extreme care so that the grinding drum does not bump
against anything and thus become damaged.
Setting the grinding brackets

– Prepare the machine for the installation of the grinding roller.
– Prior to installing the grinding roller, the grinding brackets have to be fitted and set.
Lifting the grinding roller
1
4
2
3
– Move the lifting equipment (1) over to the grinding roller (2) and then raise the roller.
Lifting device for the grinding drum, Page 6/296
– Using the assembly crane (3) and the lifting tool, place the grinding roller in the prepared grinding brack-
ets.(4)
Positioning the grinding roller

IMPORTANT
Danger of damage to the grinding drum during fitting.
The fitting must be carried out with extreme care so that the grinding drum does not bump
against anything and thus become damaged.
6 / 298 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card-accessories
a) 2 b) 6 2
– Set the grinding roller to index 0.
– Figure a): Place the grinding roller (2) on the set grinding bearings.
Note: The screw (4) can be used to secure the grinding roller.
– Position the micrometer screw gauge (5) according to the figure.
– Turn the grinding stone by hand until it is located between the brackets for the grinding roller (due to the
stroke of the traversing unit).
– Figure b): Place the installation aids (6) on the sides of the grinding roller and then carefully move the
grinding roller (2) towards the cylinder, keeping it parallel.
Installation aids for the grinding roller, Page 6/296
Removing the grinding roller

– After the cylinder or doffer has been ground, re-adjust the positions of the grinding brackets.
– Turn the grinding stone by hand until it is located between the brackets for the grinding roller (due to the
stroke of the traversing unit).
– Place the installation aids (4) on the sides of the grinding roller and carefully pull the grinding roller (2)
outwards.
Installation aids for the grinding roller, Page 6/296
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 299

Card-accessories
11.3.5.4 Adjusting screws for the grinding bracket

2
1
2
15...
20 m
1 m
The parallel setting of the grinding drum to the wire is adjusted using the adjusting screws (1) and (2).
Adjusting screws (1)

– The adjusting screws (1) have a very fine thread. An accurate setting is possible as a consequence.
They are used if small corrections to the parallel setting of the grinding drum to the wire are necessary.
Note: To ensure that the guidance of the adjusting screws (1) is always guaranteed, the adjusting
screws (2) must never be extended more than approx. 15 to 20 mm.
Adjusting screws (2)

– The adjusting screws (2) have a coarser thread. These adjusting screws are used for the parallel setting
as based on their coarser thread when the adjusting screws (1) would need more than a 15 to 20 mm
movement.
Note: The exact parallel setting of the grinding drum to the wire must always be done with the adjusting
screw (1).
6 / 300 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card-accessories
11.3.5.5 Position of the micrometer screw gauge for adjusting the grinding bracket
6
7
3
4
In order to ensure that accessibility to the micrometer screw gauge (3) and the prescribed positions (indices)
are correct, the grinding bracket has to be correctly positioned..
Sequence of steps
– The assembled pin (6) in the bearing of the grinding drum must lie sideways with respect to both the
grinding bracket (5) and the pin (7).
– Finally tighten the bearing cap (4).

Note: Only use the supplied screws (8).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 301

Card-accessories
11.3.5.6 Adjusting the grinding bracket during grinding

IMPORTANT
The wires can be abraded by an incorrect positioning.
Always move the rotating grinding roller (6) away on the grinding side first, using the adjustment
screw (1). Subsequently advance it again with the micrometer screw gauge (10).
Adjusting the grinding bracket during the grinding process
Example of doffer, sparks are visible on the right-hand side of the machine:
– Loosen the adjusting screw (1a) slightly (screw
in).
Note: The position of the grinding bracket (5)
is achieved through the opposing pressures
of the adjusting screws (1) and (1a). I.e., the
adjusting screw (1a) presses lightly against the
7 cylinder shield (8) and the adjusting screw (1)
presses lightly against the doffer frame (9).
6
– Using the adjusting screw (1) raise the grinding
bracket (5) slightly until grinding sparks are no
1a longer visible.
10 – Leave the adjusting screw (1a) standing at the

cylinder shield (8) and tension lightly the grind-
8
ing bracket (5).
– Using the micrometer screw gauge (10) move

1 the grinding drum back in until grinding sparks
are visible again. Repeat the procedure until
sparks are visible distributed across the entire
9 width.
5 Note: The procedure is similar for cylinder
grinding. In this case, the adjusting screw (1)
must be slightly loosened.
6 / 302 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card-accessories
11.3.5.7 Correcting the play in the worm gear

The delivery mechanism of the grinding drum must operate precisely. Therefor, there must not be any super-
fluous play present in the worm gear.
Procedure on the dressing bed:

– Set the eccenter to the number «1».
– Undo nut (2) and turn the eccenter bushing (1).
0
1 – The worm (3) is no longer engaged in the
worm gear (4).
3 2
– Undo the lock nut (5).
– Using the adjusting nut (6) adjust the play in

the worm.
6
– Tighten the lock nut (5) again.
5
– Using the eccenter bushing (1), make the ad-
justment so that there is little play between the
4 worm (3) and the worm gear (4) then tighten
the nut (2).
3
2
1
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 303

Card-accessories
11.3.6 Maintenance and grinding cylinder wire
11.3.6.1 Tools
Transport case for the grinding drum
The grinding drum must be stored in the transport
box and transported to the machine in it.

Purpose: Maintaining the quality requirements through the correct treatment of the wires
The service-life of the wires cannot be determined exactly. It depends strongly on the material being treated
the quality requirements and the maintenance.
The treatment from the factory was carried out following the guidelines of the wire manufacturer. As a rule,
newly pressed on wires are not ground. Take note of the special instructions of the wire manufacturer.
On cards without IGS classic, the wires should be ground very little, thus some 3 to 5 times during their life-
time.
The wires are ground with a very fine advance during 5 to 10 minutes. Finally, check the grinding using a
magnifying glass and if necessary repeat the cycle. The grinding process as a whole takes approx. 30 to 45
minutes.
6 / 304 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card-accessories
11.3.6.3 Preparing the cylinder for grinding

WARNING
Description Maintenance and grinding cylinder wire, Page 6/304
2
7
3 6
5
Removing parts:
– Remove the card flats unit (1).
– Remove all components (2) located in the vicinity of the post-carding zone.
– Remove the doffer cover and the guide rail (3).
– Remove the spacer plates (4).
– Remove the clearing brush (5).
– Remove the suction duct (6).
– Remove the cover (7) on the door frame (right-hand side of machine).
– Remove all connecting parts for suction on the right-hand side of the machine.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 305

Card-accessories
Check cylinder clothing for soiling and clean if necessary.

DANGER
Danger of injury.
During the cleaning process, the cyl-
2 inder (4) must never be driven with
1 the motor. The cylinder (4) is rotated
backwards by hand.
– Coarse wooden or polymer, etc., parts (1) are
removed from the wire with a fine blade (2).
4 3
Further preparatory work before grinding

– Transport the grinding drum in the transport box to the vicinity of the card.
Transport case for the grinding drum, Page 6/304
– Make ready the crane and all further supplies needed for grinding.
– Adjust the grinding roll

– Adjust the micrometer screw.

Position of the micrometer screw gauge for adjusting the grinding bracket, Page 6/301
– Secure the belt tightener of the cylinder belt with a screw.

6 / 306 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card-accessories
11.3.6.4 Adjust the grinding bearing for grinding the cylinder

1 1
2 2
~ 34 mm
~ 29 mm
3
2 2
~ 5 mm 3
4 1 1 4
Prepare grinding bearing

– Complete the presetting of the adjustment screws as shown in the figure.
Grinding brackets for doffers and cylinders, Page 6/304, 6/326
– Screw together the grinding bearing (1) with the supports (2).
Position support on the right-hand side of the machine

– Prerequisite: Prior to fastening, position the support (2) vertically.
Move the support (2) from underneath to the pin (3).
Note: The position of the support (2) must be maintained unconditionally, otherwise the position of the
grinding roll relative to the cylinder is not correct.
Position support on the left-hand side of the machine

– Prerequisite: Prior to fastening, position the support (2) vertically.
Move the support (2) from above onto the pin (3).
Note: The position of the support (2) must be maintained unconditionally, otherwise the position of the
grinding roll relative to the cylinder is not correct.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 307

Card-accessories
Positioning grinding brackets

– Use the adjustment screws (4) to set a distance of 5 mm between the undersides of the grinding brackets
(1) and the hole (5).
Note: Installation of the grinding roller is only possible with the brackets positioned in this way.
11.3.6.5 Before grinding, adjust the parallel setting of the installed grinding drum to
the cylinder
Sequence of steps
– Prerequisite: The grinding drum (3) is
installed.
Position the micrometer screw gauge (2).
Position of the micrometer screw gauge
for adjusting the grinding
bracket, Page 6/301
– Fasten the grinding bracket cover (4) firmly.

Note: Only use the screws (6) as supplied.
– Set the grinding drum to «index 5».

6 4
2 – Use the micrometer screw gauge (2) to provi-
3 5 sionally set a distance of 0.15 mm at the nar-
rowest position between the grinding roller and
the cylinder clothing.
– Use the adjustment screws (1) and (5) to pos-

5
ition the grinding roller, so that it is as parallel

as possible to the cylinder clothing.
Adjusting screws for the grinding
bracket, Page 6/300
1
– To achieve this, the distance must be set al-
ternatingly using first the micrometer screw
gauge (2) then corrected it with the adjusting
screws (1) and (5).
Adjusting the grinding bracket during
grinding, Page 6/302
6 / 308 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card-accessories
11.3.6.6 Grinding procedure for the drum

IMPORTANT
Sequence of steps
– Wires made from special alloys must be
ground with particular care.
Note: Sparking from wires made from special
alloys is significantly less intensive and there-
fore hardly visible.
2 1
– All doors must be closed.
3 – In the data screen, release the cylinder to

grinding operation.
81.1, Page 2/112
– Press the START button (2).

5
– For machines fitted with frequency inverters,
1
the cylinder speed can be set using the PLUS
or MINUS keys (3).
81.1, Page 2/112
IMPORTANT
4 The wires can be abraded by an incor-
rect positioning.
Move the rotating grinding drum (1)
6
away first on the grinding side using
the adjusting screw (6). Subsequently
advance it again with the micrometer
screw gauge (4).
– Using the micrometer screw gauge (4)
6 advance the grinding drum (1) until a few
grinding sparks (5) can be seen.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 309

Card-accessories
Sequence of steps
IMPORTANT
The wires can be abraded by an incor-
rect positioning.
Move the rotating grinding drum (1)
away first on the grinding side using
the adjusting screw (6). Subsequently
advance it again with the micrometer
screw gauge (4).
– In most cases, the grinding drum (1) grinds
1
first only on one side of the cylinder.
Note: Move the grinding drum (1) from this
side using the micrometer screw gauge (6).
– Correction:
4
– Turn the adjustment screw (6) on the grinding
side anticlockwise, until sparks are no longer
6
visible.
advance the grinding drum (1) until sparks are
again visible.
– Repeat this procedure until sparks can be

seen across the whole width of the cylinder.
6 / 310 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card-accessories
11.3.7 Tools for card flats maintenance
11.3.7.1 Tools
Compensation device
C 70
C 70
Grinding bearing for card flats

Loading levers
The loading levers press the card flats onto the
guiding plates via the retaining plates.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 311

Card-accessories
Retaining plates
The retaining plates with their special screws are
needed for grinding the card flats.
11.3.7.2 Install the compensation device for grinding the card flats
Remove the card flats:
– Remove the 4 card flats (1) as shown in the figure.
Assembling the compensation device:
3
6
C 70 C 70
4
5
– Assemble the bearing bushings (2) and (4) on the left and right-hand sides of the machine.
Compensation device, Page 6/311
– Push the rod (3) through the bearing bushing (2) and introduce it into bearing bushing (4).
– Prerequisite: Use the lever (5) with the designation (C 70).

Assemble the lever (5).
CAUTION
If the counterweights are not positioned correctly, then the card flats will not be ground correctly.
Set the counterweights in accordance with the instructions.
– Only install the counterweight (6) when the card flats are ready to be ground.
– Push the counterweights(6) to the outer limit stop.
6 / 312 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card-accessories
11.3.7.3 Install the retaining plate for grinding the card flats
Sequence of steps
2 4
3
1
IMPORTANT
The retaining plate chutes will be destroyed through wrong fitting.
The screws (2) must be directed towards the rear (direction of card trunk).
– On both sides slide the retaining plate (1) on the inner side of the support plate.
Note: The screws (2) must be directed towards the rear.
– Screw in the special screw (5).
– Install the removed card flats (3) again.

– Relax the tensioning device (4) as far as possible.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 313

Card-accessories
11.3.7.4 Install and adjust the grinding bearings for the card flats
4
4
5
1
m
8m
5
3
2
1
Carry out the following work on both sides:

– Assemble the complete grinding bracket (1) and (4). The guide plate (3) of the grinding bearing must not
yet be in contact with the card flat (2).
Note: The offset (5) of the grinding bracket must be directed in the direction of the doffer.
Grinding bearing for card flats, Page 6/311
– Lay a card gauge on the contact surface of the card flats.

Card gauge 0.50 mm
– Lower the entire grinding bracket (1) and (4) until the guide plate (3) rests lightly on the card gauge.
– Using the bearing (1), adjust the distance between the guide plate (3) and the contact surface of the card
flats (2).
Distance guide plate / 0.30 - 0.70 mm
contact surface of card
flats
– Adjust the bearing (4) to its minimum dimension so that the grinding roll does not contact the card flat (2)
after installation.
Minimum dimension 8.0 mm
bearing
6 / 314 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card-accessories
11.3.7.5 Adjust the retaining plates for the card flats

Push the card flats on the guide plates.
Preparatory work
– Place a card flat between the marks under the guide plate as shown in the figure.
– The grinding bearings for grinding the card flats must be adjusted.
Assembling the loading lever:
3 6
7
2
3
2
4
– Assemble the loading lever (7). (Per drawing)

Loading levers, Page 6/311
Check
DANGER
The retaining plate must not get jammed
As long as there is a card flat in the area of the retaining plate, the card flat must fit flush with the
guide plates.
CAUTION
If the counterweights are not positioned correctly, then the card flats will not be ground correctly.
Set the counterweights in accordance with the instructions.
– Assemble the counter weight for the compensation equipment.

31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 315

Card-accessories
– The drive for the card flats is activated.

The card flats must move towards the doffer.
– Observe the running of the card flats between the guide plate (3) and the retaining plate (5).
Retaining plates, Page 6/312
11.3.8 Maintenance and grinding of card flats
Purpose: Neu aufgezogene Kardendeckel (Hinweise bei vorhandener Schleifmaschine)
Kurzbeschreibung vor der Verwendung auf der Maschine.
Method of operation
• Die neuen Kardendeckelgarnituren gemäss den Vorschriften aufziehen (montieren).
• Alle Kardendeckelgarnituren gemäss der Vorschrift ausmessen.
• Kardendeckelgarnituren die ausserhalb der festgestellten Toleranz liegen auf der Schleifmaschine (z.B.
Graf DSM 20/1) auf das Mass der restlichen Kardendeckel bringen, (egalisieren)
• Die Kardendeckel anschliessend auf der Maschine montieren und gemäss den Vorschriften einstellen.
Note: Das Sollmass an allen Einstellpunkten um 0.05 mm erhöhen. Beispiel: Anstatt auf 0.175 mm auf
0.225 mm einstellen.
• Nach einer Produktion von 10...15 Tonnen die Kardendeckelgarnituren auf der Maschine mit der Rieter
Schleifwalze egalisieren.
Note: Dadurch werden kleine Unterschiede innerhalb des Kardendeckelsatzes ausgeglichen.
• Die Kardendeckel anschliessend auf das Sollmass an den Einstellpunktern einstellen.
Purpose: Neu aufgezogene Kardendeckel egalisieren (Hinweise bei nicht vorhandener

Schleifmaschine)
Kurzbeschreibung zur Egalisierung der Kardendeckelgarnituren auf der Karde.
Method of operation
• Die neuen Kardendeckelgarnituren gemäss den Vorschriften aufziehen (montieren).
• Die Kardendeckel anschliessend auf der Maschine montieren und gemäss den Vorschriften einstellen.
Note: Das Sollmass an allen Einstellpunkten um 0.05 mm erhöhen. Beispiel: Anstatt auf 0.175 mm auf
0.225 mm einstellen.
• Die Karde für das Egalisieren der Kardendeckelgarnituren vorbereiten.
• Die Kardendeckel egalisieren.

Note: Um das Schleifbild zu beurteilen mindestens 20 Kardendeckel egalisieren. Nach guter Beurteilung
des Schleifbilds, mit der Schleifwalze alle Kardendeckel in zwei Umgängen egalisieren.
• Die Kardendeckel anschliessend auf das Sollmass an den Einstellpunktern einstellen.
6 / 316 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card-accessories
Purpose: Erhalt der Qualitätsanforderungen durch Schleifen der Kardendeckelgarnituren
1
3
C 70
Die Kardendeckelstäbe (1) ohne Garnitur (2) sind ab Werk leicht hohl gefertigt.
The compensation device (3) straightens the concave bodies (1) of the card flats.
Im Gegensatz zum Egalisieren, werden abgenützte Nadeln der Kardendeckelgarnitur durch das Schleifen
wieder geschärft. Der Zeitpunkt variiert je nach Material, Produktion und Ansprüchen an die Qualität.
Nach dem Schleifen, d.h. ohne Kompensationsvorrichtung, gehen die Kardendeckel wieder in die ursprüng-
liche Position zurück. Sie sind wieder leicht hohl.
If the card flats are ground, the flats needles have to be examined with a magnifying glass after 1 to 2 revolu-
tions. A decision can then be taken as to whether the flats have to be ground further. This process must un-
der no circumstances be accelerated by increasing the infeed.
This procedure is also recommended if the machine is equipped with IGS top.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 317

Card-accessories
11.3.8.2 Prepare the machine for grinding the card flats.

Description Maintenance and grinding of card flats, Page 6/316
Preparatory work
– Switch off the feed roller.
– Wait approx. 20 minutes before switching off the machine so that all the installed flats are cleaned.
– Clean the machine thoroughly.
– Transport the grinding drum in the transport box to the vicinity of the card.
– Make ready the crane and all other supplies needed for the grinding operation.
– The grinding bearings for grinding the card flats are adjusted.
Switch the machine to the special operating mode for grinding the card flats
3
I II
2
4
– Turn the key switch (1) to the right.
– Remove the cover (3).
– Remove the gas pressure springs of the cover (2) and fold back the cover.
– Open the door (4) on the right-hand side of the machine.

Note: The safety switch for the door is no longer activated.
Open the mechanically secured doors to the feed and delivery (right-hand machine side, normal
operation), Page 2/36
– If the IGS top is available, the corresponding electrical connections should be disconnected and secured.
– Swing out the electrical control cabinet (5) as far as possible.
6 / 318 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card-accessories
Prepare the card flats drive for grinding.

– In the data mask, enable the card flats for grinding.
81.3, Page 2/112
– Use the data screen to set the speed of the card flats to 0.25 m/min.
81.3, Page 2/112
11.3.8.3 Setting the tension of the belt for the card flats
Sequence of steps
2 3 4
1 1
6 6
5 5
– Move the tensioning devices (1) to the bottom position.
– Slightly loosen screws (2).
– Use a screwdriver to force the deflection components (4) up as far as possible.
– Tighten screws (3) again.

During the grinding procedure, the incoming card flats (6) can no longer rub against the protective
plate (5).
Tasks following grinding of the card flats

– Return the deflection components (4) to their original positions.
– Re-set the belt tension using the tensioning device (1).

31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 319

Card-accessories
11.3.8.4 Preparing and installing the grinding drum

6
4
7
10
Sequence of steps
– Prerequisite: Switch on the grinding drum 60 minutes before use to allow it to warm up.
Set the grinding drum (5) to the index «10» before assembling it.
– Using the crane (4), lift the grinding drum (5) into its prepared position.
Note: Der montierte Stift (6) im Lager der Schleifwalze (5) muss seitlich sowohl am Schleiflager (8) als
auch am Stift (7) anliegen.
– Do not fasten the grinding drum yet.
6 / 320 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card-accessories
11.3.8.5 Adjust the grinding roll parallel to the card flats

3 4
2
6
6
1
7 1
5 10
6
2
Preparation
– Einen Kardendeckel (2) zwischen den Markierungen (4) , gemäss Bild, unter die Führungsplatte (3) stel-
len.
– The marking (5) of the grinding drum (1) must be on the index «10».
– Assemble the upper part of the bearing and tighten it with the screw (6).
Note: Only use the screws (6) as supplied.
Carry out the following work on both sides:

– Using the adjusting screws (8), adjust the distance between the grinding roll (1) and the card flat (2) as
exactly parallel as possible.
Distance between grinding 0.15 mm
roll and card flats
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 321

Card-accessories
11.3.8.6 Kardendeckel egalisieren

Mit dem Egalisieren werden neu garnierte Kardendeckel vor- und nach der Aufnahme der Produktion in ein
enges Toleranzfeld gebracht.
Sind keine geeigneten Bearbeitungsmaschinen für neugarnierte Kardendeckel vorhanden, muss der
Kardendeckelsatz auf der Maschine egalisiert werden. Ebenso nach 10...15 Tonnen produzierten
Kardenband nach dem Ersatz der Kardendeckelgarnituren.
Setting aim: Die Kardendeckel so wenig wie möglich egalisieren. Abgenützte Garniturnadeln werden
geschärft (geschliffen).
Preparatory work
– All preparations are carried out.
– Switch the grinding drum on 60 minutes before putting it into service.
Kardendeckel egalisieren:
– Use the key (2) to start the drive for the card
flats.
– Use the keys (3) to set the speed of the card
flats.
81.3, Page 2/112
2 1 – Use the micrometer screw gauge (4) to ad-
vance the grinding roller (1) slowly until grind-
3 ing noises can be heard or grinding sparks are
visible.
Note: Die Schleifwalze (1) egalisiert in den
meisten Fällen zuerst nur auf einer Seite eines
Kardendeckels.
1
10
6 / 322 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card-accessories
Correction:
– Use the screw (5) to gently lift the grinding
1 roller (1) on the side which is grinding, until
grinding sparks are no longer visible and/or
grinding noises can no longer be heard.
Note: Always move the grinding drum (1)
away on the side which is grinding.
– Use the micrometer screw gauge (4) to

advance the grinding roller (1) slowly once
more, until grinding noises can again be heard
or grinding sparks are again visible.
1 – Um das Schleifbild zu beurteilen mindestens

20 Kardendeckel egalisieren. Bei guter Beur-
teilung mit der Schleifwalze alle Kardendeckel
4 in zwei Umgängen egalisieren.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 323

Card-accessories
11.3.8.7 Grind card flats

IGS-top, Page 3/29
Once the grinding roller has been correctly adjusted, grinding is carried out for 1 to 2 rotations with a minimal
infeed. Following this, use the magnifying glass to check the grinding and, if necessary, repeat the cycle.
Preparatory work
– All preparations are carried out.
– Switch the grinding drum on 60 minutes before putting it into service.
Grind card flats:

– Use the key (2) to start the drive for the card
flats.
– Use the keys (3) to set the speed of the card
flats.
81.3, Page 2/112
2 1 – Use the micrometer screw gauge (4) to ad-
vance the grinding roller (1) slowly until grind-
3 ing noises can be heard or grinding sparks are
visible.
Note: In most cases the grinding roll (1) ini-
tially grinds only one side of a card flat.
1
10
6 / 324 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card-accessories
Correction:
– Use the screw (5) to gently lift the grinding
1 roller (1) on the side which is grinding, until
grinding sparks are no longer visible and/or
grinding noises can no longer be heard.
Note: Always move the grinding drum (1)
away on the side which is grinding.
– Use the micrometer screw gauge (4) to

advance the grinding roller (1) slowly once
more, until grinding noises can again be heard
or grinding sparks are again visible.
1 – Repeat this procedure until grinding sparks are

visible on both the left- and right-hand sides
of the machine, or until grinding noises can be
4 heard.
Note: Je nachdem wie hohl die Körper der
Kardendeckel gefertigt sind, sind dann auch
in der Mitte der Kardendeckel Schleiffunken
5 sichtbar. (Dieses Schleifbild verstärkt sich je
mehr die Schleifwalze zugestellt wird, oder
nach mehrmaligem Schleifen der Garnituren.)
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 325

Card-accessories
11.3.9 Service and grind licker-in
11.3.9.1 Tools
Purpose: Maintaining the quality requirements through correct treatment of the wires
The service-life of the doffer wires can be longer than that of the cylinder wires.
The doffer is only ground when it loses the fleece or if malfunctions are observed at the fibre transfer.
Do not grind out the doffer wires. That means that the grinding drum is put away 15 seconds after the last ad-
vance. All the teeth of the wire must however be lightly ground. In total the grinding procedure lasts for ap-
prox. 2 to 5 minutes.
The grinding drum must be correctly ground off and clean so that the grinding pressure can be correctly as-
sessed as based on the grinding sparks. Spark length approx. 20 to 40 mm.
11.3.9.3 Preparing the doffer for grinding

Sequence of steps
– Prepare the machine in the same way as for the grinding of the cylinder.
6 / 326 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card-accessories
11.3.9.4 Assemble the grinding bracket for grinding the doffer

Fitting and setting the grinding brackets

– Fit and set the grinding brackets in the same way as for the grinding of the cylinder.
Note: In contrast to the setting procedure for the grinding of the cylinder, the brackets are not offset relat-
ive to one another.
Positioning the grinding brackets
4
1
3
4 1
~ 34 mm
~ 5 mm
– Screw together the grinding bracket (1) with the supports (2).
Grinding brackets for doffers and cylinders, Page 6/304, 6/326
– Complete the presetting of the adjusting screws (4) per the figure.
Note: Move the supports (2) upwards on both sides until the supports (2) contact the pins (3).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 327

Card-accessories
11.3.9.5 Before grinding, adjust the parallel setting of the installed grinding drum to
the doffer
Sequence of steps
– Prerequisite: The grinding drum (3) is
installed.
Position the micrometer screw gauge (2).
Position of the micrometer screw gauge
for adjusting the grinding
bracket, Page 6/301
4
2 12 – Fasten the grinding bracket cover (4) firmly.
3 5 Note: Only use the screws (6) as supplied.
– Set the grinding drum to «index 12».
–
12
Using the micrometer screw gauge (2) set the

grinding drum provisionally at the narrowest
place to 0.15 mm from the doffer wire.
– Using the adjusting screws (1) and (5) set the

grinding drum as parallel as possible to the
doffer wire.
Adjusting screws for the grinding
1 bracket, Page 6/300
– To achieve this, the distance must be set al-

ternatingly using first the micrometer screw
gauge (2) then corrected it with the adjusting
screws (1) and (5).
6 / 328 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Card-accessories
11.3.9.6 Grinding the doffer

IMPORTANT
Description Service and grind licker-in , Page 6/326
Sequence of steps
– Prerequisite: Switch the grinding drum on
60 minutes before putting it into service. The
grinding drum (1) must be correctly ground off
and perfectly clean so that the grinding pres-
sure can be correctly assessed from the grind-
ing sparks.
2 1 All doors must be closed.
– Enable the doffer for grinding operation via the
3 data screen.
81.2, Page 2/112
– Actuate the doffer key (2).

1
– Adjust the delivery speed with the PLUS or
MINUS key (3).
Delivery speed for doffer 150.0 m / min.
grinding procedure
4
81.2, Page 2/112
IMPORTANT
The wires can be abraded by an incor-
5 rect positioning.
Always move the rotating grinding
roller (6) away on the grinding side
first, using the adjustment screw (1).
6 Subsequently advance it again with
the micrometer screw gauge (10).
– Using the micrometer screw gauge (4) adjust
the grinding drum until a few grinding sparks
are visible.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 329

Card-accessories
Sequence of steps
IMPORTANT
1 The wires can be abraded by an incor-
rect positioning.
Always move the rotating grinding
roller (6) away on the grinding side
first, using the adjustment screw (1).
Subsequently advance it again with
the micrometer screw gauge (10).
– The grinding drum (1) grinds in most cases on
one side of the doffer first.
– Correction:
– Screw the micrometer screw gauge (6) back
4
on the side being ground until no sparks are
visible.
advance the grinding drum (1) until sparks are
again visible.
– Repeat this procedure until grinding sparks are

visible over the entire width of the doffer.
6
6 / 330 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Control technique
12 Control technique
12.1 Basic module of the control system
12.1.1 Description
Structure
Earthing clip (1): The control unit must be connected to the earth of the machine via the earthing clip.
Reset and power supply buttons (2): These two protected buttons are only used for RIETER test purposes.
Do not press.
Power supply unit (3): The power supply unit is internally fused. In the event of overload or incorrect connec-
tion, the device will not sustain any damage.
USB ports (4): USB (universal serial bus) 2.0 host controller with 2 ports. Only USB1 can be used.
Ethernet port (5): Ethernet port, from communications line with higher-level data system (SPIDERweb)
COM interface (6): VARIOspinData interface (115,200 baud)
Status of LED (7): If the LED is lit green, then the power supply is OK.
Operating mode switch (8) (hexadecimal switch):Allocation of an operating mode via machine-specific switch
positions.
Compact Flash card (9): The Compact Flash card contains the machine software (program), and remains
permanently in the control unit.
Bus connector (10): CAN bus connector and Powerlink connector.
Address switch for interface module (11): Node number for the CAN bus.
Battery (12): Saved data is retained, if the main switch is off.
Additional module (13): Availability dependent on machine-specific requirements.
COM interface (14): Interface used by Rieter for test purposes (9,600 baud).
Method of operation
• The machine control unit controls all the machine functions.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 331

Control technique
12.1.2 Performing a cold start for the control unit

Control unit, Page 3/33
Description Basic module of the control system, Page 6/331
A cold start may be considered, if the control unit no longer works correctly.
The control unit is reset to its original state following a cold start.All of the entered values are stored in the
Compact Flash card and will not be lost. All battery-supported data will be lost.
Sequence of steps
– Switch off the main switch.
– Set the (x16) and (x1) address switches.
Switch position for cold start
x16 F
x1 F
– Switch on the main switch and then switch it

off again after about 20 seconds.
– Set the (x16) and (x1) address switches for

normal operation.
Switch positions for normal operation
x16 0
x1 1
– Switch on the main switch again.

The battery-supported data are lost.
6 / 332 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Control technique
12.1.3 Control system battery
12.1.3.1 Change battery of control system

Removing the battery from the control system, Page 6/333
Mounting the battery in the control system, Page 6/333
12.1.3.2 Removing the battery from the control system

WARNING
Note: The data (machine settings, shift data) in the data memory are lost if the battery is changed in voltage-
free state!
Sequence of steps
– Prerequisite: Before starting work on elec-
tronic components, the person undertaking
the task must make sure that static electricity
is discharged, by touching the machine earth
cable or other earth connections.Otherwise,
the components may be destroyed.
Use a screwdriver to remove the cover (1) of
the battery.
– Pull the pullout strip (2), to release the battery

(3) from the holder.
12.1.3.3 Mounting the battery in the control system

Note: Do not handle the battery with non-insulated tools. Risk of short-circuit!
Note: The battery may only be touched by hand at the front ends.
Note: Used lithium batteries fall into the category of hazardous waste, and must therefore be disposed of in
an appropriate manner.
Sequence of steps
– In order that the battery can be removed at a
later stage, the pullout strip (2) must be cor-
rectly placed in the battery compartment.
– Insert the new lithium battery (3) into the bat-

tery compartment, observing the correct polar-
ity.
– Re-attach the cover.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 333

Control technique
12.1.4 PCMCIA data storage in the control system
12.1.4.1 Inserting Compact Flash card into the control unit (loading PLC software)
WARNING
After a replacement of the control unit, or a change of software, the Compact Flash card for the corresponding
system must be inserted into the control unit.
Since the Compact Flash card contains the software for the corresponding machine, it remains in the control
unit permanently.
Removing Compact Flash card

– Stop the machine.
– Switch OFF main switch .

– Use a blunt object (1), such as the end of a
pencil, to activate the ejection button.
Note: Do not use any sharp objects.
The Compact Flash card (2) will be
ejected.
Installing Compact Flash card

– Prerequisite: The main switch is off
Insert the Compact Flash card (2) into the control unit slot.
Note: With the new software the machine-specific settings are no longer available.
– Turn on the main switch again.

A cold start is performed automatically.
6 / 334 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Control technique

12.2.1 Identifying the frequency converter
The Rieter part number (1) on the attached adhes-
ive label (E) must agree with the part number of the
corresponding device in the electrical document-
ation. The model designation (2) must agree with
the designation on the manufacturer’s label found
on the side of the frequency converter (3).
3
XX0V 3 Phase x.xx kW

2 Model: xxxxxxxxxxxx
1 Rieter: xxxx xxxx
Xxxxxxxxxx
12.2.2 Regenerating the replacement frequency converter

DANGER
A discharging time period of at least 10 minutes is required after the machine has been switched
off via the main switch, since the intermediate circuit continues to be supplied with power (inter-
mediate circuit capacitor).
Failure to comply with the 10-minute wait duration can lead to severe injury or even death.
During the discharging period, there must be no contact with any component which may still be
being supplied with power.
The LED (CHARGE) lights up, all the while the intermediate circuit voltage exceeds 50 V.
Once the LED goes out, wait a further five minutes or else use a measuring instrument to check
whether or not the intermediate circuit voltage has dropped below 30 V.
Trained, competent personnel only may carry out work on the control cabinet and on electrical
installations.
The replacement frequency converters held in storage must be connected to a mains supply for at least one
hour every six months. This allows the internal component to regenerate themselves.
Setting aim: The replacement equipment can be put into service at any time.
Sequence of steps
– Remove the frequency converter.
Removing the frequency converter, Page 6/337
– Install the frequency converter.

Installing the frequency inverter, Page 6/339
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 335

Control technique
12.2.3 Frequency converter
Structure
Frequency converters with powers of up to 15 kW
are available from the T1000V model range.
4 Distinct versions differ in their size and shape.The
principal components of all versions are identical,
2
however.
1 Power unit
2 Operator interface panel
3 Cover
4 Bolts
1 3
5 Cable ducts
12.2.3.2 Replacing the frequency converter

Removing the frequency converter, Page 6/337
Installing the frequency inverter, Page 6/339
Note: Frequency converters are subject to natural aging effects. Frequency converters are to be replaced
at regular intervals with inspected replacement equipment. Doing so effectively prevents equipment failure.
Authorized RIETER Service Personnel only may service frequency converters. For replacement equipment /
service: Please contact your nearest RIETER Service Center or RIETER Parts.
6 / 336 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Control technique
12.2.3.3 Removing the frequency converter

WARNING
Description Frequency converter, Page 6/336

Note: The actual housing to be removed may differ from that illustrated.
Removing the power unit cover
1 4
3 3
2
– Loosen the bolt (1) and remove the cover (2).
– Press together the latches (4) of the cover (3).
– Remove the cover (3) in the direction of the arrow.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 337

Control technique
Removing modules
– Gently press together the latches (6) on the
module (5).
The latches (6) are released from the
holes (7).
– Remove the module (5).
6
7
6 7
5
Read off the value from the charge indicator and make intermediate circuit measurements (prior to
disconnecting the cable)
– Check whether or not the LED (CHARGE) (8)
lights up.
Note: Depending on the version, the LED may
be located at a different place on the frequency
converter.
The LED will be lit if the voltage for the
intermediate circuit still exceeds 50 VDC.
– Once the LED (CHARGE) (8) goes out, wait a
further five minutes.
8 – Measure the residual voltage between the ter-
CHARGE
minals with the designations (-) and (+1) (inter-

mediate circuit).
Note: Depending on the version, these termin-
als may appear at different places among the
set of power terminals.
– No further tasks may be carried out until the

residual voltage of the intermediate circuit has
dropped to below 30 VDC.
Disconnect the cable

– Check the lettering on the clamps and cables. Ensure that the cables can be properly connected again
when installing.
– Disconnect the power and control terminals.
– Disconnect the ground terminal.
– Do not pull the cables out of the cable bushings.

Note: The cable bushings remain in the control cabinet of the machine when the frequency converter is
replaced.
6 / 338 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Control technique
– Loosen the four retaining screws and remove the frequency converter.
12.2.3.4 Installing the frequency inverter

WARNING
Identifying the frequency converter

– Before making changes, check that the device is available.
Identifying the frequency converter, Page 6/335
– Load the device accordingly.

– Configure the device for mounting in the machine.

– Carry out adaptations to the cooling system.

– Install the device. Proceed in the reverse order as followed on removal.

Note: Use toothed lock washers to ensure the earth connection for the heat sink.
Connect cable
– Proceed in the reverse order as followed on removal.
– Connect the control, power and earth cables following the cable designators.
Note: Take note of the electric manual.
– Observe the regulations concerning the connection of the earth cable.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 339

Control technique
12.2.3.5 Loading the frequency inverter

The device has to be equipped according to the version.
CAN module (SI-S3/V)
1
2
3
4 5
7
2 3
4 6
– Gently press together the latches (2) on both sides of the module (1).
– Press on the module (1) until the latches (2) snap into place in the holes (3)
Connecting the earth cable for the CAN module

– Prerequisite: For all versions, the earth cable (4) linking the CAN module and the frequency converter
has to be kept as short as possible.
Attach the earth cable (4) to the earth terminal (5) of the CAN module.
– Attach the earth cable (4) to the earth terminal (6) of the frequency converter.
Note: For all versions, the earth cable has to be arranged so that any covers can be closed properly.
– Insert the connector (7) of the CAN bus cable.
– Fit the covers (8)
6 / 340 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Control technique
12.2.3.6 Configuring the frequency inverter

DANGER
A discharging time period of at least 10 minutes is required after the machine has been switched
off via the main switch, since the intermediate circuit continues to be supplied with power (inter-
mediate circuit capacitor).
Failure to comply with the 10-minute wait duration can lead to severe injury or even death.
During the discharging period, there must be no contact with any component which may still be
being supplied with power.
The LED (CHARGE) lights up, all the while the intermediate circuit voltage exceeds 50 V.
Once the LED goes out, wait a further five minutes or else use a measuring instrument to check
whether or not the intermediate circuit voltage has dropped below 30 V.
Trained, competent personnel only may carry out work on the control cabinet and on electrical
installations.
The frequency converter is configured using the

Off On V I (S1...S4) switches on the control card.
S2 S1
AI PTC
S4
SINK (NPN)
S3
SOURCE (PNP)
Setting the S1 / S2 / S3 / S4 DIP switches

– Set the S1 switch.
S1 switch position:
U10 frequency converter I
U12 frequency converter, I
CBA
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 341

Control technique

S2 switch position:
U10 frequency converter On
U12 frequency converter, On
CBA
– Set the S3 switch. (Digital inputs of the frequency converter.)

S3 switch position:
U10 frequency converter SINK (NPN)
U12 frequency converter, SINK (NPN)
CBA

S4 switch position:
U10 frequency converter AI
12.2.3.7 Adjusting to the cooling system

Adjust the frequency inverter to the cooling system which is fitted in the machine.
Heat transfer plate

– Use a spatula to remove old heat-transfer compound residue from the heat-transfer plates.
Note: Remove the last traces using a solvent.
– Check whether or not the transfer plate is damaged. Carefully file off or grind off any local unevenness.
– Prerequisite: Before installing the device:

Coat the transfer plate with heat-transfer compound, evenly and over its entire surface.
Note: Use a small paint roller instead of a paintbrush.
Requirements for the heat conducting paste
Composition Silicone-free
Thermal conductivity 0.9 - 1.0 W/mK
6 / 342 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Control technique
12.2.3.8 Setting the T1000V frequency converter

ALM REV
1 DRV FOUT
6
LO
ESC
RE
2 RESET ENTER 5
RUN STOP
3 4
After a frequency converter is replaced, it is necessary to set the baud and the node address.
Preparing to make the settings

– Switch the machine to test mode.
80.1, Page 2/111
– Select the data screen for the frequency converter test.

84.2, Page 2/122
– From the data screen, activate the test and select the required frequency converter.
– Press the green start button on the machine operating unit.

The selected frequency converter is now supplied with power.
Authorisation setup (for all frequency converters)

– Press and hold key (4) or (6) until the display (1) for the parameters (PAr) appears.
– Confirm the selection using key (5).
– The parameter (A1-01) flashes on the display (1).
– Press key (5) several times until the parameter value is displayed.
– Use key (2) to move from one digit to the next (4) and key (6) to set the value («0002»).

Note: On the display, («End») lights up briefly, before the set value («0002») and finally (A1-01) are in-
dicated.
The authorisation to alter any parameter value has now been set up.
Initialisation (for all frequency converters)

– Prerequisite: Authorisation has been set up and (A1-02) flashes.
Use key (6) to increase the last digit on the display (1) to («3»).
– Use keys (2) (4) and (6) to enter the value («2220»).
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 343

Control technique

Note: Once the initialisation process is complete, (A1-03) is displayed again.
Communication parameter: Select the “Do not initialise” setting

Use key (2) to move to the letter (A) on the display (1).
– Use key (6) to change the letter (A) to an (F).
– Use key (2) to select the parameter (F6-08).
– Use key (2) to select the last digit.
– Use keys (4) and (6) to set the value («00»).
Setting the baud

– Use keys (4) and (6) to enter the value («0»).

Note: As a result of («0») being entered, the search for the baud value occurs automatically.
Setting the node address (dependent on frequency converter selected)

– Prerequisite: Read off the node address of the relevant frequency converter from the electric circuit dia-
gram. Authorisation has been set up and (A1-02) flashes.
– Use keys (4) and (6) to enter the node address.

Note: The node address is displayed on the respective data screen.
84.2, Page 2/122
6 / 344 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Control technique
Einstellung fehlgeschlagen (Error)

– Es kommt vor, dass die Einstellungen mit dem beschriebenen Vorgang fehlschlagen. In diesem Fall
gemäss der Anleitung im Elektroschema vorgehen.
Finishing
– After the settings have been made, select “Automatic mode” from data screen 80.1.
The machine enables the ready-to-operate state. “Ready to start” appears on the status line of the
display.
12.3 Bus systems

12.3.1 Terminating resistor for CAN bus
12.3.1.1 Set or wire the terminators.

Bus system, Page 3/33
If the correct procedure has been carried out, there should be no signal reflections in the bus line.
In order for the CAN bus to function correctly, the first connection (2) and the last connection (5) of the bus
line must each be fitted with a terminator (120 Ω). The electrical components, where the terminators are fit-
ted, connected or wired, are given in the electric circuit diagram.
Sequence of steps
– Prerequisite: The CAN connector of the interface module is the first CAN bus connection.
A terminator (1) must be fitted at the CAN connector (3) of the interface module.
– A terminator must be fitted, connected or wired at the last electrical component (4) of the bus line (5).
Note: A terminator may be contained in the last component, or else must be mounted. Consult the elec-
trical documentation.
Finishing
– Check whether or not a terminator has only been fitted, set or wired at the first and last connections.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 345

Control technique
12.4 External I/O card

12.4.1 CAN IO module CX408
12.4.1.1 Checking CAN I/O module CX408

Use the LEDs to test the CAN I/O modules CX408 and their inputs and outputs
You can use the 16 LEDs to test the status of the inputs and outputs.
– The 16 LEDs indicate the state of either the
inputs or the outputs. Use the switch (1) to
change over the LEDs. If LED (3) lights up
green, the 16 LEDs are indicating the state of
the inputs. If LED (3) lights up yellow, the 16
LEDs are indicating the state of the outputs.
– Use LED (2) to check whether the module is

working properly during operation.
– If the LED is green, the module is working

properly.
– If the LED flashes yellow, the supply voltage of

the outputs is incorrect.
– If the LED lights up yellow, the outputs are de-

fective.
Action
Check of the LED indicates a fault.
– Possibly replace module or feed and check the wiring.
6 / 346 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Control technique
12.4.1.2 Set the CAN node address of the CAN I/O module CX408
These two rotary switches are used to set the baud for the CAN bus and the node address for each module.
Sequence of steps
– Set the (SW0) and (SW1) rotary switches.
Note: The correct setting is important, since
otherwise the connection to the control unit will
not function .
CAN node address
SW0 See electric circuit diagram
SW1 See electric circuit diagram
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 347

Control technique
6 / 348 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Operating and display elements
13 Operating and display elements

13.1 Operator panel
13.1.1 Key strip of the operator panel
13.1.1.1 Pull out the keyboard strip

WARNING
Sequence of steps
– Remove all plugs and connectors for the con-
trol unit.
– Loosen all bolts (1).
– Remove the control unit from the baseplate.
– Pull out keyboard strip (2).
13.1.1.2 Insert keyboard strip

Sequence of steps
– Mark the position that is 23 mm from the end of
the keyboard strip (2).
Note: Note the positions of the openings (4).
– Bend the keyboard strip (2) through 90° at the

marked position
– Insert the keyboard strip (2) into the opening

(5).
Finishing
– After assembly, re-attach the plugs and connectors in a correct manner.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 349

Operating and display elements
6 / 350 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Torque standard
14 Torque standard
Screw dimension Strength class torque Clamping strength
M4 8.8 3.1 Nm 3.9 kN
10.9 4.5 Nm 5.7 kN
12.9 5.3 Nm 6.7 kN
M5 8.8 6.1 Nm 6.4 kN
10.9 8.9 Nm 8.3 kN
12.9 10.4 Nm 10.9 kN
M6 8.8 10.4 Nm 9.0 kN
10.9 15.5 Nm 13.2 kN
12.9 18.0 Nm 15.4 kN
M8 8.8 25.0 Nm 16.5 kN
10.9 37.0 Nm 24.2 kN
12.9 43.0 Nm 28.5 kN
M10 8.8 51.0 Nm 26.0 kN
10.9 75.0 Nm 38.5 kN
12.9 87.0 Nm 45.0 kN
M12 8.8 87.0 Nm 38.5 kN
10.9 130.0 Nm 56.0 kN
12.9 150.0 Nm 66.0 kN
M16 8.8 215.0 Nm 72.0 kN
10.9 310.0 Nm 106.0 kN
12.9 370.0 Nm 124.0 kN
M20 8.8 430.0 Nm 117.0 kN
10.9 620.0 Nm 166.0 kN
12.9 720.0 Nm 194.0 kN
M24 8.8 740.0 Nm 168.0 kN
10.9 1080.0 Nm 239.0 kN
12.9 1240.0 Nm 280.0 kN
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 6 / 351

Torque standard
6 / 352 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Keyword index
Keyword index
Page
‘Fault’ LED 2/27
A
Abnahmevorrichtung, Einstellungen 3/30
Accident Prevention 3/46
Acknowledging fault or warning 2/54
Activating the card flats drive (for setting the prox- 6/176
imity switch)
Activating the card flats drive (setting, grinding) 6/174
Adapt the position of the lower delivery roll 6/213
Adjust calender rolls 6/283
Adjust draft for take-off roll / delivery rolls 6/210
Adjust feed trough. (minimum distance) 6/45
Adjust grinding brush parallelism to card flats (de- 6/203
fault setting)
Adjust grinding pressure 6/205
Adjust magnetic limit switch B10 6/269
Adjust magnetic limit switch B8 (default setting) 6/271
Adjust safety switch and door locks 3/31
Adjust sliver cutting, production and material de- 6/277
pendent adjustments
Adjust sliver cutting, time at which the piston rod 6/276
extends
Adjust the card flats 3/29, 6/185
Adjust the default setting for the measuring eccen- 6/118
ter for the tongue
Adjust the feed plate between the card trunk and 6/80
the licker-in
Adjust the grinding bearing for grinding the cylinder 6/307
Adjust the grinding drum 6/297
Adjust the grinding roll parallel to the card flats 6/321
Adjust the grinding stone if the electrical magnet 6/150
was replaced.
Adjust the lap weight by the position of the card 6/27
trunk wall
Adjust the light barrier at the card trunk 6/29
Adjust the pressure regulator 6/250
Adjust the proximity switch for monitoring the cylin- 6/104
der speed
Adjust the proximity switch for monitoring the licker- 6/86
in speed
Adjust the proximity switch for monitoring the 6/177
smooth running of the card flats.
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 7/1

Keyword index
Keyword index
Page
Adjust the proximity switch to monitor the doffer 6/218

speed
Adjust the retaining plates for the card flats 6/315
Adjust the spacing between the can table to the 6/259
cover sheet
Adjust the vacuum for the card suction 6/26
Adjust the vacuum for the exhaust air (open trans- 6/24
fer)
Adjust transducer in feed 6/65
Adjusting accelerating and isolating valves 6/36
Adjusting door lock and safety switch 6/248
Adjusting magnetic limit switch B16 6/270
Adjusting screws for the grinding bracket 6/300
Adjusting suction opening 6/95
Adjusting the acceleration flap 6/35
Adjusting the blow-in device for the sliver 6/236
Adjusting the carding elements in the licker-in 6/94
range
Adjusting the cylinder lower section 6/114
Adjusting the disc rollers 6/232
Adjusting the distance between cross-apron and 6/230
disc roller supports
Adjusting the distance between delivery rollers and 6/225
cross apron
Adjusting the distance between feed roller and 6/63
licker-in
Adjusting the distance between the cross aprons 6/226
Adjusting the distance from the tongue to the cylin- 6/117
der
Adjusting the doffer 6/216
Adjusting the dressing diamond 6/293
Adjusting the fleece bridge 6/215
Adjusting the gas pressure spring 6/228
Adjusting the grinding bracket during grinding 6/302
Adjusting the licker-in to the cylinder 6/82
Adjusting the limit switch for the hood 6/285
Adjusting the magnetic limit switches B9 6/268
Adjusting the position of the tongue 6/116
Adjusting the positioning lever for the spinning can 6/262
Adjusting the pressure between the disc rollers 6/234
Adjusting the pressure of the stripping blade 6/221
Adjusting the production speed of the feeder ma- 6/21
chine
Adjusting the proximity switch for monitoring the 6/54
r.p.m. of the opening roller
7/2 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Keyword index
Keyword index
Page
Adjusting the proximity switch for the delivery 6/222, 6/245

speed
Adjusting the sliver funnel 6/235
Adjusting the throttle valves for the pneumatic cylin- 6/272
der of the can trolley
Adjusting the transport fan 6/21
Adjusting to the cooling system 6/342
Adjustments for start-up, after a replacement of 3/29
card flats or grinding brush
Air ratios for waste removal 1/40
ALM LED 2/25
Altering the cylinder r.p.m. 6/101
Assemble the grinding bracket for grinding the dof- 6/327
fer
B
Bandablage, Einstellungen 3/35
Bandablage, Teile wechseln 3/36
Bandregulierung, Einstellung aller Elemente im 3/32
Prozess
BASIC display key 2/18, 2/23
Battery 3/33
Bedieneinheit, Folie mit den Symbolen der 3/34
Maschinentasten (Tastaturstreifen)
Bedieneinheit, Helligkeit der Anzeige (Display) 3/34
Before grinding, adjust the parallel setting of the in- 6/308
stalled grinding drum to the cylinder
Before grinding, adjust the parallel setting of the in- 6/328
stalled grinding drum to the doffer
Blow room 3/14
Browsing in the same masks 2/60
Browsing lists 2/61
Bus-System, Einstellungen 3/33
Button for activating can change 2/15
Button for starting production (card chute) 2/16
Button for starting production (doffer at creep 2/16
speed)
Button for starting production (doffer at high speed) 2/16
C
Calibrating the distance measuring system in the 6/241
delivery
CAN IO-Modulen CX408 3/33
Cancelling the password authorisation 2/58
Card chute 3/9
Card trunk settings 3/18
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 7/3

Keyword index
Keyword index
Page
Carding system (card trunk and card) 3/14

CBA man-made fibres and mixtures: Belt pulley “C” 3/48
and distance between windings “X” dependent on
the can diameter
CBA, cotton: Belt pulley “C” and distance between 3/48
windings “X” dependent on the can diameter
CBA: Change gear “H” depends on the production 3/48
CBA: Cleaning the area of the calender rollers 4/18, 4/41
Change gear WE1 Draft (VE1) between the deliv- 3/48
ery rolls in the card truck and the feed rolls of the
card
Change gear “H”: Production more than 120 kg/h, 3/51
draft “V” between the pulley rolls of the card and
the calender rolls of the coiler (sliver deposit)
Change gear “H”: Production up to 120 kg/h, draft 3/51
“V” between the pulley rolls of the card and the cal-
ender rolls of the coiler (sliver deposit)
Change pulley WE4 (licker-in drive) and change 3/49
pulley WT (cylinder drive): Draft (VE4) between
licker-in and cylinder
Change pulley WT: Cylinder speeds 3/47
Change the language 2/54
Change the licker-in speed 6/83
Changing and tightening the drive tape for the can 6/273
trolley
Changing passwords 2/57
Changing spinning cans 2/45
Changing the distance from the sliver filling to the 6/260
spinning can
Changing the prescribed service life of the cylinder 6/139
clothing
Changing the r.p.m. of the opening roller 6/55
Check and clean all suction points 4/15, 4/26
Check and clean the filter box. (only with separate 4/15, 4/25
disposal of the licker-in waste)
Check current consumption (with grinding brush 6/199
contact on the card flats clothing)
Check default setting 6/69
Check feed trough 6/68
Check feed trough (condition) 6/68
Check motors 4/16, 4/39
Check position transducer of sliver autoleveller (de- 6/240
livery section)
Check the position of the grinding brush 6/201
Check the position of the indicators for loading the 6/69
feed trough (default setting)
Check transducer in feed (function) 6/64
7/4 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Keyword index
Keyword index
Page
Checking CAN I/O module CX408 6/346

Clean belts and chains 4/16, 4/37
Clean card flats heads 4/16, 4/35
Clean clearer roller 4/16, 4/34
Clean condensation trap of pressure regulator 4/16, 4/38
Clean the area of the card flats return point 4/15, 4/30
Clean the cover trim below the feed roller 4/16, 4/32
Clean the cylinder interior 4/16, 4/34
Clean the filter box (only with separate disposal of 4/16, 4/31
the licker-in waste).
Clean the light barriers at the card trunk 4/15, 4/22
Clean window 2/46
Cleaning the carding profile 4/16, 4/33
Cleaning the cross-members 4/15, 4/26
Cleaning the delivery 4/15, 4/24, 4/28
Cleaning the delivery roller 4/15, 4/30
Cleaning the doffer 4/15, 4/29
Cleaning the feed duct 4/15, 4/21
Cleaning the fleece bridge 2/52
Cleaning the guiding tube of the can turntable 4/18, 4/41
Cleaning the housing of the frequency inverter 4/19, 4/44
Cleaning the machine left and right completely 4/15, 4/27
Cleaning the revolving plate and can plate drives 4/18, 4/42
Cleaning the stripping blade 2/50, 4/15, 4/24
Clearing material out of the suction duct 2/49
Close the doors to the feed and delivery (right-hand 2/37
machine side, normal operation)
Coiler 3/9
Coiler (sliver deposit) 1/32
Cold start 3/33
Cold start procedure 2/127
Compressed air consumption 1/38
Compressed air main supply (ring supply) 1/39
Configuration options 2/69, 2/103
Configuration shift selection 2/69, 2/104
Configuration shifts shift schedule 2/69, 2/104
Configuring the direct selection data mask 2/64
Configuring the frequency inverter 6/341
Configuring the IGS 6/139
Contact depth setting for the PW1 cleaning roller 6/163
with respect to the clothing of the card flats
Controlling and tensioning tooth belts 4/16, 6/20
Correcting the play in the worm gear 6/303
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 7/5

Keyword index
Keyword index
Page
Cotton/Blends: Opening roller speeds in the card 3/47

chute (50/60 Hz motor)
Counting neps 6/290
Cover trim 3/20
Cross apron (fleece collection) 3/30
Cyclo gearbox for drive of revolving coiler plate 4/18, 4/42
Cylinder r.p.m. as a function of the material 3/53
Cylinder sealing (tension tapes) 3/24
Cylinder speeds 1/32
D
Data display 2/24
Data relevant to quality 3/31
DATA-DISPLAY-key-back 2/17
"DATA-DISPLAY-key-forward 2/17
DATA/ENTER key 2/25
Default setting «10» of the grinding drum before 6/293
dressing
DELETE button 2/18, 2/22
Delete shifts 2/68, 2/83
Delivery funnel 6/284
Determining the grinding interval 6/291
DIRECT key, forward 2/19
DIRECT-key back 2/19
Directions concerning the settings of the proximity 6/247
switches
Discharging areas and carding profiles 3/24
Disconnecting the pneumatic hose connections 6/252
Dismantling 3/46
DISPLAY button, brighten 2/22
DISPLAY button, darken 2/21
Display main mask 2/61
Display of machine conditions, coiler (sliver de- 2/30
posit) CBA
Display the last data mask again 2/60
Display values and reset 2/49
Display, can change, coiler (sliver deposit) CBA 2/30
Displaying an individual data mask 2/59
Distance measuring system 3/31
Doffer 3/30
Doffer STOP button 2/16
Doffer unit 3/30
Down arrow key 2/25
Draft (VA2) between doffer and take-off roll 3/50
7/6 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Keyword index
Keyword index
Page
Draft (VA4 x VA5) between delivery rolls and disc 3/51

rolls
Draft (VA4) between delivery roller and cross apron 3/50
Draft (VA5) between cross apron and pulley rolls 3/50
Draft in feed 3/10
Drafts at delivery 3/10
Dressing the grinding drum 3/38, 6/294
DRV LED 2/26
E
Effects of the settings on the batt weight 3/18
Effects on an altered sliver weight 3/13
Einstellblätter, Grundeinstellungen bestimmen 3/11
Electrical data 1/41
EMERGENCY SHUT-DOWN button 2/11
Empty card trunk and card 2/45
Emptying AEROfeed 2/15, 2/46
Emptying card chute and card 2/15
END OF LIST key 2/21
Engaging the emergency stop 2/34
Ensuring straight running of the flat belt (system 6/147
with tension screws)
Enter password 2/55
ENTER-key 2/18, 2/19, 2/22
Entered values in data screens 2/63
ESC key 2/24
Evaluating card clothing edges 6/289
Events shifts 2/68, 2/82
Events total shifts 2/68, 2/83
Example of a message display 2/72
Executing test functions 2/65
F
Fastening the cylinder cover 6/105
Feed roll drive in the card trunk 4/17, 4/40
Feed roll drive in the licker-in unit 4/17, 4/40
Feed section of licker-in 3/21
Feed trough 3/20
Feed trough installation 6/67
Feed trough removal 6/67
Fitting rubber sealing profiles for flat belts 6/145
Fitting the mote knives 6/111
Fitting the tool used for subjecting card flats to load 6/184
FOUT LED 2/26
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 7/7

Keyword index
Keyword index
Page
Frequency inverter, no reaction 5/38

Frequenzumrichter, Bestückung 3/32
Frequenzumrichter, Konfiguration 3/32
G
General information on the IGS-top 3/29
Grind card flats 6/324
Grind cylinder clothing 2/70, 2/112
Grind doffer clothing 2/70, 2/112
Grinders 1/33
Grinding procedure for the drum 6/309
Grinding the cylinder (without IGS classic) 3/39
Grinding the doffer 3/40, 6/329
Grundeinstellungen Baumwolle und Mischungen 6/14
Baumwolle / Chemiefasern bis 120 kg/h Produktion
Grundeinstellungen Baumwolle und Mischungen 6/15
Baumwolle / Chemiefasern über 120 kg/h Produk-
tion
Grundeinstellungen Chemiefasern und Karden 6/16
Chemiefasern oder Baumwolle (Swing) bis 120
kg/h Produktion
Grundeinstellungen Chemiefasern und Karden 6/18
Chemiefasern oder Baumwolle (Swing) über 120
kg/h Produktion
H
HELP-key 2/20
I
Identifying the frequency converter 6/335
IGS classic replacing and adjusting components 3/26
IGS test run 6/141
IGS-classic, Datenbilder einstellen 3/25
Info current maintenance warnings 2/69, 2/93
Info current malfunctions 2/69, 2/92
Info current warnings 2/69, 2/92
Info delete lists 2/69, 2/93
Info delete lists extended 2/129, 2/140
Info events maintenance 2/69, 2/93
Info events occurred 2/68, 2/92
Info exception list 2/129, 2/139
Info Exception Statistik D95K 2/129, 2/140
Info overview digital inputs 2/129, 2/138
Info overview digital outputs 2/129, 2/139
Info statistic events 2/129, 2/139
Information CAN slaves 2/129, 2/138
7/8 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Keyword index
Keyword index
Page
Information converter ext. 2/129, 2/138

Information freq. converter 2/68, 2/91
Information machine 2/68, 2/91
Information on setting distances 6/106
Information on the IGS-top 6/202
Initiate change sequence 2/53
Insert keyboard strip 6/349
Insert lap into the feed roller 2/48
Inserting Compact Flash card into the control unit 6/334
(loading PLC software)
Inserting the guide plate 6/92
Install and adjust the deflector on the first card 6/23
trunk
Install and adjust the grinding bearings for the card 6/314
flats
Install card flats 6/181
Install carding elements in the cylinder area into the 6/134
supports
Install grinding brush 6/198
Install the compensation device for grinding the 6/312
card flats
Install the electromagnet 6/149
Install the feed roll in card trunk 6/40
Install the licker-in 6/82
Install the retaining clips of the card flats 6/196
Install the retaining plate for grinding the card flats 6/313
Installing carding profiles 6/121
Installing D95K-2 module 6/253
Installing opening roller and fallers 6/51
Installing rollers 6/221
Installing the belts for the card flats 6/171
Installing the carding flats unit 6/156
Installing the change gear «C» 6/265
Installing the change gear «H» 6/280
Installing the clearing roller 6/58
Installing the cover trim below the feed roller 6/61
Installing the cross-apron 6/224
Installing the distance measuring system in the de- 6/239
livery
Installing the doffer group 6/209
Installing the feed plate 6/44
Installing the frequency inverter 6/339
Installing the grinder 6/138
Installing the grinding stone 6/148
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 7/9

Keyword index
Keyword index
Page
Installing the guiding sled 6/143

Installing the licker-in unit 6/79
Installing the tension tape 6/98
Installing the tongue in the range of the cylinder 6/113
J
Jumping from the overview mask straight to a data 2/59
mask
K
Kardendeckel egalisieren 6/322
Kardendeckel schleifen 3/45
Kardendeckel, Einstellungen in diesem Bereich 3/27
Kardendeckelgarnituren egalisieren 3/42
Kardendeckelgarnituren egalisieren, Vorgang ohne 3/44
vorhandene Schleifmaschine
Kardendeckelgarnituren, Vorgang bei vorhandener 3/41
Schleifmaschine
Kardendeckelgarnituren, Vorgang ohne 3/43
vorhandene Schleifmaschine
Kardenzuteilung, Optimierung der Anlage nach 3/17
einer Veränderung
Kardenzuteilung, Vorbereitungen für die Veränder- 3/17
ung
Key-operated switch for the special operating mode 2/13
"Grind card flats"
L
LANGUAGE-key 2/23
LED automatic mode (production mode) 2/27
LED electric power supply 2/28
LED on the D95K-2 module 2/29
LED "status" on module CX408 does not light up 5/38
green
Licker-in 1/32
Licker-in speeds and draft 3/21
Licker-in unit 3/9
Lifting and moving the sliver deposit 6/255
LO-RE LED 2/25
Loading the frequency inverter 6/340
LOCAL/REMOTE key 2/25
Lubricate grinding roll (after dressing grinding roll) 4/19, 4/43
Lubricating blocks for the sliding surfaces of the 4/16, 6/194
card flats
Lubricating the cylinder bearings 4/16, 4/39
Lubricating the grinding drum 4/19, 4/44
7 / 10 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Keyword index
Keyword index
Page
M
Machine configuration 2/69, 2/102
Machine efficiency 1/29
Main switch 2/12
Maintenance clothings IGS 2/70, 2/109
Maintenance clothings machine I 2/70, 2/108
Maintenance clothings machine II 2/70, 2/109
Malfunction indicator card 2/31
Malfunction time 1/29
Man-made fibres: Opening roll speeds in card 3/47
trunk (50/60 Hz motor)
Marking the cylinder belt 6/99
Marking the licker-in belt 6/84
Materialtransport, Einstellungen 3/16
Measure current 6/199
Measures to be taken 3/46
Measuring the current value with the gauge 6/240
Measuring the vacuum for the transport air of the 6/25
waste transport
MENU overview key 2/20
MENU-key back 2/17
MENU-key forwards 2/17
MINUS-ENTER-key 2/20
MINUS-key 2/20
Monitoring the data relevant to quality 6/243
Mote knife setting (basic setting for licker-ins) 6/93
Mote knives 6/87
Mounting the battery in the control system 6/333
N
Navigating to a desired data mask with one key 2/60
Notes on the magnetic limit switches on the pneu- 6/267
matic cylinder
NUMBER button 2/21
Number of stoppages due to internal faults 1/30
Numerical keyboard 2/18
O
Open the mechanically secured doors to the feed 2/36
and delivery (right-hand machine side, normal op-
eration)
Open the secured doors in case of a power failure. 2/38
Opening the secured cylinder doors. (Right side of 2/35
the machine, normal operation)
Operating Materials 3/46
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 7 / 11

Keyword index
Keyword index
Page
Operating mode switchover 2/70, 2/111

Overview display on the operator panel 2/73
P
Parts provided to be used for a clothing change 6/288
Password change level 1 2/128
Password input 2/128
PASSWORD-CANCELING key 2/21
PASSWORD-INSERT key 2/21
Performing a cold start for the control unit 6/332
PLUS-ENTER-key 2/22
PLUS-key 2/21
PLUS/MINUS button 2/20
Pneumatik, Einstellungen 3/34
Pneumatik, Rohrkupplungen 3/34
POINTER button back 2/19
POINTER button forward 2/19
Poor feed of material into the feed plate 5/37
Poor filling of the card trunk 5/37
Position of the grinding brush 6/201
Position of the micrometer screw gauge for adjust- 6/301
ing the grinding bracket
Position transducer in the feed 3/20
Prepare the machine for grinding the card flats. 6/318
Preparing and installing the grinding drum 6/320
Preparing the cylinder cover for the setting proced- 6/107
ure
Preparing the cylinder for grinding 6/305
Preparing the doffer for grinding 6/326
Preparing the electric cylinder for mote knife setting 6/90
Pressure reduction valve 6/138
Prod. act. val. reg. Sga (batt) 2/129, 2/134
Prod. act. val. reg. sliver/deliv. 2/129, 2/132
Prod. act. values reg. chute/sag 2/129, 2/134
Prod.act.values work elements ext. 2/129, 2/135
Prodn.actual values batt graphic 2/129, 2/132
Production act.values work elements 2/68, 2/79
Production actual values, material 2/68, 2/78
Production current shift 2/68, 2/81
Production duration in production mode 1/30
Production efficiency 1/29
Production efficiency/MTBA 2/68, 2/79
Production last shifts 2/68, 2/82
Production set values 2/68, 2/75
7 / 12 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Keyword index
Keyword index
Page
Production set values extended 2/129, 2/130

Production setpoints options 2/68, 2/77
Production setpoints sliver test 2/68, 2/77
Production sort sliver set values 2/68, 2/76
Production total shifts 2/68, 2/82
Productive time in production mode 1/29
Pull out the keyboard strip 6/349
Pulley roll suction adjustment 6/231
Q
Q-data act. values card CV%..CV100 2/68, 2/84
Q-data act. values card spectrogram 2/68, 2/85
Q-Data actual values card A% 2/68, 2/84
Q-data set values card A% 2/68, 2/86
Q-data set values card CV% 2/68, 2/86
Q-data set values card spectrogr. 2/68, 2/88
Q-data set values CV% corrc. 2/68, 2/87
Q-data, act. val., card feed spec. 2/129, 2/137
Q-date actual values card feed CV 2/129, 2/137
Qual., target values, card, slubs 2/68, 2/89
Quality standards for compressor air 1/38
Quality, actual values, card, slubs 2/68, 2/85
R
Raising and installing the grinding drum 6/298
Read measured value from transducer. 6/64
Reflex light barrier for monitoring the suction of the 6/168
card flats waste
Regenerating the replacement frequency converter 4/19, 6/335
Remove and install parts in the card trunk 3/19
Remove any material deposited in the card trunk. 4/15, 4/23
Remove card flats deflection roll 6/173
Remove change carriage 6/266
Remove condensation trap 6/249
Remove the card flats 6/180
Remove the electromagnet 6/149
Remove the feed roll in card trunk 6/38
Remove the licker-in 6/81
Remove the retaining clips of the card flats 6/195
Removing and disassembling the cleaning unit for 6/157
the card flats
Removing blockages in the area of the feed roller 2/47, 4/15, 4/23
Removing carding profiles 6/119
Removing D95K-2 module 6/253
Removing parts 3/28
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 7 / 13

Keyword index
Keyword index
Page
Removing rollers 6/220

Removing the battery from the control system 6/333
Removing the belts for the card flats 6/170
Removing the blockage in the sliver funnel 2/51
Removing the card flats unit 3/27, 6/152
Removing the carding elements in the area of the 6/133
cylinder
Removing the change gear «C» 6/264
Removing the change gear «H» 6/280
Removing the cover trim below the feed roller 6/59
Removing the cross-apron 6/223
Removing the delivery rollers 6/57
Removing the distance measuring system in the 6/238
delivery
Removing the doffer group 6/208
Removing the feed plate 6/43
Removing the frequency converter 6/337
Removing the grinder 6/137
Removing the grinding stone 6/148
Removing the guiding sled 6/142
Removing the licker-in assembly 6/77
Removing the opening roller 6/49
Removing the rubber sealing profiles for the flat 6/144
belt
Removing the tension tape 6/97
Removing the tongue in the range of the cylinder 6/112
Replace module D95K 3/34
Reset configuration 2/130, 2/144
Resetting the EMERGENCY STOP button 2/35
Retaining clips 3/27
REV LED 2/26
Richtwerte Kardendeckelgeschwindigkeit 3/53
RUN key 2/24
RUN LED 2/24
S
Scheibenwalzen, Einstellungen 3/31
Schleifwalze, weitere Arbeiten 3/38
SCREEN-key back 2/22
SCREEN-key scroll forwards 2/22
Servicing, flats, clothing 2/70, 2/112
Set or wire the terminators. 6/345
Set the CAN node address of the CAN I/O module 6/347
CX408
7 / 14 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Keyword index
Keyword index
Page
Set the cleaning brush for the sliding surfaces of 6/193

the card flats
Setting (positioning) the solenoid plunger in the sig- 6/244
nal coil
Setting rollers and clearer roller in the doffing 6/211
device
Setting the brightness of the display 2/62
Setting the carding profiles at the doffer section 6/131
(man-made fibre)
Setting the coupling between the motor and the 6/167
cleaning brush
Setting the cylinder covers 6/108
Setting the cylinder covers beneath the card-flat 6/110
deflection space.
Setting the deflection for the card flats on the feed 6/192
and delivery sides
Setting the differential pressure switch 6/251
Setting the differential pressure switch (standard 6/32
setting)
Setting the distance between the disk rollers 6/233
Setting the distances between the carding profiles 6/123, 6/130
and the cylinder clothing (cotton)
Setting the extraction dimension for the mote 6/127
knives (cotton)
Setting the fill height 6/34
Setting the light sensors 6/256
Setting the load on the feed trough 6/46
Setting the mote knives (cotton) 6/125
Setting the mote knives (discharge opening) 6/88
Setting the stripping knife for the PW1 cleaning 6/164
roller
Setting the stripping knife for the PW2 stripping 6/165
roller
Setting the T1000V frequency converter 6/343
Setting the tension of the belt for the card flats 6/319
Settings 3/15
Settings around the cleaning unit 3/28
Settings card delivery 2/69, 2/96
Settings coiler I 2/69, 2/100
Settings date/time 2/69, 2/94
Settings extended 1 2/129, 2/141
Settings feed/cylinder 2/69, 2/97
Settings for cylinder covers 3/23
Settings for proximity switches 3/31
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 7 / 15

Keyword index
Keyword index
Page
Settings IGS 2/69, 2/99

Settings in the data masks 6/206
Settings in the tongue range 3/23
Settings languages 2/69, 2/95
Settings units/operation 2/69, 2/94
Sharpen card flats 3/29
Slackening and tightening the flat belt (system with 6/146
tension screws)
Speed of licker-in depends on change pulleys WE4 3/51
Speisemulde und Speisewalze, Klemmdistanz ver- 6/70
ändern. Distanz «B»
Speisemulde zu Speisewalze, Abstand einstellen 6/72
(Klemmdistanz «B» eingestellt)
Speisemulde, Belastung einstellen 6/75
Speisesystem, Einflüsse 3/16
Speisesystem, Einstellungen 3/16
Standard setting for the cleaning roller 6/161
START button on the operator interface panel 2/14
START OF LIST key 2/20
Start the feed system (UNIcontrol) 2/39
Starting production (doffer at creep speed) 2/43
Starting production (doffer at high speed) 2/44
Starting production (filling card chute) 2/44
Starting the machine 2/41
Steuerung, Einstellungen nach einem Ersatz 3/33
STOP button on the operator interface panel 2/14
STOP key 2/25
Stop machine 2/42
Stop the feed system (UNIcontrol) 2/40
Stopping the doffer 2/42
Suction duct below the pulley rolls 4/16, 4/33
Switch OFF the main switch and secure 2/34
SWITCH/RESET key 2/24
Switching off the feed roller 2/15, 2/45
Switching off the main switch. 2/33
Switching on main switch Q10 2/33
Swivel out the calender rolls 2/53
T
Table, Change pulley WE4 dependent on the ma- 3/54
terial
Tauten the licker-in belts 4/16, 6/84
Tension belt of the card flats 6/172
Tensioning chains 4/16, 6/41
7 / 16 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Keyword index
Keyword index
Page
Tensioning cross aprons 6/227

Tensioning cylinder belts 4/16, 6/99
Tensioning the v-belt for the coiler drive 4/18, 6/279
Tensioning toothed belt for change «H» 4/18, 6/281
Test analog inputs 2/70, 2/115
Test cleaner brush 2/70, 2/120
Test control unit 2/71, 2/122
Test converter 2/71, 2/122
Test covers and door safeguards 2/70, 2/116
Test cylinder 2/70, 2/118
Test delivery card 2/71, 2/121
Test digital inputs 2/70, 2/114
Test digital outputs 2/70, 2/115
Test doffer card 2/70, 2/121
Test fan chute 2/70, 2/118
Test feed roll card 2/70, 2/121
Test feed roll chute 2/70, 2/117
Test IGS-classic 2/71, 2/123
Test IGS-top 2/71, 2/124
Test licker-in 2/70, 2/118
Test main motor coiler 2/71, 2/122
Test mote knife licker-in 2/71, 2/126
Test opening roll chute 2/70, 2/117
Test, clearer roller, flats 2/70, 2/120
Test, flats drive 2/70, 2/119
Testing IGS classic 3/25
Testing sensors and switching the I/O status on the 2/64
signal lamp
The feed plate must be dismantled 5/37
The first card trunk is not filling correctly 5/37
The grinding stone in the grinder of the IGS classic 5/38
does not move
The material separation is poor 5/37
Tighten V-belt of can plate drive 4/18, 6/257
Tightening the belt for the calender rolls 6/282
Tongues 6/115
Torsionsstäbe, Position 6/74
Total time 1/29
Trommel -und Abnehmergarnituren, Abklärungen 3/38
vor dem Schleifen
Trommel -und Abnehmergarnituren, generelle In- 3/37
formationen zur Schleifarbeit
Trommel -und Abnehmergarnituren, mitgelieferte 3/40
Teile für das Aufziehen der Garnituren
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 7 / 17

Keyword index
Keyword index
Page
Trommel -und Abnehmergarnituren, Schleifinter- 3/37

valle
Trommel -und Abnehmergarnituren, Sicherheits- 3/37
massnahmen
Trommel -und Abnehmergarnituren, Zubehörteile 3/37
aufbewahren
Trommeleinheit 3/9
Trommeleinstellungen 3/12
Troubleshooting, displaying additional help 2/55
Turn back feed roll in card trunk 2/14
Turn back the card feed roller 2/13
Turn the feed roller backwards 2/48
U
UNIcontrol operation 2/23
Unproductive time in production mode 1/29
Up arrow key 2/26
Use the deflection roller to load and relieve the cyl- 6/103
inder belt
Use the LEDs to test the CAN I/O modules CX408 6/346
and their inputs and outputs
V
Value group management 2/69, 2/105
Value groups preview extend. IV 2/130, 2/146
Value groups preview extended I 2/130, 2/145
Value groups preview extended II 2/130, 2/145
Value groups preview machine 2/69, 2/106
Value groups preview quality 2/69, 2/107
Value groups, preview, options 2/69, 2/108
Verzüge Bandablage 3/10
Verzug zwischen Vorreisser und Trommel 3/10
Visual checking and assessment of the cylinder 6/289
wire
Visually inspect the deflection rolls of the card de- 4/16, 4/36
flection. Clean if soiled.
Vorreisserabgangmenge beeinflussen 3/21
Vorreissereinheit einbauen 3/21
Vorreissereinheit, Einstellungen 3/22
Vorreissereinstellungen 3/11
W
Waste air for card trunk 1/41
What do you do if you have forgotten the master 2/58
password?
‘
‘Request service personnel’ LED 2/27
7 / 18 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Keyword index
Keyword index
Page
‘Warning’ LED 2/27
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 7 / 19

Keyword index
Keyword index
7 / 20 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Keyword index
Appendix
Appendix
*** ERROR (Appendix): Appendix not implemented!
31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 8/1

Appendix
Appendix
8/2 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Appendix
General Part 1
C 70
Operation Part 2
Setting up, preparing, adjusting Part 3
Maintenance Part 4
Operating instructions
received with the content
indicated
Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Part 5

return to Installation Office
Description of machine subassemblies Part 6
Keyword index Part 7
Appendix Part 8
31.01.2012 - en - V02 10740891

C70 1 V2 CBA en 31 01 2012 PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

C70 1 V2 CBA en 31 01 2012 PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Translation of the original instructions

Rieter Textile Systems

31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70

Rieter Textile Systems

Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70

Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Setting up, preparing, adjusting Part 3

Description of machine subassemblies Part 6

Keyword index Part 7

Setting up, preparing, adjusting

31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 0/1

Description of machine subassemblies

0/2 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

1 How to use the operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 1

3 General notes on safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 9

6 Technical Definitions and Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 29

8 Putting into operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 43

31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1/I

1 How to use the operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 1

3 General notes on safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 9

6 Technical Definitions and Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 29

31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1 / III

7.5 Machinery requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 38

8 Putting into operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 43

1 / IV Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

1 How to use the operating instructions

0 Preface, Register, Table of contents of file 5 Part 5: Troubleshooting

1 Part 1: General 6 Part 6: Description of machine subassem-

31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1/1

Example of a page with orientation elements

2 Cross-reference indicating page

3 Date of publication, language and version of

4 Machine type and name of part

1/2 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

1.2 Symbols in the document

3 Directions for avoiding danger

Use eye protection

31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1/3

General hazard area

Risk of injury due to part of the body being pulled in

Risk of injury due to being pulled in

Electric shock from capacitor

Potentially explosive materials

Hazard due to automatic start-up

1/4 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

Wear safety gloves

Wear protective footwear

Shut down power before working on the installation.

Press EMERGENCY STOP button

31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1/5

General hazard area

No admittance to unauthorised personnel

Use eye protection

Symbols in the document

The page indicated refers to the currently selected chapter.

More information on this subject can be found on the page indicated

Incorrect application, not permissible

Outcome. For example, after an operation step

1.3 List of Abbreviations

1/6 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02

31.01.2012 - en - V02 Card C 70 1/7

1/8 Card C 70 31.01.2012 - en - V02